EIA EMP Report of JSW Steel

Environmental
Impact Assessment Report

For the Proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant,
900 MW Captive Power Plant and Township near Barenda Village,
Sonahatu Block, Ranchi District, Jharkhand State
FINAL REPORT
Environment Consultant:
Vimta Labs Limited

142, IDA, Phase-II, Cherlapally,
Hyderabad500 051, www.vimta.com
(NABL/ISO 17025 Certified Laboratory,
Recognized by MoEF, New Delhi)
Project Proponent:
(Approved Consultant)
March, 2015
JSW Jharkhand Steel Limited

B-236, Ground Floor, Road No 3
Ashok Nagar, Ranchi
Jharkhand- 834002
Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated

Steel Plant, 900 MW Captive Power Plant and Township near Barenda
Village, Sonahatu Block, Ranchi District, Jharkhand State
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter
Title
Page
Executive Summary
1.0
Introduction
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2.0
Introduction
Type of the Project
Need of the Project
Project Location and Layout
Size and Magnitude of Operations
Project Schedule for Approval and Implementation
Process Technology
Process Description
Captive Power Plant
Cement Plant
Raw Material Requirement and Sources
Raw Material Handling
Utility Systems and Auxiliary Facilities
Environmental Effects
Pollution and Control Measures
C2-1
C2-1
C2-2
C2-2
C2-3
C2-15
C2-16
C2-17
C2-36
C2-40
C2-40
C2-48
C2-49
C2-53
C2-54
Baseline Environmental Status

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
4.0
C1-1
C1-1
C1-2
C1-10
C1-10
Project Description
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
3.0
Purpose of the Report

Identification of Project and Project Proponent
Brief Description of Project
Scope of the Study
Methodology of the Study
Introduction
Geology, Hydrogeology and Drainage
Landuse Studies
Soil Characteristics
Meteorology
Ambient Air Quality
Water Quality
Noise Level Survey
Ecology and Biodiversity
Demography and Socio-economics
Traffic Density Survey
C3-1
C3-1
C3-16
C3-25
C3-29
C3-39
C3-46
C3-52
C3-56
C3-74
C3-77
Impact Assessment and Mitigation Measures

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
Identification of Impacts and Mitigation Measures

Impacts and Mitigation Measures during Construction
Impacts and Mitigation Measures during Operation
Compliance with CREP Guidelines
VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad
C4-1
C4-1
C4-8
C4-85
TC-I

Table of Contents
Table of Contents (Contd.)

Chapter
5.0
C5-1
C5-6
C5-10
General
Monitoring Schedule
Process Monitoring and Reporting Arrangements
Implementation Schedule of Mitigation Measures
Infrastructure for Environmental Protection
Cost Provision for Environmental Measures
Greenbelt Development
Rainwater Harvesting Facilities
C6-1
C6-4
C6-8
C6-9
C6-9
C6-11
C6-11
C6-14
Additional Studies
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.15
7.16
7.17
7.18
8.0
Selection of Process
Selection of Alternative Sites
Carbon Credit Project / Reduction of Greenhouse
Gas Emission Projects
Environmental Monitoring Program

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
7.0
Page
Analysis of Alternatives for Technology and Site

5.1
5.2
5.3
6.0
Title
Technical Presentation of Draft EIA report before JSPCB C7-1

Risk Assessment
C7-12
Approach to Study
C7-12
Hazard Identification
C7-12
Hazard Assessment and Evaluation
C7-16
Consequence Analysis and Risk Assessment
C7-18
Selections of Scenarios in Gas Holders
C7-22
Disaster Management Plan
C7-33
Emergencies
C7-35
Emergency Organization
C7-37
Emergency Facilities
C7-40
Emergency Actions
C7-43
General
C7-44
Off Site Emergency Preparedness Plan
C7-45
Occupational Health and Safety
C7-49
Hydrology and Hydrogeology Study
C7-53
Sodar Study
C7-55
R & R Study
C7-55
Project Benefits
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
Improvement in Physical Infrastructure

Improvement in Social Infrastucture
Employment Potential
Other Tangible Benefits
Community Development Plan and CSR Activities
Estimated Budget for CSR
C8-1
C8-1
C8-1
C8-2
C8-3
C8-5
TC-II

Table of Contents
Table of Contents (Contd.)

Chapter
9.0
Title
Administrative Aspects
9.1
9.2
9.3
10.0
Organization Policy
Corporate Environmental Policy
Institutional Arrangements for Environment Protection
And Conservation
C9-1
C9-2
C9-2
Summary and Conclusions

10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
11.0
Page
Introduction
Major Plant Facilities
Baseline Environment
Summary of Anticipated Environmental Impacts
and Mitigation Measures
Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan
Budget Requirement for Environment Protection
Conclusions
C10-1
C10-1
C10-2
C10-3
C10-8
C10-9
C10-10
Disclosure of Consultants
11.1
11.2
Introduction
Vimta Lab Limited Environment Consultant
Table of Contents
List of Figures
List of Tables
C11-1
C11-1
TC-I
TC-IV
TC-VI
TC-III

Table of Contents
List of Figures
Figure
Title
1.1
1.2
1.3
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.4.1
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
3.6.1
3.7.1
3.8.1
3.9.1
3.9.2
3.9.3
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
Index Map
Study Area Map
Google Map
Photographs showing Site Features of the Project Area
Layout of the Proposed Plant Area
Project Site Layout Super imposed on Toposheet
Steel Plant Process Flow Diagram
Process and Material Flow Diagram
Process Flow Chart Pellet Plant
Recovery Type Coke Oven Plant
Process Flow Diagram of Sintering Plant
Process Flow Diagram of Hot Metal Production using BF
Process Flow Diagram of Steel Making
Process Flow Diagram of Lime and Dolo Calcination Plant
Typical Flow Diagram of Proposed CPP
Map showing the Plant Layout, Township and Railway siding
Flow Chart Linking Pollutants and Principle Operations in the
Integrated Steel Plant
Geology of the Study Area
Lithological Section of a Borewell
Drainage Map of the Study Area
Hydrogeological Map of the Study Area
Water Levels during Premonsoon 2014
Water Levels during Post Monsoon 2013
Pumping Test Data Plot
Pumping Test Data Analysis
Thematic Map of the Study Area
Landuse Pattern based on Satellite Data
Satellite Image and Landuse Pattern of the Project Site
Digital Elevation Model of Study Area
Soil Sampling Locations
Average Mixing Height
Windrose Diagram of Pre Monsoon & Monsoon IMD Ranchi
Windrose Diagram of Post Monsoon & Winter IMD Ranchi
Annual Windrose Diagram IMD Ranchi
Site Specific Windrose
Ambient Air Quality Sampling Locations
Water Sampling Locations
Noise Monitoring Locations
Ecological Sampling Locations
Regenerating Vegetation on Hill Slopes
Plantation of SAL and Eucalyptus
Short Term 24 hourly Incremental Concentration of PM
Short Term 24 hourly Incremental Concentration of SO2
Short Term 24 hourly Incremental Concentration of NOx
Isopleths showing Incremental Concentrations for CO
Isopleths showing Incremental Concentrations for NOx
Page
C1-4
C1-5
C1-6
C2-4
C2-6
C2-7
C2-18
C2-19
C2-22
C2-24
C2-27
C2-30
C2-33
C2-35
C2-37
C2-41
C2-56
C3-3
C3-4
C3-6
C3-7
C3-10
C3-11
C3-15
C3-15
C3-21
C3-22
C3-23
C3-24
C3-26
C3-34
C3-35
C3-36
C3-37
C3-38
C3-41
C3-49
C3-53
C3-58
C3-68
C3-69
C4-18
C4-19
C4-20
C4-36
C4-37
TC-IV

Table of Contents
List of Figures (Contd..)

Figure
Title
4.6
4.7
4.8
Page
Pre Development Drainage Network

Post Development Drainage Network
Schematic Flow Diagram of Proposed B.O. Plant of Coke Oven
Effluent Stream
4.9
Water Balance
4.10 Schematic Diagram of Proposed Raw Water Treatment Plant
4.11 Schematic Diagram of Proposed STP
4.12 Map showing Model Boundary and Ground Water Samples
4.13a Model showing Pathways for TDS in Ground Water
C4-39
C4-40
4.13b
4.13c
4.13d
4.14
5.1
6.1
6.2
7.1
7.2
7.3a
7.3b
7.4a
C4-57
C4-58
C4-58
C4-63
C5-9
C6-16
C6-17
C7-5
C7-7
C7-25
C7-25
7.4a
7.5a
7.5a
7.6a
7.6b
7.7
7.8
9.1
9.2
Model showing Pathways for Hardness in Ground Water

Model showing Pathways for Calcium in Ground Water
Model showing Pathways for Sodium in Ground Water
Noise Dispersion Contours
Location Map of Alternative Sites
Greenbelt Development Plan
Rain Water Harvesting Network
Public Hearing Notification
Photos of Public Hearing
Accidental Release of CO into the Atmosphere Leading to TVC
Accidental Release of CO into the Atmosphere Leading to VCE
Explosion Associated with Hydrogen due to Catastrophic
Release of BF gas into the atmosphere from the Holder
Explosion Associated with Hydrogen due to Catastrophic
Release of CO gas into the atmosphere from the Holder
Thermal Radiation Levels due to Failure of LPG Bullet
Explosive Over Pressure Levels due to Failure of LPG Bullet
Thermal Radiation Levels due to Failure of HFO Tank
Thermal Radiation Levels due to Failure of LDO Tank
Flood Hazard Zonation based on Flood Occurrence Data
Action Plan for Handling Off Site Emergency
Corporate Environmental Policy of JSW
Organization Structure of Environmental Management
C4-46
C4-50
C4-51
C4-52
C4-56
C4-57
C7-27
C7-27
C7-29
C7-29
C7-30
C7-30
C7-36
C7-46
C9-3
C9-4
TC-V

Table of Contents
List of Tables
Tables
1.1
1.2
1.3
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10a
2.10b
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3a
3.3.3b
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.9.1
Title
Environmental Setting of the Site
Demand Availability and Resultant GAPS /Surpluses
Environmental Attributes and Frequency of Monitoring
Product Details
Landuse Breakup
Land Breakup of the Project Area
Present Landuse
Energy & Gas Balance
Power Requirement
Main Water Re-circulation Systems
Technology Facility at various Processing Levels
Typical Technical Features for each 3 MTPA CO Plant
Technical Features for each CDQ unit
Operating Parameters of each Sinter Plant
Annual Raw Materials (Wet & Dry Basis) Requirement
Typical Chemical Properties of Iron Ore
Typical Chemical Properties of Coking Coal
Typical Chemical Properties of PCI Coal
Desirable Chemical Analysis of Limestone
Typical Chemical Properties of Quartzite
Major Elements and Trace Elements in Raw Material
Quantities and Storage Capacities of Major Raw Materials
Source and Nature of Pollution
Well Inventory in Study Area
Pumping Test Data in Large dia Dug Well
Recovery data in Large dia Dug Well
Pumping Test Data Analysis
Landuse Pattern in the 10 km Study Area
Landuse / Land Cover Classification System
Landuse Breakup of the Study Area
Landuse Breakup of the Project Area
Details of Soil Sampling Locations
Soil Analysis Results
Standard Soil Classification
Climatological Data Station Ranchi
Summary of the Meteorological Data Generated at Site
Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations
Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results
Summary of Chemical Characterization of RSPM
Details of Water Sampling Locations
Surface Water Quality
Ground Water Quality
Details of Noise Monitoring Locations
Ambient Noise Levels in the Study Area
Details of Ecological Sampling Locations
Page
C1-3
C1-9
C1-12
C2-1
C2-8
C2-9
C2-10
C2-10
C2-12
C2-13
C2-14
C2-16
C2-23
C2-23
C2-26
C2-42
C2-43
C2-44
C2-44
C2-45
C2-45
C2-46
C2-49
C2-53
C3-9
C3-13
C3-14
C3-14
C3-16
C3-17
C3-19
C3-20
C3-25
C3-27
C3-28
C3-31
C3-32
C3-40
C3-44
C3-45
C3-47
C3-50
C3-51
C3-54
C3-55
C3-59
TC-VI

Table of Contents
List of Tables (contd..)

Tables
3.9.2
3.9.3
3.9.4
3.9.5
3.10.1
3.10.2
3.10.3
3.10.4
3.11.1
3.11.2
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14a
4.14b
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
4.21
4.22
4.23
4.24
4.25
4.26
4.27
5.1
5.2
6.1
6.2
Title
Page
List of Forest Blocks in 10 km Radius

C3-59
List of Flora from the Study Area
C3-61
List of Fauna from the Study Area
C3-70
List of Plankton record during Study Period
C3-73
Distribution of Population
C3-75
Distribution of Population by Social Structure
C3-76
Distribution of Literate and Literacy Rates
C3-76
Occupational Structure
C3-77
Traffic Density
C3-78
Composition of Existing Traffic Volume
C3-78
Model Setup
C4-13
Details of Stack Emission from the proposed plant
C4-14
Predicted Short Term Modeling Results (24 hourly)
C4-17
Results Ground Level Concentration (24 hourly)
C4-17
Control Measures in Unloading Section
C4-30
Control Measures in Material Handling Section
C4-30
Control Measures in Storage of Solid Waste
C4-31
Control Measures on the Roads
C4-31
Emission Norms for Air Pollution Control Measures
C4-32
Input to the Model
C4-34
Predicted Peak Hourly Air Pollution due to Additional Traffic
C4-34
Recommendations on Traffic Capacity IRC
C4-35
Water Pollutants Treatment and Disposal
C4-48
Results of Effluent Analysis
C4-49
Results of Sewage Analysis
C4-49
Circulating the Makeup Water Requirement
C4-53
List of Water Pollution Control System
C4-53
Noise Levels from the Proposed Plant
C4-61
Predicted Noise Levels at the Plant Boundaries
C4-62
Source of Generation & Typical Characterization of Solid Wastes C4-67
Chemical Composition of Solid Waste
C4-72
Solid Waste Generation and Disposal
C4-73
Hazardous Waste Generation and Its Disposal
C4-74
Solid Waste Generation and their Re-use, Recycle, Utilization
and Disposal
C4-77
Incremental Concentrations at Forests
C4-81
Plan for Implementation of the Recommendations of CREP
Guidelines for Integrated Iron & Steel Industry
C4-86
Guidelines for CPP
C4-88
Guidelines for Cement Plant
C4-90
Plant Facility and Capacity
C5-5
Comparison of Alternative Sites
C5-6
Environmental Monitoring during Construction Stage
C6-5
Environmental Monitoring during Operational Stage
C6-7
TC-VII

Table of Contents
List of Tables (contd..)

Tables
Title
Page
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11a
7.11b
7.11c
7.11d
7.12
7.13a
7.13b
Implementation Schedule
C6-9
Environment Monitoring and Frequency
C6-9
Cost Provision for Environmental Measures
C6-11
Recommended Plant Species for Greenbelt
C6-13
Greenbelt Development Plan
C6-14
Pre Development Annual & Monsoon Run-off from the CatchmentC6-14
Pre Development Annual & Monsoon Run-off from the WatershedC6-15
Compliance of Queries Raised by Technical Committee
C7-1
Public Hearing Issues and Action Plan
C7-9
Category Wise Schedule of Storage Tanks
C7-13
Hazardous Materials stored, Transported and Handled
C7-13
Properties of Fuels used in the Plant
C7-14
Applicability of GOI Rules to Fuel/Chemical Storage
C7-16
Preliminary Hazard Analysis for Storage Areas
C7-16
Preliminary Hazard Analysis for the Whole Plant in General
C7-17
Fire Explosion and Toxicity Index
C7-17
Fire Explosion and Toxicity Index
C7-18
Damage due to Incident Radiation Intensities
C7-19
Exposure Time Necessary to Reach the Pain Threshold
C7-19
Physical Impact of Explosion Over Pressure
C7-19
Physical Impact of Toxic Concentration
C7-20
Pasquill-Gifford Atmospheric Stability Classes
C7-21
Toxicological Levels Considered for Consequence Analysis
C7-22
Flammable and Explosive Levels Considered for Consequence
Analysis
C7-22
7.14 Maximum Impact distance for Toxic/Flammable Vapour Cloud
Of Carbon Monoxide Gas from BF/CO Gas Holders
C7-24
7.15 Various Scenarios of Hydrogen
C7-26
7.16a Thermal Radiation Levels due to Failure of LPG Bullet
C7-28
7.16b Explosive Over Pressure Levels due to Failure of LPG Bullet
C7-28
7.17 Thermal Radiation due to failure of HFO/LDO Tanks
C7-28
7.18 Hazard Analysis for Process in the Plant
C7-32
7.19 Hazardous Events contributing to On-site Facility Risk
C7-32
8.1
Budget for Proposed CSR Programs
C8-6
8.2
Detailed CSR Action
C8-6
10.1 Major Plant Facilities
C10-1
10.2 Solid Waste Generation and Disposal
C10-6
10.3 Hazardous Waste Generation and Disposal
C10-7
10.4 Budget for Proposed CSR Scheme
C10-9
10.5 Cost Provision for Environmental Measures
C10-10
TC-VIII
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

FOR
THE PROPOSED 10.0 MTPA INTEGRATED STEEL PLANT,

900 MW CAPTIVE POWER PLANT AND TOWNSHIP
NEAR BARENDA VILLAGE, SONAHATU BLOCK,
RANCHI DISTRICT, JHARKHAND STATE
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Project Proponent:
JSW Jharkhand Steel Limited

B-236, Ground Floor, Road No 3
Ashok Nagar, Ranchi
Jharkhand- 834002
Environment Consultant:
Vimta Labs Ltd.

142, IDA, Phase-II, Cherlapally
Hyderabad500 051
env@vimta.com, www.vimta.com
March 2015

Executive Summary
1.0
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
1.1
Introduction
M/s. JSW Jharkhand Steel Limited propose to install 10.0 million tonnes per
annum (MTPA) integrated steel plant along with 900 MW captive power plant
(CPP) and township near Barenda village, Sonahatu block in Ranchi district of
Jharkhand state.
The proposed project has been envisaged keeping in view the growing demand of
steel in domestic as well as international market. The project has been envisaged
in Jharkhand state, based on the availability of raw materials and resources and
availability of good connectivity to the markets. The proposed plant will have
positive impact on socio-economic development of local people. Total project cost
is estimated to be about Rs. 35,000 crores and EMP cost is about 1750 crores.
The proposed project can be classified as 3(a) type activity under the category A
as per EIA notification dated 14th September 2006.
1.2
Environmental Setting
The study area map of 10 km radius around the proposed site is given in Figure1. The environmental setting of the proposed project is as follows:
The proposed plant falls at the intersection of latitude 2308'45.2"N2311'2.3"N and longitude 854730.2"E - 8550'9.2"E and at an elevation of
about 220-240 m above mean sea level (MSL);
The proposed plant is located at about 50 km (aerial) from Ranchi in SE

direction. Subarnarekha river is flowing at a distance of 2.4 km in NNE from
the project site;
There are no ecological sensitive locations, archaeological monuments, places of

tourist interests and defence installations within 10 km radius;
11 protected forests and one reserve forest block exists within 10 km radius;
Nearest major town from the plant is Muri and city is Ranchi;
Nearest village from the plant is Barenda and is located at about 0.5 km in north
direction;
Nearest railway station from the plant is Suisa at about 7.7 km in east direction;
and
Proposed plant site does not fall in any critically polluted areas as per the
CPCB/MoEF circular dated January 2010.

Executive Summary
FIGURE-1
STUDY AREA MAP (10 KM RADIUS)

Executive Summary
2.0
PROCESS DESCRIPTION
The integrated steel plant consists of a number of unit processes. It is proposed
to adopt the BF-BOF route for the proposed integrated steel plant. The ore burden
of the blast furnace will comprise a high proportion of sinter, pellet along with
some sized ore. This charge mix will also enable to achieve low levels of coke
consumption in the blast furnace.
It is proposed to install a pellet plant. This pellet plant will produce BF grade
pellets to be used in blast furnace.
Hot metal production using blast furnace process has been envisaged for the
proposed project, as the process is most established and competitive iron making
technology till date. A number of technological improvements have taken place in
blast furnace, which have resulted in higher production, less coke consumption,
most energy efficient, long campaign life, etc. The hot metal produced from the
blast furnace will be transported to the steel melting shop using hot metal ladles.
Basic Oxygen Furnace (BOF) technology for production of liquid steel has been
envisaged for the proposed project. This process till date dominates the steel
production scenario of high capacity integrated steel plant worldwide mainly due
to its energy efficiency. As such, external energy in terms of either electrical
power or solid/liquid/gaseous fuel is not required for process. However,
requirement of electricity and gaseous fuel are mainly for driving of electrical
equipment, ladle heating, etc. Most of the other steel making process except BOF
like electric arc furnace/ induction furnace process consumes high amount of
electrical energy. However, oxygen with high purity is required for conversion of
hot metal to liquid steel and scrap/iron ore/DRI is required as coolant in BOF
process. A significant amount of medium calorific value (2000 kCal/Nm3) gas is
generated during carbon refining reaction period of steel making which will be
cleaned in the gas cleaning plant. Hot metal will be pre-treated before charging
into the converter.
With a view to achieve improved homogeneity and productivity of the primary
unit and serving as a buffer between the primary unit and the caster, ladle
furnace is the ideal secondary refining unit. The correction and homogenization of
steel composition and temperature, desulphurization and decarburization, etc.
can be efficiently carried out in a ladle furnace.
The liquid steel from the BOF converters will be continuously cast into
slabs/billets/blooms through conventional casters, which will subsequently
produce HR/CR Coils, sections, wire rods, bars etc.
2.1
Infrastructural Facilities and Raw Material Requirement

Land Requirement
The proposed project will be developed in an area of 3800 acres (1538 ha) in 7
villages. The project area includes adequate area allocation for all technological
and service units, dump area, raw water reservoir and green belt development as
per statutory requirements.

Executive Summary
Raw Material Requirement

Iron ore lumps, iron ore fines, non-coking coal, coking coal, limestone, dolomite,
manganese ore and quartzite are the major raw materials required for the steel
plant. The details of raw materials requirement, the source and mode of
transportation are provided in Table-1.
TABLE-1
RAW MATERIALS AND SOURCE
Sr. No
Raw Material
Iron ore fines for

beneficiation plant
Iron ore lumps
3
4
5
Limestone (BF grade)

Dolomite (BF grade)
Quartzite
Limestone (SMS grade)
Dolomite (SMS grade)
8
9
Coking coal
Coking coal
Non-coking coal for PCI
gross
Thermal coal
Bentonite
Ferro alloy
Limestone (cement
grade)
10
11
12
13
14
Source
Captive mine (Ankua) /
other mines in
Jharkhand
Captive mine(s) (Ankua)
/ other mines in
Jharkhand
Madhya Pradesh
Madhya Pradesh
Jharkhand
Satna Maihar
/Imported
Madhya Pradesh
/Imported
Captive mines (Rohne)
Imported
Quantity
in TPA
Mode of
Transportation
to Site
Rail
29,000,000
Rail
900,000
1,300,000
1,100,000
140,000
1,600,000
700,000
5,520,000
4,800,000
2,300,000
Captive mines
Jharkhand
Jharkhand
3,000,000
400,000
200,000
Jharkhand
6,000,000
Rail
Rail
Road
Rail /Road
Rail /Road
Rail
Rail
Rail
Rail
Rail /Road
Road
Rail /Road
Water Requirement
The total water requirement for the proposed plant will be about 80 Million
Gallons per day (MGD), i.e. about 15150 m3/hr including water requirement for
the proposed CPP. About 46.7 MGD of the required water will be sourced from
Subarnrekha river, which flows at a distance of about 2.4 km from the plant site
in north direction and remaining 33.3 MGD of required water will be drawn from
Chandil dam (downstream).
Manpower
Considering a labour productivity of 1,000 tonnes of finished steel per man-year,
which is at par with international standard, the requirement of total manpower
works out to about 5,000 in phase-I and about 10,000 in final phase at 10.0
MTPA production level.

Executive Summary
However, the proposed 10.0 MTPA integrated steel plant will additionally generate
more than 20,000 to 30,000 indirect secondary and tertiary employment. It is
expected that a number of ancillary industries will develop near the proposed site,
which will be mutually beneficial.
The manpower required for the proposed project will be about 20,000 persons
during construction and 10,000 during operation phase including skilled and
unskilled workers.
Township
A full-fledged township developed for proposed plant will be utilized for
accommodating the staff. Other amenities such as school, community center,
hospital, shopping complex, post office, bank etc will be established as required in
the township.
3.0
BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

Primary baseline environmental monitoring studies were conducted during premonsoon season of March-May 2014 and details are as follows:
Soil Environment
A total of 10 samples within the study area were collected and analyzed. It has
been observed that the texture of soil is mostly sandy clay in the study area. It
has been observed that the pH of the soil quality ranged from 7.5 to 8.1 indicating
that the soil is slightly alkaline in nature. The electrical conductivity was observed
to be in the range of 268 to 480 S/cm. Available potassium was observed to be
in the range of 341.0 to 457.3 kg/ha. The nitrogen values range between as
162.8 to 230.2 kg/ha and the phosphorus values observed in sampling locations
varies between 42.0 to 66.6 kg/ha.
Meteorology
The meteorological parameters were recorded on hourly basis during the study
period near proposed plant site and comprises of parameters like wind speed,
wind direction (from 0 to 360 degrees), temperature, relative humidity,
atmospheric pressure and rainfall. The summary of meteorological data generated
at site is presented in Table-2. The predominant wind directions during study
period are from northwest.
TABLE-2
METEOROLOGICAL DATA GENERATED AT SITE
Month
March 2014
April 2014
May 2014
Range
Temperature (0C)
Max
Min
40.5
16.6
42.5
20.5
43.4
21.0
16.6-43.4
Relative Humidity (%)

Max
Min
38.4
29.5
36.1
30.8
35.3
32.4
29.5-38.4
Rainfall
(mm)
16
Nil
Nil
16
5

Executive Summary
Air Quality
The study area represents mostly rural/residential environment. Ten ambient air
quality monitoring stations were selected in and around project site and studies
were carried out as per CPCB guidelines. The summary of ambient air quality data
generated during monitoring period is given in Table-3. Ambient air quality
analysis reveals that these results are well within limits in all locations as per
national ambient air quality standards 2009.
TABLE-3
SUMMARY OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY RESULTS
Sr. No
1
2
3
4
5
Parameters
Particulate Matter (PM10)
Particulate Matter (PM2.5)
Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)
Nitrogen Dioxide (NOx)
Carbon Monoxide (CO)
Range, g/m3
37.0-52.7
19.1-25.9
9.3-12.2
11.5-16.0
200-371
NAAQ Standards, g/m3

100
60
80
80
2000
The remaining parameters such as ozone, ammonia, benzene, BaP, lead,

nickel and arsenic are observed to be will within permissible limits. There are
no operating industries within the study area.
Water Quality
Eight ground water samples and eight surface water samples were collected. These
samples were taken as grab samples and were analyzed for various parameters to
compare with the standards.
Ground Water Quality
The analysis results indicate that the pH ranges in between 7.2 to 7.6, which is well
within the specified standard of 6.5 to 8.5. Total hardness was observed to be
ranging from 46.0 to 233.0 mg/l. The hardness was found to be well within the
limit of 600 mg/l at all locations.
Chlorides at all the locations were within the permissible limit, ranging in between
10.5 to 62.5 mg/l. Fluorides were observed to be ranging in between 0.2 to 0.6
mg/l and are found to be within the permissible limit. Nitrates are found to be in
range of 2.0 13.0 mg/l. Bacteriological studies reveal that no coliform bacteria
are present in the samples. The heavy metal contents were observed to be in well
within the limits.
Surface Water Quality
The analysis results indicate that pH is found to be in the range of 7.3-7.8, which is
well within the specified standard 6.5-8.5. The TDS was observed to be in the
range of 92.0-660.0 mg/l. Dissolved Oxygen was observed to be in the range of
5.3-6.2 mg/l. The chlorides and sulphates were found to be in the range of 11.5121.5 mg/l and 3.2-16.3 mg/l respectively. It is observed that chlorides and
sulphates are well within the permissible limits. It is evident from the above values
that all the parameters are well within the permissible limits. Bacteriological studies

Executive Summary
reveal the absence of E. coli forms. The analysis results indicate that there is no
evidence of any industrial contamination.
Noise Level Survey
The noise monitoring has been conducted for determination of noise levels at ten
locations in the study area. Noise monitoring results reveal ambient noise levels in
all locations are well within the limits as per ambient noise standards.
Flora and Fauna Studies
From the field observations, it can be concluded that the forests in the study area
are under high anthropogenic pressure and show signs of degradation in the form of
tree cutting, lopping, poaching, grazing, collection of NTFPs and habitat
fragmentation.
As per MOEF and forest department, Jharkhand reveals that there are no wildlife
sanctuaries, national parks/biospheres in 10 km radius from the proposed site
boundary. As per the records of the botanical survey of India there are no plants of
conservation importance in the study area.
On comparison of the check list given in the Schedule-I of the Wildlife (Protection)
Act 1972 and the list of wildlife recorded in the study area, it can be concluded that
no species of schedule-I animals exist in the study area and rest of the species
belong to Schedule-II, III, IV and V of Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972.
4.0
IMPACT ASSESSMENT
4.1
Impacts during Construction Phase

Impact on Land Use
The total plant area is 3800 acres (1538 ha), consisting of 12% of Government
land and 88% of private land and project area consists of 80% agriculture rain
fed single crop and 20% fallow land (including waste land & water body). Clearing
of trees/shrubs at some locations is required during construction phase. However,
it is proposed to develop adequate greenbelt all along the plant boundary and
township to improve the aesthetics of the area. Thus, the overall impact will be
beneficial in nature. The land use of plant site which is currently rain-fed
agricultural/government wasteland will be converted to industrial land use
category.
Impact on Soil
The construction activities will result in minimum loss of vegetation and topsoil in
the plant area. Maximum possible extent tree cutting would be avoided. The
remaining existing trees will be integrated with proposed greenbelt. No significant
adverse impact on the soil in the surrounding area is anticipated.

Executive Summary
Impact on Air Quality

During construction phase, dust will be the main pollutant, which would be
generated from the site development activities and vehicular movement on the
road. The impact of such activities would be confined within the project boundary
and restricted to the construction phase.
Impact on Noise Levels
The major sources of noise during the construction phase are vehicular traffic,
construction equipment like dozers, scrapers, concrete mixers, cranes,
generators, pumps, compressors, rock drills, pneumatic tools, saws, vibrators etc.
The operation of equipment will generate noise ranging between 70-85 dB (A).
The noise produced during the construction will have significant impact on the
existing ambient noise levels.
Impact on Terrestrial Ecology
Most of the land identified for the proposed project contains land, with limited
number of trees. Trees will be cut only if required and as per functional
requirement. Therefore, no major loss of biomass is envisaged during
construction phase.
Demography and Socio-Economics
The non-workers constitute about 48.45% of the total population in 10 km radius
study area. Some of them will be available for employment in the proposed plant
during construction activities. As the labourers are generally un-skilled, the locals
would get opportunities for employment during construction activities.
4.2
Impacts During Operational Phase

The major emissions from the proposed integrated steel plant will be particulate
matter, sulphur dioxide and oxides of nitrogen. Various built-in control measures
will be adopted. Adequate stack heights will be provided to disperse gaseous
emissions over a wider area. In order to control emissions of particulates
adequate control equipment are proposed.
Prediction of impacts on air environment has been carried out by using AERMOD
and the resultant concentration for PM10, SO2 and NOx are observed as 71.11
g/m3, 56.25 g/m3 and 55.46 g/m3 occurring at a distance of 2.8 km
respectively in SE direction. After the implementation of the proposed project,
these concentrations are found to be well below the permissible NAAQS norms for
rural/residential zone and industrial/mixed zone. Therefore, the proposed activity
is not likely to have any significant adverse impact on the air environment.

Executive Summary
Fugitive Emissions
Fugitive dust emissions from the proposed plant would be significant as there will
be air pollution due to activities like transport of iron ore, limestone, coal
handling, crushing unit, cement plant and CPP generally due to the movement of
vehicles on the roads.
Impact on Water Resources
In the proposed steel plant, the major water requirement will be for the power
plant, slag granulation, DM and softener plant, gas cleaning plant, domestic and
general purposes. There will not be any discharge of wastewater into the surface
water resources from the plant under normal circumstances of dry weather
conditions. Hence, the impact on the surface water quality is not envisaged.
Impact on Noise Levels
The main noise generating sources will be from sinter plant, pellet plant, blast
furnace, DR plant and captive power plant. There will be associated road or rail
traffic, including truck movement and loading equipment. Consequently steel
manufacturing is likely to generate noise and vibration. Noise and vibration is
greater from heavy truck traffic associated with operations and transport of raw
materials and finished product.
Impact on Ecology
The impact of air pollutants on vegetation due to the proposed project is
identified and quantified by using air dispersion modeling. The simulations have
been done to evaluate PM10, SO2 and NOx likely to be contributed by the proposed
project activities, the resultant concentrations for study period are within the
limits as per National ambient air quality standards.
No wildlife sanctuaries are found within 10 km radius of the project site. Hence,
no impact is envisaged on the wildlife due to proposed plant. Similarly, as per the
forest department, no endangered or rare species of flora and fauna are reported
or observed in the study area.
5.0
ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN
5.1
Environment Management during Construction

During construction, some of the vegetation in the plant premises is required to be
cleared. The measures required to be undertaken to minimise the impact on the
ecology are:
Water sprinkling;
The felling of trees will be kept at minimum;
The greenbelt will be developed; and
To maintain condition of construction equipment and prevention maintenance so
that minimum disturbance to the surrounding environment.

Executive Summary
5.2
Environment Management during Operation Phase

Air Pollution Management
The raw material handling section would be provided with dust suppression
(DS)/dust extraction (DE) systems complete with bag filters/ESPs;
The principal air pollution control system for sinter plant would consist of dedusting and waste gas cleaning systems separately;
The coke oven gas generated in the coke ovens after by-product recovery
would be utilized as supplementary fuel for proposed steel plant complex;
The top gas coming out from the blast furnace would be cleaned by taking the
gas through BF gas cleaning device for separation of particulate before the
clean gas is recovered for meeting in-plant energy demand. The stock house
and cast house areas would be provided with proper DE/FE systems complete
.with ESPs and stacks;
The LD gas generated in the SMS shop would be subjected to wet cleaning
before it is used as plant supplementary fuel. There would be proper fume
extraction systems to capture any secondary fumes generated during hot
metal and liquid steel transfer points. Dust emission from calcining plant
would be controlled by bag filters. WHRB will be installed with ESP for control
of air emissions;
Emissions from the mills would consist of particulates, SO 2, NOx and CO

generated from the reheating furnaces. The combustion system would
incorporate low NOx burner system and controlled combustion; and
Captive power plant will be provided with ESP and adequate stack height of
275 m.
Fugitive Emissions
The following technologies and requirements as per CPCB guidelines are

recommended for control of dust and fugitive emissions for the proposed project.
These will be strictly implemented.
Sr. No
1
Technologies/Current Practices
Coke Ovens
In coke ovens, the volatile materials
released during cooking flows from
the oven to the by-product plants
where ammonia, benzol, xylene,
toluene, tar, pitch and tar acids are
recovered.
The
operations
are
associated with fugitive and stack
emissions. The PAH compounds
released during cooking operation as
Requirements
Land based pushing and charging

emission
control
with
dust
extraction system;
Automation
operations;
Self-sealing air cooled doors;
for
process
10

Executive Summary
Sr. No
fugitive emissions are carcinogenic
in nature.
The technologies available to control
the pollution are:
HPLA system;
Hydraulic door and door frame
cleaner;
Doors with double knife edge
and rope sealing;
Water sealed AP caps; and
Screw feeder.
Sintering Plant
ESP / bag filter / wet scrubber

for process emissions.
Requirements
Proposed coke dry quenching;
Effluent treatment plant to treat

cyanide, phenol, ammonia, COD
etc;
Hazardous waste (tar sludge and

ETP sludge) handling and disposal
following
hazardous
waste
handling, rules; or, tar sludge /
ETP sludge charging along with
the coal fines in the coke ovens.
ESP / bag filters with higher efficiency

of removal for process emissions.
3
4
6
7

for work zone environment.
Thermal Power Plant
ESP for the emissions.
Steel Melting Shop
ESP/ bag filter wet scrubber for

the process emissions;
Effluent treatment comprising

settling unit and re-circulation
system for the treated effluent.
Blast Furnace
ESP / bag filter / wet scrubber for air
emissions.
Lime Dolomite Plant
ESP bag filter / multiclones for
process
and
work
zone
dust
emissions.
Raw Material Handling Units
Enclosures and water sprinkling
system.
Proper management and utilization of

fly ash.
Proper operation and maintenance of
air emission control and effluent
treatment systems.
Proper
operation
and
maintenance of ESP / bag filter /
wet scrubber for air emissions;
BF slag utilization.
Effective operation and maintenance
of ESP / bag filter / multiclones for
process
and
work
zone
dust
emissions.
Improvements in the systems for
controlling fugitive emissions.
Noise Pollution Management

The greenbelt proposed around the boundary of the plant will attenuate the noise
emitted by the various sources in the plant and will also reduce the community
noise impact.
Earplugs will be provided for the personnel working close to the noise generating
units as a part of the safety policy.
Apart from this, some of the design features provided to ensure low noise levels
are as follows:
Noise level can be reduced by stopping leakages from various steam lines,
compressed air lines and other high pressure equipment;
11

Executive Summary
By providing padding at various locations to avoid rattling due to vibration;

By adopting new technologies for control of noise in various units especially in
blast furnace;
Encasement of noise generating equipment where otherwise noise cannot be

controlled;
Providing noise proof cabins to operators where remote control for operating
noise generating equipment is feasible;
The air compressor, process air blower, pneumatic valves should be provided
with acoustic enclosure;
All the design/installation precautions as specified by the manufacturers with

respect to noise control will be strictly adhered to;
High noise generating sources will be insulated adequately by providing

suitable enclosures;
Design and layout of building to minimize transmission of noise, segregation

of particular items of plant and to avoid reverberant areas;
Use of lagging with attenuation properties on plant components / installation

of sound attenuation panels around the equipment;
The noise control system will be designed to form an integral part of the
plant;
Other than the regular maintenance of the various equipment, ear

plugs/muffs are recommended for the personnel working close to the noise
generating units;
All the openings like covers, partitions will be designed properly; and
Inlet and outlet mufflers will be provided which are easy to design and
construct.
Water Pollution Management

The typical water pollutants and suggested treatment and or disposal in the
integrated steel plant are given below:
Sr. No.
1
Pollutants
Oil
Rolling oil
Lubricants
Source
Hot and cold rolling mills
Various
electrical
and
mechanical equipment and
machine
halls.
Spills
segregated
Treatment/Disposal/Use
Settling tanks fitted with oil and
grease traps; Used oil collected for
incineration
Floor
spills
soaked
up
on
adsorption compound; cutting oil
and other emulsion segregated for
incineration; oily water skimmed
at source and free oil collected for
12

Executive Summary
Sr. No.
Pollutants
Fuel oil
Boiler plant furnaces
Solvents
Paint shop and degreasing

operation
Coke plant and byproduct
recovery
Heat treatment
Tar
Quench oil
Hydraulic
Pumps, winches and
oil
presses
Suspended Solids
Scale
Casters
Burden
fines
Fly ash
Coal
and
coke fines
Chemicals
Acid
sludge
Caustic
wash
Lime
Brine
Cleaners
Source
Toxic
chemicals
Heat
Cooling
water
Boiler blow
down
Air and water at sinter plant

and skip hoist area, blast
furnace gas washer, OH and
basic oxygen furnace
From power plants
Coke ovens
incineration
Spills segregated by dykes and
incinerated
Collected for incineration
Collected for sale
Soldom replaces, can be
incinerated
Spills segregated and incinerated
Recovery and used in sintering

plants
Used in sintering plant
Cement or brick manufacture

Collected and reused at various
locations for various domestic
purposes
By product plant
Regenerated or burnt
By product plant
Incinerated
Mould or steel
Coating
water
softner
sludge
Ion
exchange
resin
regenerations
Surface treatment,
degreasing
Coke oven gas, lime drips
and metal treatment
Recovery
for
pickle
liquor
treatment, control release to
wastewater
Reclaimed or regulated release to
wastewater
Segregated for oil recovery or
incinerated
Chemical or biological destruction,
incineration
Furnaces, heat treatment,

roll cooling air conditioners
and heat exchanges
Steam plant
Cooling towers and recirculation

after cooling
Recovered to heat feed water
Solid Waste Management

The details of hazardous and non-hazardous waste generated from the proposed
plant and quantity of waste are presented in this section.
Hazardous Waste
The hazardous waste such as waste oil, lead acid batteries and oil soaked cotton
waste will be generated. Lead acid batteries will be sold to authorized
users/recyclers approved by JSPCB. The oil soaked cotton waste will be
incinerated.
13

Executive Summary
Non-Hazardous Waste
The main solid waste generated in the proposed steel plant will be BF slag, BOF
slag which is non-hazardous waste. Other solid waste includes gas cleaning plant
sludge, dust from ESP, bag filter and dust extraction system and refractory debris
etc., this solid waste except refractory will be completely reused in sinter plant
and coal fines will be used in the power plant. Further, Oil soaked cotton waste,
organic wastes from steel plant, paper, plastics and waste bag filters will be
generated. The non-hazardous waste and hazardous waste generation and its
disposal are given in Table-4 and Table-5 respectively.
TABLE-4
SOLID WASTE GENERATION AND DISPOSAL
Sr. No
1
Solid waste
Generation TPA
Proposed disposal
98 % granulated and sold to
Cement plants, 2% treated in
dry pits and used for land fill
BOF slag is granulated ,
metalics separated and used
in construction
Slag
Iron Making slag
30,00,000
Steel making slag
14,80,000
Sludge
Iron making sludge
1,29,000
Steel making sludge
1,51,000
Slimes from
Beneficiation plant
Mill scales
58,00,000
Steel making shop
38,000
Used in Sinter plants
1,49,000
1,06,572
3,43,428
38,000
4
A
B
5
A
B
Rolling mills
Dusts
Flue dust from Blast
furnace
Dust from bag filter
Lime / Dolo dusts
Ash
Reject from Coal

washery (Middlings)
Refractory waste
7,50,000
16,00,000
50,000 -1,00,000
Used in Pellet plant after

dewatering
Used in Sinter plants after
dewatering
Stored in Secured land fill
Sold to Cement Plants and

use for manufacturing fly ash
bricks
Will be used in power plant
Will be disposed in secured land
field
14

Executive Summary
TABLE-5
HAZARDOUS WASTE GENERATION AND ITS DISPOSAL
Sr. No
Category
Quantity KL or
T/Yr @ 10 MTPA
1
2
Waste oil & Used oil

Acid and alkali residue
from CRM
Waste pickled liquor
from CRM
Tar sludge from Coke
oven
Water treatment sludge
2750 KL / Year
450 t
Spent activated carbon,

catalyst & Oil soaked
filter
8.7 t/y
Sludge from hazardous

waste treatment
process, incinerator &
Waste sulphur
59 t/y
3
4
5
73216000 KL
315 t
8172 t
Proposed disposal
Sold to authorised parties
Regenerated in ARP
Regenerated in ARP
Used back in Coke oven
Sent to hazardous waste land
fill
Incinerated
Sent to hazardous waste

disposal site
Greenbelt Development
The greenbelt will be developed along the periphery of the plant and all open
spaces within the plant area covering an area of 465 ha and vegetation density of
about 2500 trees/ha. Accordingly, about 11,62,500 saplings will be planted.
Due care will be taken to ensure that a greenbelt is developed around the plant
and colony. All areas devoid of vegetation and having low density will be
systematically and scientifically afforested. JSW-JSL has proposed to develop
greenbelt in 30 % of area.
The anticipated capital expenditure for the environment management is about Rs.
1750 crores.
6.0
RISK ASSESSMENT AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN

The identification of various hazards, probable risks in the plant, maximum
credible accident analysis and consequence analysis are addressed, which gives a
broad identification of risks involved in the proposed plant. Based on the risk
estimation disaster management plan has also been prepared.
7.0
PROJECT BENEFITS
Proposed plant will result in considerable growth of stimulating the industrial and
commercial activities in the state. Small and medium scale industries may be
further developed as a consequence.
15

Executive Summary
The basic requirement of the community needs will be strengthened by extending

healthcare, educational facilities to the community, building/strengthening of
existing roads in the area. JSW will initiate the above amenities either by
providing or by improving the facilities in the area, which will help in uplifting the
living standards of local communities.
The CSR activities like digging and de-silting of ponds, skill training program, biogas plant, solar lantern, infrastructure development, health camps, mobile
medical van and other welfare activities.
The cost estimated for the proposed 10 MTPA integrated steel plant including
utilities, offsite, auxiliary services, etc is about Rs. 35,000 Crores. The anticipated
capital expenditure for the in-built pollution control measures is about Rs. 1750
Crores.
8.0
ENVIRONMENT MONITORING PROGRAMME

The environment monitoring for the proposed plant complex operations shall be
conducted as follows:
Air quality;
Water and wastewater quality;
Noise levels;
Soil quality; and
Greenbelt development.
A centralized environment monitoring cell will be established for plant. Monitoring

of important and crucial environment parameters is of immense importance to
assess the status of environment during operation of plant. With the knowledge
of baseline conditions, the monitoring program can serve as an indicator for any
deterioration in environment conditions due to operation of the plant and suitable
mitigatory steps could be taken in time to safeguard the environment.
9.0
CONCLUSION
The proposed integrated steel plant has certain level of adverse impacts on the
local environment. However, with the judicious implementation of the proposed
pollution control and environment management measures, even the adverse
impacts anticipated due to construction and operation of the proposed steel plant
will be mitigated. Further, development of this project has certain major
beneficial impact/effects in terms of bridging the steel demand and supply gap
and providing employment opportunities that will be created during the course of
its setting up and as well as during the operational phase of the project.
Thus, in view of considerable benefits from the project with containable adverse
environmental impacts, the proposed project will be most advantageous to the
region as well as to the nation.
****
16

Steel Plant, 900 MW Captive Power Plant and Township near Barenda Village,
Chapter-1
Introduction
1.0
INTRODUCTION
M/s. JSW Jharkhand Steel Limited proposes to establish 10.0 Million Tonnes Per
Annum (MTPA) capacity Integrated Steel Plant (ISP) along with 900 MW Captive
Power Plant (CPP) and township near Barenda village, Sonahatu block in Ranchi
district of Jharkhand state.
This chapter describes the purpose of the present Environmental Impact Assessment
(EIA) report, identification of the project and project proponent, brief description,
nature, size, location of the project and importance to the country, region. The
chapter also includes the details of regulatory scoping carried out as per Terms of
Reference (ToR) issued by the Ministry of Environment Forests and Climate Change
(MoEF & CC), Government of India (GoI), New Delhi.
1.1
Purpose of the Report

As per the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification dated 14th September
2006, the proposed project falls under Category A of project type 3(a) and requires
Environmental Clearance (EC) to be obtained from MoEF before the commencement
of ground activity.
In line with new EIA Notification 2006, proposed project was considered by the
reconstituted Expert Appraisal Committee (Industry) in its 6th meeting held during 5th
-7th March, 2013 and further reconsidered in its 8th meeting held during 16th and 17th
May 2013, for prescribing TORs for undertaking detailed EIA/EMP study.
This EIA report has been prepared, covering all the ToR conditions prescribed by
MoEF vide their letter no. F.No.J-11011/377/2012-IA-II(I) dated 24th June, 2013. A
copy of ToR letter along with compliance to the conditions are enclosed as AnnexureI.
Public Hearing for the proposed project has been conducted on 21.09.2014 by
Jharkhand State Pollution Control Board in accordance with TOR and the public
hearing proceedings and action plan have been included in this final EIA report.
1.2
Identification of the Project & Project Proponent
1.2.1
Identification of the Project

The National Steel Policy of India has declared a target of producing 110 million
tonnes of steel by the year 2020, up from about 72 million tonnes at present. In line
with the National Policy, JSW proposes to install 10.0 MTPA capacity integrated steel
plant along with 900 MW CPP and township in Ranchi district of Jharkhand state.
As directed by Department of Industries, Government of Jharkhand (GoJ), the project
proponent had assigned the work to MECON, Ranchi for undertaking the feasibility
study of the proposed project site. Based on the feasibility study report prepared by
MECON, GoJ has approved the site for establishment of the proposed project. The site
approval letter is attached as Annexure-II.
1.2.2
Identification of the Project Proponent

The JSW group has emerged as a dynamic US$ 11 billion conglomerate. The group is
a multi- location, multi-product business with interest spanning across mining, carbon
steel, non-ferrous metals, power generation & distribution, ports and infrastructure.
"Growth with a social conscience" is a paradigm the group lives by. Its strength lies
C1-1

Chapter-1
Introduction
in its individual companies, with each one committed to consolidate its core strength
and excelling in its field of specialization.
JSW Steel Limited operates a 10 MTPA steel plant at Vijayanagar, Bellary district of
Karnataka based on COREX & BF-BOF-CC-HSM process route and one of the largest
private steel producer in single location in India. JSW also has cold rolling,
galvanizing, galvalume and colour coating plants at Tarapur and Vasind in
Maharashtra.
The JSW group owns and operates JSW Salem Works, which is the only integrated
steel plant in Tamil Nadu. The plant has a capacity of 1.0 MTPA and there are plans to
further expand to 2.0 MTPA. JSW operates Dolvi works near Mumbai, with a capacity
of 3.0 MTPA and is in process of expanding to 5.0 MTPA.
JSW Vijayanagar works has been declared the winner of Prime Ministers Trophy for
excellence in performance for the year 2012-13. A copy of letter received from MoS,
Government of India is enclosed as Annexure-III.
1.2.3
Cost of the Project

The cost estimated for the proposed 10 MTPA integrated steel plant including
utilities, offsite, auxiliary services etc., is about Rs. 35,000 Crores. The anticipated
capital expenditure for the in-built pollution control measures is about Rs. 1750
Crores.
1.3
Brief Description of the Project

M/s. JSW Jharkhand Steel Limited (JSW-JSL) proposes to establish 10 MTPA
integrated steel plant along with 900 MW captive power plant and township near
Barenda village, Sonahatu block in Ranchi district of Jharkhand state. The major plant
facilities include coke oven complex, coal washeries, ore beneficiation plant, sinter
plant, pellet plant, blast furnace, DRI, steel making & casting facility, rolling mills,
oxygen plant, dolo-calcination plant, captive power plant and cement plant. Support
infrastructures, such as township, water reservoir and railway sidings will be
constructed. For this project, JSW has signed a MoU with the Government of
Jharkhand.
1.3.1
Description of the Project Site

The proposed plant site is an arid land, partially flat and undulating, mostly rain fed
crop oriented land and barren land with an elevation ranging from 220 m to 240 m
above AMSL. There are no wet lands in the proposed project site. The required land
for integrated steel plant and CPP including township is approximately 3800 acres
(1538 ha). There are no major streams or rivers passing through plant site. Due care
has been taken while identifying the project site to avoid habitations, forest lands and
vicinity of wild life sanctuaries, national parks and other sensitive areas.
1.3.2
Environmental Setting of the Site

The proposed project will be set up near Barenda village of Sonahatu block of Ranchi
district, Jharkhand state. Land identified for the proposed project is of Government
land (12%), private land (Raiyati land) (88%) and forest land (0%). At present the
C1-2

Chapter-1
Introduction
site is well drained. These lands are basically rainfed single crop oriented lands. The
site is generally a plain land with mild slopes.
The index map, study area map covering 10 km radius from the proposed plant site
on topo sheet and google map are shown in Figure-1.11, Figure-1.2 and Figure1.3 respectively. The environment settings surrounding the project site are given in
Table-1.12.
TABLE-1.1
ENVIRONMENT SETTING IN 10 KM RADIUS
Sr. No.
1
Particulars
Project area
Plant site coordinates
Elevation above MSL
Climatic conditions
(Based on IMD Ranchi
50 km, SE)
Site specific
data
Present land use of project

site
7
8
9
10
11
12
Nearest highway
Nearest railway station
Nearest airport
Nearby villages
Nearest own
Reserve forest/ protected
forest
climatological
Details
Near Barenda village, Sonahatu block, Ranchi
district, Jharkhand state
Coordinates- Latitude & longitude
A : 23 11 1.6 N, 85 47 30.2 E
B : 23 11 2.3 N, 85 49 43.4 E
C : 23 11 2.3 N, 85 50 09.2 E
D : 23 09 12.6 N, 85 50 5.4 E
E : 23 08 45.2 N, 85 49 5.6 E
F : 23 10 16.9 N, 85 47 49.1 E
220 m-240 m aMSL
Annual mean max temp: 38.20C (summer)
Annual mean min temp: 9.70C (winter)
Annual total rainfall: 1454.9 mm
Predominant wind direction :NW,SW and W
Monitored at Barenda : (summer-2014)
Maximum temperature: 42.30C
Minimum temperature: 17.3 0C
Predominant wind direction: NW,SW and W
Present land is partially flat and undulating. Plant
site consists of mostly rain fed cropland and
barren land.
National Highway-33 (15.5 km, SW)
Suisa (7.7 km, E)
Ranchi (50 km, SE)
Barenda (0.5 km, N)
Muri Town (20 km, N)
i. PF near Barenda village (0.5 km, NW)
ii. PF near Mahil village (0.6 km, ESE)
iii. PF near Tetuldih village (1.7 km, NNE)
iv. PF near Pepride village (2.9 km, S)
v. PF near Rohardih village (4.0 km, ESE)
vi. PF near Garadih village (4.1 km, ESE)
vii. PF near Bhusudih (4.6 km, SSW)
viii. PF near Chatam village (4.7 km, SE)
ix. PF near Mukrub village (5.8 km, NE)
x. PF near Saparum village (6.9 km, ESE)
xi. PF near Barukande village (7.9 km, SSW)
xii. Kalimati RF (8.2 km, NE)
Index map showing the proposed project site as per ToR-6

2 Environmental Settings of the study area as per ToR-9
1
C1-3

Chapter-1
Introduction
Plant Site
Ref:-Maps of India
FIGURE-1.1
INDEX MAP
C1-4

Chapter-1
Introduction
FIGURE-1.2
STUDY AREA MAP (10 KM RADIUS)
C1-5

Chapter-1
Introduction
10KM
F
D
E
LEGEND
CO-ORDINATES OF PROJECT AREA

A : 23 11 1.6 N, 85 47 30.2 E
B : 23 11 2.3 N, 85 49 43.4 E
C : 23 11 2.3 N, 85 50 09.2 E
D : 23 09 12.6 N, 85 50 5.4 E
E : 23 08 45.2 N, 85 49 5.6 E
F : 23 10 16.9 N, 85 47 49.1 E
Plant Area
Township
Railway Siding
FIGURE-1.3
GOOGLE MAP
C1-6

Chapter-1
Introduction
Sr. No.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Particulars
Ecologically sensitive zones
like wild life sanctuaries,
national parks, elephant and
tiger reserves, migratory
routes
and
biospheres
(existing or proposed)
Archaeological monuments
Water bodies
Defence Installations
Nearest Port
Seismicity Zone
Name of the industries 3with
in 25 km radius
Details
None within 10 km radius.
Certified map (SOI topo sheet) received from
Chief wild life warden (CWLW), Jharkhand
certifying the same. The certified copy is enclosed
in Annexure-IV
None within 10 km radius
Domra nadi (adjacent in south)
Kanchi river (2.0 km, NW)
Subarnarekha river (2.4 km, NNE)
Raru nadi (5.0 km, N)
None within 10 km radius
Haldia port (250 km, SSE)
Zone-II as per IS:1893 (Part-1) 2002
No operating industries within 25 km radius
There are 2 proposed greenfield industries within
25 km
- Tata Power Ltd (Energy-10 km) and
- Hindalco Industries Ltd Sonahatu,
Alumina Smelter & Power - 5 km).
Few operating brick kilns are observed.
Note: All distances mentioned above in () are aerial distances
1.3.3
Justification of the Project

Steel is crucial to the development of any modern economy and is considered to be
the backbone of the human civilization. The level of per capita consumption of steel is
treated as one of the important indicators of economic development and living
standard of the people in any country. All major industrial economies are
characterized by the existence of a strong steel industry and the growth of many of
these economies has been largely shaped by the strength of their steel industries in
their various stages of development.
In view of growing demand for steel in the country, JSW Jharkhand Steel Ltd
envisages installing a 10.0 million tonnes per annum (MTPA) steel plant at a green
field site in the state of Jharkhand. The plant will have the initial production capacity
of about 5.0 MTPA of liquid steel in phase-I, however the planning for infrastructure
facilities will be done keeping in view the ultimate plant capacity of 10.0 MTPA. In
order to arrive at a reasonable product-mix for the plant, a quick desk study based on
the secondary data has been carried out and presented in the following paragraphs.
1.3.3.1 Global Steel Scenario

World steel industry experienced growth during the previous years followed by a
period of downturn. The fall in demand is attributed to the global downturn.
All the major steel-producing countries and regions showed growth in 2011. The
America & Asia had higher growth rates while Europe and the CIS recorded relatively
lower growth. However, Africa & Middle East showed negative growth in 2011.
World crude steel production during 2013 was reported as 1,606 million tonnes (MT)
List of industries within the 25 km radius of the proposed project as per ToR-16
3
C1-7

Chapter-1
Introduction
against 1559 million tonnes in 2012.

World trade in finished steel, expressed as a percentage of world steel consumption is
generally about 40 percent. Accordingly, it may be expected that total trade in
finished steel will be of the order of 450 million tonnes annually, of which flat products
may constitute upto 60 percent i.e. about 270 million tonnes and long products may
constitute about 180 million tonnes.
1.3.3.2 Indian Steel Scenario
Production
The finished steel production in India has grown from a mere 1 Mt in 1951 to 13.2 MT
in 1990-91 and further increased to 71.3 MT in 2011-12. During the first two decades
of the planned economic development, i.e. 1950 to 1960-61 and 1960-61 to 1970-71,
the average annual growth rate of steel production has been about 8%. However,
this growth rate could not be maintained in the following two decades. During 197071 to 1980-81, the average annual growth rate in finished steel production came
down to 5.2% and picked up marginally to 5.6% during 1980-81 to 1990-91.
However, average annual growth during 1990-91 to 2000-01 has been encouraging
to the level of 8%. The production of finished steel grew by 16.52 %, from 44.54 MT
in 2005-06 to 49.39 MT in 2006-07. The finished steel production for the 2008-09
registered a growth of 0.6% over 2007-08. Based on the assessment of the current
ongoing projects, both in greenfield and brownfield, the working group on steel for the
12th Plan has projected that the crude steel capacity in the country is likely to be 120
MT by 2020.
Demand
Domestic Demand
Generally, a developing economy undertakes large number of infrastructure projects,
which are necessary for building of the nation and ensuring economic growth. China
is a leading example of the economic growth through phenomenal development of
infrastructure.
The Indian economy grew at 6.5% in 2011-12, down from 8.4% in 2010-11. The GDP
growth in 2011-12 was the lowest in the past nine years.
Global crisis, geopolitical disturbances and weather extremities contributed to the
domestic economic slowdown. The industrial sector growth slowed to 3.4% in 201112 against 7.2% in 2010-11 and was primarily responsible for the slowdown of Indias
economic progression. Present low per capita consumption in India is expected to
drive demand for steel, which is likely to grow @ 7.5% per annum as per Ministry of
Steel, Government of India projections, as detailed in the National Steel Policy 2005.
Export Demand
Though India started steel production in 1911, steel exports from India began only in
1964. Exports in the first five years were mainly due to recession in the domestic iron
and steel market. Once domestic demand revived, exports declined. India again
started exporting steel only in 1975 touching a figure of 1 MT of pig iron and 1.4 MT
C1-8

Chapter-1
Introduction
of steel in 1976-77. Thereafter, exports again declined to pick up only in 1991-92 to

0.39 MT. In 1995-96, exports of semi-finished and finished steel products were 1.77
MT while in 2003-04 exports reached 5.2 MT. During 2004-05, exports of these
products have declined to 4.4 MT. The exports have increased by 8.9 % in 2006-07
over 2005-06 to touch 4.9 MT. Exports have declined in the year 2007-08 by 6.1 % to
4.6 MT from 8.9 % in 2006-07.
Imports of semi-finished and finished steel products mainly HR plates, HR coils/sheets
and CR coils/sheets by India have been in the range of 1.1 MT and 2 MT, during the
last ten years.
In view of the above and anticipated higher emphasis on export of steel products in
future as per National Steel Policy-2005 (26 MT exports of steel products by 2020),
export demand in the range of 10% to 15% of apparent consumption of various
products has been considered.
Iron and steel industrys growth in India has been good though there have been
occasional downturns. National steel policy 2005 estimated domestic steel production
to grow by 7.3% annually and consumption to grow by 6.9% and projected steel
production of 110 million tonnes by the year 2019-20. However, in 2006-07 domestic
steel production grew at the rate of 10.9% and consumption at 11.6%, accordingly,
the estimates for production of steel was revised in 2008 and was projected at 180
million tonnes as target to be achieved by 2019-20.
Resultant Gaps/Surpluses
Based on the demand and availability, future gaps and surpluses have been projected
in Table-1.2.
TABLE-1.2
DEMAND, AVAILABILITY AND RESULTANT GAPS/SURPLUSES
Sr. No.
Products
Steel Products
Non Flat Products
Wire Rods
Demand
Availability
- Gaps/Surpluses*
Light Merchant Products
Demand
Availability
- Gaps/Surpluses*
Medium Merchant Products
Demand
Availability
- Gaps/Surpluses*
Heavy Sections
Demand
Availability
- Gaps/Surpluses*
Flat Products
HR Plates
Demand
Availability
2006-07
2011-12
2016-17
6040
4940
- 1100
8840
4940
- 3900
12970
4940
- 8030
9790
10150
(+) 360
14060
11900
(-) 2160
20220
11900
(-) 8320
2440
2115
(-) 325
3465
2115
(-) 1350
4910
2115
(-) 2795
560
720
(+) 160
750
820
(+) 70
1000
820
(-) 180
3680
1350
5175
2700
6900
2700
C1-9

Chapter-1
Introduction
Sr. No.
6
Products
- Gaps/Surpluses*
HR Coils /Sheets
Demand
Availability
- Gaps/Surpluses*
*Note: Demand and Gaps/Surpluses are including Export
2006-07
(-) 2330
2011-12
(-) 2475
2016-17
(-) 4200
14400
12040
(-) 2360
23160
16180
(-) 6980
42525
16180
(-) 26345
Source : JSW Project Report
From the above, the following conclusions can be drawn:
1.4
There is enough scope for creation of additional steelmaking capacity in the

country to meet the growing domestic demand; and
There is enough opportunity for Indian steel producers to enter the growing world
trade in steel.
Scope of the Study

Based on the prescribed TOR, the Environmental Impact Assessment report is
prepared covering study area (10 km radius) around the proposed project area. The
scope of study broadly includes:
To conduct literature review and to collect data relevant to the study area;
To undertake environmental monitoring so as to establish the baseline

environmental status of the study area;
To identify the ambient air quality levels in the project area;
To predict incremental levels of pollutants in the study area due to the proposed
project activities;
To evaluate the predicted impacts on the various environmental attributes in the

study area by using scientifically developed and widely accepted environmental
impact assessment methodologies;
To prepare an Environment Management Plan (EMP) outlining the measures for

improving the environmental quality and scope for future expansions for
environmentally sustainable development; and
To identify critical environmental attributes required to be monitored.
The literature review includes identification of relevant articles from various

publications, collection of data from various government agencies and other sources.
1.5
Methodology of the Study

M/s. Vimta Labs Limited, Hyderabad had conducted a reconnaissance survey
and sampling locations were identified on the basis of:
Predominant wind directions in the study area as recorded by India

Meteorological Department (IMD), Ranchi;
C1-10

Chapter-1
Introduction
Existing topography, location of surface water bodies like ponds, canals and
rivers;
Location of villages/towns/sensitive areas;
Accessibility, power availability and security of monitoring equipment, pollution

pockets in the area;
Areas which represent baseline conditions; and
Collection, collation and analysis of baseline data for various environmental

attributes.
Field studies have been conducted for a period of three months (March 2014 to May
2014) representing pre-monsoon season to determine existing conditions of various
environmental attributes as outlined in Table-1.3. The applicable environmental
standards for the project are given in Annexure-V and the methodology of
monitoring and analysis is given in Annexure-VI.
C1-11
Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant, 900 MW Captive Power Plant and Township
near Barenda Village, Sonahatu Block, Ranchi District, Jharkhand State
Chapter-1
Introduction
TABLE-1.3
ENVIRONMENTAL ATTRIBUTES AND FREQUENCY OF MONITORING
Sr.
No.
1
Environmental
Component
Surface
meteorology
Ambient
Quality
Water Quality
Air
Sampling
Locations
Sampling
Parameters
One
central
location
Temperature, wind
speed,
wind
direction
10 locations
16 locations
Total
Sampling
Period
3 months
Hourly
WS: +/-0.02 m/sec

WD: +/- 3 degrees
Temp: +/- 0.2 oC
Rainfall
3 months
Daily
Rainfall: 0.2 mm
Relative humidity,
cloud cover
As
per
NAAQS
2009
3 months
Hourly
RH: +/- 3%
Two days per

week for 13
weeks
24 hourly
PM10: 5 g/m3
PM2.5: 2 g/m3
SO2: 4 g/m3
NOx: 9 g/m3
CO: 12.5 g/m3
O3 : 2 g/m3
Pb : 12.5 g/m3
As per IS:10500
Grab sampling
Once in
period
study
Heavy metals (As,

Hg, Pb, Cd, Cr-6,
Total Cr, Cu, Zn,
Se, Fe)
Grab sampling
Once in
period
study
(8-surface
water
8-ground
water)
Sampling
Frequency
Detection Limit
EC:+/-0.1 us/cm
TSS/TDS: 0.5 mg/l
O&G:0.1mg/l
DO: 0.5 mg/l
BOD:2 mg/l
COD: 0.5 mg/l
Ca, Mg, Na, K: 0.1
mg/l Alkalinity, PO4,
SO4, Cl, NO3: 0.1 mg/l
Coliform: 1 MPN
0.001 mg/l
Methodology
The
meteorology
parameters
were
recorded
using
automatic
micrometeorological equipment consisting of
anemometer, wind wane and thermometer.
Review of secondary data collected from
IMD station at Ranchi.
Rainfall was recorded every morning at
0830 hours
Automatic Humidity was recorded.
Gravimetric method for PM10 and PM2.5.
Modified West & Gaeke method for SO2
(IS-5182 part-II 1969) using tetrachloro
mercurate 0.01 N absorbing solution.
Jacob-Hochheiser method (IS-5182 part-IV
1975) for NOX using sodium arsenate
absorbing solution of 0.01 N absorbing
solution. CO was measured by GC method.
As per APHA methods. The conductivity,
temperature
were
analyzed
at
site
laboratory and rest of the parameters were
analyzed at VIMTA's central laboratory at
Hyderabad.
C1-12
Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant, 900 MW Captive Power Plant and Township
near Barenda Village, Sonahatu Block, Ranchi District, Jharkhand State
Chapter-1
Introduction
Sr.
No.
Environmental
Component
Sampling
Locations
Sampling
Parameters
Noise
10 locations
Leq
Soil
10 locations
Terrestrial
Ecology
Total
area
study
Soil
profile,
chemical
constituents,
suitability
for
agricultural growth
Flora and fauna
Total
area
study
Demography and
Socio-economic
aspects
Land Use
Total
area
Geology
Hydrogeology
(Surface
and
ground)
10
Total
Sampling
Period
Hourly
readings
for
24 hours
Composite
sample up to
1.0 m depth
Sampling
Frequency
Once in
period
study
Detection Limit
Methodology
SPL: 0.1 dB(A)
Integrated on hourly basis
Once
during
study period
EC: 0.1 s/cm

N, P, K: 0.1 mg/kg
Analysis was carried out as

chemical analysis by ML Jackson
Field
observations
Once in
period
Demographic
profile
study
Trend of land use

change
for
different categories
Total
area
study
Geological history
Total
area
study
Drainage pattern,
nature of streams,
aquifer
characteristics,
recharge
and
discharge areas
Through field visits and collected secondary

data. Count and quadrate method has been
used.
Through
field
visits
and
secondary
information sources like National Informatic
Center, Delhi and Census data.
Through
field
visits
and
secondary
information of IRS, LISS P6 satellite
imagery
data
sources
like
National
Informatic Center, Delhi
Secondary information sources (Geological
survey of India and Central Ground Water
Board, Delhi)
Field survey was conducted and primary
data was collected
study
per
Secondary
information
sources
like
(Geological survey of India and Central
Ground Water Board)
****
soil
C1-13

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.0
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
2.1
Introduction
This chapter presents the major resources required for proposed project, project
schedule, process description, technological facilities and plant configuration, raw
material requirement and handling and likely environmental effects due to the
proposed project.
2.2
Type of Project
The proposed green field project of JSW Jharkhand Steel Limited comprises of an
integrated steel plant, CPP and a cement plant within a single plant complex. The
proposed 10.0 MTPA integrated steel plant has been proposed in Jharkhand state
on the basis of the growing domestic as well as international demand in steel
sector and availability of raw material and infrastructure.
A coal/gas based CPP of 900 MW capacity is proposed to meet the power
requirement for the proposed steel plant within the plant complex. A 6.0 MTPA
cement plant will also be installed to utilize the blast furnace (BF) slag and fly ash
generated from steel plant and CPP to the extent possible.
2.2.1 Product Details

The details of tentative proposed products from the proposed integrated steel
plant, captive power plant and cement plant are given in Table-2.1.
TABLE-2.1
PRODUCT DETAILS
Sr. No.
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
B
Products
Steel Products
HR Coils
Bars
Wire Rods
Medium Sections
Heavy Sections
Cold Rolled Coils
Plates
Galvanised Steel
Tin Plates
Electrical Steel
Colour Coating
Pellets
Cement
Quantity (MTPA)
4.5
1.0
1.0
1.2
2.2
2.3
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
3.0
6.0
Source: Project Report-JSW
Capacity of the plant is 10 MTPA, apart from the above mentioned, there will be
power generation of 900 MW for captive usage.
Vimta Labs Limited, Hyderabad
C2-1

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.3
Need for the Project

The steel industry in India is poised for faster growth in the decades ahead as the
industrial and economic development of the country gains pace. Indian steel
industry is also emphasizing its presence in the global market. The domestic
market growth outlook for finished steel has been estimated and is given below:
DOMESTIC MARKET GROWTH OUTLOOK
Growth (million
tonnes)
GDP @ 6.5%
2006-07
(million tonnes)
39.5-40.7
2012-13
(million tonnes)
77.8 78.0
2019-20
(million tonnes)
140
JSW Jharkhand Steel Limited (JSWJSL) has drawn up a growth plan with the
objective of increasing its market share, including market penetration and
maintaining its leading position in Indian steel industry. One of the key objectives
of JSWJSL is to be of a world-class company and leader in Indian steel business
horizon by leveraging its key competencies. This core competency will enable
JSWJSL to manufacture products at a lower cost and more speedily than its
competitors and enhance bottom-line.
2.4
Project Location & Layout

The proposed project site is located near Barenda village in Sonahatu block,
Ranchi district, Jharkhand state. The general location of the plant is shown in
Figure-1.2 of Chapter-1.
2.4.1 Existing Features at the Site

The major portion of land is rain fed single crop land in the project area. The soil
is sandy clay type in the project area. There is no forest and hilly area within the
project site. However, small patches of protected forests exist outside the project
site towards north and south. Hilly terrain exists outside the northern boundary of
the project site. No wet lands are present at the proposed plant site.
The area for the proposed integrated steel plant project is under acquisition. The
social impact assessment including resettlement and rehabilitation (R&R) of the
project affected persons (PAP) has been conducted by M/s. BAIF Development
Research Foundation, New Delhi as per R & R policy of Jharkhand state.
2.4.2 Topography of the Site1
The topography of the land at project site is partially flat and undulating. The land
is sloping from northern boundary of the project area to the south and southeastern end. Some amount of filling and cutting will be required at site for
adequate site preparation. The proposed project site is slightly undulating with
the contours varying from 220 m to 240, with a relief of 20 m. It is envisaged the
filling requirements will be met through internal cutting only. The need for
external borrow areas is not envisaged. The quantities of fill material are
Topography of the Site as per ToR-8
C2-2

Chapter-2
Project Description
available in the detailed engineering stage. The view of the project site is
depicted through photographs and shown in Figure-2.12.
2.4.3 Drainage Pattern and Water Bodies
The project site is well drained, sloping towards S as well as SE directions. The
project area drains into seasonal Domra river flowing along the plant boundary in
the south, which ultimately joins Subarnarekha river flowing in north-south
direction. Though the site will be leveled for construction of plant facilities, the
run-off from the site will be re-routed through efficiently designed drainage
network.
2.4.4 Layout Plan
The total area of the project is 3800 acres (1538 ha). The overall plant layout and
plant layout superimposed on the topo sheet along with coordinates are shown in
Figure-2.23 and Figure-2.34. The township in 300 acres will be constructed
outside the plant complex, taking due consideration of the prevailing wind
directions. The proposed township will be located in the northeast direction to
the plant and falls in the cross-wind direction.
2.5
Size and Magnitude of Operations

The details of the major plant facilities, land, power, water and manpower
requirement for the proposed project of 10.0 MTPA integrated steel plant are
described in this section.
2.5.1 Major Plant Facilities

The proposed project of JSW Jharkhand Steel Limited comprises of 10.0 MTPA
integrated steel plant, 900 MW CPP and township.
The major plant facilities envisaged for the proposed project and their capacities
are given in Table-2.2.
Photographs of the proposed plant area as per ToR-2

Proposed project site layout as per ToR-10
4
Plant coordinates on the topo map as per ToR-11
2
3
C2-3

Chapter-2
Project Description
FIGURE-2.1(A)
PHOTOGRAPHS SHOWING SITE FEATURES AT PROJECT AREA
C2-4

Chapter-2
Project Description
FIGURE-2.1(B)
PHOTOGRAPHS SHOWING SITE FEATURES AT PROJECT AREA
C2-5

Chapter-2
Project Description
FIGURE-2.2
LAYOUT OF THE PROPOSED PLANT AREA
C2-6

Chapter-2
Project Description
LEGEND
Plant Area
Township
Railway Siding
CO-ORDINATES OF PROJECT AREA

A : 23 11 01.6 N, 85 4730.2 E
B : 23 11 02.3 N, 85 4943.4 E
C : 23 11 02.3 N, 85 5009.2 E
D : 23 09 12.6 N, 8550 05.4 E
E : 23 08 45.2 N, 8549 05.6 E
F : 23 10 16.9 N, 8547 49.1 E
FIGURE-2.3
PROJECT SITE LAYOUT SUPERIMPOSED ON THE TOPO SHEET
C2-7

Chapter-2
Project Description
TABLE-2.2
MAJOR PLANT FACILITIES
Sr. No.
1
2
3
Plant Facilities
Beneficiation Plant
Pellet Plant
Coke Oven plant
Capacity
29.0 MTPA
2 x 4.0 MTPA
2 x 3.0 MTPA-Recovery type ovens
with CDQ having stamp-charging
facilities and by-products
2 x 7.8 MTPA
2 x 4.9 MTPA
1.2 MTPA
3 x 180 t + 2 x 280/300 t
3 x 180 t + 2 x 280/300 t
1 x 180 t + 1 x 280/300 t
2 x 6 strand
1 x 6 strand
2 x 3 starnd
2 x 2 starnd
1.0 MTPA
1.0 MTPA
1.2 MTPA
2 x 1.1 MTPA
4.5 MTPA
1.5 MTPA
2.3 MTPA
1.0 MTPA
1.0 MTPA
1.0 MTPA
1.0 MTPA
3 x 2500 TPD
5 x 600 TPD
2 x 600 TPD
3 x 300 MW
6.0 MTPA
5.52 MTPA
2.30 MTPA
4
Sinter Plant
5
Blast Furnace
6
Direct Reduction Plant
7
BOF Converter
8
Ladle Furnace (LF)
9
RH-TOP
10
Billet Caster
11
Bloom Caster
12
Shaped Bloom Caster
13
Slab Caster
14
Wire Rod Mill
15
Bar Mill
16
Medium Section Mill
17
Heavy section Mill
18
Hot Strip Mill
19
Plate Mill
20
Cold Rolling Mill
21
Galvanizing Line
22
Tin Plate Mill
23
Electrical Steel
24
Colour Coating line
25
Oxygen Plant
26
Lime Calcination Plant
27
Dolo Calcination Plant
28
Captive Power Plant
29
Cement Plant
30
Coking coal washery
31
Non- coking coal washery
Other Facilities
32
Township
300 acres
33
Water supply pipelines/channels & intake wells/weirs
34
External infrastructure
35
Railway sidings, railway bridge over Subarnarekha river and rail connection
to existing railway lines
Source-Project Report-JSW
2.5.2 Land Requirement

The proposed project will be developed in an area of 3800 acres (1538 ha) in 7
villages. The project area includes adequate area allocation for all technological
and service units, dump area, raw water reservoir and greenbelt development as
per statutory requirements. The proposed land use break-up is given in Table-
C2-8

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.3. A copy of Mutual agreement for land acquisition signed with land oustees is
enclosed in Annexure-VII5
TABLE-2.3
LAND USE BREAK-UP
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
A
B
C
D
E
Plant Facilities
Raw material Handling and storage facilities
Bas mix yard 1
Bas mix yard 2
Beneficiation plant
Coal washery
Coal washery
Coke oven 1
Coke oven 2
Sinter Plant 1
Sinter plant 2
Pellet plant 1
Pellet plant 2
DR plant
Blast furnace 1 & 2
SMS 1
SMS 2
Rolling mills 1
Rolling mills 2
Rolling mills 3
Plate mill
Lime & dolo calcination plant
Cement plant units
MSDS 1
MSDS 2
MSDS 3
Water treatment plant
Oxygen plant
Central repair shop
Stores
Tailing pond
Miscellaneous (road, railway siding, pipe & conveyor corridor, etc.)
Total steel plant
Captive power plant
Raw water reservoir
Greenbelt development
Township
Grand Total
Area (acres)
163.4
22.1
22.1
51.7
11.2
11.2
68.7
68.7
25.5
25.5
39.8
39.8
10.0
185.3
77.9
77.9
75.9
75.9
75.9
45.2
38.0
49.3
25.5
5.8
6.0
8.0
21.0
15.5
3.2
66.6
687.6
2100
150
200
1050
300
3800
2.5.2.1 Classification of Land, Acquisition Status, Land Availability 6

The land identified for the proposed project for ISP and CPP spreads over 7
revenue villages mainly Barenda, Napara, Buruhatu-Sundrup, Chokahatu,
Pandadih, Mahil and Marangikir of Sonahatu block in Ranchi district of Jharkhand.
The Project site includes 12% of Government land and 88% of private land and
project area consists of 80% agriculture rain fed single crop and 20% fallow land
(including waste land & water body). The land use breakup of the proposed
project and the present status of land are given in Table-2.4 and Table-2.5.
5
6
Land documents of the proposed project site as per ToR-5

Classification of the proposed project land as per ToR-12
C2-9

Chapter-2
Project Description
Village-wise classifications of land as per records of rights-1932 given in

Annexure-VIII
TABLE-2.4
LAND BREAKUP OF THE PROJECT AREA
(As per Records of Rights RS Khatiyan)
Sr. No
1
2
Item
Plant and
Rail line
and Siding
Township
Total
Note: *
#
DC
No. of
Village(s)
involved in
the Project
Seven
Break up of total land required for the Project

(in acres)
Total Area
Raiyati
Land under
Govt. Land
Land
CNT*
(GM-Gair
(Direct
(Registry
Mazurwa)
Registry)
after Dcs
(Transfer on
Permission)
lease)
3500.00
1065.72
1982.28
452.00
One
300.00#
0.00
3800.00
1065.72
: Chotta Nagpur Tenancy Act, 1908 (CNT)
: Land schedule verification is under progress.
: Dy. Commissioner.
0.00
1982.28
0.00
452.00
TABLE-2.5
PRESENT STATUS OF LAND (3500 acres)
Sr. No
1
Progress
(in %)
% wrt
Grand Total
Area
(Registry +
U/P for
Registry +
U/P for DCs
Permission)
1893.24
54.09%
Raiyati Land
(Direct
Registry
executed in
favor of JSW)
Govt.
Land
(Transfer
on lease)
368.40
34.57%
Land under CNT (1351.50)

Registry
DCs
Raiyat
Executed
permission
consent
in favor of
obtained
received &
JSW after
and U/P
u/p for
DCs
for
DCs
Permission
Registry
permission
384.90
878.55
88.05
68.18%
3500.00
1065.72
1982.28
452.00
173.345
38.35%
Raiyati land: 1) 753.30 acres (368.40+384.90) of land has been purchased

by JSWJSL so far. 2) Balance 2594.70 acres under various stages for
converting into the sale deed.
Government land: 1) 173.345 acres of Govt. land (in 7 villages)

recommended by DC Ranchi vide Letter Dated 31.07.2014 and 22.08.2014
[Annexure-VII(d)] for transfer (30 years lease) in favor of JSWJSL. 2) Balance
278.655 acres is under progress for transfer.
NOC received from all concerned 7 gram sabhas for transfer of GM land & for
the Project also.
2.5.3 Power Requirement and Supply

The estimated power requirement of the plant is proposed to be met by 900 MW
captive power plant (CPP) to be located within the proposed plant complex.
Some power would also be available from the top pressure recovery turbine
generators of the blast furnace and coke dry quenching (CDQ) unit from the coke
C2-10

Chapter-2
Project Description
ovens. Out of 900 MW, it is envisaged that about 300 MW will be generated from
waste heat recovery boilers and about 600 MW will be generated from
conventional coal fired boilers. The main receiving and step down station of the
plant, power will be stepped down to 33 kv to feed the various plant load centers.
These load centers will have provision to step down further to 11 kv/6.6 kv and
415 V for distribution of power at required voltages.
Necessary power compensation equipment and harmonic filters will be provided
to take care of the fluctuating load of converter shop and continuous casters. For
all 220 kv, 33 kv, 11 kv and 6.6 kv supplies, centralized supervision, monitoring
and emergency control system will be adopted. Energy and gas balance of the
proposed project is given in Table-2.67.
Construction power of about 5 MW is proposed to be arranged through Jharkhand
State Electricity Board from the nearest substation. The power requirement for all
the components of steel plant is given in Table-2.7.
Energy balance of the proposed integrated steel plant as per ToR-26
C2-11
Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant, 900 MW Captive Power Plant and
Township near Barenda Village, Sonahatu Block, Ranchi District, Jharkhand State
Chapter-2
Project Description
TABLE-2.6
ENERGY AND GAS BALANCE
Generation of Fuel Gas
COG
BFG
SMS
Product
MTPA
6.0
9.8
10.422
Annual
Hrs/Yr
8,760
8,400
8,400
Products
MTPA
6.0
15.60
8.0
9.8
1.2
10.422
2.3
2.3
4.5
1.5
1
1
1
1
1
1.2
2.2
6
Operating Hrs
Hrs/Yr
8,760
7,920
7,920
8,400
8,400
7,920
7,920
8,400
7,920
7,920
7,920
7,920
7,920
7,920
7,920
7,920
7,920
8,400
Calorific Value
KCal/Nm3
4350
850
2000
Unit Production
Mcal/Tonne
Nm3/Tonne
1479
340
1445
1700
180
90
Nm3/Hr
Nm3/Yr
337,671
1,983,333
111,664
2,958,000,000
16,660,000,000
937,980,000
20,555,980,000
14.4%
81.0%
4.6%
100%
Consumption of Fuel Gas
Coke oven
Sinter
Pellet plant
BF
DRI
SMS
CRM
LCP
Hot strip mill
Plate mill
Tin plate mill
Galvanising line
Electrical steel
Wire rod mill
Bar mill
Medium section mill
Heavy section mill
Cement plant
Unit Heat
Consumption
Gcal/Ton
0.680
0.020
0.175
0.509
2.500
0.039
0.617
0.750
0.270
0.250
0.250
0.380
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.290
0.290
0.087
CV
Kcal/Nm3
1050
900
2000
1100
4300
3000
1850
1850
1850
1850
1850
1850
1850
1850
1850
1850
1850
1850
Flow
Nm3/hr
443,575
43,771
88,384
540,273
83,056
16,975
96,854
111,004
82,924
25,594
17,063
25,935
20,475
20,475
20,475
23,751
43,544
33,591
Balance Gas
Total available gas to power plant (Nm3/hr)
Total available gas to power plant (Kcal/hr)
Heat rate of gas based power plant (Kcal/kwh)
Total power generation from gas based power plant
Consumption of Gases (Nm3/hr)

COG
BFG
LDG
25,347
418,228
625
43,146
29,040
59,343
38,591
501,682
81,870
1,187
10,428
6,548
27,672
69,181
31,715
79,288
23,693
59,231
7,313
18,281
4,875
12,188
7,410
18,525
5,850
14,625
5,850
14,625
5,850
14,625
6,786
16,965
12,441
31,103
9,597
23,993
334,954
1,402,763
2,718
580,570
111,664
2,718
580,570
111,664
11,821,551
493,484,429
223,328,571
2300
317
MW
C2-12

Chapter-2
Project Description
TABLE-2.7
POWER REQUIREMENT
Sr. No.
1
2
3
Plant Facilities
RMHS
Beneficiation plant
Pellet plant
Coke oven plant
5
6
7
8
Sinter plant
Blast furnace with PCM
Direct reduction plant
SMS
Continuous casting
machine (CCM)
(Billet/bloom/shaped
bloom caster)
Slab caster
Wire rod mill
Medium section mill
Heavy section mill
Hot strip mill
Plate mill
Bar mill
Cold rolling mill complex
Oxygen plant
Lime & dolo calcination
plant
Cement plant
Coking & non-coking
coal washery
Miscellaneous
(services & utilities)
Power generation from
TRT & CDQ
Total
power
Requirement
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Capacity
29.0 MTPA
2 x 4.0 MTPA
2 x 3.0 MTPA - Recovery type
ovens with CDQ having stampcharging
facilities
&
byproducts
2 x 7.8 MTPA
2 x 5500 m3 (2 x 4.9 MTPA)
1.2 MTPA
3 x 180 t + 2 x 280/300 t
2 x 6 strand
1 x 6 strand
2 x 3 strand
2 x 2 strand
1.0 MTPA
1.2 MTPA
2 x 1.1 MTPA
4.5 MTPA
1.5 MTPA
1.0 MTPA
2.3 MTPA
3 x 2500 tpd
5 x 600 tpd
2 x 600 tpd
6.0 MTPA
5.52 MTPA
2.30 MTPA
MW
36
50
66
36
95
138
39
80
25
25
23
17
32
52
25
32
52
125
10
50
4
38
150
900 MW
2.5.4 Water Requirement and Supply

Water is required in the steel plant mainly for equipment cooling. In addition, it is
used for process, steam rising, collecting & conveying of scales, dust and debris,
drinking & sanitation, fire-fighting and other miscellaneous purposes.
Gallons per day (MGD), i.e. about 15150 m3/hr including water requirement for
Subarnarekha river, which flows at a distance of about 2.4 km from the plant site
C2-13

Chapter-2
Project Description
Sanction for 80 MGD water (for construction and operation) from Subarnarekha
River received from WRD, Government of Jharkhand on 09.04.08 given in
Annexure-IX(A).
Further, water supply agreement has been executed between Government of
Jharkhand through Executive Engineer, Water Ways Division Ranchi, Water
Resources Department (WRD) and JSW Jharkhand Steel Limited on 29.07.2013
for Phase-I Integrated Steel Plant at Sonahatu Block, Ranchi District
(Subernarekha River 40 MCM) given in Annexure-IX8(B).
Plant Water Supply
The treated raw water will be collected in a partly on-ground reservoir in the
plant. The reservoir will have two compartments and will be pumped to different
plant units and for individual plant units re-circulating water systems will be
provided. The different categories of water to be used in the re-circulating system
are:
De-mineralized (DM) water for closed re-circulating cooling systems;
Soft water for closed re-circulating cooling systems;
Indirect cooling water (ICW) for secondary cooling of the water-to-water heat
exchangers of the closed cooling circuits;
Direct cooling water (DCW) for gas cleaning circuits, slag granulation, open
machinery cooling and scale flushing; and
Make-up water & service water for captive power plant.
Make-up water for different process units will be made available from main plant
make-up water ring main and will be conveyed to respective cold wells of various
re-circulating systems and storage reservoirs. Suitable isolating and control
valves will be provided in the make-up water pipelines conveying water to cold
wells and storage units.
Wastewater generated from different areas of plant will be treated to the desired
extent and recycled in the re-circulating system as far as possible, facilitating
adequate reuse of water. Backwash water generated from different pressure
filters will be treated in a treatment plant having sludge disposal facilities. The
treated water will be reused in the direct cooling circuit. The main water
recirculation systems are given in Table-2.8.
TABLE 2.8
MAIN WATER RECIRCULATION SYSTEMS
Sr. No.
1
Re-circulation Circuit
Closed soft water (primary
circuit)
Process Covered
Coke Oven BF stove coolers, tuyeres
and stoves Lintel cooling in Pellet Plant
Lance cooling LF cooling Top lance
cooling Vessel pre-heater cooling
Vessel cooling Mould cooling for slab
casters Machine cooling for casters For
removing scales in mills
Permission for drawl of water from the state irrigation department as per ToR-46
C2-14

Chapter-2
Project Description
Sr. No.
2
Re-circulation Circuit
Open
industrial water
(clean water cycle)
Open
industrial
water
(contaminated water cycle)
Emergency water circuit

(Through overhead tanks)
Process Covered
Secondary side cooling of plate heat
exchangers. Compressed air station
degasser cooling LF transformer BF
cooling pellet plant Indirect cooling
of plate mill Sinter Plant cooling
Power plant cooling
Uncontaminated circuit of by-product
plant -Indirect cooling of re-heating
furnace
Spray and machine cooling (direct
cooling) in conventional slab caster.
Effluent treatment plant of BF GCP.
Contaminated circuit of by-product plant.
Direct cooling of plate mill.
Blast Furnace LF, VD/VOD, mould,
machine and spray cooling of conventional
slab caster. Reheating furnace cooling
Coke Oven.
Through cascaded reuse of blow-down, the water scheme ensures practically

zero-discharge from the industrial water circuit. However, in such huge operation
of integrated steel plant some water would need to be discharged, which will
meet the statutory norms.
2.5.5 Manpower Requirement
The proposed steel plant will not only require management and executive
manpower but also, skilled, semi-skilled, unskilled and clerical manpower.
However, a number of jobs like major repair and maintenance, cleaning,
transportation and loading/unloading of bulk material, etc. will be done by
engaging outside agencies.
Considering a labour productivity of 1,000 tonnes of finished steel per man-year,
which is at par with international standard, the requirement of total manpower
works out to about 5000 in phase-I and about 10,000 in final phase at 10.0 MTPA
production level.
However, the proposed 10.0 MTPA integrated steel plant will additionally generate
more than 20,000 to 30,000 indirect secondary and tertiary employment. It is
expected that a number of ancillary industries will develop near the proposed site,
which will be mutually beneficial.
2.6
Project Schedule for Approval and Implementation

The overall schedule from the date of start of the project (zero date), the plant
will be commissioned in 48 months for 5 MTPA in Phase-I.
The efficient implementation of the project shall involve multi directional activities
to be taken up independently to restrict cost and time over-run. The activities can
be categorized as pre-project activities, planning and monitoring, contracting and
procurement, project engineering, inspection & expediting and site activities.
C2-15

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.7
Process Technology
2.7.1 Major Technology Facilities

The plant will be equipped with coke oven complex, beneficiation plant, coal
washery, sinter plant, pellet plant, blast furnace, steel making and casting facility
for production of slabs, billets and blooms, cement plant and captive power plant.
Matching facilities up to production of finished products have been envisaged in
the project proposal based on the state-of-the-art technology. The technological
facilities required at each processing step to achieve good quantity rolled products
are described briefly in the following sections. The technology facility proposed in
the process is given in Table-2.9.
TABLE-2.9
TECHNOLOGY FACILITY AT VARIOUS PROCESSING LEVELS
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Processing Step
Beneficiation
Coal washery
Coke making
Pelletization
Sintering
Iron making
7
8
Steel making
Secondary refining
Continuous casting
10
Hot rolling
11
12
Cold Rolling
Finished Steel
13
14
15
16
Calcining
Oxygen Making
Power
Cement
Technological Facility
Beneficiation plant
Coal quality up-gradation
Recovery coke oven
Pellet plant
Sinter plant
Blast furnace
& direct reduction plant
Basic oxygen furnace
Ladle furnace
RH degassing
Slab caster
Billet caster
Bloom caster/shaped bloom caster
Wire rod mill
Bar mill
Section mills
Hot strip mill
Plate mills
Cold roll mill
Galvanising line
Colour coating line
Tin plate mill
Electrical steel
Oxygen plant
Captive power plant
Cement plant
Source-JSW
Facilities required outside the plant boundary like township,

infrastructure viz. water, railways and power will be installed.
external
C2-16

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.8
Process Description9
The integrated steel plant consists of a number of unit processes. The typical
process flow diagram is shown in Figure-2.410. Process and material flow sheet
for the proposed 10.0 MTPA steel plant is given in Figure-2.511.
2.8.1 Coal Washeries

In order to supply coal for coking purpose, it will be necessary to install coal
washery. It is proposed to install two coal washeries, one for coking coal of
capacity about 5.52 MTPA and other for non-coking coal of capacity about 2.30
MTPA capacity. The middlings generated from this coal washery will be utilized for
captive power generation. The technology and process flow sheet will be decided
on completion of the coal mines evaluation and physical and chemical
characteristics of the coal expected from the coal mine of Rohne Coal Company
Limited located in north Karanpura coalfields, district Hazaribagh, Jharkhand.
2.8.2 Iron Ore Beneficiation Plant
In order to utilize the iron ore fine deposits with high alumina and ultra fines, it is
proposed to establish an iron ore beneficiation plant of 29.0 MTPA capacity, which
will give a yield of 22.0 MTPA.
The process will involve screening of the fines in wet screens, size separation in
screw classifiers, dewatering in dewatering screens, overflow of classifier material
and cyclonic separation in cyclones and filters. The process results in slime
separation and upgradation of the ore quality to the acceptable limit of Fe-64%
and SiO2 + Al2O3 5.0% (max). The beneficiation plant will have a rated capacity
of 4000 TPH and will be built in standard modules. The slime disposal will be only
in thick paste.
The beneficiation plant will receive iron ore fines either through track hoppers
and/or through truck unloading station. A conveying system will convey iron ore
fines from the track hopper system to raw material storage yard. Raw material
received at truck unloading system will be discharged on the above stacking
conveyors for further conveying to the raw material storage yard. The reclaim
conveyor will feed raw material to surge bunkers. Belt feeder at the bottom of
surge bunker will feed raw material to a screen feed conveyor.
Manufacturing process of various units of Integrated Steel plant as per ToR-24

Process flow diagram as per ToR-3
11
Mass/material balance of raw materials as per ToR-25
9
10
C2-17

Chapter-2
Project Description
FIGURE-2.4
STEEL PLANT PROCESS FLOW
C2-18
Environmental Impact Assessment for the proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant, 900 MW Captive Power Plant and
Chapter-2
Project Description
FIGURE-2.5
PROCESS & MATERIAL FLOW SHEET
C2-19
Environmental Impact Assessment for the proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated

Chapter-2
Project Description
The oversize material (+3 mm) from the screen will be conveyed to a crusher &
the crushed material will be fed back to the screen feed conveyor. The fine ore
through the screen-feeding conveyor is fed on to the vibrating screen through a
slurry box. The oversize material from the screen will be transferred to a crusher
through a crusher-feeding conveyor. The crusher will be located outside the main
plant building and nearer to the surge bins protected by structural sheds. The
crushed material will further transfer on to the screen-feeding conveyor. The
screen undersize material (in slurry form) will be fed to the primary classifier. The
coarse material (underflow) from primary classifier will be fed to scrubber. The
scrubbed material will be fed to secondary classifier. The fines (overflow) from
both the classifiers will be collected in a sump by gravity through open launder.
Density transmitters has been envisaged in the overflow lines of the both the
classifiers, which is used to control the speed of the spiral.
The coarse material (underflow) from secondary classifier will be fed to
dewatering screen for removal of moisture. The final discharge from the
dewatering screens (which is the feed to sinter plant) will be collected on a
conveyor. The material will be further transferred to base blending yard of sinter
plant through conveyor.
The fines (overflow) from both the classifiers & dewatering screen (-100 mesh / 0.15 mm) will be collected in a sump by gravity through open launder. The slurry
will then be pumped to a battery of cyclones. The overflow from the cyclones (-10
micron) will be transferred to tailings thickener. The cyclone underflow will be fed
to Wet Low Intensity Magnetic Separator (WLIMS) by gravity through launder to
recover magnetite ore. From WLIMS, the feebly magnetic fraction will be collected
in a sump located at ground level. The slurry will be pumped to High Gradient
Magnetic Separator (HGMS) for recovering hematite ore. The magnetic fraction
from HGMS and WLIMS will be transferred to belt filter via dewatering cyclone for
removal of moisture. The discharge from belt filters will be collected on a
conveyor to further transfer the same to the pellet plant storage yard. The
product of the belt filter will have moisture content of about 8-10%. The cyclone
overflow and the tailings fraction from HGMS is transferred to tailings thickener.
The tailings pumps will pump the underflow solids from the thickeners to the
tailings pond. The overflow from the thickeners is circulated back to the process
water reservoir.
2.8.3 Pellet Plant
The pelletization process involves reduction of moisture in the iron ore to less
than 1%, grinding to 45 micron size, feed preparation by adding binders and
moisture, green pelletization and induration (heat hardening).
For full and proper utilization of the iron ore resources available, it is proposed to
install 2 (two) Nos. of 4.0 MTPA pellet plant. This pellet plant will utilize the
beneficiation plant product to produce BF grade pellets to be used in the blast
furnace and DR grade pellets to be used in direct reduction plant. Iron ore
concentrate, limestone and coke breeze from local ground storage will be
conveyed to the silos of iron ore concentrate and additive storage unit within the
pellet plant. From these silos limestone and coke breeze are collected in preset
C2-20

Chapter-2
Project Description
quantities and dried to reduce the moisture content to below 1% before feeding it
to the ball mills for co-grinding to get the requisite fineness. Grinding of coarse
bentonite will be done separately in a Raymond mill.
Then the iron ore concentrate, ground additives and bentonite are transported to
the respective silos in ground material storage unit. Further, mixing in paddle
mixer, green pellet formation in pelletising discs and heat hardening of green
pellets in indurating machine will be carried out.
One travelling grate indurating machine of 464 m2 grate area will be installed with
all other associated service facilities for each pellet plant. Mixed gas will be used
for drying before grinding and finally during induration of green pellets. The
process flow diagram of pellet plant is shown in Figure-2.6.
The operating parameters of each pellet plant are given below:
Capacity
No. of annual working days
Indurating machine area
Pellet width
Useful strand length
Fuel for induration
L/S & coke breeze additive
Grinding
Bentonite grinding
Mixing
Balling
Feeding green balls on
Machine
Induration
Separation of hearth layer
:
:
:
:
:
:
4.0 MTPA
330 days
464 m2
4.0 m
116 m
Mixed gas (CV = 2000 kcal/Nm3)
:
:
:
:
Ball mill (1 no.)

Roller mill (1 no.)
Paddle mixer horizontal type (1 no.)
Balling discs (7.5 m dia.) 6 nos.
: By double deck roller screen for narrow size

(9 16 mm) machine distribution onto the
indurating
: Travelling grate (TG) indurating machine
: By natural segregation / HL vibrating screen
2.8.4 Coke Oven Plant

Coke is one of the prime requirements for production of hot metal through blast
furnace route. The coke supplies heat to the blast furnace for smelting purpose
and also acts as reducing agent inside the furnace for reduction of iron oxides to
metallic iron. Both active hot carbon of coke as well as reducing gas generated in
the furnace by burning of coke take part in reduction reaction. A number of
technologies have been developed for reduction of coke requirement in blast
furnaces resulting in cost effectiveness viz. injection of auxiliary fuels like noncoking coal/tar/natural gas through tuyers etc.
Considering the level of technological development in the coke making area and
total requirement of blast furnace coke in the blast furnace, installation of 2 (two)
Nos. of recovery type coke oven plant of capacity 3.0 MTPA each have been
envisaged. The gross coke generated in the coke ovens will be screened. BF coke
will be sent to the blast furnace and coke fines/ coke breeze generated in the
plant will be utilized in the sinter plant and pellet plant. Flow diagram of recovery
type coke oven plant is shown in Figure-2.7.
C2-21

Chapter-2
Project Description
FIGURE-2.6
PROCESS FLOW CHART OF PELLET PLANT
C2-22

Chapter-2
Project Description
The coke making technology would include pre-carbonization and post

carbonization technologies like selective crushing of coal, stamp charging &
caking and coke dry cooling plant (CDCP). The by-product plant will be designed
to recover benzol, benzene, toulene, xylene along with recovery of tar and
sulphur.
The end result of such batteries would be uniform heating, low specific heat
consumption, higher productivity, improved coke quality and less emission due to
the improved sealing arrangement.
The main technical features for each 3.0 MTPA coke oven plant are given in
Table-2.10.
TABLE-2.10(A)
TYPICAL TECHNICAL FEATURES FOR EACH 3.0 MTPA COKE OVEN PLANT
Sr. No
I
II
1
3
4
5
6
III
Name
Production capability (rating ability) - gross
coke (dry)
Product output
Gross coke (dry)
8010 mm
< 10 mm
Coke gas (dry)
For coke oven & by-product plant
Balance gas
BF Gas
Tar
Sulfur paste
Crude benzol/benzene/toluene/xylene
Annual operation days
Unit
TPA
Quantity
3,000,000
TPA
TPA
TPA
Nm3/annum
Nm3/annum
Nm3/annum
Nm3/annum
TPA
TPA
TPA
day
3,000,000
2,550,000
4,50,000
147x106
111X106
1386X106
1832X106
148,000
10,000
45,000
365
TABLE-2.10(B)
TECHNICAL FEATURES FOR EACH COKE DRY QUENCHING UNIT
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Items
Coke yield per hour

CDQ configuration
Coke temperature :before dry quenching
After dry quenching
Circulating gas flow in system
Circulating gas temperature (before into dry
quenching oven)
7
Circulating gas temperature (out of dry
quenching oven)
8
CDQ steam generating rate
9
Daily operation system of CDQ
10
Annual operation system of CDQ
11
Maintenance
Source: JSW Project Report
Main Process Parameters

2x175 TPH
2185 TPH
9501050C
<200C
230000 Nm3/hr
135C
800980C
0.520~0.570 t/t (coke)
24 hr continuously
340 days continuously
25 days
C2-23

Chapter-2
Project Description
Coking Coal
Crushing
Blending
Coke Oven
Gas
Coke Ovens
Coke Oven
Gas
Recovery
Power
Crude tar,
Sulphur,
Benzol / BTX
Coke
Quenching
Screening
BF
Coke
Coke
Breeze
FIGURE-2.7
RECOVERY TYPE COKE OVEN PLANT
C2-24

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.8.4.1 By-Product Plant

A by-product recovery plant has been envisaged. The by-product plant will
recover crude tar, crude sulphur, benzol / BTX etc. from the out-going gases of
the coke ovens.
The cleaned gas is then proposed to be supplied to consumers of the steel plant
from gas holders. The gas to the consumers will be boosted by gas boosters.
The major units of a by-product plant for cleaning of CO gas to the required
degree and for recovery of crude tar, benzol, BTX and sulphur are as below:
Gas cooling and tar condensation;

Electrostatic tar precipitator;
Coke oven gas exhauster;
Coke oven gas desulphurization;
Sulphur recovery unit;
Ammonia scrubbing and distillation unit;
Ammonia cracking unit; and
Benzol recovery plant and BTX plant.
Along with the above, the following additional units are also proposed:
Comprehensive water supply unit;

Air compression station;
Refrigeration system;
Gas holder and booster station;
Cooling water system; and
Soft water system.
2.8.5 Sinter Plant

Sintering is an agglomeration process in which iron bearing materials (generally
fines) are mixed with iron ore, limestone and finely divided fuel such as coke
breeze. The fines consist of mill scale from hot rolling operations and dust from
basic oxygen furnaces and blast furnaces. The raw materials are mixed before
they are placed on the traveling grate of the sinter machine. Near the head end of
the grate, the surface of the raw materials is ignited by a gas fired ignition
furnace located over the bed. As the mixture moves along the grate, air is drawn
through the mixture at the wind boxes to enhance combustion and sinter (fuse)
the fine particles. As the bed burns, carbon dioxide, cyanides, sulfur compounds,
chlorides, fluorides and oil and grease are driven off with the gases.
The sinter drops off the grate at the discharge end and is cooled (either by air or
a water spray), crushed, and screened to maintain uniformity in the size of the
sinter fed to blast furnaces. Improperly sized sinter and fines from screening are
returned for reprocessing. The process flow diagram of sintering plant is shown in
the Figure-2.8.
C2-25

Chapter-2
Project Description
The advantages of agglomerated burden in the blast furnace is well established

and almost all the high capacity blast furnaces world-wide are using
agglomerated burden for most efficient furnace operation. The major advantages
for use of sinter in blast furnace are as follows:
Control of physical, chemical and high temperature properties of burden

materials;
Avoid use of raw flux charging directly in the blast furnace;
Increase in productivity of the furnace;
Decrease in coke/fuel rate;
Longer life of furnace; and
Production of desired grade of hot metal, etc.
Apart from the above advantages, the iron ore fines generated in the mines
during production of iron ore lumps are used in the sinter plant, which avoids the
problems related to disposal of fines in the iron ore mines. Moreover,
metallurgical waste materials generated in different process steps including part
of converter slag can also be recycled in the sinter plant, which minimizes the
dust pollution inside the plant boundary. The sinter plant will be equipped with
the following major facilities:
Base blending for input materials;

Flux and fuel crushing facilities;
Lime dozing facility;
Mixing and nodulising unit;
Sintering machine equipped with sinter strand, ignition furnace, wind boxes,
suction fan, dust cleaning unit, etc.;
Sinter coolers; and
Sinter screening and transportation facilities.
Capacity of the sinter plant has been estimated based on use of about 70-75%
sinter in the burden of blast furnaces and 2 (two) number of sinter plant of
capacity 7.8 MTPA each has been envisaged for the proposed project. The
operating parameters of each sinter plant are given in Table-2.11.
TABLE-2.11
OPERATING PARAMETERS OF EACH SINTER PLANT
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Unit
MTPA
t/m2/h
mm
d/y
h/d
Kcal/t
Value
7.8
1.37
6-50
330
24
20,000
7
8
9
10
Item Description
Capacity
Productivity (Rated)
Size of finished sinter
Annual working regime
No. of working hours/day
Gaseous energy consumption for ignition / ton of BF
sinter
Coke breeze consumption / ton of BF sinter
Under-grate suction
Sinter m/c bed height (including 30-50 mm hearth layer)
Cooler type / bed height
kg/t
mm WC
mm
-------
11
12
Temperature of cooled sinter

Dust content in exhaust gases at stack
deg. C
mg/Nm3
~ 86
1,500
600-650
Circular
cooler
< 100
< 50

C2-26

Chapter-2
Project Description
FIGURE-2.8
PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM OF SINTERING PLANT
C2-27

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.8.6 Blast Furnace

Hot metal production using blast furnace process has been envisaged for the
proposed project, as the process is most established and competitive iron making
technology till date. A number of technological improvements have taken place in
blast furnace, which has resulted in higher production, less coke consumption,
most energy efficient, long campaign life, etc. Blast furnaces will survive into the
next millennium because the larger efficient furnaces can produce hot metal at
costs competitive with other iron making technologies. State-of-the-art blast
furnace equipped with the following major facilities has been envisaged for the
proposed plant.
Stock house with automatic conveyor charging facilities;

Bell less top charging equipment;
High top pressure operation (3.0 kg/cm2 top pressure) and matching gascleaning plant;
Stoves for generation of high hot blast temperature (1250C blast
temperature);
Coal dust injection facilities (150 kg/t-hm);
Oxygen enrichment of blast;
Cast house slag granulation plant; and
Level-III automation and control system etc.
Hot metal produced from the blast furnace will be transported to the steel melting
shop using torpedos/ladles. Pig casting machines or nodulising machine of
adequate capacity will also be provided as a balancing device. The process flow
diagram of hot metal production using blast furnace is shown in Figure-2.9.
The blast furnace is a large steel stack lined with refractory bricks, where iron
ore, coke and limestone are dumped into the top, and preheated air is blown into
the bottom. The raw materials require 6 to 8 hours to descend to the bottom of
the furnace where they become the final product of liquid slag and liquid iron.
These liquid products are drained from the furnace at regular intervals. The hot
air that was blown into the bottom of the furnace ascends to the top in 6 to 8
seconds after going through numerous chemical reactions. Once a blast furnace is
started it will continuously run for four to ten years with only short stops to
perform planned maintenance.
The purpose of a blast furnace is to chemically reduce and physically convert iron
oxides into liquid iron called "hot metal". The blast furnace is a counter-current
reactor where solids descend and gases ascend. In this reactor there are
numerous chemical and physical reactions that produce the desired final product,
which is hot metal.
Hot metal produced from the blast furnace will be transported to the steel melting
shop using torpedos/ladles. Pig casting machines or nodulising machines of
adequate capacity will also be provided as a balancing device.
Considering the daily requirement of hot metal in the steel melting shop for
production of liquid steel, which is sufficient to produce about 10.0 MTPA finished
C2-28

Chapter-2
Project Description
steel, 2 (two) blast furnace of capacity 4.9 MTPA each and volume 5500 m3 each
have been envisaged for the proposed project. Slag generated from the blast
furnaces will be granulated in the cast house slag granulation plant. The
granulated slag will be utilized for cement manufacturing.
2.8.7 Pig Casting Machine/Noduliser Unit
A pig casting facility of an adequate capacity has been proposed to cast surplus
hot metal. Alternatively, a nodulizer unit may also be considered.
With a view to converting the blast furnace slag into value-added product, which
is otherwise wasted and also to eliminate the slag disposal problem, a cast house
slag granulation unit has been envisaged.
2.8.8 Slag Crushing Unit
The blast furnace slag has been widely used in cement making. It is also used as
admixture along with the OPC clinker. A slag crushing unit has been planned in
the expansion phases for crushing the slag for use in the construction industry.
The hot metal will be transported to BOF shop/hot metal pretreatment station by
torpedo ladles.
2.8.9 Direct Reduction Plant
One Direct Reduction (DR) plant with average gross production capacity of 1.2
MTPA has been envisaged to meet the DRI requirement of steel plant.
DRI is produced from direct reduction of iron ore (in the form of lumps, pellets or
fines) by a reducing gas produced from coke oven gas/LD gas/Mixed gas. The
reducing gas is a mixture of mainly hydrogen (H2) and carbon monoxide (CO)
which acts as a reducing agent. This process of directly reducing the iron ore in
solid form by reducing gases is called direct reduction.
2.8.10 Steel Making
The production of quality steel through BOF has become predominant in order to
meet the bulk demands of various grades of steel. This process is now preferred
over other process as it uses Oxygen as source of energy. The major thrust in
BOF operations are in the areas of lowering inclusions and accompanying
elements in crude steel automation of converter operations and process control,
improved product quality environmental protection aspects of converter
operations; improved converter lining, adoption of preventive maintenance
techniques and recycling of scrap. Substantial improvement in refractory life has
been achieved by employing slag-splashing technique (using top-blown nitrogen
to blow slag, modified with dolomite over the refractory) after tapping the steel.
C2-29
DOLOMITE
QUARTZITE
LUMP ORE
SINTER
PELLET
COKE
FERROUS
BURDEN MATERIALS
LIME STONE
Chapter-2
Project Description
STOCK HOUSE DUST

EXTRALTION SYSTEM
VENTURI SCRUBBER
CYCLONE
SEPTUM VALVE
TO FUEL GAS NETWORK
CAST HOUSE FUME

EXTRACTION SYSTEM
HOT STOVES
TUYERES
OUTLET
SHUT-OFF
VALVE
INLET
SHUT-OFF
VALVE
RECYCLE TO
SINTER
PLANT
DUST
EMERGENCY
TRIP VALVE
GENERATOR
BLAST FURNACE
HOT BLAST
COLD BLAST
TOP RECOVERY TURBINE

SLURRY WATER TO
CLARIFIER FOR RECYCLE
GRANULATED BF SLAG FOR SALE
HOT METAL TO LD SHOP / PIG CASTING
BLOWER
FIGURE-2.9
PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM OF HOT METAL PRODUCTION USING BLAST FURNACE
C2-30

Chapter-2
Project Description
A more recent development in BOF steel making is the mixed or combined

blowing process which seeks to decrease over-oxidation of the slag and metal and
thereby increase the yield and operate the BOF process close to equilibrium.
Various methods have been developed for combined blowing. The most popular
one with BOF steel making is the Lance Bubbling Equilibrium (LBE) process in
which an inert gas is bubbled through permeable elements at the converter
bottom, while oxygen is blown from the top.
BOF process of steel making has been widely accepted, particularly, due to its low
energy requirement and high productivity. BOF process commands the largest
share of total steel production of the world, amounting to about 65% of the total
steel production.
External energy in terms of either electrical power or solid/liquid/gaseous fuel is
not required for process. However, requirement of electricity and gaseous fuel are
mainly for driving of electrical equipment, ladle heating, etc. Most of the other
furnaces like electric arc furnace/ induction furnace consumes high amount of
electrical energy. However, oxygen with high purity is required for conversion of
hot metal to liquid steel and scrap/iron ore/DRI is required as coolant in BOF
process. A significant amount of medium calorific value (2000 kcal/Nm 3) gas is
generated during carbon refining which is separated in the gas cleaning plant. Hot
metal will be pre-treated before charging into the converter.
Considering the requirement of liquid steel for subsequent process steps,
chemical composition of input materials, quality of liquid steel to be produced,
sequence of casting of liquid steel into slabs, beams blanks and billets, oxygen
blowing rate etc., SMS plant consisting of three (3) numbers of converters of
capacity 180 T each and another SMS plant consisting of two (2) numbers of
converters of capacity 280/300 T each have been envisaged for the proposed
project. Thus, two SMS plants have been envisaged for the proposed project. The
schematic flow diagram of steel making process is shown in Figure-2.10.
2.8.11 Ladle Furnace (LF)
With a view to achieve improved homogeneity and productivity of the primary
unit and serving as a buffer between the primary unit and the caster, ladle
furnace is the ideal secondary refining unit. The correction and homogenization of
steel composition and temperature, desulphurization and recarburisation, etc. can
be efficiently carried out in a LF three (3) LF of size 180 T each and two (2) LF of
size 280/300 T each have therefore been envisaged for the proposed project. The
LF will also be equipped with argon purging facilities.
2.8.12 Vacuum Degassing (VD)
In order to produce value-added products subject to market requirements,
VD/VOD/RH are essential as secondary refining units. The processes assure liquid
steel of high purity, low level of inclusions and good homogeneity with respect to
temperature and chemistry. These processes help attainment of very low levels of
gases and inclusions and provide controlled alloying and mixing to produce a
great variety of alloys. These processes also allow improvement in plant
productivity (through sharing of refining load) and yield, in addition to ensuring
good quality.
C2-31

Chapter-2
Project Description
One (1) RHOB unit of matching size (180 T) and one (1) 280/300 T RH degassing
unit as secondary refining have been envisaged for production of value-added
steels. The VD unit will be used for production of various steel grades and for
special applications.
2.8.13 Slab Caster
The product-mix envisages processing of approximately 4.6 MTPA of liquid steel
through conventional slab caster. Considering the capacity of the plant,
conventional slab casting machine has been envisaged for the proposed plant.
The slab caster will be equipped with the state-of-the-art facilities like electromagnetic stirring, mould oscillation, shrouding of liquid metal with inert gas,
online width control, etc. Considering market requirements, two (2) double strand
slab caster capable of producing slabs of 950-1850/2200 mm width and 220/250
mm thickness have been envisaged for the proposed project. However this could
be revised to cater to the future market requirements.
2.8.14 Hot Strip Mill
It is envisaged to process slabs through hot strip mill finishing train for the
production of hot rolled coils / strips. This will have the ability to produce coils of
thickness 1.6 mm to 12.7 mm and with 900 mm to 2000 mm width with a
capacity of 4.5 MTPA.
Continuous cast slabs identified by cast number and individual slab number
marked on them are received in the slab yard. The slabs are stocked in piles in
the slab yard. From the stock, the slabs are charged into the reheating furnaces
according to the mill rolling programme.
The slabs are heated to a temperature of about 1250 C in walking beam type
reheating furnaces. The heated slabs are extracted one by one by extractors
located at the discharge side of each of the furnaces. The scales on the heated
slabs is first removed by a hydraulic scale breaker, where high pressure water at
250 bar is sprayed on slab top and bottom surfaces simultaneously. The slab is
then rolled in the universal roughing mill down to 25 mm to 40 mm thick breakdown bars. Vertical edgers attached to the mill, edge the slabs on the odd passes
to edge about 100 mm width and to hold desired finished width. Before feeding
to the first finishing stand, a crop shear crops the head and tail ends of the bar.
The cropped breakdown bar passes through the scale washer where high pressure
water at 250 bar is sprayed on top and bottom surfaces simultaneously, which
removes the secondary scale. The cleaned breakdown bar is then rolled in the 6stand finishing mill train to the desired thickness. The rolled strip is cooled to the
desired coiling temperature on the run-out table provided with water sprays. The
strip is then coiled in the down coiler.
The coiled strip is transported by a system of conveyors to the coil yard for
storage. The coil is strapped, weighed and identified on the conveyor system.
The hot coils delivered by the conveyor system to the coil yard are removed by
EOT cranes. Coils are loaded into the trailers/ railway wagon by EOT cranes and
dispatched from the coil yard.
C2-32
Chapter-2
Project Description
FIGURE-2.10
PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM OF STEEL MAKING
C2-33

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.8.15 Billet Caster and Bloom Caster

To produce wire rods bars, angles, squares, flats and heavy section, etc., billet
and beam blank casters are the right choice to produce billets and beams to cater
down rolling mill facilities. The technology of continuous casting of steel into
billets has been fully mastered today for any grade of steel. This technology has
become well established through extensive mechanisation and control of various
operating parameters. The continuous casting process has gained worldwide
acceptance, mainly because of high yield, good product quality and good
economics of operation. In order to cast 5,880,000 TPA liquid steel into long
products, billet and bloom casters have been envisaged for the proposed project.
Two (2), six (6) strand billet caster, one (1) six (6) strand bloom caster and two
(2) three (3) strand bloom caster has been envisaged for the proposed project.
2.8.16 Section Mill/Wire Rod Mill/TMT Bar Mill
Based on the product-mix, two heavy section mill, one medium section mill, one
wire rod mill and one bar mill of suitable capacity has been proposed for the
project. The continuous cast billets and blooms will be rolled into rounds, squares,
angles, etc. in bar mill, wire rods in wire rod mill and thermo-mechanically
treated deformed reinforcing bars in TMT bar mill and heavy and medium sections
in section mills. The mills shall produce about 1,00,000 TPA wire rod, 1,000,000
TPA bars, 1,200,000 TPA medium sections & 2,200,000 TPA of large sections.
2.8.17 Plate Mill/Tin Plate Mill/Cold Rolling Mill/Electrical Steel/ Galvanizing Line/Colour
Coating Line
It is proposed to set up plate mill of 1.5 MTPA capacity, tin plate mill of 1.0 MTPA
capacity, cold rolling mill of 2.3 MTPA capacity, galvanizing line of 1.0 MTPA
capacity, electrical steel line of 1.0 MTPA capacity and colour coating line of 1.0
MTPA capacity for production of value added rolled products.
2.8.18 Reheating Furnace of Non-Flat Mills
Capacities of reheating furnaces of bar mill, wire rod mill, section mills and TMT
bar mill will be decided suitably. All reheating furnaces will utilize mixed gas
generated in the primary units.
2.8.19 Lime & Dolo Plant
5 x 600 TDP capacity of lime plant and 2 x 600 TDP capacity of dolo plant has
been envisaged to meet the burnt lime and dolo requirement of the Steel plant.
The lime calcining & lime grinding plant will comprise of vertical shaft kiln for
calcination of limestone and raw dolomite. Lime and calcined dolomite of size (+)
10 mm will be used as flux in steel melting shop. Lime fines and calcined dolomite
fines of size 0-10 mm will be used in sintering plant. Limestone and raw dolomite
for the calcining plant will be of size 20-60 mm for charging into the shaft kiln for
calcination. Limestone & dolomite fines of 0-20 mm in the charge should be kept
minimum to achieve soft burnt reactive lime for steel making. Limestone and raw
dolomite calcination will be carried out at a temperature of about 1100 0C
11500C. Mixed gas will be used as fuel for calcinations. The schematic flow
diagram of lime and dolo plant is shown in Figure-2.11.
C2-34

Chapter-2
Project Description
FIGURE-2.11
PROCESS FLOW CHART OF LIME AND DOLO CALCINATION PLANT
C2-35

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.9
Captive Power Plant

To meet the requirement of power for the proposed plant, a captive power plant
of capacity 3x300 MW has been envisaged. The captive power plant will be
operated on middlings and rejects of coal washery & purchased coal along with
fuel gases generated in the steel plant.
2.9.1 Main Plant Equipment

It is proposed to install three units of turbo generators (TG) each of 300 MW
capacity to generate 900 MW of power. The steam generators would be coal/gas
fired and would be rated to generate about 820 TPH of superheated steam at 155
ATA pressure and 540C temperature. Each steam turbine would drive an electric
generator at 3000 rpm to produce 300 MW output at 0.85 power factor at the
generator terminals. The layout of captive power plant of 900 MW (3X300 MW) is
shown in Figure -2.12.
2.9.2 Process Description
The proposed power plant of 3x300 MW will be a conventional thermal power
plant using coal and gasses operating on sub critical pressure, single reheat
steam cycle with regenerative feed heating arrangement.
The superheated steam from the boilers at 175 bar and 540C is supplied to the
high pressure (HP) turbine. This steam, after expansion in the HP turbine is sent
back to the boiler as cold reheat steam. After reheating in the boiler, the reheated
steam (hot reheat steam) at about 42 bar and 540C is sent to intermediate
pressure (IP) and low pressure (LP) turbine and is finally exhausted into the
condenser.
The exhaust steam is cooled and condensed in the condenser by cooling water
circulated through the tubes of the condenser.
The condensate from the hot well of each condenser is extracted and is pumped
to the deaerator through gland steam condenser, drain cooler and LP heaters.
The feed water is de-aerated in the deaerator and is collected in feed water
storage tank. Water from tank is drawn by the boiler feed pumps and is pumped
to the boiler through the HP heaters.
Condensate in the LP heaters and feed water in HP heaters is heated
progressively by bled steam drawn from cold reheat line and extraction steam of
the IP and LP turbine. Condensate drain from the HP heaters will be cascaded to
the deaerator feed storage tank and drain from the LP heaters would be cascaded
to the condenser through the drain cooler.
C2-36

Chapter-2
Project Description
Generator
Water
Treatment
Raw Water
Turbine
D.M Makeup
Deaerator
LP Heater
Boiler
Reservoir
C.W
Pump
Neut Pit
BFP
H P Heater
Mill
CEP
Intake Pump
RIVER
Economisar
Condenser
Coal
Bunker
Makeup
Cooling
Tower
Ash Water
Pump House
Central
Monitoring Basin
Air
Preheater
FD
Fan
To Ash Handling
System
Dust Supression/
Sanitation/
Green Belt Dev.
PA
Fan
ID
Fan
Electrostatic
Precipitator
Bottom Ash
Chimney
Fly Ash Collection/

Disposal
FIGURE-2.12
TYPICAL FLOW DIAGRAM OF PROPOSED CPP
C2-37

Chapter-2
Project Description
The auxiliary steam for the power station is drawn from main steam line and after
pressure reduction and de-superheating is used for de-aeration, turbine gland
sealing, etc. Provision for steam supply to auxiliary steam system from cold
reheat piping through adequately sized pressure reducing and desuperheating
station will also be there.
The unit is also provided with HP and LP bypass system for quick hot start and
boiler stability with large load rejections.
Description of major plant and equipment of a typical 3 x 300 MW power plant
unit is given hereunder.
Steam Generator & Accessories
The steam generator, which would be designed for firing coal/fuel gas would be
radiant, reheat, natural circulation, single drum, balanced draft. Semi-outdoor
type of unit rated to deliver 980 TPH of superheated steam at 175 bar, 540OC
when supplied with feed water at a temperature of 253.7C at economiser inlet.
The steam generator would be provided with six mill type coal pulverisers along
with individual raw coal feeders and coal bunkers. The boiler would be designed
to handle and burn HFO/LSHS oil as secondary fuel up to 22.5% MCR capacity for
startup and low-load operation.
The boiler would also be provided with light diesel oil (LDO) firing system having
a capacity corresponding to about 7.5% MCR for warm-up during start-up. The
required fuel oil and light fuel oil pressurizing units and fuel oil heating equipment
will be provided. High energy arc (HEA) ignitors would be provided to ignite LDO
as well as fuel oil.
The steam generator would consist of a corner fired water cooled furnace, radiant
and convection super heaters, reheaters, economiser, regenerative air heaters,
steam coil air heaters etc. The draft plant comprises axial forced draft fans, radial
induced draft fans and radial type primary air fans.
Electrostatic precipitators and fly ash hoppers with associated ducting/piping
would be provided for the collection of ash. Soot blowers would be provided at
strategic locations and would be designed for sequential automatic operation from
the unit control room.
Turbine Generator Unit
The steam turbine would be rated for 300 MW maximum continuous output, at
the generator terminals, with throttle steam conditions of 175 bar pressure and
540OC superheat, 540OC reheat temperature, 0.1033 kg/cm2 back pressure and
all feed water "heaters in service. The steam turbine would be a reheat,
condensing unit tandem compound with a double exhaust LP turbine.
The generator stator would be water cooled. The rotor would be suitable for
conventional hydrogen cooling, with the windings cooled with hydrogen circulated
by fans mounted on the rotor.
C2-38

Chapter-2
Project Description
The turbine-generator would be complete with all accessories customarily

supplied by turbine-generator manufacturer such as protective system, lube and
control oil systems, seal oil system. Jacking oil system, seal steam system,
turbine drain system. HP/LP bypass system. Electro-hydraulic control system,
automatic turbine run-up system. on-line automatic turbine test system and
turbine supervisory instrumentation. The turbine-generator would also have all
necessary indicating and control devices to permit the unit to be placed on
turning gear, to be rolled, accelerated and synchronized automatically from the
control room. Other turbine-generator accessories would include an oil
purification unit with transfer pumps and clean and dirty oil storage tanks of
adequate capacity.
The condensing plant would comprise double-pass surface type condenser of
single shell construction. The condenser would be mounted on spring supports
designed to take up its own and turbine exhaust hood thermal expansion, Priming
vacuum pump would be provided to create vacuum in the condenser during startup and main vacuum pumps to remove the non-condensible gases liberated
during normal operation.
Mechanical vacuum pumps are motor driven and unlike steam jet air ejectors do
not require any motive steam. Vacuum pumps are therefore more convenient for
unit start-up and are preferred.
The unit would be provided with a HP-LP bypass system:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
To prevent a boiler trip in the event of a full export load throw-off and
maintain the unit in operation at house load;
To prevent a boiler trip following a turbine trip and enable quick restart of
the turbo set;
To minimise warm restart deviations of the unit after a trip;
To conserve condensate during start-up; and
To facilitate quick load changes in both directions without affecting the
steam generator operation during start-up.
2.9.3 Coal Handling System

The coal handling system envisaged would be capable of handling coal and would
consist of two streams of conveyors, one operating and the second one being
standby. Adequate coal stock facilities along with reclaiming equipment, coal
crushing and screening plant, facilities for removal of extraneous matter and
suitable metering facilities will be provided.
2.9.4 Ash Handling System
The bottom ash handling system envisages evacuation and transportation to a
storage silo in dry for onward disposal by trucks to the ash disposal area. Fly ash
is proposed to be evacuated by pneumatic (pressurized) system. Provisions will
also be made to convey the fly ash in high concentrated slurry form to ash
disposal area.
C2-39

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.9.5 Condenser Cooling and Make-up Water

Raw water will be pumped from plant storage pond to a raw water pond in the
power plant area. For the condenser cooling, closed circuit re-circulation system
with clarified water make-up using natural/induced draft, cooling towers has been
proposed. The make-up water for the condenser cooling would be drawn from the
clarifier by gravity and discharged into the common cooling towers. From the
cooling tower, cold water would be pumped to the condenser through individual
MS conduits.
2.10
Cement Plant
It is proposed to setup a cement plant of 6.0 MTPA capacity within the integrated
steel plant complex for utilizing the BF slag and the fly ash to the maximum
extent.
It is proposed to use BF slag in the cement plant after granulation of the same.
The annual quantity of PSC generation will be 3.0 MTPA. The remaining quantity
of BF slag will be used for making railway ballast and used as aggregate for road
building.
As a major initiative to utilize fly ash for cement making, it is also proposed to
utilize part of the total fly ash generated for cement making. The annual quantity
of PPC generation will be 3.0 MTPA. The rest of the fly ash will be sold to other
cement manufacturers or group companies for cement making and also for
manufacturing brick and building plant.
The major units in cement manufacturing are mentioned as under:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
2.11
Raw material storage;

Crushing;
Quality check;
Grinding;
Blending;
Pre-heating;
Calcination;
Cooling;
Clinker storage;
Cement milling; and
Packaging and transportation.
Raw Material Requirement and Sources

Iron ore lumps, iron ore fines, non-coking coal, coking coal, limestone, dolomite,
manganese ore and quartzite are the major raw materials required for the steel
plant. Map showing the plant layout township and railway siding is shown in
Figure-2.13.
C2-40

Chapter-2
Project Description
FIGURE-2.13
MAP SHOWING THE PLANT LAYOUT TOWNSHIP AND RAILWAY SIDING
C2-41

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.11.1 Raw Material Requirement

The net and dry annual requirement of various raw materials and their sources is
given in Table-2.1212.
TABLE-2.12
ANNUAL RAW MATERIALS (WET AND DRY BASIS) REQUIREMENT
Sr.
No
1
Iron ore fines for

beneficiation plant
Iron ore lumps
3
4
5
6

Dolomite (BF grade)
Quartzite
Limestone (SMS
grade)
Dolomite (SMS
grade)
Coking coal
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Raw Material
Coking coal
Non-coking coal for
PCI - gross
Thermal coal
Bentonite
Ferro alloy
Limestone (cement
grade)
Source
Quantity
in TPA
Captive mine (Ankua) /

other mines in
Jharkhand
Latitude and Longitude
of Ankua:
2201344.34 N to
2201720.50N
8501435.08E to
8501716.66 E
Captive mine(s)
(Ankua) / other mines
in Jharkhand
Madhya Pradesh
Madhya Pradesh
Jharkhand
Satna Maihar
/Imported
Madhya Pradesh
/Imported
Captive mine (Rohne)
Latitude and Longitude:
2304430N to
2304745 N 8501600E
to 8501945 E
Imported
29,000,000
Mode of
Transportation
to Site
Rail
900,000
Rail
1,300,000
1,100,000
140,000
1,600,000
Rail
Rail
Road
Rail /Road
700,000
Rail /Road
5,520,000
Rail
4,800,000
2,300,000
Rail
Rail
3,000,000
400,000
200,000
6,000,000
Rail
Rail /Road
Road
Rail /Road
Captive mines
Jharkhand
Jharkhand
Jharkhand
Iron Ore
The estimated requirement of total iron ore lumps and fines is 29.0 MTPA. Iron
ore fines generated in the mines will be used in the sinter plants and pellet plants
which will be installed inside the plant boundary for production of sinter and pellet
and charging the same in the proposed blast furnaces.
JSW Steel Limited has been alloted Ankua iron ore mine (2201344.34 N to
2201720.50N 8501435.08E to 8501716.66 N) in Jharkhand which has a
12
List raw material required as per ToR-18
C2-42

Chapter-2
Project Description
mineable reserve of about 211 MT of iron ore. The expert appraisal committee
(EAC) has recommended Environmental clearance of Ankua iron ore mine. A copy
of the minutes of meeting of expert appraisal committee for Ankua iron ore mine
is given in Annexure-X13.
The requirement of iron ore of the plant will be served mostly from Ankua mine.
The iron ore lump is proposed to be met from captive mine / other mines in this
region. Hence, keeping in view the availability of iron ore deposits in this region,
the following tentative analysis of iron ore have been considered, as given in
Table-2.13. These characteristics will be achieved with ore beneficiation.
TABLE-2.13
TYPICAL CHEMICAL PROPERTIES OF IRON ORE
Parameters
Fe
SiO2
Al2O3
LOI
Percentage (%)
64.0
2.50
2.60
3.0
Coal
Generally for coke making, metallurgical coal of different grades is used in blend.
Availability of low ash coking coal of desired quality in this country is limited.
Hence, it has been envisaged that major requirement of metallurgical blast
furnace coal for the proposed steel plant will be met through imports. The
possible sources of supply of metallurgical coal are Australia and China, while
South Africa and Indonesia are the possible sources for BF injection coal. The
indigenous coal blocks of semi coking coal, which may be available, will be
developed for blending with the imported coking coal.
Coking Coal
The requirement of coking coal is about 8.7 MTPA, out of which 4.8 MTPA shall be
imported for blending with coal from Rohne coal block. JSW has been allocated
the Rohne coal block (2304430N to 2304745N 8501600E to 8501945E) and
the copy of the allocation letter is given in Annexure-X14. The Indian coking coal
is proposed to be sourced from Rohne coal block in Jharkhand and other linkages.
JSW has a share of about 69.07% in the Rohne coal block. The entire coal from
Rohne block is proposed to be washed in coal washery for coal upgradation. The
tentative analysis of imported and indigenous coking coal is mentioned in Table2.14.
In the latest development, the Honble Supreme Court Order dated 24.09.2014,
in addition to other coal blocks, Rohne Coal block allocated to Rohne Coal
Company Pvt Ltd (JV Company) has been de-allocated. However, JSW is in the
process of bidding through e-auction to meet our coal requirement for end use
plant.
13
14
Iron ore from captive mine (JSW Ankua Iron ore mine) linkage documents as per ToR-4
Coal from captive coal mine (Rohne coal mine) linkage documents as per ToR-4
C2-43

Chapter-2
Project Description
TABLE-2.14
TYPICAL CHEMICAL PROPERTIES OF COKING COAL
Parameters
Moisture
Ash
Volatile matter %
Sulphur content %
Percentage (%)
Indigenous Coking Coal
Imported Coking Coal
~ 5.0-7.0
6.0-8.0 (max)
21-30
7-9 (max)
21-27
24-26
0.65-0.75
0.55-0.60
It is proposed to blend imported and indigenous coal in the ratio of about 55:45.
The entire coal quantity is proposed to be transported through rail.
Coal for PCI
The non-coking or PCI coal requirement for the blast furnace is about 1.6 MTPA
and it is about 2.3 MTPA allowing for washing and handling losses. The PCI coal
required for the blast furnace for pulverized coal injection through the tuyres. The
ash content of the injected coal is normally lower than that of the coke for the
most efficient coal dust injection operation. The tentative analysis of PCI coal is
mentioned in Table-2.15.
TABLE-2.15
TYPICAL CHEMICAL PROPERTIES OF PCI COAL
Parameters
Fixed carbon (dry, ash free basis)
Volatile matter
Ash (dry basis)
Total moisture
CV of coal
Size of coal
Percentage (%)
59-68
20-30
10-12
15% maximum
7000 kcal/kg (approx.)
<100 mm
Thermal Coal for Captive Power Plant
A captive power plant of 900 MW (3X300 MW) is envisaged at 10.0 MTPA

production capacity for which 3.0 MTPA of thermal coal and 2.0 MTPA of
middlings generated from the captive coal washery of the plant will be required.
Thermal coal would be replaced by the surplus plant gas to the extent possible.
Limestone
Limestone will be required as flux material both for iron making and for steel
making. In case of steel making, limestone will be calcined in a captive calcination
plant and the calcined product, namely burnt lime, will be used in steel melt shop
for production of liquid steel.
For iron making, it has been proposed to use high-grade low alumina limestone
through sinter route. Hence, for a better burden preparation, the requirement of
limestone for sinter making has been planned to be met from captive sources /
Satna or Niwer- Jukehi area of central India.
Low silica, dense and hard SMS grade limestone is available in Jaisalmer area of
Rajasthan, but the cost of transportation of this limestone to eastern India is very
C2-44

Chapter-2
Project Description
high and exploitation is limited due to environmental problem. Hence, for quality
reasons, sustained supply and cost effectiveness, the entire requirement of SMS
grade limestone may be met through import. This shall be considered during
detailed engineering stage of the plant. High-grade low silica limestone is
produced and traded by several countries namely Japan, Vietnam, Thailand,
Middle-East etc.
The desirable chemical analysis of BF grade limestone and typical analysis of
imported limestone is given in Table-2.16.
TABLE-2.16
DESIRABLE CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF LIMESTONE
Parameters
Percentage (%)
BF Grade Limestone
SMS Grade Limestone
3.61
0.43
0.60
0.20
50.74
54.54
1.91
0.91
SiO2
Al2O3
CaO
MgO
Quartzite
It has been proposed to use quartzite in the blast furnace. Known occurrences of
quartzite of high grade are reported from almost all over Jharkhand. Hence, it has
been proposed to procure quartzite from Jharkhand State. A typical analysis of
quartzite from this area is given in Table-2.17.
TABLE-2.17
TYPICAL CHEMICAL PROPERTIES OF QUARTZITE
Parameters
SiO2
Al2O3
Percentage (%)
96.5
0.60
Steel Scrap
Steel scrap / DRI shall be used as coolant in the BOF converter. It is proposed to
utilize DRI from DR Plant and in-plant generation of scrap for this purpose. Some
DRI would also be charged into the blast furnaces.
2.11.2 Petrological and Chemical Analysis of the Raw Materials
The analysis of raw materials with respect to major elements and trace elements
Results of petrological and chemical analysis of major raw materials as per ToR-18, ToR-19, ToR-20 and
ToR-21
15
C2-45

Chapter-2
Project Description
TABLE-2.18(A)
MAJOR ELEMENTS & TRACE ELEMENTS IN RAW MATERIALS
Sr. No.
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters
Composition
Loss on ignition, %
Silica (as SiO2), %
Aluminium (as Al2O3), %
Iron (as Fe2O3), %
Calcium (as CaO), %
Magnesium (as MgO), %
Sodium (as Na2O), %
Phosphorous P, %
Trace Elements / Metals
Arsenic (As), g/g
Cadmium (Cd), g/g
Chromium (Cr), g/g
Copper (Cu), g/g
Iron (Fe), g/g
Lead (Pb), g/g
Mercury (Hg), g/g
Manganese (Mn), g/g
Nickel (Ni), g/g
Zinc (Zn), g/g
Iron Ore
2.87
8.89
4.52
58.17
0.056
0.002
0.005
0.03
2.02
28.60
1.52
BDL
0.079
0.024
0.319
TABLE-2.18(B)
Sr. No.
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters
Composition
Loss on ignition, %
Silica (as SiO2), %
Iron (as Fe2O3), %
Calcium (as CaO), %
Sodium (as Na2O), %
Phosphorous P, %
Arsenic (As), g/g
Cadmium (Cd), g/g
Chromium (Cr), g/g
Copper (Cu), g/g
Iron (Fe), g/g
Lead (Pb), g/g
Mercury (Hg), g/g
Manganese (Mn), g/g
Nickel (Ni), g/g
Zinc (Zn), g/g
Lime Stone
39.80
7.30
1.48
1.14
47.20
2.70
0.017
0.019
BDL
0.017
0.055
0.062
0.45
0.008
BDL
BDL
0.011
0.07
C2-46

Chapter-2
Project Description
TABLE-2.18(C)
Sr. No.
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters
Composition
Loss on ignition, %
Silica (as SiO2), %
Iron (as Fe2O3), %
Calcium (as CaO), %
Sodium (as Na2O), %
Phosphorous P, %
Arsenic (As), g/g
Cadmium (Cd), g/g
Chromium (Cr), g/g
Copper (Cu), g/g
Iron (Fe), g/g
Lead (Pb), g/g
Mercury (Hg), g/g
Manganese (Mn), g/g
Nickel (Ni), g/g
Zinc (Zn), g/g
Dolomite (10-30 mm)

40.71
9.40
2.17
1.15
26.78
18.50
0.012
0.580
BDL
0.013
0.09
0.02
0.31
0.011
BDL
BDL
0.002
0.22
TABLE-2.18(D)
Sr. No.
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters
Composition
Loss on ignition, %
Silica (as SiO2), %
Iron (as Fe2O3), %
Calcium (as CaO), %
Sodium (as Na2O), %
Phosphorous P, %
Arsenic (As), g/g
Cadmium (Cd), g/g
Chromium (Cr), g/g
Copper (Cu), g/g
Iron (Fe), g/g
Lead (Pb), g/g
Mercury (Hg), g/g
Manganese (Mn), g/g
Nickel (Ni), g/g
Zinc (Zn), g/g
Quartzite (15-30 mm)

99.2
0.2
0.5
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
BDL
BDL
BDL
0.002
0.001
0.005
-
C2-47

Chapter-2
Project Description
TABLE-2.18(E)
Sr. No.
A
1
2
3
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
C
1
2
3
4
5
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2.12
Parameters
Coal
(Australia)
Total moisture, %
CSN
HGI
Proximate Analysis (Air dry basis)
Inherent moisture, %
Ash, %
Volatile matter, %
Fixed carbon, %
Sulphur, %
Calorific value, kcal/kg
Petrographic Analysis
Vitrinite %
Semi vitrinite %
Inertinite %
Exinite %
Mineral matter %
Ash Analysis (Air dry basis)
SiO2 %
Al2O3 %
Fe2O3 %
CaO %
MgO %
Mn3O4 %
TiO2 %
P2O5 %
SO3 %
Na2O %
K2 O %
Arsenic (As), g/g
Cadmium (Cd), g/g
Chromium (Cr), g/g
Copper (Cu), g/g
Iron (Fe), g/g
Lead (Pb), g/g
Mercury (Hg), g/g
Manganese (Mn), g/g
Nickel (Ni), g/g
Zinc (Zn), g/g
Non-Coking Coal
(Indian)
9.1
1.5
70
10.7
1
58
1.5
12.3
26
53
0.35
7563
3.2
9.5
27.2
60.1
0.57
6887
41
2
46
4
7
39
2
49
3
7
53.26
23.68
12.65
3.72
0.04
0.70
1.14
1.05
0.32
0.12
1.04
50.4
32.8
7.7
2.8
0.9
0.5
1.4
1.4
1.2
0.4
0.6
0.008
0.007
0.152
0.026
2
0.016
BDL
0.03
0.042
0.037
0.005
0.065
0.145
0.032
1.5
BDL
BDL
0.065
0.034
0.029
Raw Material Handling
2.12.1 Unloading of Materials

The plant will receive all major raw materials by rail. The iron ore at Ankua in
Jharkhand will be transported by rail to Barenda plant site. The coal at Rohne will
be dispatched to Barenda by railways. Two separate unloading stations, one for
C2-48

Chapter-2
Project Description
ore and flux and the other for coal will be constructed at the railway-unloading
yard. The incoming gross quantity of major raw materials and the number of days
of storage in the plant are given in Table-2.19.
TABLE-2.19
QUANTITIES AND STORAGE CAPACITIES OF MAJOR RAW MATERIALS
Sr. No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Incoming Quantity of Major Raw

Materials (Net & Dry)
Iron ore fines for beneficiation plant
Iron ore lumps
Dolomite (BF grade)
Quartzite
Limestone (SMS grade)
Dolomite (SMS grade)
Coking coal
Coking coal
Non-coking coal for PCI gross
Thermal coal
Bentonite
Ferro alloy
Limestone (cement grade)
Net Quantity
(TPA)
29,000,000
900,000
1,300,000
1,100,000
140,000
1,600,000
700,000
5,520,000
4,800,000
2,300,000
3,000,000
400,000
200,000
6,000,000
Storage Capacity
(days)
7
7
7
20
20
7
15
15
15
15
20
15
15
15
All raw materials unloaded in loading stations will be transported to ore and flux
storage yard by belt conveyors. Non-uniformity and bunching factors have been
considered for indigenous and imported raw materials respectively. As per this,
the total number of rakes works out to be about 50 per day at 10.0 MTPA
capacity.
2.13
Utility Systems and Auxiliary Facilities
Oxygen
High purity oxygen (99.5%) will be required mainly for converter blowing and
heating, cutting operation in the continuous casters and other general purpose
usage. Low purity oxygen (95%) will be required for enrichment of cold blast to
the blast furnace stoves. The hourly requirement of oxygen for the steel plant is
1,95,900 Nm3/hr.
Oxygen plant of required capacity will be installed by third party on build, own
and operate (BOO) basis and purchased by JSW steel at predetermined price.
Such an agreement is already under place at JSWs existing plant at Vijaynagar
Karnataka, the same will be followed.
Nitrogen
Nitrogen will be mainly required for converter gas cleaning, cooling of the blast
furnace bell-less top, gas line purging and general purpose applications. The
hourly requirement of nitrogen is 1,22,800 Nm3/hr.
C2-49

Chapter-2
Project Description
Compressed Air System
Compressed air will be required for pneumatic devices, instrumentation & control,
general purpose usage, pneumatic conveying, bag filter pulsing etc.
Requirement of compressed air has been estimated as 2,58,070 Nm3/hr. This will
be provided by central compressed air station with piped compressed air to the
different consumption points.
Chilled Water System
Chilled water is required for air conditioning of control rooms, etc in various areas
of the steel plant. Two vapour compression type chilled water plants will be
provided. Water inlet and outlet temperatures of chiller plant will be maintained
at 16oC and 7C respectively.
Fuel System
The by-product gases (i.e. blast furnace gas, coke oven gas and converter gas)
will be utilized for heating and burning applications (BF stove heating, coke oven
under firing, sinter plant, rolling mill furnaces, etc.) of the steel plant. Available
gases after meeting the above applications will be utilized for steam and power
generation.
Blast furnace (BF) gas will be used mainly as fuel in stoves, sinter plant and
power plant. In addition to the above consumers, BF gas will also be used in
CDI, cast house runner drying and LRS. Semi-clean BF gas will be used for
pressure equalization BF top. BF gas will be distributed to the consumers through a
system of piping network, operating at a pressure of 800 mm WC (Approx). BF gas
will be stored in gas holders of 50,000 m3 each capacity and from there it will be
sent to different consumers in the plant. Coke oven gas will be stored in
50,000 m3 each gas holder, while LD gas shall be stored in a gas holders
having capacity of 50,000 m3 each. Mixed gas will be used mainly as fuel for
sinter plant, pellet plant, ladle pre-heating in SMS and plate mill. For sinter plant,
BF gas & CO gas will be mixed in proper ratio to get CV of 900 Kcal/Nm3 and for
ladle preheating BF gas & CO gas will be mixed in proper ratio to get CV of 2000
kcal/Nm3. Thus the by-product fuel gases viz. CO gas and BF gas will be used
judiciously as gaseous fuel in various units of plant. The surplus gases from BF &
coke oven will be used in the CPP for generation of power.
Plant Automation
It has been envisaged that Level-1 and Level-2 automation systems that will
come along with the various equipment/facilities, to provide process and
equipment level control including supervisory automation functions. In addition,
higher level computer system will be provided to cater to the needs for production
planning & control (PPC) as well as management information system (MIS) for
the whole plant.
C2-50

Chapter-2
Project Description
The centralized production planning and control system will provide overall and
area/shop wise production planning. This system will be interfaced to the
automation systems of various plant units through suitable gateways, to enable
downloading of production targets and uploading of production and consumption
figures. The management information system will provide necessary information
about the plant and other administrative functions.
Communication System
Telephone system will be provided for communication inside as well as outside

the plant. Telephone system will comprise one electronics private automatic
branch exchange (EPABX) of required line capacity and associated cable network
along with press-to-talk system, closed circuit television (CCTV), VHF wireless
system as required.
Repair and Maintenance Facilities
The plant repair and maintenance facilities will be centralized in a structural

building to take care of routine repair and periodical maintenance work. Major
repairing works involving machining, fabrication and assembly of heavy and
critical jobs of specialized nature are envisaged to be contracted to outside
agencies.
Warehouse
A central warehouse will be provided to keep spares of equipment, hardware and

consumables. For this purpose, a structural building has been envisaged. A part
of the building will be raised for easy manual loading and unloading of the
materials from trucks. Forklifts will be used for movement of materials inside the
stores building.
For storing various ferro-alloys and refractory, separate buildings have been
envisaged. Ferro-alloys will be received by road trucks in bags/boxes. Refractory
will be received in pellets and in bags.
Laboratory
To meet the analytical and testing needs of the proposed plant, laboratories as
mentioned below will be provided at different locations in the plant:
Sample preparation station;

Iron making laboratory;
SMS laboratory; and
Central laboratory.
Ancillary Facilities
Necessary ancillary facilities such as administrative building, canteen, car park,

cycle & scooter stand, first-aid station etc will be provided based on the
manpower requirement for the plant.
C2-51

Chapter-2
Project Description
Facilities for Labour Force16
During plant construction phase of the project, work force of about workers needs to
be deployed, which consists of skilled and un-skilled workers. All the workers will be
housed in labour colony, which will be located near the project site.
The colony which will be temporary in nature will have the following amenities:
1
2
3
4
5
Drinking water facility drinking water will be supplied through water

tankers/community taps;
Community kitchen will be provided for the workers;
Sanitation facilities will be constructed, which will include the adequate number
of separate toilets for men and women. The make shift treatment plant will be
installed and treated wastewater will be utilized in greenbelt development;
Bins will be installed to collect municipal waste from the colony;
Fuel (kerosene/LPG) will be supplied to the labours for cooking to prevent tree
felling.
Drainage and Sewerage System
Open type drain has been envisaged for the plant storm water drainage. The
drains will be laid generally by the side of the roads. Storm water run-off,
collected through arterial and trunk drain, will be discharged suitably for
minimum pollution.
Sanitary faecal sewage will be collected from the ablution blocks through pipeline
and the same will be connected to a sewage treatment plant. The effluent from
sewage treatment plant will be utilized for the development and maintenance of
greenery.
Roads
Adequate plant road system will be provided considering the types of vehicles and
the traffic volume. The road system will be designed to minimize cross movement
of vehicles. Adequate vehicle parking facilities and road weighbridges will be
provided.
Township17
The new township will be constructed to take care of the accommodation facilities
of the employees. Area for the township has been identified near Barenda.
The township is to serve a large steel plant of 10 MTPA capacity and CPP of 900
MW capacity and may have up to 9620 dwellings of various categories in about
300 acres of land. Adequate green belt/green cover will be developed in the
township.
The township will be located in the northeast direction to the plant and falls in the
cross-wind direction to the proposed plant site.
16
17
Facilities for labor as per ToR-66

Proposed town ship location as per ToR-17
C2-52

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.14
Environmental Effects
The proposed integrated steel plant would comprise various production
facilities/departments, such as raw materials handling, coke ovens, pellet plant,
sinter plant, lime calcining plant, blast furnace, DRI, BOF shop and rolling mills.
The inputs to the above facilities will comprise raw materials in process material,
along with water, fuel and power.
The major type of pollution from the power plant is gaseous emissions. In
addition, wastewater and solid waste will also be generated. In the proposed
cement plant, the main sources of air pollution will be the emissions from stacks
attached to raw meal grinding units, clinker burning, coal grinding and cement
grinding.
The sources and nature of pollution from the proposed plant and the types of
environmental pollution likely to occur are presented in Table-2.20.
TABLE-2.20
SOURCES AND NATURE OF POLLUTION
Facility/Department
Raw material yard
Beneficiation plant
Sinter plant & pellet
plant
Pollutants
Fugitive dusts
Dust
SO2, NOx, dust, heat and noise
Heat in cooling water
Coke oven
Type of Pollution
Air pollution
Air, water pollution
Air pollution
and noise pollution
Thermal pollution of water
bodies at the outfall
Air pollution
Blast furnace/DRI
PM, CO2, NOx, SO2, PAH and

heat
PM, VOC
Oil & grease, phenol, cyanide
Dust, SO2, NOx, heat, noise
Calcining plant
Heat, dust, SO2 & NOx
Air pollution, work zone air

pollution
Steel making shop

Rolling mills/ continuous
caster
Dust, NOx, heat

Heat, particulate dust, SO2,
NOx, noise
Suspended scales, traces of oil
and grease
Work zone air pollution

Air pollution and noise
pollution
Water pollution
Captive power plant
PM, SO2 & NOx, wastewater,

noise
Air,
noise
pollution
Heat in cooling water
Thermal pollution of water

bodies at the outfall
Air pollution
Cement plant
Fugitive dust
Work zone air pollution

Water pollution
Air pollution and noise
pollution
and
water
The quantities and the composition of the gaseous, liquid and solid waste that are
likely to be generated in the plant will be managed and treated such that their
final disposal into the environment meets all the statutory requirements and thus
the environmental impacts are minimized.
C2-53

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.15
Pollution Control Measures

The details of sources of pollution and their quantity, impact and mitigation
measures proposed to be incorporated into the project to meet the environmental
standards are described in the Chapter-4. The brief description of mitigation
measures are described in this section. The flow chart linking pollutants and
principal operations in an integrated steel plant is shown in Figure-2.14.
2.15.1 Air Pollution Control Measures
The raw material handling section would be provided with dust suppression
(DS)/dust extraction (DE) systems complete with bag filters/ESPs and
adequate stack height will be provided;
The principal air pollution control system for sinter & pellet plant would consist
of de-dusting and waste gas cleaning systems separately;
The coke oven gas generated in the coke ovens after by-product recovery
would be utilized as supplementary fuel for proposed steel plant complex;
The top gas coming out from the blast furnace would be cleaned by taking the
gas through BF gas cleaning device for separation of particulate before the
clean gas is recovered for meeting in-plant energy demand;
The stock house and cast house areas would be provided with proper DE/FE
systems complete with ESPs and stacks;
The LD gas generated in the SMS shop would be subjected to wet cleaning
before it is used as plant supplementary fuel;
There would be proper FE systems to capture any secondary fumes generated

during hot metal and liquid steel transfer points;
Dust emission from calcining plant would be controlled by bag filters;
Emissions from the mills would consist of particulates, SO 2, NOx and CO

generated from the reheating furnaces. The combustion system would
incorporate low NOx burner system and controlled combustion;
For the control of fugitive dust emission within and around the coal handling
units, dust extraction and suppression system will be provided. Dust
suppression system shall be installed at all the transfer points in coal handling
plant and coal stockyard;
All rotary equipment like fans, blowers, pumps & compressors, rolling mills
would be of low noise design. The grouting of this equipment will be made
free from vibrations. The work zone noise exposure of the operating personnel
would be avoided by remote operation from the control rooms;
C2-54

Chapter-2
Project Description
The fly ash will be conditioned with water spray to reduce fugitive dust during
loading and unloading operations;
The ash in the open trucks will be covered with tarpaulin to prevent flying of
the fine ash during transportation; and
Water sprinkling system will be provided in the ash disposal area to restrict
flying of fine ash due to wind.
2.15.2 Water Pollution Control Measures
The wastewater generated from the indirect cooling circuit would be routed
through the cooling tower and pressure filter for recycling purpose;
The wastewater generated from the coke ovens will be treated in a biooxidation plant to reduce the level of phenolic compounds, oil & grease and
cyanide. The treated wastewater will be reused in the system;
The wastewater from gas cleaning plants of blast furnace and steel melt shop
containing suspended solids will get clarified in the wastewater treatment
plant. The clarified water will be recycled to the waste gas cleaning units.
Similarly, the wastewater coming out from the continuous casting machine
will be treated to remove scales and oil and the treated water will be recycled
after cooling;
The ash disposal area will be lined with impervious lining to prevent seepage
of rain water from the disposal area in the ground and pollute ground water;
and
The sanitary wastewater will be treated in sewage treatment plant and the
treated water will be used for dust suppression and maintenance of greenbelt
development.
C2-55

Chapter-2
Project Description
LIME
STONE
Particulates
Nox, SO2
H 2 S Steam
SS, BOD
LIME BURINING
TRANSPORT
AND
STORAGE
Fugitive Dust
CRUSHING
Particulates, Noise
COAL
SS, BOD
NH 3 CN
Phenol
COOLING OR
GRANULATION
COOLING
CRUSHING
Slag
Hydrocarbons
Steam
Particulates
CO, NH 3 ,SO 2 ,
Nox, H2 S
SINTERING &
PELLETIZING
Particulates
IRON MAKING
Particulates CO, SO2, NOx, ZnO

Hydrocarbons
SS, BOD, NH 3 , Chlorides, Cyanides
Sulphates, Sludge
PRETREATMENT
SCRAP
Particulates
PREPARATION
Blast Furnace Slag

Particulates
CRUSHING
Sludge
STEEL MAKING
Noise
Particulates Zn, CO, SO , NOx, HF

2
Hydrocarbons
SS, BOD, Chlorides
LIQUID
STEEL
Steel Furnace Slag

Slag
Sludge
Legend
Particulates
SO , NOx, HF
2
CO
Hydrocarbons
Noise
SINTERING &
PELLETIZING
HOT METAL (MOLTEN

PIG IRON)
Particulates
ORE
LADLE
TREATMENT
CONTINUOUS
CASTING
Particulates, Noise
SS, Oils
Steam
Air Pollutant
Water Pollutant
Solid Waste
STEEL
PRODUCTION
FIGURE-2.14
FLOW CHART LINKING POLLUTANTS AND PRINCIPAL
OPERATIONS IN AN INTEGRATED STEEL PLANT
C2-56

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.15.3 Solid Waste Management

Major solid wastes generated from the proposed plant complex would include BF
slag, SMS slag, gas cleaning plant sludge, ESP/bag filter dust, refractory debris,
fly ash and bottom ash generated from power plant etc. The iron ore, coal and
other fines generated in the process would be recycled to the sinter plant. The
blast furnace slag would be granulated and sold as raw material to cement
manufacturing units. The SMS slag would be recovered in the waste recycling
plants (WRP) for separation of magnetic components. The ash would be utilized
for cement manufacturing to the possible extent. The rejects would be dumped in
a designated area.
2.15.4 Noise Pollution
The major sources of noise generation from the proposed plant are fixed plant
installations and external transport movements.
The common noise generating sources from the fixed plant installations are blast
furnace, screens, vibrators, and conveyors. Apart from these, another noise
generating source is DG set which will be generated occasionally.
However, fans are the major noise generating source but this will be enclosed in a
separate building. The adequate noise control measures will be adopted and work
zone noise levels will be controlled to less than 85 dB (A).
****
C2-57

Chapter-3
3.0
3.1
BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

Introduction
This chapter illustrates the description of the existing environmental status of the
study area with reference to the prominent environmental attributes. The study
area covers 10 km radius from project boundary. The existing environmental
setting is considered to adjudge the baseline environmental conditions, which are
described with respect to climate, hydrogeological aspects, atmospheric
conditions, water quality, soil quality, ecology, land use and socio-economic
profiles of people within the study area. The baseline studies are carried out for
three months, representing pre-monsoon season (i.e. March 2014 to May 2014)
in the various domains of environment.
EIA notification requires that 10 km radius area surrounding the project site shall
be covered under the study and the same is denoted as study area. As part of the
study, description of biological environment and human environment such as
environmental settings, demography & socio-economics, land-use/ land cover,
ecology & biodiversity have been carried out for entire 10 km radius. However, as
a universally accepted methodology of EIA studies, physical environmental
attributes such as ambient air quality, water quality, soil quality, noise levels,
physiography, hydrology, ecology, odour, solid waste generation have been
studied at selective locations representing rural/ residential land sensitive
locations including the densely populated areas, agricultural lands, forest lands
and other ecologically sensitive areas, if any falling within 10 km radius study
area.
This report incorporates the baseline data monitored for three months (March
2014May 2014) representing pre-monsoon season and secondary data collected
from various government and semi-government organizations.
3.2
Geology, Hydrogeology & Drainage
3.2.1 Regional Geology

The area is covered by 73 E quadrangle and forms part of the Chotanagpur
plateau where the main rock-types are granite, granite gneiss, augen gneiss and
migmatite, collectively known as Chotanagpur granite gneiss. Within these
granitic rocks, there are enclaves of metamorphic rocks, mostly with E-W trend
consisting of quartzites, mica shcists, crystalline limestone and calc-silicate rocks
and amphibolites. The metasediments occurring in the south viz., phyllites, mica
schists and quartzites, together with basic volcanic flows, are classified under iron
ore group. The other monor rock-types present are pegmatite and quartz veins,
meta-dolerite and meta-gabbro and laterite.
The general orientation of foliation in the rocks is E-W. Folds and lineations
mostly plunge lowly towards ENE. However, the rocks are involved in polybase
deformations which have brought about swings in the foliation and complex
geometric patterns of the structural elements. Metamorphically, the rocks
attained very high grades, as revealed by the formation of sillimanite and
anatectic melting of the metamorphic. Granite formation apparently took place in
two phases.
C3-1

Chapter-3
The precambrian shield was faulted by later earth movements to form roughly EW trough where the fresh water gondwana sediments were accumulated. These
include sandstone, shale and coal seams, which occur in chain of outliers in
gneissic terrain within the drainage area of the river Damodar and span from
Upper carboniferous (Talchir formation) to lower middle jurassic (Mahadeva
Formation). These are absent in the present study area. Regional stratigraphic
succession and geology based on quadrangle sheet 73E of Geological Survey of
India are presented in Figure-3.2.1.
Geology of the study area is dominated by granite gneiss of Chotanagpur group of
rocks with thin alluviual cover in the central and eastern part and mica schist in
the southern part. Bore wells drilled for drinking water supply by PHED in Barenda
village indicate that fractured granite gneiss extends up to a depth of 165.00 m.
Lithological section of a bore well drilled in Barenda is presented in Figure3.2.21.
3.2.2 Physiography2
The study area is the part of Chotanagpur plateau. Physiographically, the area is
characterized by varied landforms like high hill ranges, eroded valleys and
undulating land. Dumra pahar in the northeast and Bariburu pahar in the
northwest of the study area and hills and rides in the central part towards north
of proposed site and in the southern part of the study area are main hill ranges
partially covered mainly dense/scrub forest. The lower area lies covers major part
of the study area mainly created by river Subarnarekha and its tributaries. The
maximum elevation observed for hills areas is 538 m amsl and is at the
northwestern part of the study area namely Bariburu pahar. The lowest elevation
is 183 m amsl and is at the southeastern part of the study area. The general
slope of the land is towards southeast.
3.2.3 Drainage Pattern
The Subarnarekha is one of the longest east flowing inter-state river. It covers
large areas of Bihar and some parts of West Bengal and Odisha. The
Subarnarekha river originates near Nagri village in Ranchi district of Jharkhand at
an elevation of 600 m. The total length of the river is about 395 km. The principal
tributaries of the river are Kanchi, Kharkai, Karkari and Dulang.
Subarnarekha river is about 2.4 km from proposed project site towards northeast.
Raru nadi running northwest- southeast in the north and Kanchi nadi running
southwest-northeast from western part of the study area join Subarnarekha
towards north of proposed project site. Domra nadi flowing west-east along the
southern boundary of the proposed project site joins Subarnarekha towards
southeast of the project site. Major part of the study area has dendritic pattern
with a drainage density of 1.37 km/sq.km. The drainage in the area is controlled
by several small streamlets joining Raru nadi, Kanchi nadi, Domra nadi, Karru
nadi and Subarnarekha river. Distributories of right bank canal of Kanchi runs
southwest-northeast in the central part of the study area passing just outside the
proposed project site. Drainage map of the study area is presented in Figure3.2.3.
1
2
Lithological section of a bore well drilled in Barenda as per ToR-42

Topography of the project site as per ToR-8
C3-2

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.2.1
GEOLOGY OF THE STUDY AREA
C3-3

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.2.2
LITHOLOGICAL SECTION OF A BORE WELL
C3-4

Chapter-3
The estimated water requirement for the project is about 80 million gallons per
day (MGD) (132.7 MCM per annum), out of which 46.7 MGD (77.4 MCM per
annum) of water will be drawn from Subarnarekha river in the upstream and 33.3
MGD (55.3 MCM per annum) of water will be drawn from Chandil dam in the
downstream at about 45 km south from the proposed plant site.
The flow monitoring data indicates that the surface flow during 2000-2001 and
2005-2006 non-monsoon periods was below the requirement. Suitable
impounding arrangements in the form of a pickup weir or intake well at the river
source will have to be considered to meet the plant water requirement, along with
dedicated pipeline or open channel.
Chandil dam across Subarnarekha river is a composite dam which is 720.10 m
long and 56.5 m high with a gross storage of 1963 hm (1963 MCM) and live
storage of 1611 hm (1611 MCM) at Maximum Water Level (MWL)/Full Reservoir
Level (FRL) 192 m.
3.2.4 Hydrogeology
The hydrogeological studies have been carried out in the area to understand the
local geology, geomorphic features, drainage network, aquifer characteristics and
yield of water. Accordingly various components controlling the hydrogeological
regime of the study area have been studied. Detailed hydrogeological
investigations were carried out in the month of May 2014 for the study area is
presented in Figure-3.2.4. Detailed hydrogeology study report is enclosed in
Annexure-XI. The salient features are discussed below:
Nature of Occurrence of Groundwater
Groundwater systems are a result of the complex combination of different

lithological and structural types within an area that together constitute an aquifer
within which groundwater accumulates and moves. Rather than describing
individual lithologies and their tendencies to form aquifers or otherwise, it is
useful to describe the groundwater as one continuous across various lithological
types (Kulkarni and Deolankar, 1995).
The groundwater occurs in two types of aquifers. Weathered aquifer and fractured
aquifers. Thickness of weathered aquifers varies from 10-25 m in granite terrain.
In weathered aquifer, ground water occurs in unconfined condition while in
fractured aquifer, ground water occurs in semi confined to confined condition.
C3-5

Chapter-3
FIGURE -3.2.3
DRAINAGE MAP OF THE STUDY AREA
C3-6

Chapter-3
Source: CGWB District Profile Ranchi District
FIGURE 3.2.4
HYDROGEOLOGICAL MAP OF STUDY AREA
C3-7

Chapter-3
The shallow aquifers are being tapped through dug wells, dug-cum bore wells and
hand pumps. Many dug wells dry up during summer months. Hand pumps
generally tap first fracture zones and its depth is 30-40 m bgl. In granite gneiss
terrain, first fracture occurs between 50-70 m and second fracture is found
between 100-120 m depth. Discharge of bore wells varies between 10 to 30
m/hr in these areas. Third set of fracture can be found between 15-200 m bgl.
Discharge varies between 15 to 25 m/hr and drawdown varies between 20-25 m
bgl. Shallow and deep bore wells drilled in the study area are mainly for drinking
water purpose fitted with hand pumps and submersible pumps. The irrigated
agriculture is mainly rain, canal dependent with support irrigation from dug and
dug-cum bore wells.
Well inventory of 34 wells in 34 settlements was conducted in the study area
during the field visit. Mostly the groundwater is developed by way of dug wells
whose depth varies from 5.50 m to 16.90 m with diameter varying from 1.20 m
to 6.14 m. The depth to water level during pre-monsoon range from 3.30 m to
10.90 m bgl and the average water level is 7.00 m bgl. The depth to water during
post-monsoon range from 0.23 m to 6.93 m bgl and the average water level is
2.78 m bgl. The average fluctuation between pre and post-monsoon seasons is
4.23 m. Well inventory data is furnished in Table-3.2.1 and water level contours
are presented in Figure-3.2.5 and Figure-3.2.6.
C3-8
Chapter-3
TABLE-3.2.1
WELL INVENTORY IN STUDY AREA
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Well No
GW1
GW2
GW3
GW4
GW5
GW6
GW7
GW8
GW9
GW10
GW11
GW12
GW13
GW14
GW15
GW16
GW17
GW18
GW19
GW20
GW21
GW22
GW23
GW24
GW25
GW26
GW27
GW28
GW29
GW30
GW31
GW32
GW33
GW34
Village
Mango
Marangkiri
Dudni
Mankidih
Dangdung
Tunturi
Simali
Atna
Tilaipiri
Pilid
Pohardih
Jargordih
Adardih
Hartaidih
Kudm
Chumudih
Salukdih
Pandudih
Chukahatu
Hasardih
Jojopudi
Barudih
Dimbudih
Jamdih
Jhabri
Brididth
Baredih
Donadih
Sareyd
Jamudag
Jahedih
Baluwodih
Rangamati
Kurdhum
Lat
2311'56.2"N
2312'34.9"N
2311'25.2"N
2310'20.2"N
2312'07.8"N
2312'09.8"N
2310'44.9"N
2309'40.1"N
2308'48.1"N
2307'15.1"N
2308'33.5"N
2307'17.5"N
2307'18.5"N
2305'37.5"N
2305'21.4"N
2304'10.7"N
2306'56.5"N
2310'14.4"N
2310'15.1"N
2307'44.8"N
2306'36.7"N
2306'06.0"N
2308'16.3"N
2309'22.7"N
2316'40.0"N
2314'30.3"N
2310'44.8"N
2310'40.0"N
2312'30.3"N
2313'28.3"N
313'02.0"N
314'59.3"N
313'47.8"N
315'47.2"N
Long
8548'49.0"E
8550'58.9"E
8550'52.0"E
8551'39.0"E
8553'25.7"E
8553'10.3"E
8554'41.3"E
8555'05.8"E
8550'19.8"E
8551'35.2"E
8552'26.5"E
8553'35.5"E
8553'20.3"E
551'22.3"E
8549'44.0"E
8549'15.5"E
8549'53.8"E
8549'37.1"E
8547'58.8"E
8547'47.5"E
8547'00.7"E
8545'14.7"E
8543'44.0"E
8544'02.6"E
8548'29.1"E
8548'41.1"E
8546'27.8"E
8541'38.0"E
8543'26.2"E
8544'36.1"E
8545'23.8"E
8547'09.8"E
8552'33.7"E
8551'24.0"E
Well
Type
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Dug
Purpose
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Domestic
Total
Depth (m)
Dia
(m)
Lining
(Dug Well) (m)
8.70
12.02
10.12
9.93
12.96
9.61
9.11
10.60
12.00
16.90
11.20
10.80
11.60
12.80
10.70
8.12
5.50
11.90
10.15
9.40
8.60
5.80
6.10
10.00
9.30
6.95
7.80
8.79
9.20
9.90
12.05
9.80
11.50
10.00
3.00
1.60
1.58
3.60
1.70
2.40
2.10
2.98
2.20
1.60
4.00
2.90
3.50
1.40
3.55
3.00
1.25
2.10
1.90
1.20
1.80
2.45
1.40
3.10
3.50
6.08
6.14
2.10
3.20
2.80
1.70
2.70
2.60
3.30
8.70
12.02
10.12
9.93
12.96
9.61
9.83
10.60
12.00
16.90
11.20
10.80
11.60
12.80
10.70
8.12
5.50
11.90
10.15
9.40
8.60
5.80
6.10
10.00
9.30
6.95
7.80
8.79
9.20
9.90
12.05
9.80
10.50
10.50
Static Water Level (m)

PrePostMonsoon
Monsoon
5.90
2.10
9.72
5.60
6.83
3.21
7.44
4.52
10.85
6.93
7.61
4.72
6.80
3.11
6.95
3.15
6.50
3.10
10.90
6.23
9.10
4.50
7.90
3.20
7.05
3.05
9.30
5.10
6.30
2.90
4.82
1.90
3.80
1.50
8.30
4.15
8.90
4.50
8.20
3.70
5.05
2.10
3.30
1.35
4.49
1.90
6.90
2.12
6.70
2.76
5.45
1.60
3.70
0.40
5.92
1.53
6.90
0.23
6.40
0.60
7.85
0.90
6.90
0.50
9.10
1.10
6.38
0.30
Fluctuation
(m)
3.80
4.12
3.62
2.92
3.92
2.89
3.69
3.80
3.40
4.67
4.60
4.70
4.00
4.20
3.40
2.92
2.30
4.15
4.40
4.50
2.95
1.95
2.59
4.78
3.94
3.85
3.30
4.39
6.67
5.80
6.95
6.40
8.00
6.08
C3-9

Chapter-3
FIGURE -3.2.5
WATER LEVELS DURING PRE-MONSOON 2014
C3-10

Chapter-3
FIGURE3.2.6
WATER LEVELS DURING POST-MONSOON 2013
C3-11

Chapter-3
3.2.5 Movement of Ground Water

Ground water movement mainly takes place through the fractures and joints of
the crystalline rocks and the ground water is transmitted through the voids and
interstitial openings. In other words, movement of ground water is controlled by
the hydraulic conductivity of the aquifer and hydraulic gradient. The ground water
movement in granite gneiss is through fissures, fractures and joints. A review of
the topography and drainage pattern reveals that the general slope of the study
area is towards southeast. Based on the water level data (pre and post monsoon)
the ground water level contour maps have been prepared for the pre and post
monsoon periods.
The ground water table contours depicts that the ground water flow also follows
the topography and surface water flow direction and moves in southeast direction.
The hydraulic gradient near the proposed plant site is moderate and during both
seasons is observed as 4.83 m/km.
3.2.5.1 Aquifer Characteristics3
Ground water is stored in the open spaces and fractures within geologic materials
such as soil, sand and rock that occur beneath the land surface. Aquifers are the
geologic layers that are filled with water and that can transmit enough water to
supply a well under normal hydraulic gradients. Pumping tests are conducted to
determine the performance characteristics of a well and to determine the
hydraulic properties of the aquifer such as permeability and transmissivity. These
properties determine how easily water moves through the aquifer, how much
water is stored, and how efficiently it produces water. During an aquifer test, the
hydraulic head in the aquifer declines as the time of pumping increases. Analysis
of hydraulic head decline, or drawdown, allows for the estimation of aquifer
hydraulic properties. There are many pumping test solution methods but most
commonly used for different aquifers and conditions have some general
assumptions: a) aquifer extends radially and infinitely, b) single pumping well, c)
fully penetrating well (except for Neuman method).
Bore wells drilled for drinking water supply by PHED in Barenda village at distance
of 0.5 to 1.0 km from the proposed project site indicate that fractured granite
gneiss extends upto a depth of 165.00 m. Discharge from these wells vary
between 15.0 to 25.00 m/hr.
In absence of bore wells to carryout pumping for at least medium duration
pumping test within 2 km area of the proposed plant site, a pumping test was
carried out on a large diameter open dug well near the northern boundary of the
proposed plant site. The dug well is 7.30 m deep and yielding 11.70 m/hr. The
pump test was conducted for 220 minutes till steady state conditions were
achieved. After stopping the pump, recovery was continued. Since an interference
in the water level was observed due to pumping from the nearby well, recovery
measurements could not be continued till the steady state.
Presence of aquifers within 1 km of project as per ToR-40
C3-12

Chapter-3
Papadopulos devised a method that accounts for well bore storage for a large
diameter well that fully penetrates a confined aquifer (Kruseman and de Ridder,
1990). Using the Jacob correction factor, this method can also be applied to
unconfined aquifers. The aquifer test data was analyzed using Large Diameter
Well Papadopulos and Cooper, 1967, which provided good fits. Type curves
were generated by the software and were both automatically and manually
matched to the observed drawdown data. Type curves were generated for
numerous combinations of parameters in order to assess and obtain the
combination of parameters which provided the best match with the observed
data. Pumping test data, analysis and aquifer parameters derived are presented
in Table-3.2.24 & Table-3.2.3, Figure-3.2.7 & Figure-3.2.8 and Table-3.2.4
respectively. The Transmissivity was found as 56.51 m/day while storage
coefficient was found as 0.00026 and hydraulic conductivity was found as 0.083
m/day.
TABLE-3.2.2
PUMPING TEST DATA IN LARGE DIA DUG WELL
Date: 05.05.2014
Time of Test Start: 09.16 AM
Measuring Elevation: 0.30 m agl
Lat: 2311'52.5"
Time Since Pump Started
(Min)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
200
220
Well Depth: 7.30 m

Well Dia: 6.16 m
Static Water Level: 2.62 m
Long: 8548'44.8"
WL Below MP
in m
2.63
2.65
2.72
2.80
2.86
2.92
3.00
3.03
3.06
3.10
3.21
3.28
3.42
3.50
3.65
3.85
3.87
3.95
4.00
4.09
4.15
4.25
4.45
4.53
4.60
Draw Down
(s) in m
0.01
0.02
0.07
0.08
0.06
0.06
0.08
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.11
0.07
0.14
0.08
0.15
0.20
0.02
0.08
0.05
0.09
0.06
0.10
0.20
0.08
0.07
Discharge
(Q) in Lps
3.33 lps
3.5 lps
3.5 lps
3.5 lps
Pumping data and recovery data as per ToR-41
C3-13

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.2.3
RECOVERY DATA IN LARGE DIA DUG WELL
Time Since
Pump Started
(min)
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
235
240
245
250
260
270
280
300
320
370
420
Time Since Pump Stopped

min
T/T'
WI Below
Mp In M
Residual
Drawdown (S)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
80
100
150
200
221.00
111.00
74.33
56.00
45.00
37.67
32.43
28.50
25.44
23.00
15.67
12.00
9.80
8.33
6.50
5.40
4.67
3.75
3.20
2.47
2.10
4.59
4.57
4.53
4.50
4.49
4.45
4.43
4.40
4.42
4.40
4.39
4.38
4.36
4.35
4.35
4.35
4.32
4.55
4.52
4.57
4.54
1.97
1.95
1.91
1.88
1.87
1.83
1.81
1.78
1.80
1.78
1.77
1.76
1.74
1.73
1.73
1.73
1.70
1.93
1.90
1.95
1.92
TABLE-3.2.4
PUMPING TEST DATA ANALYSIS
Sr.No.
1
2
3
Aquifer Parameter
Transmissivity - m/day
Storage coefficient
Hydraulic conductivity - m/day
Value
56.51
0.00026
0.083
C3-14

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.2.7
PUMPING TEST DATA PLOT
FIGURE-3.2.8
PUMPING TEST DATA ANALYSIS
C3-15

Chapter-3
3.3
Land Use Studies

Studies on land use aspects of eco-system play important roles for identifying
sensitive issues, if any, and taking appropriate actions for maintaining the
ecological balance in the development of the region.
3.3.1 Objectives
The objectives of land use studies are:
To determine the present land use pattern;
To analyze the impacts on land use due to plant activities in the study area;
and
To give recommendations for optimizing the future land use pattern vis-a-vis
growth of plant activities in the study area and its associated impacts.
3.3.2 Methodology
For the study of land use, literature review of various secondary sources such as
district census handbooks, regional maps regarding topography, zoning
settlement, industry, forest etc., were taken. The data was collected from various
sources like district census handbook, revenue records, state and central
government offices and Survey of India (SOI) topo sheets and also through
primary field surveys.
3.3.3 Land use Based on Secondary Data
Based on the census report, 10 km radial distance around this plant boundary
has been considered in the study. These areas were studied in detail to get the
idea of land use pattern in the study area. The land use census data 2011 is yet
to be published and the land use pattern of the study area as per 2001 census is
presented in Table-3.3.1. The village wise land use data is presented in
Annexure-XII.
TABLE-3.3.1
LAND USE PATTERN IN THE STUDY AREA
Sr.No
1
2
3
4
Particulars of Land use

Forest land
Land under cultivation
a) Irrigation land
b) Un irrigated land
Cultivable waste land
Land not available for
cultivation
Total Area
0-3 km
467
3-7 km
809
7-10 km
1276
0-10 km
2552
Area %
4.89
1668
7905
1184
1293
10129
1908
1513
14336
2535
4474
32369
5627
8.57
62.02
10.78
1211
12435
2384
16523
3579
23239
7173
52195
13.74
100.00
Source: District Census Hand Book 2001
C3-16

Chapter-3
Forest
The revenue forest land under the study area consists 2552 ha (4.89%) of the
total geographic area.
Land under Cultivation
Altogether 36843 ha cultivable land (irrigated and un-irrigated) was observed in

the study area. The irrigated land admeasures to 4474 ha which works out to be
8.57% of total study area. The un-irrigated land admeasures about 32369 ha and
works out to about 62.02% of the total study area.
Cultivable Waste
This land includes that land, which was cultivated sometime back and left vacant
during the past 5 years in succession. Such lands may either be fallows or
covered with shrubs, which are not put to any use. Lands under thatching grass,
bamboo bushes, other grooves useful for fuel etc., and all grazing lands and
village common lands are also included in this category. The study area comprises
about 10.78% cultivable wastelands.
Land not available for Cultivation
The land not available for cultivation is 13.74% of the total study area, which
includes area of land with shrub, land without shrub, quarry, mining area, rocky/
stony and barren area.
3.3.4 Land Use Based on Satellite Imagery
Present land use based on remote sensing satellite imageries were collected and
interpreted for the 10 km radius study area for analyzing the land use pattern of
the study area. Based on the satellite data, land use/ land cover maps have been
prepared.
Land use/Land Cover Classification System
The present land use / land cover maps were prepared based on the classification
system of National standards. For explanation for each of the land use category
the details as given in Table-3.3.2 are considered.
TABLE-3.3.2
LAND USE/LAND COVER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
Sr. No.
1
Level-1
Built-up Land
Agriculture Land
Forest
Level-2
Town/cities
Villages
Institution/industry/godown etc
Plotted area/layout
Crop land
Plantations
Fallow
Evergreen/semi evergreen
C3-17

Chapter-3
Sr. No.
Level-1
Wastelands
Water Bodies
Others
Level-2
Deciduous
Forest plantation
Rocky/stony waste
Land with /without shrubs
Saline/sandy & marshy/swampy
River/stream
Lake/reservoir/tanks
Orchard/Other plantation
Shifting cultivation
Salt pans, snow covered/glacial
Barren/vacant land
Data Requirements
IRS-P6 Resourcesat-II L4FMX of 5 m resolution was acquired for 03rd February,

2014 and was used for the mapping and interpretation. Besides, other collateral
data as available in the form of maps, charts, census records, other reports and
especially topographical survey of India maps are used. In addition to this,
ground truth survey was also conducted to verify and confirm the ground
features.
Methodology
The methodology adopted for preparation of land use/ land cover thematic map is
monoscopic visual interpretation of geocoded scenes of IRS-P6 Resourcesat-II
L4FMX and field observations are taken. The various steps involved in the study
are preparatory field work, field survey and post field work.
Pre-field Interpretation of Satellite Data
The False Colour Composite (FCC) of IRS-P6 Resourcesat-II L4FMX satellite data
are used for pre-field interpretation work. Taking the help of topo sheets, geology,
geo-morphology and by using the image elements the features are identified and
delineated the boundaries roughly. Each feature is identified on image by their
image elements like tone, texture, colour, shape, size, pattern and association. A
tentative legend in terms of land cover and land use, physiography and erosion
was formulated. The sample areas for field check are selected covering all the
physiography, land use / land cover feature cum image characteristics.
a)
b)
c)
Softwares used
ERDAS Imagine for image processing/rectification/geocoding;
AutoCAD for data preparation after visual interpretation of the image; and
Arc View for image/landuse presentation.
Ground Truth Collection
Both toposheets and imagery were taken for field verification and a transverse
plan using existing road network was made to cover as many representative
sample areas as possible to observe the broad land use features and to adjust the
sample areas according to field conditions. Detailed field observations and
investigations were carried out and noted the landuse features on the imagery.
C3-18

Chapter-3
Post Field Work
The base maps of the study area were prepared, with the help of survey of india
toposheet. Preliminary interpreted land use and the land cover features
boundaries from IRS-P6 false colour composite were modified in light of field
information and the final thematic details were transferred onto the base maps.
The final interpreted and classified thematic map was catrographed. The
cartographic map was coloured with standard colour coding and detailed
description of feature with standard symbols. All the classes noted and marked by
the standard legend on the map.
Final Output
The final output would be the landuse/land cover map and numerals were given
different colour code for each category as shown in map. Area estimation of all
features of land use/land cover categories was noted. The thematic map and land
use pattern is shown in Figure-3.3.15 and Figure-3.3.26. The details of the land
use in 10 km radial study area are given in Table-3.3.3. Satellite image and land
use pattern of the project site is shown in Figure-3.3.3. Digital elevation model
of the study area (10 km radius) is shown in Figure-3.3.47.
TABLE-3.3.3(A)
LAND USE BREAK UP OF THE STUDY AREA
Sr.No.
Land Use
Built-up Land/Other Development

1
Settlements
2
Industry/Institutional Land
Forest
3
Dense/Open Forest
4
Degraded Scrub Land
5
Forest Blanks
Agricultural land
6
Plantation
7
Irrigated/Double Crop
8
Single Crop
9
Fallow Land
Waste Land
10
Land with Scrub
11
Land without Scrub
12
Rocky/Stony/Barren Land
13
Quary/Mining Land
Water Body
14
Stream/River
15
Tank/Reservoir
Total
Area
(ha)
Percentage
(%)
2788
20
5.63
0.04
1340
948
220
2.70
1.91
0.44
15
1702
29966
2483
0.03
3.43
60.47
5.01
3787
2990
678
29
7.64
6.03
1.38
0.06
1591
996
49555
3.21
2.01
100.00
Satellite image of the study area as per ToR-7

Present land use in 10 km radial study area as per ToR-7
7 Digital elevation model of the study area as per ToR-6
5
6
C3-19

Chapter-3
Observations
The land use pattern of the study area indicates forest land of 5.06 % in the study
area and the land under agriculture is about 68.95%.
TABLE-3.3.3(B)
LAND USE BREAK UP OF THE PROJECT AREA
S.No.
Land Use
Area
(ha)
Percentage
(%)
0
0
0.00
0.00
0
0
0
0.00
0.00
0.00
0
16
1327
111
0.00
1.04
86.28
7.22
0
44
5
0
0.00
2.86
0.33
0.00
16
19
1538
1.04
1.24
100
Built-up Land/Other Development

1
Settlements
2
Industry/Institutional Land
Forest
3
Dense/Open Forest
4
Degraded Scrub Land
5
Forest Blanks
Agricultural land
6
Plantation
7
Irrigated/Double Crop
8
Single Crop
9
Fallow Land
Waste Land
10
Land with Scrub
11
Land without Scrub
12
Rocky/Stony/Barren Land
13
Quary/Mining Land
Water Body
14
Stream
15
Tank/Reservoir
Total
C3-20

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.3.1
THEMATIC MAP OF STUDY AREA
C3-21

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.3.2
LAND USE PATTERN BASED ON SATELLITE DATA
C3-22

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.3.3
SATELLITE IMAGE AND LAND USE PATTERN OF THE PROJECT SITE
C3-23

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.3.4
DIGITAL ELEVATION MODEL
C3-24

Chapter-3
3.4
Soil Characteristics
It is essential to determine the potentiality of soil in the area and to identify the
impacts of urbanization on soil quality. Accordingly, the soil quality assessment
has been carried out.
3.4.1 Data Generation

For studying soil quality in the region, sampling locations were selected to assess
the existing soil conditions in and around the plant area representing various land
use conditions. The physical, chemical and heavy metal concentrations were
determined. The samples were collected by ramming a core-cutter into the soil up
to 90 cm depth.
Ten locations were identified within the study area for soil sampling. At each
location, soil samples were collected from three different depths viz. 30 cm, 60
cm and 90 cm below the surface and homogenized. The homogenized samples
were analyzed for physical and chemical characteristics. Samples were taken once
during the study period.
The details of the sampling locations are given in Table-3.4.1 and are shown in
Figure-3.4.1. The soil quality for all the locations during the study period is
tabulated in Table-3.4.2(A) and (B). The results are compared with standard
classification as given in Table-3.4.3.
TABLE-3.4.1
DETAILS OF SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS
Code
No
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
Location
Project Site
Sayatanr village
Garadih village
Sonahatu village
Jaherdih village
Barenda village
Marangkiri village
Mahuldih village
Tilaipiri village
Hesadih village
Distance
from Plant Boundary
(km)
4.2
6.5
8.5
4.8
0.5
2.5
2.9
1.0
3.0
Direction w.r.t
Proposed Plant
Boundary
WSW
W
WNW
NW
N
NE
E
SE
SSW
C3-25

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.4.1
SOIL QUALITY SAMPLING LOCATIONS
C3-26

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.4.2 (A)
SOIL ANALYSIS RESULTS
Sr. No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Parameters
pH
Conductivity
Texture
UOM
-s/cm
--
Sand
Silt
Clay
Bulk Density
Exchangeable Calcium as Ca
Exchangeable Magnesium as Mg
Exchangeable Sodium as Na
Available Potassium as K
Available Phosphorous as P
Available Nitrogen as N
Organic Matter
Organic Carbon
Water soluble Chloride as Cl
Water soluble Sulphate as SO4
Sodium Absorption Ratio
Aluminium
Total Iron
Manganese
Boron
Zinc
%
%
%
g/cc
mg/kg
mg/kg
mg/kg
Kg/ha
Kg/ha
Kg/ha
%
mg/kg
mg/kg
%
-%
%
mg/kg
mg/kg
mg/kg
S1
7.8
295.0
Sandy
Clay
38.0
20.0
42.0
1.0
2810
1280
320
457.3
46.4
162.8
0.72
0.42
251.4
78.9
0.56
0.62
1.21
183.0
43.2
62.4
S2
8.0
367.0
Sandy
Clay
35.0
33.0
32.0
1.1
2400
1160
280
392.2
49.5
188.7
0.52
0.30
285.0
71.6
0.53
0.89
1.78
192.0
50.2
72.6
S3
7.5
425.0
Sandy
Clay
42.0
19.0
39.0
1.0
2475
1240
275
372.0
52.8
204.6
0.93
0.54
231.0
96.4
0.50
0.32
1.15
210.9
38.6
84.8
S4
7.6
382.0
Sandy
Clay
34.0
26.0
40.0
1.0
3260
1820
430
387.5
42.3
176.7
0.83
0.48
245.7
87.3
0.67
0.60
1.32
243.0
50.2
74.2
S5
7.8
298.0
Sandy
Clay
42.0
13.0
45.0
1.2
3050
1625
325
427.8
42.0
189.7
0.69
0.40
319.9
88.5
0.53
0.48
1.24
380.2
70.4
105.6
TABLE-3.4.2(B)
SOIL ANALYSIS RESULTS
Sr. No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Parameters
pH
Conductivity
Texture
UOM
-s/cm
--
Sand
Silt
Clay
Bulk Density
Exchangeable Calcium as Ca
Exchangeable Magnesium as Mg
Exchangeable Sodium as Na
Available Potassium as K
Available Phosphorous
Available Nitrogen as N
Organic Matter
Organic Carbon
Water soluble chloride as Cl
Water soluble sulphate as SO4
Sodium Absorption Ratio
Aluminium
Total iron
Manganese
Boron
Zinc
%
%
%
g/cc
mg/kg
mg/kg
mg/kg
Kg/ha
Kg/ha
Kg/ha
%
mg/kg
mg/kg
%
-%
%
mg/kg
mg/kg
mg/kg
S6
7.7
424.0
Sandy
Clay
36.0
24.0
40.0
1.2
2430
1200
290
418.5
50.1
202.0
0.61
0.35
211.6
73.2
0.54
0.52
1.04
264.0
72.4
68.9
S7
7.6
392.0
Sandy
Clay
32.0
30.0
38.0
1.1
3260
1820
340
409.2
66.6
191.0
0.41
0.24
320.5
97.6
0.54
0.75
1.50
328.9
45.2
83.2
S8
7.8
378.0
Sandy
Clay
35.0
23.0
42.0
1.0
3290
1800
375
379.8
61.9
164.3
0.56
0.32
202.3
88.1
0.58
0.68
1.36
482.6
50.6
68.9
S9
7.7
268.0
Sandy
Clay
38.0
22.0
40.0
1.1
2945
1375
315
341.0
58.4
230.2
0.82
0.48
230.4
68.5
0.54
0.83
1.66
372.4
52.4
84.3
S10
8.1
480.0
Sandy
Clay
32.0
20.0
48.0
1.0
4280
2125
475
379.8
59.5
193.8
0.93
0.54
363.7
87.5
0.66
0.90
1.80
689.8
78.3
110.0
C3-27

Chapter-3
3.4.2 Baseline Soil Status

Based on the results obtained from the different soil samples, it is evident that
the soil samples are predominantly sandy clay type. The pH of the soil samples
ranged from 7.5 to 8.1 indicating the moderately alkaline nature. The electrical
conductance of the soil samples varied from 268 S/cm to 480 S/cm. Based on
the conductivity results it can be concluded that the ionic content of the soil
samples are within the limits that does not harm the crops. Bulk densities of the
soil samples varied from 1.0 to 1.2 g/cc.
Available nitrogen in the soil samples varied from 162.8 kg/ha to 230.2 kg/ha and
indicating moderate to high category in the soil samples. Available phosphorus in
the region varied from 42.0 kg/ha to 66.6 kg/ha revealing the distribution from
medium to on average sufficient quantities.
Available potassium levels in the samples ranged from 341.0 kg/ha to 457.3
kg/ha, which indicates more than sufficient quantity in the soil samples.
Soluble chlorides in the region varied from 202.3 mg/kg to 363.7 mg/kg. Organic
matter concentrations ranged from 0.41% to 0.93%. Organic carbon
concentrations ranged from 0.24% to 0.54%.
Based on the above, the soil in the region has been found to have sufficient
quantities of nutrients for crop growth.
TABLE-3.4.3
STANDARD SOIL CLASSIFICATION
Sr. No.
1
Soil Test
pH
Salinity Electrical Conductivity

(mmhos/cm)
(1 ppm = 640 mmho/cm)
Organic Carbon
Nitrogen (kg/ha)
Classification
<4.5 Extremely acidic
4.51- 5.50 Very strongly acidic
5.51-6.0 moderately acidic
6.01-6.50 slightly acidic
6.51-7.30 Neutral
7.31-7.80 slightly alkaline
7.81-8.50 moderately alkaline
8.51-9.0 strongly alkaline
9.01 very strongly alkaline
Upto 1.00 Average
1.01-2.00 harmful to germination
2.01-3.00 harmful to crops (sensitive
to salts)
Upto 0.2: very less
0.21-0.4: less
0.41-0.5 medium,
0.51-0.8: on an average sufficient
0.81-1.00: sufficient
>1.0 more than sufficient
Upto 50 very less
51-100 less
101-150 good
151-300 Better
>300 sufficient
C3-28

Chapter-3
Sr. No.
5
Soil Test
Phosphorus (kg/ha)
Classification
Upto 15 very less
16-30 less
31-50 medium,
51-65 on an average sufficient
66-80 sufficient
>80 more than sufficient
0 -120 very less
120-180 less
181-240 medium
241-300 average
301-360 better
>360 more than sufficient
Potash (kg/ha)
Source: Handbook of Agriculture, ICAR, New Delhi
3.5
Meteorology
The meteorological data recorded during the study period is very useful for proper
interpretation of the baseline information regarding plant site area and
surrounding area for air quality dispersion. Historical data on meteorological
parameters will also play an important role in identifying the general
meteorological regime of the region.
The year may broadly be divided into four seasons:
3.5.1
Winter season
Pre-monsoon season
Monsoon season
Post-monsoon season
:
:
:
:
December to February
March to May
June to September
October to November
Methodology
The methodology adopted for monitoring surface observations is as per the
standard norms laid down by Bureau of Indian Standards (IS : 8829) and India
Meteorological Department (IMD). On-site monitoring was undertaken for various
meteorological variables in order to generate the site-specific data. Data was
collected every hour continuously from 1st March 2014 to 31st May 2014.
3.5.1.1 Methodology of Data Generation

The Central Monitoring Station (CMS) equipped with continuous weather
monitoring equipment was installed on top of a building near to the project site at
a height of 10 m above ground level to record wind speed, direction, relative
humidity and temperature. The meteorological monitoring station was located in
such a way that it is free from any obstructions and cloud cover was recorded by
visual observation. Rainfall was monitored by rain gauge.
3.5.1.2 Sources of Information
Secondary information on meteorological conditions has been collected from the
nearest IMD station at Ranchi. The available meteorological data of IMD, Ranchi
station has been collected for the period 1991-2000 and analyzed.
C3-29

Chapter-3
IMD data from Ranchi has been collected for pressure, temperature, relative
humidity, rainfall, evaporation, wind speed and direction. The data at IMD is
usually measured twice a day viz., at 0830 and 1730 hr.
3.5.2
Presentation of Data
3.5.2.1Meteorological Data Recorded at IMD, Ranchi

The meteorological data was collected from the IMD - Ranchi, which is the nearest
IMD station to the project site. The data collected from IMD includes wind speed,
wind direction (recorded in sixteen directions), temperature, relative humidity,
atmospheric pressure; rainfall and cloud cover over a period of 10 years from the
year 2001 to 2010. The monthly maximum, minimum and average values are
collected for all the parameters except wind speed and direction. All these
parameters are recorded twice a day viz at 0830 and 1730 hours. The collected
data is tabulated in Table-3.5.1.
3.5.2.2 Meteorological Data Generated at Site
The meteorological parameters have been recorded on hourly basis during the
study period from 1st March 2014 to 31st May 2014 and the parameters recorded
at site includes wind speed, wind direction (from 0 to 360 degrees), temperature,
relative humidity, atmospheric pressure, rainfall and cloud cover over.
3.5.3 Synthesis of Data on Climatic Conditions
3.5.3.1Analysis of the Data Recorded at IMD - Ranchi
1] Temperature
The winter season starts from December and continues till the end of February,
the maximum temperature was 26.20C and the minimum temperature was 9.70C.
Both the night and day temperatures increase rapidly during the onset of the premonsoon season from March to May. During pre-monsoon season, the mean
maximum temperature (May) was observed to be 38.20C with the mean minimum
temperature (March) was 16.90C. The mean maximum temperature in the
monsoon season was observed to be 34.40C in the month of June whereas the
mean minimum temperature was observed to be 21.70C in the month of
September. By the end of August, the day temperatures increase slightly, with
the mean maximum temperature at 28.80C in the month of October and the night
temperature decreases with the mean minimum temperature at 12.6 0C in the
month of November. The monthly variations of temperature are presented in
Table-3.5.1.
2] Relative Humidity
The air is generally humid in this region during the monsoon season when the
relative humidity at 0830 hr was observed with a maximum of 87% and a
minimum of 68%. Similarly, at 1730 hr, the relative humidity was observed with
a maximum 84% and minimum of 63%. Generally, the weather during other
C3-30

Chapter-3
seasons was observed to be dry. The monthly variations in the relative humidity
are presented in Table-3.5.1.
3] Atmospheric Pressure
The average pressure level was found to be in the range of 928.1 to 942.3 mb at
0830 hr and 924.8 mb to 939.8 mb at 1730 hr. It can be seen from the data that
not much variations are observed in the average atmospheric pressure levels. The
pressure levels are found to be fairly consistent over the region. The monthly
variations in the pressure levels are presented in Table-3.5.1.
TABLE-3.5.1
CLIMATOLOGICAL DATA
STATION: IMD, RANCHI
Month
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
Atmospheric
Pressure (mb)
0830
1730
942.3
941.0
938.7
935.9
932.5
928.6
928.1
929.4
933.5
937.9
941.1
941.9
939.8
937.8
934.9
931.1
928.6
924.8
925.1
928.9
930.1
935.7
939.3
938.6
Temperature
(0C)
Mean
Mean
Max
Min
23.8
9.8
26.2
12.1
31.3
16.9
36.3
21.3
38.2
24.3
34.4
24.2
29.4
22.5
29.1
22.2
29.5
21.7
28.8
18.3
26.0
12.6
23.5
9.7
Relative
Humidity (%)
0830
1730
63
56
42
37
46
68
87
87
84
73
56
60
52
42
32
27
34
63
83
84
83
69
54
50
Total Rainfall
Rainfall
(mm)
24.5
38.5
27.9
21.9
48.9
200.6
358.4
351.6
251.9
108.9
17.6
4.2
1454.9
4] Rainfall
The average annual rainfall based on the 10 year IMD data, was observed to be
1454.9 mm. The monsoon sets in the month of June and continues till September
and sometime extends upto mid October. The maximum amount of rainfall (358.4
mm) occurs in the month of July. The maximum number of rainy days was also
observed in the month of July. Monthly variations in the rainfall are given in
Table-3.5.1.
5] Cloud Cover
During the winter and the pre-monsoon seasons, it was observed that the skies
were generally very clear. In the post-monsoon season, generally light clouds
were observed in the evenings, with clear mornings. During the monsoon season,
both in the mornings and evenings, the skies were found to be generally clouded.
C3-31

Chapter-3
6] Wind Speed/Direction
Generally, light to moderate winds prevail throughout the year. Winds were light
and moderate particularly during the morning hours, while during the afternoon
hours the winds were stronger. The seasonal and annual windrose patterns are
shown in Figure-3.5.2 to 3.5.4.
3.5.3.2 Observations on Primary Data
The site specific data is presented in Table-3.5.28 and discussed below:
TABLE-3.5.2
SUMMARY OF THE METEOROLOGICAL DATA GENERATED AT SITE
Month
March 2014
April 2014
May 2014
Range
Temperature (0C)
Max
Min
40.5
16.6
42.5
20.5
43.4
21.0
16.6-43.4
Relative Humidity (%)

Max
Min
38.4
29.5
36.1
30.8
35.3
32.4
29.5-38.4
Rainfall
(mm)
16
Nil
Nil
16
1] Temperature
Maximum temperature of 43.4oC and minimum temperature of 16.60C was
recorded during the study period. Maximum temperature was observed during
May and the minimum temperature was observed during March in the study
period.
2] Relative Humidity
During the period of observation the relative humidity recorded ranged from
29.5% to 38.4%. Maximum humidity was observed during the month of March.
3] Rainfall
Rainfall was observed to be 16 mm during March and no rainfall during April and
May.
4] Cloud Cover
The clear skies were observed mostly during the study period.
5] Wind Speed/Direction
The wind roses for the study period representing pre-monsoon season is shown in
Figure-3.5.5. A review of the wind rose diagram shows that predominant winds
are mostly from NW followed by SW and WNW direction. Calm condition prevailed
for 7.8% of the total time.
Site-specific micro meterological data for the study period as per ToR-27 and ToR-29
C3-32

Chapter-3
3.5.3.3 Comments
The India Meteorological Department (IMD) records the data at two times a day viz.
0830 hr and 1730 hr while the site specific data has been recorded at an hourly
interval. On comparison of site specific data generated for study period vis--vis the
IMD data, slight variations were found. The following observations are brought out:
The temperature recorded on site when compared vis--vis the IMD data, slight
variations were found. The maximum and minimum temperatures recorded at site
during study period were 43.40C and 16.6oC, whereas the maximum and minimum
temperature recorded at IMD, Ranchi for the same pre-monsoon season are 38.2oC
and 16.9oC respectively.
The relative humidity was observed to range from 29.5% to 38.4% during the
study period whereas according to IMD, Ranchi data the relative humidity was
observed to range from 27% to 46%. The variation could be because of the fact
that the RH values considered for the site are actual values while the range of IMD,
Ranchi data represents the average values over 10 years.
The data generated at continuous monitoring station near project site when
compared with the data recorded at IMD, it can be observed that the data
generated at the site is broadly compatible with regional meteorology, except
minor variations as described above.
The variations can be attributed to distance between two stations, different
altitudes of monitoring stations, monitoring frequency and the topographical
features between the two stations.
3.5.4 Site Specific Upper Air Data9
SODAR was operated continuously from 1st May to 30th May 2014. This is a final
report prepared based on one month data. Data generation remained almost
continuous throughout this period using power backup system.
The hourly echograms obtained for a total of about 688 hours in 30 days have
been analyzed to obtain mixing heights. Graphical representation of mixing height
has been shown in Figure-3.5.1. A detailed sodar study report is enclosed in
Annexure-XIII.
Determination of atmospheric inversion level (Upper air data) as per ToR-32
C3-33

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.5.1
AVERAGE MIXING HEIGHT
Mixing Height
The mixing height during day time has been observed more than 1000 m
throughout the period of observation. Peak mixing Height for the study period 1st
May to 30th May month is 3065 m.
i) Nocturnal Inversion Period
The period of nocturnal inversion is from 20:00 hrs in the evening to 06:00 hrs in
the morning. The mixing height during nocturnal inversion period in month of May
125 to 357 m.
ii) Early Morning Rising Inversion Layer
The nocturnal inversion layer starts rising at 0800 hrs with the rising of the sun.
It continues to rise till 1000 hrs. The fumigation hours are from 08:00 hrs to
10:00 hrs.
iii) Day Time Convective Mixing Layer
Day time connective structures start forming noon after sunrise under the rising
layer. After 0900 hrs they come in full bloom and rise to height a more than 1000
m. The convective structures start decreasing in the afternoon and disappear
around 19:00 hrs.
iv) Evening Transition Period
The evening transition period is between 18:00 hrs to 19:00 hrs. During this
period the connective structure drop off and the inversion starts forming.
C3-34

N 3.2%
NN
E1
.2%
10.7% S
N 5.0%
NN
E2
.2%
15.5% S
N 5.7%
NN
E0
.6%
SS
W
3.7
%
SS
W
11.3% S
3.6
%
SS
W
3.3
%
6.0% S
17-30 HRS
MONSOON
17-30 HRS
PRE MONSOON
5%
SCALE
5%
SCALE
ES
E3
.8%
%
.5
11
SS
W
SW
6%
4.
2.3
%
W
WS
E 11.5%
SE
%
.2
11
7%
7.
C-4.1%
6.5% W
%
2.2
E
N
.7%
E1
EN
.2%
E1
SS
SE
.6%
E0
SS
ES
E2
.4%
E 7.2%
ES
E1
.8%
7%
5.
W
NN
W
NN
.0%
E1
EN
WN
W
E 7.3%
W
WS
SW
%
2.3
W
N
%
2.6
3%
6.
3%
5.
.2%
E2
EN
08-30 HRS
MONSOON
%
.2
10
W
N
%
1.0
SW
4.0
%
E
N
0%
7.
SE
%
.8
20
C-1.5%
6.4% W
W
WS
E
N
.8%
E1
SS
%
.0
30
WN
W
%
5.0
6%
5.
SW
08-30 HRS
PRE MONSOON
16.
4%
C-5.0%
10.9% W
SE
.3%
E0
SS
%
5.0
WN
W
E 2.7%
ES
E1
.4%
W
WS
W
NN
C-10.1%
%
1.5
W
NN
.3%
E0
EN
9.6% W
%
.4
17
E
N
5.5
%
3%
3.
W
N
%
2.3
W
N
WN
W
8%
6.
%
.3
12
6.6
%
N 3.6%
NN
E0
.7%
Chapter-3
SPEED CALM
SPEED CALM
1
11
19
>19 Km/hr
11
19
>19 Km/hr
FIGURE-3.5.2
WIND ROSE - PRE-MONSOON AND MONSOON (IMD- RANCHI)
C3-35

N 8.9%
SS
W
17-30 HRS
POST MONSOON
SW
NN
E2
.0%
N 12.5%
ES
E2
.3%
17-30 HRS
WINTER
5%
SCALE
W
WS
7%
2.
2.0% S
1.0% S
SS
W
5%
5.
1.0
2%
7.
.6%
E0
EN
C-7.2%
E 5.1%
2.3% W
SE
1.0
WN
W
2%
4.
SE
.3%
E0
SS
ES
E2
.5%
%
E0
SS
1.
.5%
E1
EN
E 7.5%
C-10.0%
W
WS
SW
5%
0%
8.2
SS
W
2.0% W
NN
E3
.5%
WN
W
%
.0
14
W
NN
W
NN
08-30 HRS
WINTER
%
7.7
7.5
N 17.0%
%
.5
21
4.0
1.3
%
08-30 HRS
POST MONSOON
0.7
0%
2.5% S
%
.0
34
5.
3%
1.
SE
.3%
E0
SS
SW
WN
W
6%
3.
.7%
E0
EN
6.4% W
C-32.9%
E 3.0%
ES
W
E0
S
W
.3%
%
1.4
W
S
7%
.
3
0%
1.
SE
.5%
E0
SS
SS
W
.5%
E0
EN
E 4.5%
5.0% W
C-18.5%
ES
W
E
1.0
WS
%
%
1.0
NN
E2
.0%
6.7
3.3% S
NN
E8
.0%
W
NN
WN
W
5%
%
6.8
%
.5
11
W
N
W
NN
3.5
%
.4
17
W
N
7.5
%
.5
16
N 13.0%
Chapter-3
5%
SCALE
SPEED CALM
SPEED CALM
1
11
19
>19 Km/hr
11
19
>19 Km/hr
FIGURE-3.5.3
WIND ROSE POST-MONSOON AND WINTER (IMD- RANCHI)
C3-36

WN
W
%
11
.9
%
6.
3%
E
8.0% S
2.0
7%
3.
.7%
SS
W
W
WS
E0
SS
.0%
E1
EN
C-17.0%
E 4.3%
ESE
1.2
%
8.0% W
%
3.4
NN
E3
W
NN
5.6
.0%
4.5
%
.4
12
N 7.1%
Chapter-3
WN
W
5.0% S
SS
W
%
4%
6.
1.8
4%
2.8
%
5.
ESE
.6%
S
W
W
WS
E0
SS
%
1.0
.2%
E1
EN
E 7.9%
C-6.0%
4.4% W
8.
5%
W
NN
%
5.0
8.1
N 10.0%
NN
E2
.0%
%
.9
23
08-30 HRS
ANNUAL
17-30 HRS
ANNUAL
5%
SCALE
SPEED CALM
1
11
19
>19 Km/hr
FIGURE-3.5.4
WIND ROSE-ANNUAL (IMD- RANCHI)
C3-37

Chapter-3
N
W
1.0
%
NN
E1
.5%
.7%
W2
NN
N 4.7%
%
.1
19
WN
W1
NE
3%
4.
E1
EN
C-7.8%
W 6.2%
ES
E2
.6%
.1%
SS
W3
9%
4.
.3%
5%
SCALE
SPEED
SE
E1
%
.8
11
S 9.7%
SW
E 4.3%
SS
.4
W3
WS
.6%
CALM
1.0
11
19
>19
Km/hr
FIGURE-3.5.5
SITE SPECIFIC WIND ROSE- (PRE-MONSOON 2014)
C3-38

Chapter-3
3.6
Ambient Air Quality10

The ambient air quality with respect to the study zone of 10 km distance around the
proposed plant boundary forms the baseline information. The prime objective of the
baseline air quality study was to assess the existing air quality of the area. This will
also be useful for assessing the conformity to standards of the ambient air quality
during the project operations.
This section describes the selection of sampling locations, methodology adopted for
sampling, analytical techniques and frequency of sampling. The ambient air quality
was monitored at locations in and around the proposed plant. The air quality
monitoring was conducted as per revised NAAQ standards 2009.
3.6.1
Methodology adopted for Air Quality Survey

The baseline status of the ambient air quality has been assessed through a
scientifically designed ambient air quality monitoring network. The design of
monitoring network in the air quality surveillance program has been based on the
following considerations:
3.6.2
Meteorological conditions on synoptic scale;

The methodology for conducting the baseline environmental survey and
selection of sampling locations considered the guidelines given in the EIA
manual of the MoEF;
Topography of the study area;
Representatives of regional background air quality for obtaining baseline status;
and
Representatives of likely impact areas.
Sampling and Analytical Techniques

The air samples were analyzed as per standard methods specified by Central
Pollution Control Board (CPCB), IS: 5184 and American Public Health Association
(APHA).
3.6.2.1 Frequency and Parameters for Sampling

Ambient air quality monitoring was carried out at a frequency of two days per
week at each location representing pre-monsoon season. The baseline data of air
environment was generated for the following parameters:
10
Particulate Matter (PM10);

Particulate Matter (PM2.5);
Sulphur dioxide (SO2);
Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx);
Carbon Monoxide (CO);
Ozone (O3);
Ammonia (NH3);
Nickel (Ni);
Benzene(C6H6);
Base line ambient air quality data as per ToR-30
C3-39

Chapter-3
Arsenic (As);
Lead (Pb);
Benzo Pyrene (BAP); and
Poly-aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH).
3.6.2.2 Duration of Sampling

The sampling duration for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NO2, NH3, C6H6, BaP, Pb, Ni, PAH and As
was twenty-four hourly continuous samples per day and CO and O3 was sampled for
8 hrs continuous thrice a day. This is to allow a comparison with the present revised
standards mentioned in the latest Gazette notification of the Central Pollution
Control Board (CPCB) (November 16, 2009).
Ambient air quality monitoring (AAQM) stations were set up at ten locations with
due consideration to the above mentioned points. Table-3.6.1 gives the details of
environmental setting around each monitoring station. The location of the selected
stations with reference to the proposed plant boundary is given Table-3.6.1 and
shown in Figure-3.6.1.
TABLE-3.6.1
AIR QUALITY SAMPLING LOCATIONS
Station
Code
Name of the
Station
AAQ1
AAQ2
Project site
Sayatanr village
Distance from
the Boundary of
Plant Site (km)
4.2
AAQ3
Sonahatu village
8.9
AAQ4
Sigid village
3.6
NW
AAQ5
Barenda village
0.5
AAQ6
Marangkiri village
2.5
NE
AAQ7
Mankidih village
2.9
AAQ8
Tilapiri village
1.1
SE
AAQ9
Adardih village
8.0
SE
AAQ10
Hesadih village
3.0
SSW
Direction w.r.t.
the Boundary of
Plant Site
WSW
Environmental
Setting
Rural
Cross wind
(Rural/Residential)
Up wind
(Rural/Residential)
Cross wind
(Rural/Residential)
Cross wind
(Rural/Residential)
Cross wind
(Rural/Residential)
Down wind
(Rural/Residential)
Cross wind
(Rural/Residential)
Down wind
(Rural/Residential)
Cross wind
(Rural/Residential)
C3-40

Chapter-3
E
N
.7%
4.
3%
.5%
W2
NN
WN
W1
1.0
%
N 4.7%
19
.1
%
NN
E1
NW
.6%
E1
EN
C-7.8%
W 6.2%
E 4.3%
ESE
SE
E1
4.
S 9.7%
11
.8
%
SS
W3
2.6
%
9%
.3%
.1%
3.4
SS
W
WS
5%
SCALE
SPEED
CALM
FIGURE-3.6.1
AIR QUALITY SAMPLING LOCATIONS
1.0
11
19
>19
Km/hr
C3-41

Chapter-3
3.6.3
Presentation of Primary Data Baseline Air Quality

Various statistical parameters like 98th percentile, average, maximum and minimum
values have been computed from the observed raw data for all the AAQ monitoring
stations. The summary of these results for pre-monsoon season is presented in
Table-3.6.211. Characterization of RSPM are given in Table-3.6.312.
The results of monitoring carried out for three months are presented in AnnexureXIV. These are compared with the standards prescribed by the Central Pollution
Control Board (CPCB) for rural/residential zone.
Summary of Observations
The results of the monitored data indicate that the ambient air quality of the region
in general is in conformity with respect to rural/residential norms of the National
Ambient Air Quality Standards of CPCB, with present level of activities.
11
12
1]
PM10: The maximum value for PM10 is observed at Hesadih village (AAQ10),
as 52.7 g/m3 with the minimum value observed at Barenda village (AAQ5),
as 37.0 g/m3 during the study period.
2]
PM2.5: The maximum value for PM2.5 is observed at Marangkiri village

(AAQ6) and Mankidih village (AAQ7) station, as 25.9 g/m3 with the
minimum value observed at Sayatanr village (AAQ2) station as 19.1 g/m3
during the study period.
3]
SO2: The maximum value for SO2 is observed to be 12.2 g/m3 at Hesadih
village (AAQ10) station with the minimum value observed at Sayatanr
village (AAQ2) station as 9.3 g/m3 respectively during the study period.
4]
NOx: The maximum value for NOx is observed at Project site (AAQ1)
station, as 16.0 g/m3 with the minimum value observed at Project site
(AAQ1) station as 11.5 g/m3 during the study period.
5]
CO: The maximum value for CO is observed at Project site (AAQ1) and
Mankidih village (AAQ7), as 371 g/m3 with the minimum value observed at
Plant site (AAQ1) station as 200 g/m3 during the study period.
6]
O3: The maximum value for O3 is observed at Sigid village (AAQ4), as 7.1
g/m3 with the minimum value observed at Sonahatu village (AAQ3) station
as 2.3 g/m3 during the study period.
7]
Lead (Pb): Lead concentrations were observed <0.05 ng/m3 in all the
sampling locations.
8]
Arsenic (As): Arsenic values in all the locations are observed to be less
than 0.2 ng/m3.
One season data for gaseous emissions as per ToR-387

Results for analysis of PAH, Benzene souble fraction and RSPM Characterstics as per ToR-31
C3-42

Chapter-3
9]
Nickel (Ni): Nickel values in all the locations are observed to be less
than0.1 ng/m3.
10]
Ammonia (NH3): Ammonia concentration observed in all the locations is

less than 20.0 g/m3.
11]
Poly-aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH): PAH concentration in all the

locations was found to be <0.0022 ng/m3.
12]
Benzo(a) Pyrene (BaP): BaP values observed in all the locations are
<1.0 ng/m3.
13]
Benzene (C6H6): Benzene concentration was observed in all the

locations are <1.0 ng/m3.
Conclusion
From the above analysis of the data, it infers that the air quality levels in the
study area are of fairly good quality. The observed concentrations can be
attributed to rural and residential activities and rural and semi urban activties.
These are no operating industries in the region. The observed concentrations are
within permissible limits specified by CPCB.
C3-43
Chapter-3
TABLE-3.6.2
SUMMARY OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY RESULTS (PRE-MONSOON SEASON, 2014)
Station
Code
AAQ1
AAQ2
AAQ3
AAQ4
AAQ5
AAQ6
AAQ7
AAQ8
AAQ9
AAQ10
Station
Code
AAQ1
AAQ2
AAQ3
AAQ4
AAQ5
AAQ6
AAQ7
AAQ8
AAQ9
AAQ10
Locations
Min
Project Site
Sayatanr village
Sonahatu village
Sigid village
Barenda village
Marangkiri village
Mankidih village
Tilapiri village
Adardih village
Hesadih village
Range
42.1
38.2
38.7
41.2
37.0
38.2
39.2
38.2
39.7
41.0
Locations
Min
Project Site
Sayatanr village
Sonahatu village
Sigid village
Barenda village
Marangkiri village
Mankidih village
Tilapiri village
Adardih village
Hesadih village
Range
200
293
220
268
216
231
263
268
287
284
PM10 (g/m3)
Max
Avg
52.1
51.2
50.2
51.0
51.4
51.2
50.5
50.2
49.5
52.7
37.0 -
CO (g/m3)
Max
Avg
371
368
351
349
367
354
371
365
366
366
200 -
270
341
304
307
304
279
313
326
330
332
371
45.7
43.3
44.6
46.0
45.7
47.3
47.2
45.3
45.4
47.1
52.7
98th
%le
349
366
351
345
360
338
367
365
363
366
98th
%le
51.1
50.7
49.7
50.7
51.3
51.0
50.5
49.4
49.3
52.1
Min
4.5
3.0
2.3
4.1
3.1
2.7
3.1
2.4
2.4
2.4
Min
19.2
19.1
19.3
20.6
19.3
21.4
20.1
19.6
20.9
19.5
PM2.5 (g/m3)
Max
Avg
23.8
25.8
25.6
25.5
25.7
25.9
25.9
25.7
25.6
25.1
19.1
O3 (g/m3)
Max
Avg
6.8
6.9
6.8
7.1
6.9
6.8
5.9
6.1
6.1
6.1
2.3
5.7
4.9
4.3
5.4
5.4
4.8
4.4
4.6
4.6
4.6
7.1
20.8
21.9
22.8
23.0
22.8
24.3
24.2
23.5
23.3
22.4
25.9
98th
%le
6.7
6.8
6.5
6.9
6.8
6.7
5.8
5.9
5.9
5.9
98th
%le
23.3
25.8
25.5
25.3
25.7
25.9
25.9
25.5
25.5
24.8
Min
9.4
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.5
9.4
9.8
9.5
9.4
9.8
SO2 (g/m3)
Max
Avg
11.8
11.7
10.7
11.6
11.8
11.8
11.8
11.4
11.8
12.2
9.3
10.4
10.1
10.0
10.4
10.2
10.3
10.5
10.2
10.8
11.6
12.2
98th
%le
11.7
11.7
10.7
11.5
11.7
11.6
11.5
11.4
11.7
12.2
Min
NOx (g/m3)
Max
Avg
11.5
11.7
12.2
12.1
12.2
11.6
12.1
11.8
11.7
11.8
16.0
15.8
15.8
15.2
15.8
15.9
15.1
15.6
15.6
15.9
11.5
13.9
13.5
13.3
13.8
13.8
13.5
13.9
13.4
14.4
13.6
16.0
98th
%le
15.6
15.8
15.3
15.0
15.3
15.4
15.0
15.0
15.6
15.7
NH3
(g/m3)
C6H6
(ng/m3)
BaP
(ng/m3)
As
(ng/m3)
Ni
(ng/m3)
Pb
(ng/m3)
PAH
(ng/m3)
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<0.2
<0.2
<0.2
<0.2
<0.2
<0.2
<0.2
<0.2
<0.2
<0.2
<0.2
<0.1
<0.1
<0.1
<0.1
<0.1
<0.1
<0.1
<0.1
<0.1
<0.1
<0.1
<0.05
<0.05
<0.05
<0.05
<0.05
<0.05
<0.05
<0.05
<0.05
<0.05
<0.05
<0.0022
<0.0022
<0.0022
<0.0022
<0.0022
<0.0022
<0.0022
<0.0022
<0.0022
<0.0022
<0.0022
C3-44
Chapter-3
TABLE-3.6.3
SUMMARY OF CHEMICAL CHARACTERIZATION OF RSPM PRE-MONSOON SEASON 2014
Sr.
No
Components
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Free Silica
Aluminium
Calcium
Sodium
Potassium
Magnesium
Lead
Zinc
Vanadium
Iron
Manganese
Boran
Cadmium
Copper
Nickel
Cobalt
Mercury
Arsenic
Sulphur
Phosphorus
Chlorides
Chromium
AAQ1
Min
0.2
0.7
2.5
1.6
1
0.23
0.06
1.2
<0.001
0.23
1.2
2
<0.001
0.06
0.01
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
0.3
2.8
2.5
0.01
Max
0.58
1.6
5
3.5
2.3
1.5
0.2
4.6
0.03
0.5
2.4
4.8
0.02
0.2
0.03
<0.001
<0.001
0.003
1
4.5
4.2
0.03
AAQ2
Min
0.18
1
2.3
1.2
0.5
0.1
0.08
0.68
<0.001
0.7
1.5
1.2
<0.001
0.03
0.02
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
0.5
3
2.5
0.01
Max
0.62
2.2
4
2.5
1.8
1.2
0.3
1.5
0.06
1.8
3.8
4.5
0.1
0.05
0.06
<0.001
<0.001
0.005
1.5
4.8
4.5
0.06
AAQ3
Min
0.19
1.2
3.4
1.5
1.8
0.2
0.05
1.68
<0.001
0.2
0.6
1.6
0.01
0.06
0.005
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
0.023
2.2
1
0.009
Max
0.68
2.5
5.1
3.4
3.5
0.8
0.15
4.2
0.02
0.5
1.6
4.52
0.02
0.025
0.029
<0.001
<0.001
0.003
0.5
4.9
2.2
0.06
AAQ4
Min
0.09
1.6
2.9
2.2
1.6
0.15
0.08
1.95
<0.001
0.2
1.02
3
<0.001
0.05
0.02
<0.001
<0.001
0.003
0.3
1.5
1.6
0.02
Max
0.54
2.9
3.5
4.2
3.2
1.5
0.26
5.2
0.02
1
2.8
4.5
0.06
0.35
0.04
<0.001
<0.001
0.02
1.2
4
4.2
0.08
AAQ5
Min
0.19
0.6
2.3
1.3
0.8
0.2
0.03
0.9
<0.001
0.19
1.2
1.8
<0.001
0.03
0.02
<0.001
<0.001
0.005
0.5
3.8
2.5
0.01
Max
0.48
1.2
4.3
4.2
2.3
1.5
0.25
3.4
0.02
1.32
2.5
4.3
0.02
0.35
0.06
<0.001
<0.001
0.08
1.5
4.8
3.87
0.05
AAQ6
Min
0.2
0.8
2.56
1.67
1.02
0.22
0.05
1
<0.001
0.2
1.5
1.9
<0.001
0.07
0.02
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
0.4
2.5
2.8
0.02
Max
0.5
1.3
3.8
3
1.5
1.9
0.5
1
0.06
1.3
3.4
4.3
0.03
0.35
0.12
<0.001
<0.001
0.008
1.6
5.1
4.5
0.05
AAQ7
Min
0.32
1.2
2.01
1.9
0.5
0.32
0.15
0.5
<0.001
0.8
1.6
2.5
<0.001
0.02
0.01
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
0.256
3.4
3.2
0.005
Max
0.73
2.8
5.1
3.3
1.69
1.458
0.34
1.35
0.02
1.23
3
5
0.05
0.6
0.08
<0.001
<0.001
0.005
1.1
5
5
0.06
AAQ8
Min
0.2
1.5
1.326
1.6
1.3
0.9
0.08
2
<0.001
0.34
1.5
1.895
<0.001
0.09
0.02
<0.001
<0.001
0.01
0.62
1.21
1.3
0.01
Max
0.75
2.6
3.55
4.2
3.2
2
0.32
4.5
0.02
1
3
4.2
0.05
0.42
0.05
<0.001
<0.001
0.03
1.3
3.5
4.1
0.08
Concentrations are expressed in g/m3
C3-45

Chapter-3
3.7
Water Quality
Selected water quality parameters of surface and ground water resources within 10
km radius of the study area has been studied for assessing the water environment
and evaluate anticipated impact of the project. Understanding the water quality is
essential in preparation of environmental impact assessment and to identify critical
issues with a view to suggest appropriate mitigation measures for implementation.
The purpose of this study is to:
Assess the water quality characteristics for critical parameters;

Evaluate the impacts on agricultural productivity, habitat conditions,
recreational resources and aesthetics in the vicinity; and
Predict impact on water quality by this project and related activities.
The information required has been collected through primary surveys and
secondary sources.
3.7.1
Surface Hydrology
The drainage in the study area is governed by Subarnarekha river flowing from
north to south direction. Many small rivers, viz., Raru nadi, Kanchi nadi, Ghosru
nadi and several seasonal nallas meet the river during its course in the study area.
3.7.2
Methodology
Reconnaissance survey was undertaken and monitoring locations were finalized
based on:
Drainage pattern and surface water bodies;

Location of residential areas representing different activities/likely impact areas;
and
Likely areas, which can represent baseline conditions.
The ground water and surface water sources covering 10 km radial distance were
examined for physico-chemical, heavy metals and bacteriological parameters in
order to assess the effect of industrial and other activities on surface and ground
water. The samples were analyzed as per the procedures specified in 'Standard
Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater' published by American
Public Health Association (APHA).
Samples for chemical analysis were collected in polyethylene carboys. Samples
collected for metal content were acidified with 1 ml HNO3. Samples for
bacteriological analysis were collected in sterilized glass bottles. Selected physicochemical and bacteriological parameters have been analyzed for projecting the
existing water quality status in the study area.
C3-46

Chapter-3
3.7.3
Water Sampling Locations13

Eight ground water samples and eight surface water samples were collected
from the study area during the pre-monsoon season. These samples were taken as
grab samples and were analyzed for various parameters to compare with the
standards for drinking water as per IS: 10500 Specifications for Drinking Water.
The water sampling locations are identified in Table-3.7.1 and shown in Figure3.7.1.
TABLE-3.7.1
WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS
Code
Location
Surface Water
SW1
Subernarekha upstream (North of Marangkiri
village)
SW2
Subernaredkha downstream (Near Sari kuli
village)
SW3
Kanchi nadi upstream (near Garadih village)
SW4
Kanchi nadi downstream (between Jeherdih and
Barenda)
SW5
Raru nadi
SW6
Subarnarekha river (near Marangkiri village)
SW7
Domra nadi (river was dry)
SW8
Pond near Kodadih village (river was dry)
Ground Water
GW1
Project site
GW2
Sayatanr village
GW3
Jaherdih village
GW4
Barenda village
GW5
Marangkiri village
GW6
Mahuldih village
GW7
Tilaipiri village
GW8
Hesadih village
3.7.4
Distance
from Plant
Boundary
(km)
Direction
w.r.t. Plant
Boundary
5.5
NNE
6.1
ESE
6.2
2.7
W
N
7.0
2.4
3.4
4.3
N
NE
SE
SW
4.2
4.8
0.5
2.5
2.9
1.0
3.0
WSW
NW
N
NE
E
SE
SSW
Presentation of Results
The results of the water quality monitored during the study period representing premonsoon season are given in Table 3.7.2 and Table-3.7.3.
3.7.4.1 Surface Water Quality

The analysis results indicate that pH is found to be in the range of 7.3-7.8, which is
well within the specified standard 6.5-8.5. The TDS was observed to be in the range
of 92.0-660.0 mg/l. Dissolved Oxygen was observed to be in the range of 5.3-6.2
mg/l. The chlorides and sulphates were found to be in the range of 11.5-121.5 mg/l
and 3.2-16.3 mg/l respectively. It is observed that chlorides and sulphates are well
within the permissible limits. It is evident from the above values that all the
13
Surface water quality of near by stream as per ToR-48 and ToR-55
C3-47

Chapter-3
parameters are well within the permissible limits. Bacteriological studies reveal the
absence of E. coli forms. (Table-3.7.2)
3.7.4.2 Ground Water Quality
The analysis results indicate that the pH ranges in between 7.2 to 7.6, which is well
within the specified standard of 6.5 to 8.5. Total hardness was observed to be
ranging from 46.0 to 233.0 mg/l. The hardness was found to be well within the limit
of 600 mg/l at all locations.
Chlorides at all the locations were within the permissible limit, ranging in between
10.5 to 62.5 mg/l. Fluorides were observed to be ranging in between 0.2 to 0.6
mg/l and are found to be within the permissible limit. Nitrates are found to be in
range of 2.0 13.0 mg/l. Bacteriological studies reveal that no coliform bacteria are
present in the samples. The heavy metal contents were observed to be in well
within the limits (Table-3.7.3).
C3-48

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.7.1
WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS
C3-49
Chapter-3
TABLE-3.7.2
SURFACE WATER QUALITY
Sr. No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Parameter
PH
Colour
Conductivity
Total Dissolved Solids
Dissolved Oxygen
BOD ( 3 days at 27oC)
COD
Total Hardness as CaCo3
Total Alkalinity as CaCo3
Calcium as Ca
Magnesium as Mg
Chloride as Cl
Residual free chlorine
Phosphate as PO4
Sulphate as SO4-Fluorides as FNitrates as NO3
Sodium as Na
Potassium as K
Total Boron as B
Cyanides as CN
Phenolic compound
Oil and grease
Cadmium as Cd
Arsenic as As
Copper as Cu
Lead as Pb
Iron as Fe
Chromium as Cr
Selenium as Se
Zinc as Zn
Aluminium as Al
Mercury as Hg
SAR
Insecticides
Anionic detergents as MBAS
Total Coliforms
Units
Hazen units
S/cm
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
MPN/ 100 ml
SW1
7.4
2
286.0
185.0
5.8
<3
<5
103.0
112.6
27.3
8.5
16.8
<0.2
<0.1
7.8
0.4
6.4
18.5
6.2
0.03
<0.02
<0.001
<0.1
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.03
<0.05
<0.01
0.02
<0.01
<0.001
0.79
Absent
<0.1
Absent
SW2
7.5
3
413.0
265.0
5.6
<3
<5
148.0
158.3
35.2
14.5
23.5
<0.2
0.1
11.5
0.5
12.6
26.5
8.0
0.05
<0.02
<0.001
<0.1
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.05
<0.05
<0.01
0.04
<0.01
<0.001
0.95
Absent
<0.1
Absent
SW3
7.3
2
147.0
92.0
6.0
<3
<5
49.0
58.7
11.5
5.0
11.5
<0.2
<0.1
6.8
0.2
2.8
14.8
2.8
0.01
<0.02
<0.001
<0.1
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.02
<0.05
<0.01
0.01
<0.01
<0.001
0.92
Absent
<0.1
Absent
SW4
7.8
3
1025.0
660.0
6.2
<3
<5
444.0
210.5
121.5
34.2
121.5
<0.2
0.2
16.3
0.7
14.3
30.2
11.2
0.08
<0.02
<0.001
<0.1
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.12
<0.05
<0.01
0.08
<0.01
<0.001
0.62
Absent
<0.1
Absent
SW5
7.5
2
484.0
310.0
5.4
<3
<5
160.0
182.0
40.0
14.6
34.0
<0.2
0.1
8.2
0.3
5.6
30.0
15.6
0.12
<0.02
<0.001
<0.1
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.04
<0.05
<0.01
0.06
<0.01
<0.001
1.03
Absent
<0.1
Absent
SW6
7.6
3
235.0
152.0
5.3
<3
<5
64.0
79.0
16.0
5.8
28.4
<0.2
0.1
3.2
0.1
4.8
23.0
10.0
0.08
<0.02
<0.001
<0.1
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.02
<0.05
<0.01
0.02
<0.01
<0.001
1.25
Absent
<0.1
Absent
$ Limits not specified as per IS code, Note:- SW-7 and SW-8 were dry at the time of sampling.
C3-50
Chapter-3
TABLE-3.7.3
GROUND WATER QUALITY
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
$ Limits not
Parameter
pH
Colour (Hazen units)
Taste
Odour
Conductivity
Turbidity (NTU)
Total Dissolve solids
Total Hardness as CaCO3
Total Alkalinity
Calcium as Ca
Magnesium as Mg
Residual Chlorine
Boron
Chloride as Cl
Sulphate as SO4
Fluorides as FNitrates as NO3
Sodium as Na
Potassium as K
Phenolic Compounds
Cyanides
Anionic Detergents
Mineral Oil
Cadmium as Cd
Arsenic as As
Copper as Cu
Lead as Pb
Manganese as Mn
Iron as Fe
Chromium as Cr6+
Selenium as Se
Zinc as Zn
Aluminium as Al
Mercury as Hg
Pesticides
E-coli(Nos/100 ml)
Coliform Organisms
specified as per IS code: 10500
IS:10500
Limits
6.5 8.5
5 (25)
Agreeable
Unobjec-tionable
$
5 (10)
500 (2000)
300 (600)
200 (600)
75 (200)
30 (100)
0.2 min
1
250 (1000)
200 (400)
1.0 (1.5)
45 (NR)
$
$
0.001 (0.002)
0.05 (NR)
0.2 (1.0)
0.01 (0.03)
0.01 (NR)
0.01 (NR)
0.05 (1.5)
0.05 (NR)
0.1 (0.3)
0.3 (1.0)
0.05 (NR)
0.01(NR)
5 (15)
0.03 (0.2)
0.001 (NR)
Absent
Absent
10
Units
GW1
GW2
GW3
GW4
GW5
GW6
GW7
GW8
Hazen
uS/cm
NTU
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
7.5
2
Agreeable
UO
165.9
2
105.0
53.0
60.0
12.5
5.2
<0.2
0.01
14.0
7.5
0.3
2.6
15.6
3.2
<0.001
<0.02
<0.1
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.02
<0.05
<0.01
0.01
<0.01
<0.001
Absent
Absent
<2
7.2
1
Agreeable
UO
144.0
2
90.0
46.0
56.0
11.3
4.2
<0.2
<0.01
10.5
6.0
0.2
2.0
14.2
2.6
<0.001
<0.02
<0.1
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.01
<0.05
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.001
Absent
Absent
<2
7.4
2
Agreeable
UO
278.0
2
180.0
101.0
110.0
26.8
8.2
<0.2
0.03
16.0
8.1
0.4
6.0
18.3
5.6
<0.001
<0.02
<0.1
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.04
<0.05
<0.01
0.04
<0.01
<0.001
Absent
Absent
<2
7.6
3
Agreeable
UO
591.0
3
380.0
233.0
192.0
60.3
20.0
<0.2
0.06
62.5
13.0
0.6
10.9
28.3
10.2
<0.001
<0.02
<0.1
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.06
<0.05
<0.01
0.10
<0.01
<0.001
Absent
Absent
<2
7.2
2
Agreeable
UO
252.0
2
164.0
93.0
100.0
24.5
7.6
<0.2
0.03
15.8
8.0
0.4
5.8
17.5
5.0
<0.001
<0.02
<0.1
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.04
<0.05
<0.01
0.04
<0.01
<0.001
Absent
Absent
<2
7.4
2
Agreeable
UO
267.0
2
174.0
97.0
104.6
25.6
8.0
<0.2
0.03
16.2
8.4
0.4
5.9
18.0
5.3
<0.001
<0.02
<0.1
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.02
<0.05
<0.01
0.04
<0.01
<0.001
Absent
Absent
<2
7.5
3
Agreeable
UO
431.0
2
280.0
157.0
166.2
38.2
15.0
<0.2
0.04
24.3
12.8
0.6
13.0
27.0
8.5
<0.001
<0.02
<0.1
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.04
<0.05
<0.01
0.06
<0.01
<0.001
Absent
Absent
<2
7.5
2
Agreeable
UO
365.0
2
235.0
136.0
150.0
34.7
12.0
<0.2
0.05
14.8
10.2
0.4
11.7
21.5
7.8
<0.001
<0.02
<0.1
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.22
<0.05
<0.01
0.18
<0.01
<0.001
Absent
Absent
<2
MPN/100 ml
C3-51

Chapter-3
3.8
Noise Level Survey

The physical description of sound concerns its loudness as a function of frequency.
Noise in general is sound which is composed of many frequency components of
various loudness distributed over the audible frequency range. Various noise scales
have been introduced to describe, in a single number, the response of an average
human to a complex sound made up of various frequencies at different loudness
levels. The most common and universally accepted scale is the A weighted scale
which is measured as dB (A). This is more suitable for audible range of 20 to
20,000 Hz. The scale has been designed to weigh various components of noise
according to the response of a human ear.
The impact of noise sources on surrounding community depends on:
Characteristics of noise sources (instantaneous, intermittent or continuous in

nature). It can be observed that steady noise is not as annoying as one which is
continuously varying in loudness;
The time of day at which noise occurs, for example high noise levels at night in
residential areas are not acceptable because of sleep disturbance; and
The location of the noise source, with respect to noise sensitive land use, which
determines the loudness and period of exposure.
The environmental impact of noise can have several effects varying from Noise
Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) to annoyance depending on loudness of noise. The
environmental impact assessment of noise due to construction activity, and
vehicular traffic can be undertaken by taking into consideration various factors like
potential damage to hearing, physiological responses, annoyance and general
community responses. Noise monitoring has been undertaken for 24 hours duration
at each location.
3.8.1
Identification of Sampling Locations

A preliminary reconnaissance survey has been undertaken to identify the major
noise generating sources in the area. Noises at different noise generating sources
have been identified based on the activities in the village area and ambient noise
due to traffic.
The noise monitoring has been conducted for determination of noise levels at ten
locations during the study period. The noise levels at each of the locations were
recorded for 24 hours.
The environment setting of each noise monitoring location is given in Table-3.8.1
and shown in Figure-3.8.1.
3.8.2 Methodology of Data Generation

3.8.2.1 Method of Monitoring
Sound Pressure Level (SPL) measurements were measured at all locations. The
readings were taken for every hour for 24 hours. The day noise levels have been
monitored during 6 am to 10 pm and night levels during 10 pm to 6 am at all the
locations covered in 10 km radius of the study area.
C3-52

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.8.1
NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS
C3-53

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.8.1
DETAILS OF NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS
Location
Code
Location
(Village)
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
N9
N10
Project site
Sayatanr village
Garadih village
Sonahatu village
Jaherdih village
Barenda village
Marangkiri village
Mahuldih village
Tilapiri village
Hesadih village
Distance from
Boundary
(km)
4.2
6.5
8.5
4.8
0.5
2.5
2.9
1.0
3.0
Direction w.r.t
Plant Boundary
Present Settings
WSW
W
WNW
NW
N
NE
E
SE
SSW
Rural
Rural/Residential
Rural/Residential
Rural/Residential
Rural/Residential
Rural/Residential
Rural/Residential
Rural/Residential
Rural/Residential
Rural/Residential
3.8.2.2 Parameters Measured During Monitoring

For noise levels measured over a given period of time interval, it is possible to
describe important features of noise using statistical quantities. This is calculated
using the percent of the time certain noise levels are exceeding the time interval.
The notation for the statistical quantities of noise levels are described below:
L10 is the noise level exceeded 10 per cent of the time;

L50 is the noise level exceeded 50 per cent of the time; and
L90 is the noise level exceeded 90 per cent of the time.
Equivalent Sound Pressure Level (Leq):

The Leq is the equivalent continuous sound level which is equivalent to the same
sound energy as the actual fluctuating sound measured in the same period. This is
necessary because sound from noise source often fluctuates widely during a given
period of time.
This is calculated from the following equation:
Leq = L50
(L10 - L90)2
+ -----------60
Lday is defined as the equivalent noise level measured over a period of time during
day (6 am to 10 pm).
Lnight is defined as the equivalent noise level measured over a period of time during
night (10 pm to 6 am).
A noise rating developed by E P A for specification of community noise from all the
sources is the Day-Night Sound Level, (Ldn).
C3-54

Chapter-3
Day-Night Sound Level (Ldn):

The noise rating developed for community noise from all sources is the Day-Night
Sound Level (Ldn). It is similar to a 24 hr equivalent sound level except that during
night time period (10 pm to 6 am) a 10 dB (A) weighting penalty is added to the
instantaneous sound level before computing the 24 hr average.
This night time penalty is added to account for the fact that noise during night when
people usually sleep is judged as more annoying than the same noise during the
day time.
The Ldn for a given location in a community may be calculated from the hourly Leq's,
by the following equation.
Ldn = 10 log {1/24[16(10 Ld/10) + 8 (10(Ln+10)/10)]}
Where Ld is the equivalent sound level during the day time (6 am to 10 pm) and Ln
is the equivalent sound level during the night time (10 pm to 6 am).
3.8.2.3 Presentation of Results
The statistical analysis is done for measured noise levels at ten locations for once
during study period. The parameters are analyzed for Lday, Lnight, and Ldn. These
results are tabulated in Table-3.8.2.
TABLE-3.8.2
NOISE LEVELS IN THE STUDY AREA IN dB(A)
Location
Code
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
N9
N10
Locations
Project Site
Sayatanr village
Garadih village
Sonahatu village
Jaherdih village
Barenda village
Marangkiri village
Mahuldih village
Tilapiri village
Hesadih village
Area
Code
A
B
C
D
Category of Area
Industrial Area
Commercial Area
Residential Area
Silence Zone
L10
L50
L90
Leq
Ld
Ln
Ldn
46.2
45.4
43.5
42.1
44.2
46.7
44.5
45.9
45.3
44.2
42.5
41.5
39.7
38.2
40.6
42.9
40.8
42.2
41.7
40.4
38.9
37.7
36.2
34.4
36.9
39.4
37.2
38.6
38.0
36.9
43.4
42.5
40.6
39.2
41.5
43.8
41.6
43.1
42.6
41.3
44.1
43.4
41.2
40.2
42.0
44.6
42.4
43.6
43.1
42.1
40.0
38.3
36.8
35.7
37.7
40.3
39.3
39.1
38.8
37.8
47.3
45.9
44.2
43.1
45.0
47.7
46.3
46.5
46.1
45.2
Ambient Noise Standards

Noise Levels dB (A) Leq (Limits)
Day time
Night time
75
70
65
55
55
45
50
40
3.8.2.4 Observations
a)
Day time Noise Levels (Lday)
The daytime noise levels at the residential locations ranged between 40.2 - 44.6 dB
(A). The maximum value of 44.6 dB (A) was recorded at Barenda village (N6) and
C3-55

Chapter-3
the minimum value of 40.2 dB(A) was recorded at the Sonahatu village (N4). It is
observed that the day time noise levels at maximum residential locations are within
the prescribed limit of 55 dB (A).
b)
Night time Noise Levels (Lnight)
The night time noise levels were ranged between 35.7 to 40.3 dB (A). The
maximum value was recorded at Barenda village (N6) and the minimum value was
recorded at the Sonahatu village (N4). It is observed that the night time noise
levels at maximum residential locations are within the prescribed limit of 45 dB (A).
The activities which contributed to the baseline levels are normal rural/residential
activities including local rural traffic. There are no industrial activities in the study
area.
3.9
Ecology & Biodiversity14
3.9.1 Introduction
Ecological evaluation aims at developing and applying methodologies to assess
the relevance of an area for nature conservation. As such, it is to support the
assessment of the impact of a proposed development by providing guidance on
how to describe the ecological features within the area affected, how to value
them, and how to predict the value losses caused by the development. The
evaluation of the ecological significance of an area can be undertaken from
different perspectives and consequently with different objectives. One of such
perspectives focuses on the conservation of the biological diversity or biodiversity.
Among the human activities that pose the highest threat to the conservation of
biodiversity are the developmental projects in particular. Such projects represent
artificial elements that cut through the landscape and interfere with the natural
habitat and its conditions by emissions that may be solid, liquid and or gaseous.
This in turn influences the abundance and distribution of plant and animal
species, i.e., the biodiversity of the area is impacted.
The secondary data is usually existing and obtainable from the governmental
agencies or the scientific literature. This information is typically complemented by
field visit, site surveys and sample collection. The description of the actual
ecological assessment provided by the ecological baseline study serves to set a
reference for the subsequent impact analysis. Moreover, it helps decision-makers
and EIA reviewers to become familiar with the environmental features and the
needs of the study area.
3.9.2 Objectives
The present study was undertaken with the following objectives to assess both
terrestrial and aquatic habitats of the study area:
14
To assess the nature and distribution of vegetation in and around the proposed
project site;
Details of flora and fauna as per ToR-62
C3-56

Chapter-3
To assess the fauna in the study area;

To understand the ecology of the water bodies;
To ascertain the presence of migratory routes of fauna and breeding grounds
or sensitive habitats in the study area, if any;
To assess the presence of protected areas in the study area;
To review the information from secondary sources and discuss the issues of
concern with the relevant authority and stakeholders; and
Impact prediction based on primary and secondary data sources to formulate
mitigation measures.
3.9.3 Methodology
To achieve the above objectives a detailed study of the area was undertaken with
the proposed project site as its center. The different methods adopted were as
follows:
Generation of primary data by undertaking systematic ecological studies in the

study area;
Primary data collection for flora through random sampling method for trees,
shrubs and herbs from the selected locations to know the vegetation cover
qualitatively;
Faunal studies by taking transect in the study area to spot the fauna and also
to know the fauna through secondary indictors such as pugmarks, scats, fecal
pallets, calls and other signs;
For ecological information, the secondary sources such as local officials,

villagers and other stakeholders were interviewed; and
Sourcing secondary data with respect to the study area from published
literature.
The locations for terrestrial and aquatic ecological studies are shown in Figure3.9.1 and the details are given in Table-3.9.1.
C3-57

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.9.1
MAP OF ECOLOGICAL SAMPLING LOCATIONS
C3-58

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.9.1
ECOLOGICAL SAMPLING LOCATIONS
Station
Location
Distance from
the Site (km.)
Direction
0.5
1.9
8.0
7.6
1.5
6.7
N
NNE
NE
ESE
E
SSW
5.5
6.2
6.2
2.7
NNE
E
W
N
Terrestrial
TE-1
Near village Baranda
TE-2
Near village Pandudih
TE-3
Near village Kalimati
TE-4
Near village Garadih
TE-5
Near village Mahuldih
TE-6
Near village Marankiri
Aquatic
AE-1
River Subarnarekha near village Dungdung
AE-2
At junction of Subarnarekha and Rauru
AE-3
River Kanchi near village Garadih
AE-4
River Kanchi near village Birdih
3.9.4
Forests of the Region

Out of the total 7,698 km2 geographical area of Ranchi, the district has 141 km2 of
Very dense Forest, 684 km2 of moderate dense forest, 1,079km2 of open forest and
67 km2 of open scrub land. A total of 25% of the geographical areas is covered by
vegetation excluding scrubland (India State of the Forest Report, 2011).
3.9.5 Forest Blocks in the Study Area

The list of forest blocks in 10 km radius of the plant premises is presented in
Table-3.9.2.
TABLE-3.9.2
LIST OF FOREST BLOCKS IN 10 KM RADIUS
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
3.9.6
Name of the Forest Block

PF near village
PF near village
PF near village
PF near village
PF near village
PF near village
PF near village
PF near village
PF near village
PF near village
PF near village
Kalimati RF
Baranda
Mahil
Tetuldih
Pepride
Rohardhi
Garadih
Bhusadih
Chatam
Mukrub
Sapuram
Barukande
Distance from
Plant Site
0.5
0.6
1.7
2.9
4.0
4.1
4.6
4.7
5.8
6.9
7.9
8.2
Direction
N
E
NNE
S
ESE
ESE
SSW
SE
NE
ESE
SSW
NE
Core Zone (Project Area)

The core zone is primarily composed of fallow agricultural land with some
vegetation on the farm boundaries and open scrublands. The area near the hills
which are non-agricultural land are with uniform stands of Butea monosperma
C3-59

Chapter-3
which is also the most dominant species in the region. Large areas of this land is
covered with regenerating B. monosperma. High amount of human pressure can be
seen on the existing vegetation.
Most of the trees have been felled or lopped and as a result the regeneration has
occurred. Other species that are represented include asan, bel, kusum, mango,
drumsticks, australian acacia, jamun and Eucalyptus sp. The understory is mainly
composed of Lantana camara, Eupatorium sp. and Ipomea carnea.
The core zone is used by the fauna mostly for transient passage. It was noted that
no sensitive species occurs in this area, nor was this area represented by a
permanent habitat of any species that has conservation importance. The animals
which pass through this area and in the vicinity of the villages are wild boar, hare,
Indian fox and the avifauna observed in this area was represented by spotted dove,
ringed dove, indian myna, larks, pied myna, indian roller, black drongo, jungle
babblers.
3.9.7
Buffer Zone
Hills: Most of the hill slopes and hill tops are barren due to rocky exposed surfaces
and steep slopes which do not allow any vegetation to grow. As shown in the
Figure-3.9.2 most of the hill ranges occurring in the study area show similar
desolate habitat.
Foothills and Hill Slopes: The areas which are on the lower slopes with less steep
elevation are covered with vegetation. This occurrence of vegetation is due to
availability of top soil with some boulders and rocky outcrops. These forest areas
are degraded and show signs of high anthropogenic pressure. There are no large
trees occurring but mostly regenerated growth of large trees which have been cut
down over the years. This forest type is mostly represented by Shorea robusta,
Delonix regia, Bauhinia recemosa, Schleichera oleosa, Phyllanthus emblica,
Madhuca indica, Albizia margninata, Terminalia elliptica, T. chebula and T.
tomentosa
Vegetation near Villages and Rivers: The most dominant species in this area is
Butea monosperma. Uniform stands of B. monosperma can be seen on the village
fringe, riverside and forest fringe near the foot hills. These stands do not have large
old grown trees but mostly regenerating stumps and poles as well as new
regeneration in the form of seedlings and saplings. These seedlings and saplings
represent the undergrowth and replace the shrubby vegetation.
Villages do show typically large trees of fruit bearing species such as Tamarindus
indica, Ficus bengalensis, F. religosa, Agle marmelos, Schleichera oleosa, Madhuca
indica, Azadirachta indica, Sygygium cumini, Acacia sp., drumsticks and species of
bamboo.
Many roads side plantation have been carried out by the forest department. The
block plantation carried out in the study area comprises of uniform stands of Shorea
robusta, Eucalyptus hybrids (Figure-3.9.3) and australian acacia.
C3-60

Chapter-3
Dominance of Justicia betonica, Croton bonplandinum, Strobilanthes heymareus,

Parthenium hysterophorus, Tephrosia purpuria, Abutilon polyandrum, Eupatorium
sp, and Oxalis cornuculata and Albizia marginata. Butea monosperma, Schleichera
trijuga, Dalbergia sissoo, Delonix regia, Terminalia elliptica and Bauhinia racemosa
are predominant tree species in the study area. The floristic composition indicates
that the floral structure in the study area is uniform in nature.
The region is represented by 344 plant species which include crops, vegetables,
plantation, fruit trees and natural vegetation (except algae, fungi and bryophytes)
as per the records of the forest department and the list of species recorded from the
core and the buffer zone of the study area is given in Table-3.9.3.
It was observed that high amount of biotic pressure can be seen in the forest areas.
The common indicators of forest degradation such as tree cutting, lopping, stunted
growth, cattle dung, proliferation of weed species and fragmented and patchy
nature of forests were observed. Collection of NTFPs is common in the region,
collection of tendu leaves for bidi making, other plants are also collected for
everyday use and collection of fruits and seeds is also a common practices. The
intensity of impacts are high near the villages adjoining the forest areas and reduce
as we go into the deeper areas of the forests. It was also observed that some
patchy destruction within the forests have created open voids which are devoid of
any vegetation.
TABLE-3.9.3
LIST OF FLORA FROM THE STUDY AREA
Sr. No
Technical Name
Core Zone (Project Area)
1
Butea monosperma
2
Delonix regia
3
Leucena leucophloe
4
Azadirachta indica
5
Acacia nilotica
6
Albizia lebbeck
7
Albizia procera
8
Eucalyptus sp
9
Mangifera indica
10
Michaelia champaca
11
Bambusa arundanacea
12
Cassia tora
13
Ageratum conyzoides
14
Tamarindus indica
15
Cymbopogon jwarancusa
16
Ficus benghalensis
17
Ficus religiosa
18
Argemone Mexicana
19
Agave wightii
20
Ipomea tuba
21
Tridax procumbens
22
Opuntia elator
23
Cleome viscosa
24
Evolvulus alsinoides
25
Emblica officinale
26
Euphorbia geniculate
27
Euphorbia hirta
28
Euphorbia piluliflora
29
Mallotus philippinus
Family
Caesalpinaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Meliaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Myrtaceae
Anacardiaceae
Annonaceae
Poaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Compositae
Caesalpinaceae
Cyperaceae
Moraceae
Moraceae
Papaveraceae
Agavaceae
Convolvulaceae
Compositae
Cacataceae
Capparidaceae
Convolvulaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Life Form
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Hemicrptophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Therophyte
Therophyteq
Therophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Phanerophyte
C3-61

Chapter-3
Sr. No
Technical Name
30
Azadirachta indica
31
Zizyphus mauritiana
32
Panicum sp.
33
Saccharum munja
34
Parthenium hysterophorus
35
Lantana camara
36
Vitex negundo
37
Schleichera oleosa
38
Agle marmelos
39
Sygygium cumini
40
Terminalia elliptica
Buffer Zone
I. Agricultural and Commercial Crops
41
Hordium vulgare
42
Oryza sativa
43
Pennisetum typhoideum
44
Sorghum vulgare
45
Triticum vulgare
46
Zea mays
II. Commercial Crops (including Vegetables)
47
Mangifera indica
48
Annona squamosal
49
Colacasia esculenta
50
Carica papaya
51
Beta vulgaris
52
Catharanthes pusillus
53
Brassica oleracea var botrydis
54
Brassica oleracea var capitata
55
Raphanus sativa
56
Memordia charantia
57
Trichosanthes anguina
58
Arachis hypogia
59
Cajanus cajan
60
Cicer arietinum
61
Pisum sativum
62
Allium cepa
63
Allium sativum
64
Abelomoschus indicus
65
Gossypium sp
66
Psidium guava
67
Pepaver somneferrum
68
Citrus lemon
69
Litchi chinensis
70
Lycopersicum esculentus
71
Solanum tuberosum
72
Coreandrum sativum
73
Daucus carota
III. Plantations
74
Bauhinia corymbosa
75
Bauhinia purpuria
76
Bauhinia variegate
77
Butea frondosa
78
Butea monosperma
79
Delonix regia
80
Leucena leucophloe
81
Azadirachta indica
82
Acacia nilotica
83
Albizia lebbeck
84
Albizia odorattissima
85
Albizia procera
Family
Meliaceae
Rhamanaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Compositae
Verbinacaee
Verbinaceae
Sapindaceae
Ruteceae
Myrtaceae
Combretaceae
Life Form
Phanerophyte
Phanrophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Anacardiaceae
Annonaceae
Arecaceae
Caricaceae
Chenopodiaceae
Compositae
Cruciferae
Cruciferae
Cruciferae
Cucurbitaceae
Cucurbitaceae
Fabaceae
Fabaceae
Fabaceae
Fabaceae
Liliaceae
Liliaceae
Malvaceae
Malvaceae
Myrtaceae
Pepavaraceae
Rutaceae
Sapindaceae
Solanaceae
Solanaceae
Umbelliferae
Umbelliferae
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Geophyte
Therophyte
Geophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Geophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Geophyte
Therophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Therophyte
Geophyte
Geophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Hemicrptophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Geophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Geophyte
Caesalpinaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Meliaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
C3-62

Chapter-3
Sr. No
Technical Name
86
Eucalyptus sp
87
Bambusa arundanacea
IV. Natural Vegetation
88
Barleria prionoites
89
Blepharis asperima
90
Blepharis madaraspatens
91
Haplanthus verticillatus
92
Hygrophylla auriculata
93
Jusrtia simplex
94
Justia diffusa
95
Justicia diffusa
96
Agave wightii
97
Yucca gloriosa
98
Mollugo cerviana
99
Mollugo hirta
100
Alangium salivus
101
Achyranthes aspera
102
Alternanthera sessilis
103
Croton bonplandinum
104
Lannea procumbens
105
Mangifera indica
106
Michaelia champaca
107
Polyalthia longifolia
108
Alstonia scholaris
109
Carissa carandus
110
Carissa spinarium
111
Nerium indicum
112
Wrightia tomentosa
113
Calotropis gigantia
114
Desmodium triflorum
115
Leptodenia pyrotechnica
116
Leptodenia reticulate
117
Holostemma annularia
118
Jacarandra jacquimontii
119
Tecomella undulate
120
Bombax ceiba
121
Garuga pinnata
122
Opuntia elator
123
Caesalpina pulcherima
124
Cassia absus
125
Cassia auriculata
126
Cassia obtuse
127
Cassia occidentalis
128
Cassia tora
129
Tamarindus indica
130
Canna indica
131
Capparis aphylla
132
Capparis decidua
133
Cleome gynandra
134
Cleome viscosa
135
Crataeva adsoni
136
Anogeissus latifolia
137
Anogeissus serica
138
Schleichera trijuga
139
Terminalia elliptica
140
Terminalia tomentosa
141
Ageratum conyzoides
142
Bidens biternata
143
Blumea lacera
144
Chrysanthemum sp
Family
Myrtaceae
Poaceae
Life Form
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Acanthaceae
Acanthaceae
Acanthaceae
Acanthaceae
Acanthaceae
Acanthaceae
Acanthaceae
Acanthaceae
Agavaceae
Agavaceae
Aizoaceae
Aizoaceae
Alangiaceae
Amaranthaceae
Amaranthaceae
Amaryllidaceae
Anacardiaceae
Anacardiaceae
Annonaceae
Annonaceae
Apocyanaceae
Apocyanaceae
Apocyanaceae
Apocyanaceae
Apocyanaceae
Asclepiadaceae
Asclepiadaceae
Asclepiadaceae
Asclepiadaceae
Asclepiadaceae
Bignoniaceae
Bignoniaceae
Bombacaceae
Burseraceae
Cacataceae
Caesalpinaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Cannaceae
Capparidaceae
Capparidaceae
Capparidaceae
Capparidaceae
Capparidaceae
Combretaceae
Combretaceae
Combretaceae
Combretaceae
Combretaceae
Compositae
Compositae
Compositae
Compositae
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyteq
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
C3-63

Chapter-3
Sr. No
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
Technical Name
Echinops echinatus
Eclipta alba
Eclipta prostrate
Emilia lajerium
Lactuca punctate
Parthenium hysterophorus
Tridax procumbens
Vernonia cinera
Vicoa indica
Xanthium strumariumk
Evolvulus alsinoides
Evolvulus numalaris
Ipomea aquatic
Ipomea tuba
Oldenlandia umbellate
Raphanus sativus
Cuscuta reflexa
Cymbopogon jwarancusa
Cyperus aristatus
Setaria glauca
Shorea robusta
Acalypha lanceolata
Antidesma diandrum
Bridelia retusa
Bridelia superba
Emblica officinale
Euphorbia geniculate
Euphorbia hirta
Euphorbia hyperocifolia
Euphorbia neruri
Euphorbia nivula
Euphorbia piluliflora
Euphorbia tricauli
Jatropha gossypifolia
Mallotus philippinus
Phyllanthes asperulatus
Phyllanthes emblica
Phyllanthes nirurii
Phyllanthes reticulates
Alysicarpus hamosus
Crotalaria medicagenia
Dalbergia paniculata
Tephrosia purpuria
Flacourtia indica
Flacourtia latifolia
Eulaliopsis binate
Hyptis suavalens
Leucas aspera
Leucas longifolia
Ocimum americanum
Ocimum canum
Ocimum sanctum
Asparagaus racemosus
Dendrophthe falcate
Loranthus sp
Ammania baccafera
Diospyros melanoxylon
Diospyros Montana
Lawsonia inermis
Abutilon indicum
Family
Compositae
Compositae
Compositae
Compositae
Compositae
Compositae
Compositae
Compositae
Compositae
Compositae
Convolvulaceae
Convolvulaceae
Convolvulaceae
Convolvulaceae
Convolvulaceae
Cruciferae
Cuscutaceae
Cyperaceae
Cyperaceae
Cyperaceae
Dipterocarpaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Fabaceae
Fabaceae
Fabaceae
Fabaceae
Flacourtiaceae
Flacourtiaceae
Poaceae
Labiatae
Labiatae
Labiatae
Labiatae
Labiatae
Labiatae
Liliaceae
Loranthaceae
Loranthaceae
Lythraceae
Lythraceae
Lythraceae
Lythraceae
Malvaceae
Life Form
Therophyte
Therophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Hydrophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Epiphyte
Hemicrptophyte
Therophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Epiphyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
C3-64

Chapter-3
Sr. No
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
Technical Name
Gossypium herbaceum
Hibiscus gibbosa
Hibiscus micronthus
Hibiscus ovalifolia
Hibiscus rosa-cianensis
Hibsicus caesus
Malvastrum coramandalicum
Sida orientalis
Azadirachta indica
Acacia Arabica
Acacia auriculiformis
Acacia catechu
Acacia cenescens
Acacia fernacea
Acacia intinsia
Acacia leucophloe
Mimosa hamate
Parkinsonia aculata
Pithocolobium dulce
Ficus benghalensis
Ficus carica
Ficus glomerata
Ficus hispida
Ficus racemosus
Ficus religiosa
Ficus gibbosa
Psidium guava
Sygygium cumini
Boerheavia chinensis
Boerheavia diffusa
Jasmimum arborens
Jussiaea suffraticosa
Careya arborea
Phoenix aculis
Argemone Mexicana
Erythrina indica
Fumaria indica
Lathyrus sativus
Medicago aureus
Medicago indica
Medicago lymorpha
Medicago polymorpha
Mucuna prurita
Oogeinia oojensis
Paspalum strobilanthus
Passiflora foetida
Sesamum indicum
Apluda mutica
Aristida adscensionsis
Arthraxon prionoites
Cenchrus ciliaris
Cenchrus setifgera
Chloris dolichosta
Chloris variegate
Cyanodactylon sp
Dactylectinium annualatum
Dichanthium annulatum
Digetaria bicornis
Digetaria Segetaria
Eragrostis biferia
Family
Malvaceae
Malvaceae
Malvaceae
Malvaceae
Malvaceae
Malvaceae
Malvaceae
Malvaceae
Meliaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Moraceae
Moraceae
Moraceae
Moraceae
Moraceae
Moraceae
Moraceae
Myrtaceae
Myrtaceae
Nyctaginaceae
Nyctaginaceae
Oleaceae
Onagraceae
Palmae
Palmae
Papaveraceae
Papillionaceae
Papillionaceae
Papillionaceae
Papillionaceae
Papillionaceae
Papillionaceae
Papillionaceae
Papillionaceae
Papillionaceae
Passifloraceae
Passifloraceae
Pedaliaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Life Form
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phaneophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Hydrophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Phanerophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Phanerophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Therophyte
Geophyte
Therophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Therophyte
C3-65

Chapter-3
Sr. No
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
Technical Name
Eragrostis tenella
Ichnocarpus frutens
Inperata cylendrica
Ischaemum rugosum
Panicum milliria
Panicum notatum
Saccharum munja
Saccharum officinarum
Sachharum spontanseum
Themeda quadrivalvis
Tragus biflorus
Vivevera zizanoides
Polygala ererptera
Eichhornia cressipes
Portulaca oleracea
Punica granulatum
Delphinium ajacus
Zizyphus mauritiana
Tinospora cordifolia
Zizyphus jujube
Rhus mysoorensis
Rosa indica
Adina cordifolia
Borreria hispida
Borreria stricta
Canthium diddynum
Cestrum diurnum
Cestrum nocturnum
Combretum ovalifolium
Cordia dichotoma
Cordia myxa
Cordia rothri
Gardenia latifolia
Gardenia lucida
Gmelina arborea
Helictris isora
Heliotropium indicum
Ixora arborea
Ixora parviflora
Ixora singapuriens
Oldenlandiua corymbosa
Randia dumatorum
Aegle marmelos
Atalantia monophylla
Citrus liminoites
Citrus limon
Citrus media
Feronia elephantum
Murraya exotica
Murraya koenigii
Salmalia malabarica
Casearia graveolens
Sapindus emerginatus
Scherebera sweitenoides
Schleichera oleosa
Achras sapota
Madhuca latifolia
Ailanthes excels
Capsicum annulatum
Datura alba
Family
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Polygalaceae
Pontederiaceae
Portulacaceae
Puniaceae
Ranunculaceae
Rhamanaceae
Rhamnaceae
Rhamnaceae
Rosaceae
Rosaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rubiaceae
Rutaceae
Rutaceae
Rutaceae
Rutaceae
Rutaceae
Rutaceae
Rutaceae
Rutaceae
Salmaliaceae
Samydiaceae
Sapindaceae
Sapindaceae
Sapindaceae
Sapotaceae
Sapotaceae
Simaroubaceae
Solanaceae
Solanaceae
Life Form
Therophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Therophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Hemicryprophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Hydrophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanrophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophytes
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Theophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
C3-66

Chapter-3
Sr. No
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
Technical Name
Datura fastulosa
Datura metal
Lycopersicum esculentus
Nicotiana plubigera
Physalis minima
Solanum nigrum
Solanum xanthocarpum
Symplocos racemosa
Grewia abutifolia
Grewia salivifolia
Grewia subinaqualis
Sterculia villosa
Triumferta pilosa
Lantana camara
Tectona grandis
Vitex negundo
Vitex negungo
Cissus quadrangularis
Vitis vermifera
Fagonia cretica
Family
Solanaceae
Solanaceae
Solanaceae
Solanaceae
Solanaceae
Solanaceae
Solanaceae
Styraceae
Tiliaceae
Tiliaceae
Tiliaceae
Tiliaceae
Tiliaceae
Verbinacaee
Verbinaceae
Verbinaceae
Verbinaceae
Vitaceae
Vitaceae
Zygophyllaceae
Life Form
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Hemicryptophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
Phanreophyte
Phanerophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Therophyte
Phanerophyte
C3-67

Chapter-3
VEGETATION ON HILL SLOPES NEAR VILLAGE BARENDA
VEGETATION IN BARUKUNDE P.F.

FIGURE-3.9.2
REGENERATING VEGETATION ON HILL SLOPES
C3-68

Chapter-3
SAL PLANTATION NEAR VILLAGE RAHARADIH
EUCALYPTUS PLANTATION NEAR VILLAGE RAGHUNATHPUR

FIGURE-3.9.3
PLANTATIONS OF SAL AND EUCALYTUS
C3-69

Chapter-3
Fauna: With reference to the authenticated map given by the forest department,
Ranchi- Jharkhand it reveals that there are no wildlife sanctuaries, national parks,
biosphere reserves and migratory corridors within the study area. The authenticated
map of the study area is given as Annexure-IV15.
The commonly occurring species in the core zone do not represent a permanent
habitat of any species of conservation importance. Most of the species use this area
as transit and are accidental passersby. The species such as common fox, wild boar
and wild hare were reported to occur in this area.
The commonly occurring avifauna was represented by Indian robin, cattle egret, red
vented bulbul, babblers, spotted munia, cormorant, darter and pond heron. The
most abundant and prevalent species were of collared dove, spotted dove, blue rock
pigeon. The recorded wild animal species in the core and the buffer zone of the
study area and their conservation status as per the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972 is
presented in Table-3.9.4 below.
TABLE-3.9.4
FAUNA FROM THE STUDY AREA
Sr.
Scientific Name
No.
Core Zone
Aves
1
Milyus migrans
2
Corvus splendens
3
Turdoides striatus
4
Pycnonotus cafer
5
Saxicoloides fulicata
6
Columba livia
7
Streptopelia decaocto
8
Streptopelia chinensis
9
Copsychus saularis
10
Acridotheres tristicus
11
Passer domisticus
12
Cinnyris asiatica
13
Megalaima merulinus
14
Eudynamis scolopaceus
15
Centropus sinensis
16
Psittacula Krammeri
17
Coracias benghalensis
18
Merops orinetalis
19
Merops leschenaultia
20
Alcedo atthis
21
Microfus affinis
22
Milvus migrans
23
Bubulcus ibis
24
Ardeola grayii
Reptiles
25
Calotes versicolor
26
Bangarus cirulis
27
Naja naja
English Name/
Local Name
Conservation status as
per WPA (1972)
Common Kite
House crow
Jungle babbler
Red vented bulbul
Indian robin
Blue Rock Pigeon
Collard Dove
Spotted Dove
Magpie Robin
Common myna
House Sparrow
Purple Sunbird
Indian Cuckoo
Koel
Crow Pheasant
Rose ringed parakeet
Indian Roller
Common Bee Eater
Chestnut headed Bee Eater
Common Kingfisher
House swift
Pariah kite
Cattle Egret
Pond Heron
Sch-IV
Sch-V
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-V
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Common garden lizard

Krait
Indian cobra
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Part-IV
Authenticated map of the study area indicating no wild life sanctuaries, national parks, tiger reserve from
the chief wild life warden, Jharkhand as per ToR-9
15
C3-70

Chapter-3
Sr.
Scientific Name
No.
Amphibians
28
Rana tigrina
29
Bufo malanosticus
Mammals
30
Bandicota indica
31
Herpestes edwardii
32
Lepus nigricollis
33
Rattus rattus
34
Canis aureus
35
Presbytis entellus
36
Mucaca mulata
37
Funambulus spp.
38
Vulpus bengalensis
39
Sus scrofa
Butterflies
40
Papilio demoleus
41
Euploea core
42
Neptis hylas
43
Eurema hecabe
44
Catopsilia sp.
Buffer Zone
Aves
1
Milyus migrans
2
Corvus corvus
3
Corvus splendens
4
Turdoides striatus
5
Pycnonotus cafer
6
Pycnonotus jokokus
7
Saxicoloides fulicata
8
Gallus gallus
9
Columbus livibus
10
Streptopelia decaocto
11
Streptopeliachinensis
12
Copsychus saularis
13
Oriolus oriolus
14
Temenuchus pagodarum
15
Acridotheres tristicus
16
Ploceus philippines
17
Uroloncha striata
18
Passer domisticus
19
Cinnyris lotensis
20
Cinnyris asiatica
21
Megalaima merulinus
22
Eudynamis scolopaceus
23
Centropus sinensis
24
Psittacula Krammeri
25
Coryllis vaeralis
26
Coracias benghalensis
27
Merops orinetalis
28
Merops leschenaultia
29
Alcedo atthis
30
Microfus affinis
31
Caprimulgus asiaticus
32
Tylo alba
33
Haliastur indus
34
Milvus migrans
35
Anhinga melanogaster
English Name/
Local Name
Bull frog
Common Toad
Bandicoot
Common mongoose
Hare
House rat
Jackal
Langur
Monkey
Squirrel
Wild fox
Wild Boar
per WPA (1972)
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Part-II of Sch-II
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Part-II of Sch-II
Part-I of sch-II
Part-I of Sch-II
Sch-IV
Part-I of Sch-II
Sch-III
Lime butterfly
Common crow
Common sailor
Common grass yellow
Emigrant
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Common Kite
Jungle crow
House crow
Jungle babbler
Red vented bulbul
White browed Bulbul
Indian robin
Red Jungle fowl
Blue Rock Pigeon
Collard Dove
Spotted Dove
Magpie Robin
Indian Oriole
Brahmny Myna
Common myna
Weaver bird
Spotted munia
House Sparrow
Loten's sunbird
Purple Sunbird
Indian Cuckoo
Koel
Crow Pheasant
Rose ringed parakeet
Lorikeet
Indian Roller
Common Bee Eater
Chestnut headed Bee Eater
Common Kingfisher
House swift
Common Indian Nightjar
Barn Owl
Brahmny kite
Pariah kite
Darter
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-V
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-V
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-V
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-V
C3-71

Chapter-3
Sr.
Scientific Name
No.
36
Egretta garzetta
37
Bubulcus ibis
38
Ardeola grayii
Reptiles
39
Calotes versicolor
40
Chamaleon zeylanicus
41
Bangarus cirulis
42
Naja naja
Amphibians
43
Rana tigrina
44
Bufo malanosticus
Mammals
45
Bandicota indica
46
Rhinolopus spp.
47
Hipposiderus spp.
48
Herpestes edwardii
49
Rattus norvegicus
50
Lepus nigricollis
51
Rattus rattus
52
Canis auries
53
Presbytis entellus
54
Mucaca mulata
55
Funambulus spp.
56
Vulpus benghalensis
57
Sus scrofa
Butterflies
58
Pachliopta hector
59
Papilio demoleus
60
Junoria almana
61
Hypolimnas bolina
62
Euploea core
63
Neptis hylas
64
Eurema hecabe
65
Catopsilia sp.
3.9.8
English Name/
Local Name
Little Egret
Cattle Egret
Pond Heron
per WPA (1972)
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Common garden lizard

Indian chameleon
Krait
Indian cobra
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Part-IV
Bull frog
Bufo
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Bandicoot
Bat
Bat
Common mongoose
Field mouse
Hare
House rat
Jackal
Langur
Monkey
Squirrel
Wild fox
Wild Boar
Crimson rose
Lime butterfly
Peacock pansy
Great eggfly
Common crow
Common sailor
Common grass yellow
Emigrant
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Part-II of Sch-II
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Part-II of Sch-II
Part-I of sch-II
Part-I of Sch-II
Sch-IV
Part-I of Sch-II
Sch-III
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Aquatic Biodiversity
Phytoplankton: Phytoplankton forms the basis of food chain in any aquatic
water body. The diversity and abundance of phytoplankton mainly depends on the
region, type of water body, either lentic or lotic, the nutrient flux in the system
and the sunlight available for photosynthesis. These factors together form the
dynamics of phytoplankton productivity over the seasons. The phytoplankton of a
given water body determines the zooplankton populations and the fish
productivity of the ecosystem.
Phytoplankton group reported from four locations are Basillariophyceae,
Chlorophyceae, Myxophyceae and Euglenophyceae members. About 22 species of
phytoplankton were reported from all the locations. Dominance of Bacillariophyceae
members followed by Myxophyceae were observed in the studied samples. The
highest percentage was Cymbella sp. and Spirulina sp. and the lowest percentage
was of Synedra sp. during study period.
Zooplankton: The zooplankton of the aquatic water body are the primary
consumers and also in cases secondary producers which play an important role
C3-72

Chapter-3
for the fisheries of that system. The diversity and abundance of zooplankton also
depends on whether the water body is eutrophic or oligotrophic. They also are
good representatives of the ecosystem health. The amount and type of pollutants
in the water body determine the type of zooplankton species. Species of copepod
will usually dominate in the tropical region while more eutrophicated waters with
high nutrient or organic loads will harbour high number of crustaceans and
arthropods. The less polluted waters will have more of cladocerans and rotifers.
Percentage composition of zooplankton varied among different locations. Among the
zooplankton group, Brachionous sp (Rotifera) had highest percentage composition
and the lowest percentage composition was of Asplancha sp in the total
zooplankton. Cypris sp and Cyclops sp. also occurred in the sampled water bodies.
On the basis of type of species their proportional dominance and the overall
diversity of both phyto- and zooplankton it can be concluded that water bodies are
oligotrophic to slightly mesotrophic in nature due to inflow and runoff from the
surrounding areas. The list of plankton recorded in fresh water bodies from the
study during the study period are presented in Table-3.9.5 below.
TABLE-3.9.5
LIST OF PLANKTON & ZOOPLANKTON RECORDED DURING STUDY PERIOD
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
3.9.9
Phytoplankton
Pediastrum duplex
Actinastrum sp
Coelatrum sp
Synedra ulna
Synedra acus
Gomphonema sp
Navicula gracilis
Pinnularia sp
Nitzshia sp
Cymbella pucilla
Cymbella cymbiformsis
Cymblella rombhoides
Achnanthes sp
Eunotia sp
Cyclotella sp
Oscillatoria sp
Spinulina sp
Chroococcus sp
Microcystis aerusinosa
Nostoc sp
Rivularia sp
Anabaena sp
Zooplankton
Keratella sp
Diaptomus sp
Daphnia sp
Ceriodaphnia sp
Brachionus sp
Amoeba sp
Diaphanosoma sp
Macrothrix sp
Asplancha sp
Cypris sp
Cyclops sp
Conclusions
From the field observations it can concluded that the forests in the study area are
under high anthropogenic pressure and show signs of degradation in the form of
fragmentation.
C3-73

Chapter-3
As per the MOEF and the forest department, Jharkhand reveals that there are no
wildlife sanctuaries, national parks/biospheres reserves and migratory corridors in
10 km radius from the proposed site boundary. As per the records of the Botanical
Survey of India there are no plants of conservation importance in the study area.
On comparing the checklist given in the Schedule-I of the Wildlife (Protection) Act
1972 and the list of wildlife recorded from the study area, it can be concluded that
there are no schedule-I species found in the study area.
3.10
Demography and Socio-Economics

The demographic and socio- economic conditions prevailing in the 10 km radius of
the proposed project boundary is analyzed. The study area extends to 3 districts
covering 144 villages coming under Sonahatu, Tamar-1, Silli C.D Blocks, of
Ranchi district and Ichagargh C.D Block of Saraikela district in Jharkhand state
and Bagmundi, Jhalda-1 C.D Blocks, of Puruliya district in West Bengal state.
The census data is collected and presented in this section for assessing the
impending impact in the study area. The data is analyzed for developing social
impact management plan not only for preventing, if any, adverse impacts, but
also to take measures for further socio-economic development of the study area
under its Corporate Social Responsibility initiative.
The project proponent is committed to take up the socio-economic development
initiatives not only to minimize the negative impacts, if any, on the population
and also to improve the socio-economic status of population living in 10 km
radius around the project site.
3.10.1 Methodology Adopted for the Study

The methodology adopted for the study mainly includes demographic and socioeconomic conditions and education profile of the project area is analyzed by
reviewing published secondary data (District Census Statistical Handbooks-2011
and Primary Census Abstract of Census-2011) with respect to population, social
stratification, literacy rate and occupational structure for 10 km radius study area.
3.10.2 Review of Demographic and Socio-Economic Profile-2011
The village wise demographic data of the project site as per the 2011 census is
given in Annexure-XV. The salient features of the demographic and socioeconomic conditions are analyzed and described in the following sections.
3.10.3 Demography
The study area of 10 km radius of project site is found to be completely rural
area. The nearest railway station is Suisa which is 7.7 km away from the project
site.
C3-74

Chapter-3
Distribution of Population
As per 2011 census, the study area consisted of 1,47,066 persons inhabited in
144 villages covering in two districts of Jharkhand and one district of West
Bengal. The distribution of population in the study area is shown in Table3.10.1.
TABLE-3.10.1
DISTRIBUTION OF POPULATION
Particulars
No. of households
Male population
Female population
Total population
Male population (0-6 years)
Female population (0-6 years)
Total population (0-6 years)
% of 0-6 years population
Average household size
% of males to the total population
% of females to the total population
Sex ratio (no of females per 1000
males)
Density
0-3 km
6405
14513
14321
28834
2174
2184
4358
15.11
4.50
50.33
49.67
3-7 km
11292
25947
24906
50853
3931
3686
7617
14.98
4.50
51.02
48.98
7-10 km
15042
34389
32990
67379
5274
4937
10211
15.15
4.48
51.04
48.96
0-10 km
32739
74849
72217
147066
11379
10807
22186
15.09
4.49
50.89
49.11
987
232
960
308
959
290
965
282
Average Household Size
The study area has an average household size of 4.49 as per 2011 census.
Population Density
The density of population reveals that the study area has an overall density of 282
persons per km2 (PP km2) as per 2011 census reports.
Sex Ratio
The configuration of male and female indicates that the males constitute to about
50.89% and females to 49.11% of the total population as per 2011 census data.
The study area on an average has 965 females per 1000 males, which is little
higher than the rural sex ratio of both West Bengal and Jharkhand (West Bengal
rural sex ratio 961 and Jharkhand rural sex ratio 953).
3.10.4 Social Structure
In the study area, as per 2011 census, 7.92% of the population belongs to
Scheduled Castes (SC) and 22.00% to Scheduled Tribes (ST). Overall the data of
social stratification reveals that the SC and ST % to population is more than 29%,
which is found to be very significant. The SC and ST community are marginalized
and they are considered at low level of social strata and calls for a special
attention in Social Impact Management Plan for improving their socio-economic
status, apart from preservation and protection of their art, culture and traditional
rights of livelihood.
C3-75

Chapter-3
The distribution of population by social structure is shown in Table-3.10.2.

TABLE-3.10.2
DISTRIBUTION OF POPULATION BY SOCIAL STRUCTURE
Particulars
Schedule caste (SC)
% To the total population
Schedule tribes (ST)
% To the total population
Total SC and ST population
% To total population
Total population
0-3 km
1717
5.95
6694
23.22
8411
29.17
28834
3-7 km
4343
8.54
9118
17.93
13461
26.47
50853
7-10 km
5588
8.29
16547
24.56
22135
32.85
67379
0-10 km
11648
7.92
32359
22.00
44007
29.92
147066
3.10.5 Literacy Levels

The study area has the literacy rate of 54.35% (2011), which is less than national
and state rural literacy rate. The distribution of literate and literacy rate in the
study area is given in Table-3.10.3.
TABLE-3.10.3
DISTRIBUTION OF LITERATE AND LITERACY RATES
Particulars
0-3 km
Male population
14513
Female population
14321
Total population
28834
Male population (0-6 years)
2174
Female population (0-6 years)
2184
Total population (0-6 years)
4358
Male literates
9533
Female literates
5832
Total literates
15365
Male literacy rate (%)
62.04
Female literacy rate (%)
37.96
Average male literacy to the total
population (%)
33.06
Average female literacy to the total
population (%)
20.23
Total literacy rate (%)
53.29
3-7 km
25947
24906
50853
3931
3686
7617
17453
10894
28347
61.57
38.43
7-10 km
34389
32990
67379
5274
4937
10211
22464
13760
36224
62.01
37.99
0-10 km
74849
72217
147066
11379
10807
22186
49450
30486
79936
61.86
38.14
34.32
33.34
33.62
21.42
55.74
20.42
53.76
20.73
54.35
The male literacy i.e. the percentage of literate males to the total literates of the
study area works out to be 61.86%. The percentage of literate female to the total
literates, which is an important indicator for social change, is observed to be
38.14% in the study area as per 2011 census records.
3.10.5.1 Occupational Structure
The occupational structure of residents in the study area is studied with reference
to main workers, marginal workers and non-workers. The main workers include
10 categories of workers defined by the census department consisting of
C3-76

Chapter-3
cultivators, agricultural laborers, those engaged in live-stock, forestry, fishing,

mining and quarrying; manufacturing, processing and repairs in household
industry and other than household industry, construction, trade and commerce,
transport and communication and other services.
The marginal workers are those workers engaged in some work for a period of
less than six months during the reference year prior to the census survey. The
non-workers include those engaged in unpaid household duties, students, retired
persons, dependents, beggars, vagrants etc. institutional inmates or all other
non-workers who do not fall under the above categories.
As per 2011 census records altogether the main workers works out to be 23.68%
of the total population. The marginal workers and non-workers constitute to
27.87% and 48.45% of the total population respectively. The distribution of
workers by occupation indicates that the non-workers are the predominant
population. The occupational structure of the study area is shown in Table3.10.4.
TABLE-3.10.4
OCCUPATIONAL STRUCTURE
Sr.No
1
2
3
4
Particulars
Total population
Total workers
Work participation rate (%)
Total main workers
% of main workers to total
5
population
6
Marginal workers
% of marginal workers to total
7
population
8
Non-workers
% of non-workers to total
9
population
Source: District Census Hand Book-2011
3.11
0-3 km
28834
16295
56.51
6515
3-7 km
50853
25478
50.10
12614
7-10 km
67379
34040
50.52
15698
0-10 km
147066
75813
51.55
34827
22.59
24.80
23.30
23.68
9780
12864
18342
40986
33.92
25.30
27.22
27.87
12539
25375
33339
71253
43.49
49.90
49.48
48.45
Traffic Density Survey

The traffic studies have been conducted to know the prevailing traffic volumes on
the roads in the study area. It is essential to consider these details for assessing the
anticipated future traffic volumes as a part of overall impacts assessment for the
project.
The variations of traffic densities depend upon the working days and time and also
vary in day and night times. In order to assess the prevailing traffic volumes on the
roads, the survey was conducted during normal working days of the week by
avoiding local holidays or abnormal situations to reflect the true picture of the traffic
densities. The traffic study was conducted at one location for 12 hours.
3.11.1 Selection of Sampling Location

The traffic density study was conducted at Tata to Sili Road (near Barenda village)
which is about 1 km away from the project site.
C3-77

Chapter-3
3.11.2 Methodology
3.11.2.1 Vehicular Count
The vehicles plying in both the directions were counted continuously for 12 hours at
one location. The vehicles were counted every hour and recorded under respective
category. The maximum traffic count in an hour is termed as peak hour traffic. The
vehicles were categorized under various heads like trucks/tankers, buses, multi
axles, cars, 2/3 wheelers, cycles and bullock carts.
3.11.2.2 Categorization of Traffic
The engine driven vehicles were categorized into various heads viz. light motor
vehicles (LMV) as two wheelers (scooters, motor cycles etc.), three wheelers
(auto rickshaws, 3-wheel tempo etc.), medium motor vehicles (cars, jeeps),
tractors (6 wheelers), minibuses and mini trucks (8 wheelers); heavy motor
vehicles such as buses, trucks and tankers (10 wheelers).
3.11.3 Results and Discussion
The summary of daily traffic count for the location was monitored during the study
period is summarized in Table-3.11.1 and % of composition of the vehicles are
given in the Table-3.11.2.
It was observed that the 2/3 wheelers, cars/jeeps and trucks/buses forms the
major volume of the traffic. The total traffic PCU of this road is minimal.
3.11.3.1Presentation of Results
The present level of traffic has been converted to Passenger Car Units (PCU) at this
location as per the conversion factors stipulated by Indian Road Congress (IRC).
The Passenger Car Unit (PCU) recorded at the selected traffic location, which is
towards Tata to Sili road is about 698 PCU.
TABLE-3.11.1
TRAFFIC DENSITY (VEHICLES/DAY)
Code
Location
Two Wheelers
(Bicycle/
Scooter/
Motorcycle)
Four
Wheelers
(Car/Jeep)
Tractors
Buses/
Trucks
Multi
Axles
Total
PCUS
Tata to Sili road (near

Barenda village)
381
93
45
52
41
698
Note: PCU rating: (2/3 wheelers: 0.5, Car/Jeep: 1.0, Tractor: 3.0, Buses: 3.0, Trucks/HMV: 3.0)
1
TABLE3.11.2
COMPOSITION OF EXISTING TRAFFIC VOLUME
Code
Note:
Total
No. Of Vehicles
% Composition
Vehicles
LMV
MMV
HMV
LMV
MMV
HMV
T1
612
381
138
93
62.26
22.54
15.20
LMV-Light Motor Vehicles (scooter, motorcycle & auto rickshaw etc.)
MMV-Medium Motor Vehicles (car, jeep, tractor, mini bus, mini trucks)
HMV-Heavy Motor Vehicles (bus, trucks and tankers)
****
C3-78

Chapter-4
Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.0
ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES

This chapter describes the identification of impacts, appraisal of various impacts,
and mitigation measures during construction phase and operational phase. It
further describes the action plan for the control of pollution as per CPCB and
CREP guidelines.
4.1
Identification of Impacts & Mitigation Measures

The environmental impacts can be categorized as either primary impacts or
secondary impacts. Primary impacts are those, which are attributed directly to
the project and secondary impacts are those, which are indirectly induced and
typically include the associated investment and changed pattern of social and
economic activities by the proposed action.
The impacts have been assessed for the proposed integrated steel plant assuming
that the pollution due to the existing activities has already been captured under
baseline environmental monitoring and continue to remain same till the operation
of the project.
The environment management plan is required to ensure sustainable
development in the area of the steel plant. The steel manufacturing processes to
a certain extent are associated with an inevitable negative impact on
environment, but the impacts are within limits and can be easily ameliorated to a
significant extent through adoption of appropriate mitigative measures.
The construction and operation of the proposed integrated steel plant comprises
various activities each of which may have an impact on some or other
environmental parameters. Various impacts during the construction and operation
phase on the environment parameters have been studied to estimate the impact
on the environment and are discussed briefly below and elaborated in the
subsequent sections.
4.2
Impacts & Mitigation Measures during Construction Phase

This includes the activities related to leveling of site, construction of steel plant,
captive power plant, other project related structures and installation of
equipment.
4.2.1 Land Use and Soil Quality

The total plant area is 3800 acres (1538 ha), consisting of 12% of Government
land and 88% of private land and project area consists of 80% agriculture rain
fed single crop and 20% fallow land (including waste land & water body).
Proposed site does not involve any forest area. Clearing of trees/shrubs at some
locations is required during construction phase. However, it is proposed to
develop adequate greenbelt all along the plant boundary and township to improve
the aesthetics of the area. Thus, the overall impact will be beneficial in nature.
The muck generated during excavation and construction phase will be stored and
reused in low lying area and leveling purpose. The excavated soil will be used in
filling up of the foundations and other for leveling purposes within the site
C4-1

Chapter-4
premises. The top soil if any will be stacked in earmarked area and will be used in
greenbelt development at project site.
The land use of plant site which is currently wasteland/single crop agricultural
land will be converted to industrial land use category. This will be an irreversible
impact.
Impact on Soil Quality
The soil at the project site predominantly consists of silt clay. The sub-strata of this
area is not rocky, however for construction of civil foundations, permissions as
required for blasting will be taken from concerned authorities. The contour relief is
about 20 m with mild slopes so the site needs very little grading, filling and leveling.
So there will not be any need for external borrow areas. The project site is gradually
sloping towards south-east.
The construction activities will result in loss of topsoil to some extent in the plant
area and waste disposal area. The topsoil requires proper handling like separate
stacking so that it can be used for green belt development. Apart from very
localized construction impacts at the plant site, no significant adverse impact on soil
in the surrounding area is anticipated.
Mitigation Measures
The following mitigation measures will be adopted for soil and land environment:
After completion of the construction phase, the surplus earth will be utilized to
fill up the low lying areas, the rubble will be cleared and all un-built surfaces
will be reinstated;
The top soil from the excavated areas will be preserved in separate stacks for
re-use during the plantation;
Green belt development and related activities will be taken up so that

plantation will grow to adequate height by the time of plant commissioning.
Thus, green belt will be effective in containing the fugitive emissions during
operation, if any;
Species selected in this plantation will be native, fast growing with rich canopy
and they will be easily adaptable to local conditions. Their ability to combat
localized pollution is the prime factor for their selection and placement in the
planting grid/pattern. Most of the varieties shall be eco-friendly i.e. generate
lot of oxygen while helping reduce/absorb gases and dust;
Entire plant will be aesthetically landscaped and natural gradient will be

maintained to the extent feasible;
There will be minimum concreting of the top surfaces so that there is a scope
for maximum ground water recharge due to rainfall; and
Plantation outside the plant premises, in the nearby villages will be

encouraged by supplying free saplings to the villagers.
C4-2

Chapter-4
4.2.2 Air Quality

During construction phase, particulate matter will be the main pollutant, which
would be generated from the site development activities and vehicular movement
on the road. Further, concentration of NOx and CO will also increase due to
increased vehicular traffic movement. However, the increase in ambient
concentrations of air quality will be negligible. As most of the construction
equipment will be mobile, the emissions are likely to be fugitive and well
dispensed. The dust generated will also be fugitive in nature, which can be
controlled by sprinkling of water.
The impacts will be localized in nature and the areas out side the project
boundary are not likely to have any major adverse impact with respect to
ambient air quality.
Air Pollution Control Measures
The following mitigation measures will be employed during construction period to
reduce the pollution level to acceptable limits.
Proper and prior planning, appropriate sequencing and scheduling of all major
construction activities will be done, and timely availability of infrastructure
supports needed for construction will be ensured to shorten the construction
period vis--vis to reduce pollution;
The construction sites will be adequately camouflaged from outside areas so

that pollution can be confined to the construction site only;
Construction materials will be stored in covered godown or enclosed spaces to

prevent the windblown fugitive emissions;
Stringent construction material handling / overhauling procedures will be

followed;
Truck carrying soil, sand, stone dust, stone will be duly covered to avoid
spilling and fugitive emissions;
Adequate dust suppression measures such as regular water sprinkling at

vulnerable areas of construction sites will be undertaken to control fugitive
dust during material handling and hauling activities in dry seasons;
The construction material delivering vehicles will be covered in order to reduce

spills;
Low emission construction equipment, vehicles and generator sets will be

used;
C4-3

Chapter-4
It will be ensured that all construction equipment and vehicles are in good
working condition, properly tuned and maintained to keep emission within the
permissible limits and engines turned off when not in use to reduce pollution;
Vehicles and machineries would be regularly maintained so that emissions

confirm to standards of Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB);
Monitoring of air quality at regular intervals will be conducted during

construction phase; and
Construction workers will be provided with masks to protect them from

inhaling dust.
4.2.3 Impact on Drainage Pattern

The drainage network in the proposed plant site initiates from the hill range about
1.50 km towards north of the proposed plant site and have up to 3 rd order
streams joining Domra nadi running west-east along the southern boundary and
joining Subarnarekha river. The drainage network in the proposed township area
joins Subarnarekha river.
It is proposed to divert the flow safely in the development area of the plant site
and leave natural course as it is in the open/green belt area maintaining the
natural flow along the boundaries of development within proposed plant site.
4.2.4 Impact Water Resources and Quality
The peak estimated water requirement during construction will be drawn from
ground water (750 m3/day) wells and other sources. The existing tube wells/dug
wells falling in proposed plant area will be utilized to the maximum extent. The
necessary permission for withdrawing ground water for industrial purpose will be
taken.
The wastewater generation during the construction period will be from the
sanitary units provided for the workers. This wastewater will be treated in
packaged sewage treatment plants. The treated wastewater will be used for
greenbelt and dust supression. Hence, there will not be any major adverse impact
on the water regime due to discharge of sanitary treated wastewater.
Mitigation Measures
The plant drainage will be protected or re-routed through well-engineered storm

water drains within the project site. The seasonal Domra river in the south of the
project area will not be diverted. The plant boundary will instead be aligned along
the river boundary.
The earth work (cutting and filling) will be avoided during rainy season and will be
completed during summer season. Stone pitching on the slopes and construction
of concrete drains for storm water to minimize soil erosion in the area will be
undertaken. Settling pond is planned for storage and recycling of surface water
for use in the plant area. Also development of green belt in and around plant will
C4-4

Chapter-4
be taken up during the monsoon season. In-plant roads will be paved to arrest
fugitive dust emission.
Soil binding and fast growing vegetation will be grown within the plant premises
to arrest the soil erosion. Toilets with packaged sewage treatment plants will be
constructed at site for workers.
4.2.5 Noise Environment
Impact due to Noise Levels
construction equipment like dozers, scrapers, concrete mixers, cranes, pumps,
compressors, pneumatic tools, saws, vibrators etc. The operation of these
equipment will generate noise ranging between 85-90 dB (A) near the source at
1-m distance. These noises will be generated within the plant boundary and will
be transient in nature.
Noise Levels Mitigation
Equipments will be maintained appropriately to keep the noise level within 85 dB

(A). Wherever possible, equipment will be provided with silencers and mufflers.
Highly noise intensive construction activities will be restricted to day time only.
Greenbelt will be developed from construction stage. Further, workers working in
high noise areas will be provided with necessary protective devices e.g. ear plug,
ear-muffs etc.
4.2.6 Ecology
During construction vegetation will be disturbed. However, precautions have to be
taken to disturb only to the minimum extent possible. Greenbelt will be developed
phase wise during construction to improve the aesthetic value in the area and to
screen out the fugitive dust generated during construction.
The removal of vegetation from the soil and loosening of the topsoil generally
causes soil erosion. However, such impacts will be confined to the project site and
will be minimized through paving and water sprinkling.
There are not many existing matured trees in the site. However, greenbelt will be
developed surrounding the plant facilities in the open areas. The existing trees will
be preserved to the extent possible.
4.2.7 Impact on Socio-Economic Aspects during the Construction Phase
Any development project which requires using natural resources initially creates
impoverishment of the community in the core zone, if the development is unplanned and without adequately addressing the issue of impoverishment.
Impoverishment risks and reconstruction model that addresses risks in
displacing people, impoverishment because of displacement and reconstructions
must ensure that those relocated to be restored their livelihood. The minimum six
risks identified during socio economic baseline data collection and mitigating the
same are:VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad
C4-5

Chapter-4
Landlessness;
Joblessness;
Homelessness;
Marginalization;
Loss of access to common property; and
Social-disintegration, Loss of kinship.
It is pertinent to mention that these risks combine economic, social and cultural
impoverishment.
Any company undertaking such projects must study these risks in great detail in
order to formulate appropriate strategies and framing development plans to
restore the livelihood of the PAPs. The project proponent of the proposed
integrated steel plant has taken all the possible mitigation measures in
minimizing the any adverse impact on the population in core zone due to the
establishment of the project. Apart from this, a systematic plan is made after
conducting social impact assessment.
4.2.7.1 Positive Impacts of the Project during the Construction Phase
The project study area both core zone and buffer zone population will have
positive impact of the project due to adequate inputs being proposed by the
project proponent besides offering the benefits of royalty and other revenue to
the state exchequer. Any company will have its own community development
policy and would try to implement the same. Company would also be providing
direct employment in the project besides large number of villagers would get
indirect employment due to self-employment opportunities available. Following
direct and indirect employment opportunities will be created during the
construction phase and would further consolidate with more exhaustive
opportunities due to cascading effect of the project establishment.
Construction workers both technical and non-technical;

Development of transportation and travel industry;
Automobile servicing centers;
Hotels and canteens;
Markets and shopping complex;
Labour contractors;
Electricals and maintenance;
Internet, xerox and printing;
Education institutions;
Health services sector;
Earth work and reclamation business;
Diary and goatary industry;
Grocery shops;
Tailoring and barber saloons; and
Other ancillary units will develop in the process of establishing the industry.
These inputs would be in addition to the development of appropriate

infrastructure under various government schemes. The project proponent would
also develop in-house expertise to handle the social issues and take help of
C4-6

Chapter-4
outside voluntary organizations. Besides, the company would make adequate

allocation of budget for taking up socio-economic development programs for
minimizing/mitigating the adverse impacts during the project construction phase.
In nutshell, any major industry launched by any proponent catering to the needs
of project affected population as well as the study area population, would offer a
ray of hope for the betterment of the socio-economic conditions, which will usher
an era of better quality of life and trouble free and smooth operation of any
project. Over a period of time the project study area will convert into an
economic boom and bring in socio-economic change in the project study area
thus bringing down the impoverishment and improving the living conditions.
4.2.8 Storage of Hazardous Materials
The hazardous materials used during construction may include petrol, diesel,
welding gas and paints etc. These materials will be stored and handled carefully
under applicable safety guidelines.
Some of the precautions of storage include the following:
Dyked enclosures shall be provided so as to contain complete contents of the

largest tank;
Diesel and other fuels shall be stored in separate dyke enclosures;
Tanks having a diameter of more than 30 m shall be separated by fire
insulating walls from other storage tanks;
The distance between the storage tanks shall be at least half their height; and
The precautions as suggested under TAC/OISD guidelines will be
implemented.
4.2.9 Facilities for Construction Workforce

The contractor shall be asked to provide following facilities to construction work
force:
First Aid: At work place, first aid facilities will be maintained at a readily
accessible place where necessary appliances including sterilized cotton wool etc.
will be available. Ambulance facilities will be kept readily available at workplace to
take injured person to the nearest hospital.
Potable Water: Sufficient supply of cold water fit for drinking will be provided at
suitable places.
Sanitary Facility: Within the precinct of work place, latrines and urinals will be
provided at accessible place. These will be cleaned at least twice during working
hours and kept in a good sanitary condition. The contractor will conform to
sanitary requirement of local medical and health authorities at all times.
Canteen: A canteen on a moderate scale will be provided for the benefit of
workers.
Security: JSW will provide necessary security to work force in co-ordination with
state authorities.
C4-7

Chapter-4
4.3
Impacts & Mitigation Measures during Operational Phase

The proposed project operation will involve production of 10.0 MTPA of steel and
captive power generation of 900 MW. For the purpose of impact assessment
during the operational phase, the following components have been separately
considered although some of these will be overlapping:
Land use;
Topography and climate;
Air quality;
Traffic;
Water resources and quality;
Noise levels;
Ecology; and
Solid waste management; and
Socio-economic aspects.
4.3.1 Land use

The total plant area is 3800 acres for the entire plant including township. Out of
this, 80% is rain-fed single crop agricultural land and the balance is government
waste land and fallow land. The present land use will be converted into industrial
land use. This will be an irreversible change. Forest land is not involved in the
proposed plant site. The existing trees/shrubs/plantation will be retained to the
extent possible in line with the plant design. Further, suitable greenbelt
development will also be implemented. While change in land use will be an
irreversible impact, the aesthetics will be improved with greenbelt of native
species with rich canopy.
4.3.2 Topography and Climate
The topography of the project site is slightly undulating (220 m-240 m aMSL) with
trees/shrubs present at some places. There will not be much cutting and filling
required for the proposed project. The additional structures such as industrial
buildings, stacks, waste disposal facilities etc. will be constructed. The general
appearance of the site will change into an industrial set-up. The filling
requirements will be met through internal cutting only. There will not be any need
for any external borrow areas. The ground level will be graded to the required
plinth levels. This will be a permanent change at the project site.
The exit temperatures from the stacks will be maintained in the range of ambient
temperature from 50 oC to 200oC, which will have nominal impact. By
implementing the pollution control measures the impact will be localized. The
temperature rise is not likely to have any macro-climatic adverse impacts.
Further, the proposed extensive green belt in the project site will have a
moderating impact on the heat conditions in the project site.
C4-8

Chapter-4
4.3.3 Air Environment

4.3.3.1 Impact on Air Quality
In an integrated steel plant, air pollutants are generated at different stages of
production. Air pollutants may be particulate matter, sulphur dioxide, oxides of
nitrogen etc. The pollutants may be released as point source emission or fugitive
emission. Accordingly it is most expected that there will be some variation in the
emitted pollution load. It is therefore most justified to first assess the anticipated
variation in the emitted pollution load. Once these variations vis--vis increase or
decrease in emitted pollution load are estimated, its impact on air environment
will be assessed and predicted. Major unit wise emission potentials are discussed
below:
a) Beneficiation Plant
Fugitive dust and PM will occur during iron ore loading/unloading point and
transfer points. Adequate water sprinkling system will be provided at suitable
locations to reduce fugitive dust and particulate matter.
b) Sintering Plant
During the process of agglomeration by sintering, waste gases are generated,
which carries along with it particulate matter, oxides of sulphur and nitrogen as
major pollutant.
The waste gases generated during the process stage and cooling of sinter after
passing through an electrostatic precipitator are released to the atmosphere.
Further transportation and handling of different material in the sinter plant area
will also generate dust, for which dust extraction systems will be provided and the
clean air will be discharged through stacks.
c) Pellet Plant
Pelletising turns iron ore fines into balls suitable for feeding into BF and DRI
plants. Impurities are removed from crushed iron ore and is subsequently
moistened and then heated with a binding agent to create "green pellets in
rotating drums or on rotary discs. These green pellets are subsequently dried and
indurated at temperatures of more than 1000 C travelling grate (induration
units). Particulate matter is generated at mixed material drying unit, which is led
to atmosphere through multicyclone-scrubber based de-dusting facility. The
exhaust gases during induration process carries along with it particulate matter,
oxides of sulphur and nitrogen as major pollutant, which will be cleaned in ESP
and will be vented into the atmosphere through common waste gas stack.
d) DRI Plant
DRI is produced in solid phase at 800C1050C using coal/gas as reductant.
The plant is fitted with separate off-gas circuit mainly consisting of dust settling
chamber and after burning chamber (ABC). The gases from ABC are led to waste
heat recovery boilers to generate steam for waste heat power generation. The
C4-9

Chapter-4
exhaust gas carries along with it particulate matter, oxides of sulphur and
nitrogen as major pollutants, are then cleaned in electrostatic precipitator (ESP,
designed for <50 mg/Nm3 dust emission) before lettwqing them out into the
atmosphere through ID fan and stack.
e) Blast Furnace
Flue gas from hot stoves is the main emission source from the operation of blast
furnace. Hot stoves are fired with blast furnace and CO gas for heating air fed to
blast furnace. Flue gas generated in the hot stoves is discharged to the
atmosphere through stacks. This flue gas contains particulate matter (in very
small quantity) and oxides of sulphur and nitrogen. Oxides of nitrogen are formed
due to the high temperature of the stoves.
In addition to the above emissions, fugitive emissions also occur during charging
and in cast house. During charging, normally a sealed charging system is
provided but since the furnace pressure is higher than atmospheric pressure, the
components present in BF gas along with particulate matter may be emitted.
f) Pig Casting
The pig casting facilities will cast surplus hot metal during poor take off of hot
metal from steel melting shop. The casting of pig iron generates fugitive
emissions, mainly arising from contact between hot metal and slag and ambient
oxygen. The main pollutants in the fugitive emissions are particulate matter with
some amount of sulphur dioxide.
g) Slag Granulation Plant (SGP)
The process of treating blast furnace slag involves pouring the molten slag
through a high-pressure water spray in a granulated head. Due to high-pressure
water spray no particulate matter is expected to be emitted.
h) De-sulphurisation
A de-sulphurisation unit for hot metal pre-treatment to ensure consistent supply
of homogenous and low sulphur hot metal to the BOF has been envisaged. The
process of de-sulphurization generates fugitive emissions. The exhaust air
generated in the process is contaminated with particulate matter.
i) Basic Oxygen Furnace (BOF) Shop
The objective of basic oxygen furnace (BOF), in steel making is to burn (oxidise)
the undesirable impurities contained in the metallic feedstock. The main elements
are thus converted into oxides are carbon, silicon, manganese, phosphorus, and
sulphur. The purpose of this oxidation process is:
To reduce the carbon content to a specified level;

To adjust the contents of desirable foreign elements; and
To remove undesirable impurities to the greatest possible extent.
C4-10

Chapter-4
The production of steel by the BOF process is a discontinuous process, which

involves the following steps:
Transfer and storage of hot metal;

Pre-treatment of hot metal (de-sulphurization);
Oxidation in the BOF (de-carburization and oxidation of impurities);
Secondary metallurgical treatment; and
Casting (continuous or/and ingot).
The following emissions of off gases are generally recognized in BOF area:
Oxygen blowing and BOF gas secondary off gases are generated during;
Secondary off-gases are generated during:
Removal of undesirable impurities (to the maximum possible extent);
BOF charging;
Tapping of liquid steel and slag from BOF and ladles; and
Continuous casting.
Air pollution control system comprising of suction hood, duct and bag filters are
provided in the existing BOF, for bulk material charging system, mixer and deslagging systems. However due to different operational problems sometimes the
pollution control systems are not functioning properly. Due to which the fumes
generated due to puffing in the converters escape into the BOF shop. Further, the
fumes generated during charging and tapping of converters are also not
controlled at times. The fugitive emissions in the area will be limited within the
limits given below:
i) Respirable particulate matter: 2000 mg/m3
ii) Suspended particulate matter: 5000 mg/m3
iii) SO2: 250 mg/m3
iv) NOx: 150 mg/m3
j) Secondary Refining Facilities
The secondary refining is not an emission intensive process except for some
fugitive dust emissions during the process. Necessary fume extraction system has
been envisaged for the process.
k) Coke Oven
The operation of a coke oven battery comprises the following activities:
-
Coal charging;
Heating / firing of the chambers;
Coking;
Coke pushing; and
Coke quenching.
During the coke making, heating of the coke oven chambers is carried out by
burning coke oven / BF gas as fuel and the resultant flue gas is led to the stacks.
Excess coke oven / BF gas is transported via pipeline to large gas holders to
utilize these gases for power generation and plant heating needs.
C4-11

Chapter-4
During operation of coke ovens fugitive emissions are also generated during
charging, pushing, and quenching activity. However, CPCB/MOEF prescribed
emission standard for coke oven emission shall be met.
l) Raw Material Handling Complex (RMHC)
Necessary pollution control facilities in the form of dust extraction / dust
suppression system will be provided to restrict the emitted pollutant within
statutory norms. Dust extraction system provided will discharge air after cleaning
to limit the dust content in the emitted air within statutory norms.
m) Captive Power Plant
Fugitive and stack emissions from the power plant will contribute to increase in
concentrations of PM, SO2, and NOx pollutants.
The mitigative measures recommended in the plant are:
Installation of ESP of efficiency more than 99.9% to limit the PM concentrations

below 50 mg/Nm3;
Provision of bi-flue stack of 275-m height for wider dispersion of gaseous
emissions;
Provision of water sprinkling system at raw material storage yard;
Asphalting of the roads within the plant area;
Provision of dust extraction systems at dust generating source;
Developing of greenbelt (100-m wide towards village areas and river course, 50
to 100-m wide towards other area) around the plant to arrest the fugitive
emissions;
Design of control equipment to meet the standards stipulated by CREP;
Online flue gas monitors as well as flue gas flow rates and temperature
measurement shall be provided for all stacks; and
Usage of washed/beneficiated coal will be done.
To control fugitive hydrocarbon emissions, the following measures shall be adopted:
Provision and periodic inspections of mechanical seals in pumps;

Preventive maintenance of valves, flanges, joints, roof vents of storage tanks;
and
Submerged filling of liquid fuel storage tanks.
The fugitive dust emissions shall be controlled by installation of closed conveyor

system along with suitable dust suppression measures.
n) Coal Washery
The raw coal will be transported from Rohne coal mine by rail. The source of air
pollution from the proposed coal washery will be the fugitive dust emissions.
There will not be any stack emission from the washery plant. The proposed coal
washery unit will generate PM from the coal processing operations. The emissions
are not likely to affect the area outside the plant. The emissions of particulate
matter from the coal washery will be controlled by effective dust extraction/dust
suppression system. Dusty air from various material transfer points will be
controlled with dry fog system, which will allow through vent only clean air to the
surrounding environment.
C4-12

Chapter-4
o) Cement Plant
The particulate matter will be the major concern during the cement
manufacturing process. The particulate matter will be emitted through point
source as well as with line source as fugitive emission.
The ambient air quality will be maintained as per the specific Environmental
Management Program and adhered to the gazette notification 16 th November,
2009.
4.3.3.2 Air Modeling
Particulate matter, sulphur dioxide (SO2) and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions
will be the main pollutants in the proposed integrated steel plant. The incremental
ground level concentrations from the proposed facilities have been estimated by
using dispersion modeling.
Details of Mathematical Modelling
For prediction of maximum ground level concentrations (GLCs), the air dispersion
modeling software (AERMOD version 7.1.0) was used. AERMOD is steady state
advanced gaussian plume model that simulates air quality and deposition fields
upto 50 km radius. AERMOD is approved by USEPA and is widely used software.
It is an advanced version of industrial source complex (ISCST3) model, utilizes
similar input and output structure to ISCST3 sharing many of the same features,
as well as offering additional features. The model is applicable to rural and urban
areas, flat and complex terrain, surface and elevated releases and multiple
sources including point, area, flare, line and volume sources.
Dispersion modeling using AERMOD requires hourly meteorological data. Site
specific data recorded during pre-monsoon 2014 at project site is used for
executing modeling studies. The site specific meteorological data is processed
using AERMET processor.
Model Set-up
The model set-up details are presented in Table-4.1 below:

TABLE-4.1
MODEL SET-UP
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Parameter
Model name
Model type
Topography
Averaging time
Source type
Boundary limits
Co-ordinate system
Receptor height
Anemometer
Surface meteorological data
Upper air data
Details
AERMOD (Version 7.1.0)
Steady state gaussian plume air dispersion model
Rural, flat
24 hours
Point source
10 km X 10 km
Uniform polar grid
0
10 m
Site specific data processed by AERMET
Upper air estimator using AERMET processor
Model Input Data
The details of proposed stack emissions in the proposed integrated steel plant are
given in Table-4.2.
C4-13
Chapter-4
TABLE-4.2
DETAILS OF STACK EMISSIONS FROM THE PROPOSED PLANT
Sr.
No.
Plant Name
Pellet Plant
1
Pellet Plant-1
2
Pellet Plant-1
3
Pellet Plant-2
4
Pellet Plant-2
Sinter Plant
1
Sinter Plant-1
2
Sinter Plant-1
3
Sinter Plant-1
4
Sinter Plant-1
5
Sinter Plant-1
6
Sinter Plant-2
7
Sinter Plant-2
8
Sinter Plant-2
9
Sinter Plant-2
10
Sinter Plant-2
DR Plant
1
DR Plant-1
2
DR Plant-1
3
DR Plant-1
Blast Furnace
1
Blast Furnace-1
2
Blast Furnace-1
3
Blast Furnace-1
4
Blast Furnace-1
5
Blast Furnace-2
6
Blast Furnace-2
7
Blast Furnace-2
8
Blast Furnace-2
Coke Oven
Stack Attached to
Pollution
Control
Equipment
Flue
Type
Stack
Height
(m)
Stack
Dia
(m)
Temp
(oC)
Velocity
(m/s)
Flow Rate
(Nm3/hr)
PM
(g/s)
Pellet ESP
Machine Discharge
Pellet ESP
Machine Discharge
ESP
Bag Filter
ESP
Bag Filter
C
DD
C
DD
100
30
100
30
5
1.5
5
1.5
115
45
115
45
27.6
18.7
27.6
18.7
1,500,000
111,220
1,500,000
111,220
Sinter Machine
Dedusting
Sinter Storage Dedusting
Sinter Machine
Dedusting
Sinter Machine
Dedusting
Sinter Storage Dedusting
Sinter Machine
Dedusting
ESP
Bag Filter
Bag Filter
ESP
Bag Filter
ESP
Bag Filter
Bag Filter
ESP
Bag Filter
C
DD
DD
C
DD
C
DD
DD
C
DD
130
65
65
130
65
130
65
65
130
65
7.7
4.5
4
7.7
4.5
7.7
4.5
4
7.7
4.5
190
60
30
190
60
190
60
30
190
60
20.2
7.7
4.5
20.2
7.7
20.2
7.7
4.5
20.2
7.7
Flue gas ejector

Reduction Furnace
Product Silo Dust Collector
Reformer
Bag Filter
DD
40
30
30
4.5
0.9
0.9
180
65
55
Stove
Casthouse East
Casthouse West
Stockhouse
Stove
Casthouse East
Casthouse West
Stockhouse
ESP
Bag Filter
Bag Filter
Bag Filter
ESP
Bag Filter
Bag Filter
Bag Filter
C
DD
DD
DD
C
DD
DD
DD
60
40
40
40
60
40
40
40
3.5
5
5
3.5
3.5
5
5
3.5
200
40
40
40
200
40
40
40
SO2
(g/s)
NOx
(g/s)
20.8
1.5
20.8
1.5
12.5
12.5
-
58.3
58.3
-
2,174,400
396,000
198,000
2,174,400
396,000
2,174,400
396,000
198,000
2,174,400
396,000
30.2
5.5
2.8
30.2
5.5
30.2
5.5
2.8
30.2
5.5
90.6
90.6
90.6
90.6
-
90.6
90.6
90.6
90.6
-
32.6
10.7
12.7
1,228,034
21,562
26,411
0.5
0.3
0.3
95.9
0.1
-
20.6
24.5
24.5
19.7
20.6
24.5
24.5
19.7
450,000
1,650,000
1,650,000
650,000
450,000
1,650,000
1,650,000
650,000
3.8
13.8
13.8
5.4
3.8
13.8
13.8
5.4
3.8
3.8
-
6.3
6.3
-
C4-14
Chapter-4
Sr.
No.
Plant Name
1
Coke Oven-1
2
Coke Oven-1
3
Coke Oven-1
4
Coke Oven-1
5
Coke Oven-1
6
Coke Oven-2
7
Coke Oven-2
8
Coke Oven-2
9
Coke Oven-2
10
Coke Oven-2
Steel Melting Shop
1
SMS-1
2
SMS-1
3
SMS-1
4
SMS-1
5
SMS-1
6
SMS-1
7
SMS-2
8
SMS-2
9
SMS-2
10
SMS-2
11
SMS-2
Reheating Furnace
1
HSM
2
Wire Rod Mill
3
Bar Mill
4
Medium Section Mill
5
Heavy Section Mill-1
6
Heavy Section Mill-1
7
Plate Mill
8
Tin Plate Mill
Cold Rolling Mill
1
Cold Rolling Mill
2
Cold Rolling Mill
Stack Attached to
Flue
Type
Coke Oven Battery-1&2

CO Pushing Emission-1
Ammonia Cracker-1
Ammonia Cracker-1
Pollution
Control
Equipment
ESP
ESP
Bag Filter
Bag Filter
ESP
ESP
ESP
Bag Filter
Bag Filter
ESP
BOF-1
BOF-2
BOF-3
Fume Extraction System
LHF - 3 Nos.
RH - 1
BOF-1
BOF-2
Fume Extraction System
LHF - 2 Nos.
RH - 1
Reheating
Reheating
Reheating
Reheating
Reheating
Reheating
Reheating
Reheating
Furnace-3 Nos.
Furnace
Furnace
Furnace
Furnace
Furnace
Furnace
Furnace
Pickling Line
Annealing Furnace
Stack
Dia
(m)
4.2
4.2
3
3
2
4.2
4.2
3
3
2
Temp
(oC)
Velocity
(m/s)
Flow Rate
(Nm3/hr)
PM
(g/s)
C
C
DD
DD
C
C
C
DD
DD
C
Stack
Height
(m)
165
165
40
40
50
165
165
40
40
50
200
200
55
55
150
200
200
55
55
150
11.9
11.9
20.8
20.8
15.1
11.9
11.9
20.8
20.8
15.1
375,000
375,000
480,000
480,000
120,000
375,000
375,000
480,000
480,000
120,000
ESP
ESP
ESP
Bag Filter
Bag Filter
Bag Filter
ESP
ESP
Bag Filter
Bag Filter
Bag Filter
C
C
C
DD
DD
DD
C
C
DD
DD
DD
60
60
60
40
60
30
60
60
40
60
30
2
2
2
5.5
3
0.6
2.5
2.5
5.5
3
0.8
60
60
60
60
50
60
60
60
60
50
60
14.8
14.8
14.8
20.9
12.8
10.9
15.8
15.8
20.9
12.8
12.4
ESP
ESP
ESP
ESP
ESP
ESP
Bag Filter
Bag Filter
C
C
C
C
C
C
DD
DD
100
80
80
80
80
80
65
47
4.2
3
3
3
3
3
4.5
1.5
293
318
318
325
320
320
300
150
Bag Filter
Bag Filter
DD
DD
30
40
1.2
1.5
45
120
SO2
(g/s)
NOx
(g/s)
5.2
5.2
6.7
6.7
5.2
5.2
6.7
6.7
-
41.7
41.7
8.0
8.0
41.7
41.7
8.0
8.0
-
36.5
36.5
6.67
6.67
36.5
36.5
6.67
6.67
-
150,000
150,000
150,000
1,600,000
300,000
10,000
250,000
250,000
1,600,000
300,000
20,000
2.1
2.1
2.1
13.3
2.5
0.1
3.5
3.5
13.3
2.5
0.2
4.17
4.17
4.17
6.94
6.94
-
8.33
8.33
8.33
13.89
13.89
-
9.5
5.8
5.8
7.1
6.7
6.7
5.1
22.3
250,000
75,000
75,000
90,000
80,000
80,000
150,000
100,000
2.1
0.6
0.6
0.8
0.7
0.7
0.6
1.1
3.5
1.0
1.0
1.3
1.1
1.1
2.1
1.1
6.94
2.08
2.08
2.50
2.22
2.22
6.3
1.9
9.4
9.5
36,000
46,000
0.3
0.5
0.5
1.0
C4-15
Chapter-4
Sr.
No.
Plant Name
3
Galvanizing Line
4
Colour Coating Line
5
Electrical Steel
Lime Plant
1
Lime Plant-1
2
Lime Plant-2
3
Lime Plant-3
4
Lime Plant-4
5
Lime Plant-5
Dolo Plant
1
Dolo Plant-1
2
Dolo Plant-2
Cement Plant
1
Slag Cement Plant
2
Raw mill/ Kiln
3
Cement mill
4
Coal mill
5
Cooler
6
Packer-I
7
Packer-II
8
Packer-III
Captive Power Plant
1
Power Plant-1
2
Power Plant-2
3
Power Plant-3
Incinerator
1
Incinerator-1
2
Incinerator-2
Stack Attached to
Annealing Furnace
CCL
HDGL Stack
Pollution
Control
Equipment
Bag Filter
Bag Filter
Bag Filter
Flue
Type
Stack
Dia
(m)
1.5
1
2
Temp
(oC)
Velocity
(m/s)
Flow Rate
(Nm3/hr)
PM
(g/s)
DD
DD
DD
Stack
Height
(m)
40
40
65
120
40
150
4.2
18.6
12.6
20,000
50,000
100,000
SO2
(g/s)
NOx
(g/s)
0.2
1.4
0.2
0.6
0.4
1.1
Kiln
Kiln
Kiln
Kiln
Kiln
Bag
Bag
Bag
Bag
Bag
Filter
Filter
Filter
Filter
Filter
DD
DD
DD
DD
DD
55
55
55
55
55
2
2
2
2
2
130
130
130
130
130
14.4
14.4
14.4
14.4
14.4
120,000
120,000
120,000
120,000
120,000
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.17
0.17
0.17
0.17
0.17
Kiln
Kiln
Bag Filter
Bag Filter
DD
DD
55
55
2
2
130
130
14.4
14.4
120,000
120,000
1.0
1.0
0.30
0.30
0.17
0.17
ESP
ESP/Bag House
ESP/Bag House
ESP/Bag House
ESP/Bag House
ESP/Bag House
ESP/Bag House
ESP/Bag House
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
40
100
35
62
62
30
30
30
1.5
5.0
1.4
2.3
4.5
0.8
0.8
0.8
60
140
90
40
230
40
40
40
10.5
15.0
7.0
7.0
12.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
60,000
212.0
8.8
27.6
112.6
3.3
3.3
3.3
69.4
-
192.1
-
CPP-1
CPP-2
CPP-3
ESP
ESP
ESP
C
C
C
275
275
275
5.5
5.5
5.5
150
150
150
24.9
24.9
24.9
1,500,000
1,500,000
1,500,000
41.7
41.7
41.7
500.0
500.0
500.0
333.3
333.3
333.3
Incinerator-1
Incinerator-2
ESP
ESP
C
C
30
30
0.5
0.5
50
50
9.2
9.2
6,000
6,000
0.1
0.1
0.20
0.20
0.33
0.33
SCP
Kiln
Cement mill
Coal mill
Cooler
Packer-I
Packer-II
Packer-III
0.8
10.6
0.44
1.38
5.63
0.17
0.17
0.17
Source-JSW
ESP- Electro Static Precipitator, HSM-Heavy Section Mill, CPP-Captive Power Plant, SCP- Slag Cement Plant, SMS- Steel Melting Shop
C4-16

Chapter-4
The simulations have been carried out to evaluate SO2, NOx and PM likely to be
contributed by the proposed integrated steel plant. For the short-term
simulations, the concentrations were estimated to obtain an optimum description
of variations in concentrations over the site in 10 km radius covering 16
directions. The predicted results for PM, SO 2 and NOx are presented in Table-4.3
and isopleths showing the incremental concentrations are shown in Figure-4.1 to
Figure-4.3.
TABLE-4.3
PREDICTED SHORT-TERM MODELLING RESULTS (24-HOURLY)
Pollutants
Particulate matter (PM10)
Sulphur dioxide (SO2)
Nitrogen oxides (NOx)
Maximum Incremental
Levels (g/m3)
18.41
44.05
39.46
Distance
(km)
1.4
2.8
2.8
Direction
SE
SE
SE
Resultant Concentrations after Implementation of Expansion Project
The resultant concentrations after the implementation of the proposed integrated

steel project are given in Table-4.4.
TABLE-4.4
RESULTANT GROUND LEVEL CONCENTRATIONS (24-HOURLY)
Pollutant
PM (PM10)
SO2
NOx
Max
Baseline
52.7
12.2
16.0
Concentrations (g/m3)
Incremental
Resultant
Concentration
18.41
71.11
44.05
56.25
39.46
55.46
NAAQS Limits
100
80
80
The incremental concentrations when superimposed over the existing maximum

baseline concentrations, the resultant concentrations are observed to be within
the permissible levels for residential/rural conditions. The Resultant concentration
for PM10, SO2 and NOx are observed as 71.11 g/m3, 56.25 g/m3 and 55.46
g/m3 respectively.
C4-17
Chapter-4
PROJECT TITLE:
COMMENTS:
ug/m^3
Incremental Concentrations for PM
8000
SOURCES:
73
18.410
6000
441
2
4
OUTPUT TYPE:
Concentration
4000
-2000
12
-4000
-8000
-6000
UCART1
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
PLOT FILE OF HIGH 1ST HIGH 24-HR VALUES FOR SOURCE GROUP: ALL
2000
16.000
-10000
RECEPTORS:
MAX:
18.41448 ug/m^3
12.000
MODELER:
Mr. Janardhan and

Mr. Kishore kumar
8.000
SCALE:
1:138,000
4 km
4.000
PROJECT NO.:
2.000
FIGURE-4.1
SHORT TERM 24 HOURLY INCREMENTAL GLCS OF PM
AERMOD View - Lakes Environmental Software
C4-18
Chapter-4
PROJECT TITLE:
COMMENTS:
ug/m^3
Incremental Concentrations for SO2
8000
SOURCES:
44.060
70
10
6000
RECEPTORS:
40.000
441
4000
OUTPUT TYPE:
Concentration
20
25
-2000
15
10
25
15
-4000
-6000
20
15
-8000
10
UCART1
-10000
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
15
10
2000
30
35.000
10
10
MAX:
44.05551 ug/m^3
30.000
25.000
MODELER:
Mr. Janardhan and

Mr. Kishore kumar
20.000
SCALE:
1:138,000
4 km
15.000
10.000
PROJECT NO.:
5.000
FIGURE-4.2
SHORT TERM 24 HOURLY INCREMENTAL GLCS OF SO2
C4-19
Chapter-4
PROJECT TITLE:
COMMENTS:
ug/m^3
Incremental Concentrations for NOx
10
8000
SOURCES:
39.460 70
6000
10
RECEPTORS:
441
4000
35.000
OUTPUT TYPE:
Concentration
10
30
15
-2000
25
20
25
10
-4000
20
15
-6000
-8000
10
UCART1
-10000
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
MAX:
15
10
2000
15
10
30.000 39.46267 ug/m^3
25.000
MODELER:
Mr. Janardhan and

Mr. Kishore kumar
20.000
SCALE:
15.000
1:138,000
4 km
10.000
PROJECT NO.:
5.000
FIGURE-4.3
SHORT TERM 24 HOURLY INCREMENTAL GLCS OF NOx
C4-20

Chapter-4
4.3.3.3 Air Pollution Control Measures

The air pollution control system proposed in the proposed integrated steel plant is
given below:
During the design phase, all efforts have been made to adopt latest state of art
technology and to install adequate pollution control measures for different
processes and de-dusting stacks and for different fugitive emission sources.
During the construction phase of the proposed project appropriate mitigation
measures will be implemented to ameliorate the anticipated air quality problems.
The following mitigation measures will be employed during operation period to
reduce the pollution level to acceptable limits:
Bag filter based DE system in BF with gas cleaning plant;

Bag filter based DE system for ground based pushing emission control in coke
oven battery;
Dry fog type DS system for material handling junction points;
Fume extraction system for BOF & LF along with gas cleaning plant;
Dust extraction system in sinter plant;
Dedusting system in lime & dolo plant;
Stack monitoring to ensure proper functioning of different major stacks;
Air monitoring in the work-zone to ensure proper functioning of fugitive
emission control facilities;
Adequate plantation in and around different units;
confirm to the applicable standards;
Monitoring of ambient air quality through online AAQ monitoring system at
two locations; and
Workers will be provided with adequate protective measures to protect them
from inhaling dust.
Additional Recommendations
Good house keeping shall be maintained in the plant premises; road sweeping
machine shall be used to clean road;
The trucks and other vehicles shall be maintained and serviced regularly to
reduce air emissions; and
Usage of respiratory protective equipment by all employees to be ensured.
In deciding upon the type of respiratory protection to be provided, due regard

should be given to the levels of dust in air, the type of work and its duration, the
ease of its use to encourage it to be worn and maintenance considerations which
would clearly have a bearing on costs (i.e. disposable or non-disposable face
masks, air stream helmets or face masks).
C4-21

Chapter-4
The arrangement for the storage, issue, collection and maintenance of respiratory
protective equipment should be located in an uncontaminated place and easily
accessible by employees.
4.3.3.4 Fugitive Dust Emissions & Control Measures1
The following technologies and requirements as per CPCB guidelines are
recommended for control of dust and fugitive emissions for the proposed project.
These will be strictly implemented.
Sr. No
1
Coke Ovens
In
coke
ovens,
the
volatile
materials released during cooking
flows from the oven to the byproduct plants where ammonia,
benzol, xylene, toluene, tar, pitch
and tar acids are recovered. The
operations are associated with
fugitive and stack emissions. The
PAH compounds released during
cooking
operation
as
fugitive
emissions
are
carcinogenic
in
nature.
The
technologies
available
control the pollution are
Requirements
Land based pushing and charging

emission
control
with
dust
extraction system;
Automation for process operations
Self sealing air cooled doors;
Possibility of coke dry quenching

needs to be tried out;
Effluent treatment plant to treat

cyanide, phenol, ammonia, COD
etc;
Hazardous waste (tar sludge and

ETP sludge) handling and disposal
following
hazardous
waste
handling, rules; or, tar sludge /
ETP sludge charging along with the
coal fines in the coke ovens.
to
HPLA system
Hydraulic door and door frame
cleaner
Doors with double knife edge
and rope sealing
Water sealed AP caps
Screw feeder
Sintering Plant

for process emissions
3
4

for work zone environment
Thermal Power Plant
ESP for the emissions
Steel Melting Shop
ESP/ bag filter wet scrubber for

the process emissions
Effluent treatment comprising

settling unit and re-circulation
system for the treated effluent
Blast Furnace
ESP / bag filter / wet scrubber for
air emissions
ESP / bag filters with higher efficiency

of removal for process emissions.
Proper management and utilization of

fly ash
Proper operation and maintenance of
air emission control and effluent
treatment systems
Proper operation and maintenance

of ESP / bag filter / wet scrubber
for air emissions
BF slag utilization
An action plan to control and monitor secondary fugitive emissions as per ToR-39
C4-22

Chapter-4
Sr. No
6
7
8
Lime Dolomite Plant
ESP, bag filter / multiclones for
process and work zone dust
emissions
Raw Material Handling Units
Enclosures and water sprinkling
system
Cement Plant
ESP, bag filter / multiclones for
process and work zone dust
emissions
Requirements
process and work zone dust emissions
Improvements in the systems
controlling fugitive emissions
for

process and work zone dust emissions
Source: Central Pollution Control Board
Specific Measures to Control Fugitive Emissions
Coke Oven and By-Product Plant

To minimize fugitive emissions from the coke ovens during charging, high pressure
ammonia liquor aspiration (HPLA) system has been considered for effective onmain charging. The oven doors would be provided with special type of sealing
device. The coke side fugitive emission would be controlled by providing land
based pushing emission control system, integrated with coke transfer car.
Computerized combustion Control System (CCS) has been envisaged for the coke
ovens to improve efficiency of combustion.
The measures considered to control the fugitive or secondary emissions from the
coke oven batteries for the proposed project is described below:
a. High Pressure Ammonia Liquor Aspiration (HPLA) System
To control charging emission from coke oven battery, high-pressure ammonia
liquor aspiration system (HPLA) has been envisaged. It shall consist of highpressure multistage booster pumps for ammonia liquor, spray nozzles and
pipelines. The low pressure ammonia liquor will be drawn from the liquor mains,
pressurized to about 30 35 kg /cm2 and injected into gooseneck while charging.
The charging gases evolved will be sucked into the gas collecting mains,
preventing emission of dust and smoke into the atmosphere. HPLA system will be
complete with pumps, HP nozzles, LP nozzles, goosenecks, pipes, valves & fittings,
electric and instrumentation.
b. Coal Charging Cars
JSW has intended to provide charging cars fitted with screw feeders and
hydraulically pressed sleeves. Feeding of coal into oven will be carried out with
control speed by screw feeders. During charging hydraulically pressed sleeves will
be helping to eliminate leakage around charging holes. The charging cars will be of
modern single spot type with hydraulic drives to cater to the needs. The charging
cars will be provided with PLC and air-conditioned operators cabin. The charging
cars will also be equipped with oven top vacuum cleaner, which will help in proper
up keeping of oven top.
C4-23

Chapter-4
c. Hydro Jet Door Cleaners

During the coking process in the ovens, the bitumen separates out mainly at the
bottom of the oven and if there are any gaps in the door seal, coal tar oozes out of
the door. At times, it is impossible to get the door back onto the oven because of a
buildup of bitumen in the faces. This results in leaking doors allowing coal gas and
sulphurous fumes to escape to the surrounding. It is therefore required to
maintain clean door. JSW have envisaged to provide hydraulic door cleaner system
to reduce the pollution and improved working environment. The system will be
complete with high-pressure water pump, tank, hose, nozzles etc. with pressure
and volume control arrangement. The hydro jet cleaning system will be used for
door and the doorframe cleaning with facility of hydro pressure up to 600 Kg/cm.
d. Leak Proof Oven Door
Leak proof oven door will be installed the coke oven batteries. Doors will be leak
proof with flexible sealing strips and other modified features to ensure leak proof
sealing. The doors shall be of heat resistant cast iron provided with spring-loaded
latches and spring loaded sealing strips.
e. Pushing Emission Control (PEC)
Pushing emission control (PEC) system has been envisaged to capture the
emission of hot coke dust and other pollutants when coke side door of a coke oven
is opened and coke is pushed out of the oven and dropped into the coke car. In
the PEC system the dust recovery hood unit /assembly will consists of two suction
hoods and connecting duct piece. The coke car hood will extend over the hot coke
car and shall be open to the top face of the hot coke car as well as to the
discharge face of the coke guide car. This hood will suck dust-laden gas when hot
coke is dropped from coke guide car into the hot coke car during coke pushing
operation and will be a part of the coke guide car machine. The other suction hood
i.e the oven door hood will be movable inside a telescopic sleeve and will move
/extend over oven door area to extract smoke and dust arising /emitting when the
door is taken off the oven for coke pushing operation. The telescopic sleeve of the
oven door hood and the coke car hood will be joined into a connecting duct piece
which will be extended over stationary collecting duct positioned along the full
length of the coke oven battery. The collecting duct will be open on top for its full
length. The opening will be internally braced with grating to provide support for a
special high temperature rubber belt. The actual connection between the moving
dust recovery hood unit / assembly and the stationary collecting duct will be
achieved by means of belt raising tripper car movable on the collecting duct along
the length of the collecting duct.
The pushing emission thus collected in the moving suction hoods and evacuated
into the stationary collecting duct will be taken into a dust control system (wet
scrubber / bag filter) before discharging through a stack / chimney of suitable
height.
C4-24

Chapter-4
f. Dry-fog Dust Suppression System in Coke Cutter / Coke Conveyor

When temperature of the coke reaches normal, dry fog type dust suppression
system is proposed for the coke cutting house / coke conveyor transfer points to
suppress the coke dust and other dust particles in the major areas like transfer
towers, coke crushing station, coke screening station, etc.
The dual fluid dust suppression "DFDS" (water atomization with compressed air)
dust control system works on the principle of agglomeration. Dust particles
released from a material handling or processing plant, which become air borne,
are made to pass through a blanket of extremely fine fog. The dust particles and
the micro-sized fog droplets collide and adhere to each other, thus increasing their
mass. After a series of such collisions, the mass becomes heavy enough to cause
settlement of the agglomerates on to the larger mass of the material being
handled.
The "DFDS" (water atomization with compressed air) dust control system is
envisaged for controlling the dust generated during material transfer at junction
houses. This system has been envisaged based on the consideration that micronic
fugitive dust is generated during handling of material in these areas, which is
hazardous for the people working in the work zone, and can best be controlled
effectively by the "DFDS" type dust control system.
Basic principle of the system is based on the fact that if water droplets of
approximately the same size as the dust particles are produced, the probability of
collision between the two is extremely high. On the other hand, if the droplets
exceed the size of dust particles, possibility of collision decreases rapidly. The
DFDS system uses an air driven acoustic oscillator nozzle, which is capable of
producing super fine atomization of water droplets that greatly increase the dust
particle to water droplet contact resulting in settlement of dust. The fine droplets
evaporate before wetting anything but the dust. The water addition is 0.1% of the
weight of material being handled. These atomized water droplets are best
described as "fog". Since it does not wet the product, the system is called "dry
fog".
Coal Handling and Coke Sorting Plant
The following air pollution control system will be installed in coal handling and coke
sorting plant:
Water sprinklers for wagon tipplers;

Dust extraction system (bag filter based) for coal crusher house;
Dust suppression system at crusher feeding point Duel Fluid Dust
Suppression (DFDS);
DFDS dust suppression system (compressed air and water) for coal handling
plant; and
Dust extraction system with bag filter in coke sorting plant.
C4-25

Chapter-4
Raw Materials Handling (RMHS) Section

To control the fugitive dust emissions at the stock piles on the ground, conveyor
transfer points, vibrating screens, etc which would be major source of fugitive
dusts, both water sprinkling and dry fogging (DFDS) would be adopted for dust
suppression. The DFDS system generates a layer of fine water droplets (fog) that
a dust particle cannot pass through without colliding with water droplet. It does
not use any chemicals as dust suppressant agent. DF requires only compressed
air and water pressure for atomization through specially designed nozzles. DF is
applicable for coal dusts, coke dust, ore dust etc which are non-reactive with
water if the material is not hot.
For lime dust abatement, conventional dust extraction (DE) would be adopted. The
dust extraction system will comprise of pulse jet type bag filter, centrifugal fan
with motor and other accessories, suction hood, duct work, stack, etc. will be
provided. The pollution control facility at RHMS can be summarized as:
Stock pile & wagon tripler plain water spray;

Rest all transfer point DFDS;
All crusher house bag filter based dust extraction; and
DE system with bag filters in case of crusher house of lime/dolo handling plant.
Blast Furnace Stock House and Cast House De-dusting System

The DE system based on fabric filter / electrostatic precipitator (ESP) would be
provided for room air cleaning such as BF stock house and BF cast house fume
extraction.
The fans will suck the air from the hoods of the working cast house and there will
be no suction from hoods of the standby cast house except partial suction of air
from tap hole. Pneumatic / electrically operated dampers will be provided in duct
line to prevent idle suctions from non-working cast house. Variable inlet vane type
pneumatic / electrically operated dampers are also to be provided at fan inlet.
Air laden with fumes of iron oxides will be cleaned in electrostatic precipitator
before being discharged into atmosphere through stack with the help of centrifugal
fans. The centrifugal fans are to be provided after ESP and before stack for
sucking the air. The suction will be taken from different points like tap hole,
skimmer, slag runner, iron runner, tilting runners and from BF top charging
conveyor discharge. Dust concentration of inlet air to ESP is 3-5 gm/ Nm3.
Collected dust at ESP hoppers will be taken to storage hopper and from there dust
will be disposed by truck. Clear height below storage hopper shall be 4.5 m to
facilitate truck entry.
Dust concentration at stack outlet shall be less than 50 mg/Nm. Work zone dust
concentration will not exceed 5 mg/Nm.
C4-26

Chapter-4
Steel Melting Shop (SMS)

Material handling operations in the SMS would be one of the prime sources of
fugitive dust emissions during material handling operations, charging / tapping /
blowing, argon rinsing, steel pouring, deslagging etc. Air pollution control system
comprising of suction hood, duct and bag filters are provided in the SMS for bulk
material charging system, mixer, desulphurization and LF.
Lime and Dolomite Plant
In lime and dolomite plant - raw material bunker building, lime / dolo sizing plant,
dust extraction (plant de-dusting system) system will be provided. In lime/
dolomite DE system will comprise of pulse jet type bag filter, centrifugal fan with
motor and other accessories, suction hood, duct work, stack, etc.
Point Source Dust Emission Control
Wherever there is fuel gas fired combustion systems like coke oven batteries, BF
stoves and reheating furnace of mills where cleaned fuel gases are used as fuel,
no dust emission control devices are proposed.
Process Dust Emission Control
In case of BF, BOF top gas having calorific value and contains large amount of
dust. To clean the gas wet scrubbing / ESP will be installed for cleaning fuel gases.
However, as per process requirement at regular intervals fuel gases will be burnt
in the flare stacks. All efforts will be made to utilize the fuel gases.
In case of sinter plant and lime / dolo kilns, the waste gases contain large amount
of dust and will require ESP/bag filter to arrest the particulates and emit the clean
flues to the atmosphere. The ESP/bag filters will be designed to limit the emissions
to less than 50 mg/Nm3. However, in order to meet the statutory ground level
concentration limits for SO2, NOx and other gaseous pollutants, suitable stack
heights will be provided for proper dispersion. All stacks will be provided with porthole and working platform so that stack monitoring can be done as per norms of
statutory authority.
All bag filters will have bags with non-adhesive coating to avoid blinding of bags
and no air infiltration into bag house including ducting will be ensured. However,
the suitability of non-adhesive coating for specific application will be examined
during detailed engineering. Pug mills will be provided below dust silos to prevent
secondary pollution / fugitive emission during unloading of dust. The collected dust
from bag filters will be transported to nearby material handling system. In case
this is not feasible, the same will be transported by trucks to consumer points such
as sinter plant or the plant dump.
Pellet Plant
There will be dust suppression system for raw material preparation, handling and
different material transfer points in pellet plant. Mixed material drying unit (rotary
C4-27

Chapter-4
kiln): Multi cyclone-scrubber based de-dusting facility; and Induration unit: ESP
based de-dusting facility.
DR Plant
The crushing and screening operation for raw material preparation will be carried
out in enclosed area. Centralized de-dusting facility (collection hood and suction
arrangements followed by suitable de-dusting units with bag filter or ESP and the
emissions will be finally discharged through stack.
Water sprinkling arrangement will be provided at raw material heaps and on land
around the crushing and screening units.
Belt conveyors and transfer points of belt conveyors will be provided with
enclosures to control fugitive dust emission. Water sprays/ sprinklers will be
provided at strategic locations for dust suppression during raw material transfer.
Blast Furnace
A number of measures have been considered to control the emission from the
blast furnaces:
Coal Dust Injection (CDI)
Coal dust injection (CDI) in BF has been planned at the rate of about 150 kg/t hot
metal. The CDI has an economic as well as an environment advantage. Direct
injection of coal as reducing agent facilitates replacing part of the required coke. It
is considered that for every kg of coal dust injected approximately 0.8 kg of coke
requirement is reduced.
Coal dust injection system will be introduced involving handling, screening and
drying and pulverisation system for coal. During this handling and drying, dust will
be generated. To control this dust, dust extraction system comprising bag filter
(pulse jet type), fan, suction hood, duct and stack have been envisaged.
Gas Cleaning System
A gas cleaning plant (GCP) comprising of dust catcher, scrubber and wet ESP will
be installed.
BOF Convertors / LF and BOF Gas Cleaning System
The dust cleaning (of primary gases) system will be of venturi scrubber type.
Secondary Refining
During secondary refining process, the gases generated during mixing and
desulphurization process will be contaminated with dust. A centralised secondary
dust and fume extraction system for converters and LFs will comprise of bag filter
suction hood, ducts and stacks.
C4-28

Chapter-4
4.3.3.5 Gaseous Emission Control

SO2 Emission Control
The main sources of sulphur dioxide from the steel plant operations are the
metallurgical coal used in the coke ovens. In consideration to this, it is proposed to
use low sulphur blended coal (S < 0.5 w/w). A major portion of sulphur present in
coal or coke would be fixed in BF and BOF slag. The balance sulphur in the form of
H2S is present in coke oven gas would be partly removed in the byproducts plant
to 3 4 gm/N cum of H2S. For power generation, it is envisaged to use relatively
sulphur free fuel gases hence no significant emissions from power plants are
envisaged. The other source of sulphur dioxide emissions is from the sinter plant,
where the sulphur present in coke is reflected as sulphur dioxide in the waste
gases. The emissions can be reduced by using metallurgical coal with low sulphur
(<0.5%) and also be incorporating waste heat recovery systems.
NOX Emission Control
The source of NOx is fixed nitrogen in coal. During coking, nitrogen is converted to
ammonia and is present in coke oven gas. The ammonia is removed in the
byproducts plant, so that the generation of NOx is reduced in furnaces where coke
oven gas is used as fuel.
Other than NOx, there would be thermal NOx during combustion of fuels. It is
therefore proposed to have combustion control devices by adopting waste gas
recirculation and introducing secondary air in the combustion process. Low NOx
burners will be installed so as to minimize the formation of NOx in combustion
process.
Carbon Monoxide Emission Control
The source of carbon monoxide generation is from the waste gases from the
combustion operations. The control of air/fuel will be adjusted in such a way that
formation of carbon monoxide is minimised in presence of excess oxygen in the
flues.
4.3.3.6 Control of Secondary Fugitive Emissions
This section of the report presents details on the fugitive and potential emissions
and control of the emissions at the site.
Fugitive Emission Sources
Fugitive emission sources from this project are associated with various activities
which are summarized as below:
Transfer of raw materials from the point of extraction to storage, handling and
processing locations along roads;
Unloading of materials;
Material conveying between processing stages; and
C4-29

Chapter-4
Wind blow across exposed surfaces inactive or undisturbed wind erosion.
Prevention and Control of Fugitive Emissions
For the purpose of effective prevention and control of fugitive emissions, the plant
will implement the following measures:
Unloading Section
Measures for effective prevention and control of fugitive emissions to be provided
for the unloading section are given in Table-4.5.
TABLE-4.5
CONTROL MEASURES IN THE UNLOADING SECTION
Sr.
No.
1
Control Measures
Proposed
Enclosure
would
be
provided for all unloading
operations
Water shall be sprayed on

the material prior and
during unloading
Details
The enclosures for the unloading sides could be
flexible curtain type material covering up to
height of dumpers discharge from the roof.
A dust suppression system would be provided
through spray water. The amount of water
sprayed would preferably be optimized by
employing proper design of spray system.
Suitable systems will be adopted to reduce the
problems like choking, jamming of the moving
parts.
Material Handling Section

for the material handling section are given in Table-4.6.
TABLE-4.6
CONTROL MEASURES IN THE MATERIAL HANDLING SECTION
Sr. No.
1
3
4
Control Measures
Proposed
All transfer point locations
would be fully enclosed.
Airborne dust at all transfer
operations / points would
be controlled either by
spraying
water
or
by
extracting to bag filter.
Belt
conveyors
would
preferably be closed.
Fugitive emissions will be
generated
mainly
from
transfer
and
junction
Details
The enclosures from all sides with the
provision for access doors, which shall be
kept, closed during operation. Spillages would
be periodically removed.
Either water spray system would be provided
for suppressing the air borne dust or dry
extraction cum bag filter with adequate
extraction volume.
This will avoid wind blowing of fines.
Bag filters will be provided with appropriate
suction devices to control the fugitive
emissions.
C4-30

Chapter-4
Sr. No.
Control Measures
Proposed
points, product hopper area
and loading points.
Details
In area where provision of bag filter and other
control device is not feasible, waterspraying
arrangements shall be made, particularly
manganese / dolomite /coke yard, wagon
tippler and truck tippler.
Storage of Slag and GCP Dust

for the storage of slag, GCP dust are given in Table-4.7.
TABLE-4.7
CONTROL MEASURES IN THE STORAGE OF SOLID WASTE
Sr. No.
1
Control Measures Proposed

The storage would be done
under covered shed.
GCP dust shall be stored in
silos only.
Details
The enclosure walls shall cover minimum
two sides up to roof level.
The dry GCP dust would be sent to closed
silos and will be reused in the sinter plant.
Roads
for the roads are given in Table-4.8.
TABLE-4.8
CONTROL MEASURES ON THE ROADS
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Control Measures Proposed
Details
All roads on which vehicle

movement of raw materials or
products take place would be
paved.
Limiting the speed of vehicles.
The paved roads would be maintained as

paved at all times and necessary repairs to be
done immediately after damages to the road if
any.
Limiting the speed of vehicle to 10 km/hr for
heavy vehicles with in the plant premises to
prevent the road dust emissions.
Preventive measures include covering of trucks
and paving of access areas to unpaved areas.
Employing preventive measures

to minimize dust build up on
roads.
Carry out regular sweeping of
roads to minimize emissions.
Accumulated dust shall be
removed / swept regularly and
water the area after sweeping.
Mitigative controls include vacuum sweeping,

water flushing.
Any deposits of dust on the roads would be
cleaned regularly by sweeping machines.
4.3.3.7 Summary of Proposed Air Pollution Control (APC) Measures

In line with the above stated proposals for air pollution prevention and control of
the emissions from proposed production facilities, a summarized list of required
C4-31

Chapter-4
APC measures is presented in Table 4.9. Air pollution control measures envisaged
above will be designed suitably so as to meet the air emission norms. The table
indicates design target and control measures at respective sources.
TABLE-4.9
EMISSION NORMS FOR AIR POLLUTION CONTROL (APC) MEASURES
Sr.
No
1
Production
Unit/
Facilities
Coal
handling
/
coke sorting
plant
Raw
materials
handling
section
Coke oven
battery
Proposed Emission Control Devices

Non-Point Sources
Point Sources
Dust
suppression:
water sprinkler & DFDS
-DE system bag filter
based:
coal
crusher
house / coke sorting
plant.
- Covered conveyor
- Dry fogging
- Water sprinkling
- Bag filter - DE system
- On-main charging by
HPLA
Coke
side
dust
extraction
Dust outlet: 50 mg/N

m3 Work zone dust
level: < 5 mg/m3
DE stacks

m3 Work zone dust
level: < 5 mg/m3
Combustion stack
- Waste flue gas

cleaning by ESP
- Sinter process
de-dusting by ESP
- Sinter process:
low NOx burners
-Multicyclonescrubber
based
de-dusting
for
drying unit.
-ESP
for
induration unit.
-DR plant feed
end ESP.
-DR plant product
discharge end bag
filter/ESP
- BF stove stack
- BF stove : low
NOx burners
Fugitive emissions:
5% PLD
1% PLL
4% PLO
BaP:
Work
zone
(Battery
top) : 5 ug/m
Other units in coke
ovens:
2 ug/m
Stack emissions:
PM 50 mg/m3
SO2 800 mg/m3
NOx 500 mg/m3
m3
Work zone dust
level: < 5 mg/ m3
Sinter plant
Raw
feed
proportioning building,
sinter
cooler,
air
cleaning by DE system
comprising of ESP
Pellet plant
Dust
suppression
system for raw material
preparation & handling.
DR plant
-Raw
material
preparation & handling
centralized de- dusting
facility bag filter/ ESP
Blast
furnaces
Design Target
- BF stock house by DE
system
- BF cast house by DE
system: ESP

m3 Work zone dust
level: < 5 mg/ m3

m3
Work zone dust level: <
5 mg/m3
Dust outlet 50 mg/N
m3 Work zone dust
level: < 5 mg/m3
C4-32

Chapter-4
Sr.
No
8
Production
Unit/
Facilities
Steel
melting
shop
Lime & dolo

plant
10
Bar & rod

mill
reheating
furnace
Power plant
11
Proposed Emission Control Devices

Non-Point Sources
Point Sources
SMS material handling
- DE system by bag
filter
Lime
plant
raw
material bunker building
- de-dusting by bag
filter.
- Lime sizing plant dedusting by bag filter.
12
Cement
Plant
-Centralised
secondary
fume
extraction system
for converters /
LFs
with
bag
filter.
Waste flue gas
through bag filter
(fabric)
Dust outlet 50 mg/N

m3 Work zone dust
level: < 5 mg/m3
Low NOx burners
Dust outlet 50 mg/N

m3
Low
burners
- ESP
NOx
Dust outlet 50 mg/N

m3 Work zone dust
level: < 5 mg/ m3
ESPs
and
filters
efficiency
99.9%)
Bag
with
of
To limit the outlet dust

levels
also
to
50
mg/Nm3
Design Target
Dust outlet 50 mg/N

m3 Work zone dust
level: <5 mg/m3
4.3.4 Impact on Traffic2 due Transportation of Raw Materials and Products

JSW-JSL project site is reasonably well connected by both road network and
railway. The proposed site is located at about 25 km from Muri on the State
Highway in the northern side and about 30 km from NH-33 on the southern side.
National Highway (NH-33A) connecting the state highway and NH-33 is adjacent
to the project site in eastern side.
All raw materials required for the proposed project will be transported by using
rail and road. Impacts due to the transportation of raw material and products by
road on ambient air quality has been carried out and the details are given below.
4.3.4.1 Details of Mathematical Modeling
Model Input Data
The parameters considered for prediction of GLCs are CO and NOx. A study area
within a radius of 10 km around the project site has been taken into consideration
to compute the ground level concentrations (GLC) of the said air pollutants. The
line sources are taken according to state highway to the project site. The
emission rates as inputs to the line source model are calculated based on
Emission factor development for Indian vehicles, a project executed by
Impact of transporation of raw materials and finished products as per ToR-37 and ToR-67
C4-33

Chapter-4
Automative Research Association of India, Pune, 2008.

modeling area given in Table-4.10.
The inputs used for
TABLE-4.10
INPUT TO THE MODEL
Raw Material
Truck capacity (T)
No. of trucks
Emission Factors
CO (g/km/vehicle)
NOx (g/km/vehicle)
Emission Rate
CO (g/s)
NOx (g/s)
Details
35
400
6.0
9.3
0.27
0.43
Presentation of Results
The predicted CO and NOx concentrations from additional vehicular traffic are
presented in Table-4.11 and the isopleths showing the incremental
concentrations for CO and NOx are shown in Figure-4.4 to Figure-4.5
respectively.
TABLE-4.11
PREDICTED PEAK HOURLY AIR POLLUTION
DUE TO ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC
Sr. No.
1
2
Parameter
Carbon monoxide
Oxides of nitrogen
Concentration (g/m3)
4.0
6.5
It can be observed that the maximum incremental concentrations of CO and NOx

due to the additional traffic load would be about 4.0 g/m3 and 6.0 g/m3
respectively likely to occur at 10 m from the centre of the road. The CO and NOx
concentrations are likely to be very low when compared with the NAAQ standards
for CO (4000 g/m3) and WHO standard of 400 g/m3 for hourly average for NOx.
Hence, it is assessed that the impact on the present ambient air quality will be
negligible due to the additional traffic from the proposed project.
4.3.4.2 Adequacy of Existing Road Network in Study Area
About 400 trucks per day would be required for the transportation of raw
material. The traffic contribution from proposed plant to the outside road network
connecting NH-33A, will thus is the to and fro movement of 800 vehicles per
day, which is equivalent to 2400 PCU per day (taking a PCU factor of 3 per
vehicle). The existing road NH-33A is a two lane road with 698 PCU per day and
additional traffic due to the proposed project will result with 3098 PCU per day.
The estimated peak traffic in terms of PCUs, when compared to the stipulated
standards by IRC for traffic capacity of the roads and it can be observed that the
C4-34

Chapter-4
existing road network is adequate. Recommendations on traffic capacity are given

in Table-4.12.
TABLE-4.12
RECOMMENDATIONS ON TRAFFIC CAPACITY - IRC
Sr.
No.
1
2
Category of Road
Two lane roads (7 m) with earthen shoulders
4-lane highway with earthen shoulders
Maximum Carrying
Capacity (PCU/day)
15,000
35,000
Further, the necessary strengthening and widening of the connecting road will be
taken up by JSW-JSL.
4.3.5 Impact on Water Resources and Water Quality
Impact on water resources and quality are discussed under three sub-headings,
namely surface water resources, ground water resources and water quality.
Impact on Surface Water Resources
The total water requirement for the proposed project will be about 80 Million
Gallons per day (MGD), i.e. about 15150 m 3/hr including water requirement for
4.3.5.1 Impact on Water Regime
The impact of proposed project on water regime may be in different ways and on
surface or ground water or both. Water environment may be affected by the
proposed project in terms of disturbing natural water course or change in
drainage pattern of the area, quantity and quality due to drawl of water,
discharge of polluted water/wastewater by contaminated leachate from
disposal/dumping of solid waste etc.
C4-35
Chapter-4
PROJECT TITLE:
COMMENTS:
8000
0.50
1.50
ug/m^3
Line source modeling for CO
4.500
SOURCES:
6000
RECEPTORS:
4.090
OUTPUT TYPE:
4.000
0.50
4000
0.50
-2000
-4000
-6000
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
2000
4000
6000
8000
2000
SLINE1
0.50
-8000
Concentration
MAX:
UCART1
-10000
441
4.08728 ug/m^3
3.500
3.000
MODELER:
2.500
2.000
Mr. Janardhan and

Mr. Kishore kumar
SCALE:
1:138,000
4 km
1.500
1.000
PROJECT NO.:
0.500
FIGURE-4.4
ISOPLETHS SHOWING INCREMENTAL CONCENTRATIONS FOR CO
C4-36
Chapter-4
PROJECT TITLE:
COMMENTS:
ug/m^3
Line source modeling for NOx
8000
SOURCES:
6.510
RECEPTORS:
441
6000
OUTPUT TYPE:
4000
6.000
Concentration
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
SLINE1
UCART1
-10000
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
2000
MAX:
6.50937 ug/m^3
5.000
MODELER:
4.000
Mr. Janardhan and

Mr. Kishore kumar
3.000
SCALE:
1:138,000
4 km
2.000
PROJECT NO.:
1.000
FIGURE-4.5
ISOPLETHS SHOWING INCREMENTAL CONCENTRATIONS FOR NOx
C4-37

Chapter-4
4.3.5.2 Natural Drainage and Water Bodies

The drainage network in the proposed plant site initiates from the hill range about
1.50 km towards north of the proposed plant site and have up to 3rd order
streams joining Domra nadi running west-east along the southern boundary and
joining Subarnarekha river. The drainage network in the proposed township area
joins Subarnarekha river. It is proposed to divert the flow safely in the
development area of the plant site and leave natural course as it is in the
open/green belt area maintaining the natural flow along the boundaries of
development within proposed plant site. The pre and post project development
drainage network in the catchment area contributing run-off to the proposed
plant site are presented in Figure-4.6 and Figure-4.7. Drainage in the open and
green belt areas is undisturbed and that in the development area is diverted
along the boundaries of development and project site to continue the natural runoff joining Domra nadi in the south.
The run-off from the developed area including plant, facilities, roads etc., and
drainage from the roofs are routed through storm water drains. These storm
water drains are laid alongside the road just outside the boundary of the
development. Few small ponds which do not have active storage will be disturbed
during the development process. The run-off water routed through the storm
water drains will be collected in a storm water pond, proposed in the
southeastern part of the site for critical water usage and supplementing ground
water recharge. Any pollutant joining the storm water is to be prevented with
proper precautions and advanced management practices such as: 1) prevent
water from contacting working areas, 2) keep pollutants off surfaces that come
into contact with water, 3) manage storm water before it is discharged to the
storm drain etc.
4.3.5.3 Impact on Drawl of Surface Water
downstream at about 45 km south from the proposed plant site.
The flow monitoring data of CWC at Muri on Subarnarekha river between 1997-98
and 2007-08 indicates that the monsoon flow range between 202 MCM 682
MCM and the non-monsoon flow range between 32 MCM 339 MCM. The nonmonsoon flow during 2000-2001 and 2005-2006 was very low at 66 MCM and 32
MCM respectively. Suitable impounding arrangements in the form of a pickup weir
or intake well at the river source will have to be considered to meet the plant
water requirement, along with dedicated pipeline or open channel. It is not
proposed to draw surface water from Subarnarekha river during the lean season.
Chandil dam across Subarnarekha river is a composite dam which is 720.10 m
long and 56.5 m high with a gross storage of 1963 hm (1963 MCM) and live
storage of 1611 hm (1611 MCM) at Maximum Water Level (MWL)/Full Reservoir
Level (FRL) 192 m. As the proposed surface water withdrawal from Subarnarekha
3
Impact of water drawl during lean season as per ToR-47
C4-38

Chapter-4
FIGURE-4.6
PRE-DEVELOPMENT DRAINAGE NETWORK
C4-39

Chapter-4
FIGURE-4.7
POST-DEVELOPMENT DRAINAGE NETWORK
C4-40

Chapter-4
river is 77.4 MCM with suitable pickup weir or intake well during only monsoon
period and the requirement from Chandil dam is also minimal at 3.43% of the live
storage, no major impact on Subarnarekha river or Chandil dam is envisaged.
4.3.5.4 Water Quality
In order to combat industrial pollution and to comply with guidelines laid down by
the statutory authority, suitable treatment units and neutralization pits will be
provided to control water pollution in different water system units. Attempts will
be made to achieve zero discharge as far as practicable by making use of bleed
water from cooling tower and other effluent water for dust suppression.
Wastewater generated from different areas of plant will be treated to the desired
extent and recycled in the re-circulating system as far as possible, facilitating
adequate reuse of water. Backwash water generated from different pressure
filters will be treated in a treatment plant having sludge disposal facilities. The
treated water will be reused in the direct cooling circuit.
Considering the following factors 1) zero discharge from the proposed project,
2) waste disposal mechanism and 3) analysis results of all the surface and ground
water samples are within desirable limits of ISO: 10500, impact on surface and
ground water quality is not envisaged.
Impact on Ground Water Resources
As the complete fresh water requirement is proposed to be met from the

Subarnarekha river and tapping of ground water resources for meeting the
process requirement is not envisaged. Hence, the groundwater withdrawal
thereby depletion of the ground water resources will not arise from the proposed
project.
During the construction, the water will be met from the ground water from the
available bore wells in the plant site. The construction water requirement will be
about 750 m3/day. The necessary permission for the withdrawl of ground water
will be taken as applicable.
Impact on Surface Water Quality

In an integrated steel plant, water is generally used for purposes like:
Material conditioning i.e. for slurrying, quenching, mill scale removal, rinsing
etc;
Air pollution control i.e. for wet scrubbing of air pollutants; and
Heat transfer i.e. water used for protecting the equipment by cooling
refractory and shell of equipment. Overall, approximately 75% of water use is
for heat transfer. Accordingly, a considerable portion of water supplied is lost
by evaporation. Evaporation losses include slag quenching at blast furnaces
and basic oxygen furnaces, coke quenching, spray chamber cooling at casters
and evaporation in cooling towers. However, wastewater discharges from any
plant mainly depend upon the water usage and type of use.
C4-41

Chapter-4
Wastewater discharges from an integrated steel plant can be broadly divided into
two parts. Non-contact water discharges and contact water discharges. Water is
used in a series of heat exchangers in coke oven gas treatment, blast furnaces,
basic oxygen furnaces and rolling operations and boilers. This non-contact water
is generally contaminated with high dissolved solids comprising of salts of calcium
and magnesium, which were originally present in the raw / feed water. Due to
repeated re-circulation and high temperature concentration of these salts starts
to built up necessitating bleeding off of some part of circulating water. Water is
also used for contact cooling e.g. quenching, Coke oven gas treatment, slag
handling etc. This contact water discharges may be contaminated with different
pollutants and needs to be treated prior to discharges.
The unit wise wastewater generations are given below:
a) Sinter Plant
Wastewater may be generated in sinter plant if wet scrubbers are used for
pollution control facilities. However, in this project dry ESPs are used in the sinter
plant for pollution control, which does not generate any effluent. Further, the
water requirement /consumption in sinter plant is very less and no water is
required for process purposes and as such no wastewater is generated from the
process.
b) Pellet Plant
In pellet plant, water is mainly used for wetting the ore additive mix before
feeding into balling mills for making balls. Further, in the balling discs controlled
water is used for adjusting final moisture content of the green balls. Further, the
water requirement / consumption in pellet plant are very less and as such no
wastewater is generated from the process.
c) DR Plant
In DR plant, water is required for cooling of the reduced material. The cooling
water is collected in trough below the cooler and sent to cooling tower for cooling.
The cooled water is re-circulated. Due to repeated re-circulation and high
temperature concentration of dissolved salts starts getting built up necessitating
bleeding off of some part of circulating water from the indirect cooling circuit.
d) Blast Furnace
Blast furnace requires a considerable quantity of water. Water required is mainly
for direct contact water used in the gas coolers / wet scrubbers, which cleans the
blast furnace gas. This water is treated in settling tank / clarifier for removal of
suspended solids and the overflows are recycled to the gas scrubbers.
Only the final blows down from the re-circulated systems are being discharged.
The blow down will conform to the following quality:
pH 6.5 - 8.5
Suspended solids 100 mg/l
C4-42

Chapter-4
Oil & Grease 10 mg/l

Cyanide as CN 0.2 mg/l
Ammoniacal nitrogen as NH3N 50 mg/l
Therefore, there is no possibility of any adverse impact of water pollution.

e) Steel Making and Primary Refining: Basic Oxygen Furnace (BOF)
The water requirement for BOF is not significant. The wastewater generated from
gas cleaning plant (GCP) will be contaminated only with particulate matter and
will be pumped to a sludge pond. Further any bleed off water from cooling circuit
will be used for slag cooling and as such no wastewater is anticipated to be
generated from cooling water circuit. Thus no adverse impact on water
environment is anticipated.
f) Secondary Refining Facilities: Laddle Furnace
The other water usages indicated are mainly for refining and casting operations.
The refining operation except vacuum degassing does not generates any effluent.
g) Continuous Casting Facilities and Rolling Mills
Continuous caster usually requires water for cooling of different mechanical
equipment, and for flushing of mill scale (generated during cutting) down the
flume beneath the run out table. The principal pollutants are suspended solids oil
and greases. This will be treated in scale pits for mill scale recovery and oil
removal and the treated effluent will be discharged.
h) Coke Oven & By Product Plant
Wastewater is generated from the coke oven & by-product plant as waste
ammonia liquor from moisture contaminated in the charged coal, steam used in
distilling ammonia from the waste liquor, light oil recovery and other processes.
Wastewater is contaminated with oil & grease, ammonia, cyanides, thiocyanates
and phenols.
Further, whatever wastewater is generated from the coke oven & by product
plant area is collected and transported through pipeline to a wastewater
treatment plant (BOD plant). The wastewater after treatment will be meeting the
statutory norms for discharge of treated effluent but instead of discharging it
outside, the wastewater will be used for plantation and as such no water pollution
is anticipated. Treated effluent will conform to the following :
Sr No
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
Parameter
pH of the treated effluent
Suspended solids
Phenol
Cyanide
Ammonical nitrogen
Free ammonia
Range
Between 6.0 to 8.0
Not more than 100 mg/l
Not more than 1.0 mg/l
Not more than 50 mg/l
C4-43

Chapter-4
Sr No
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
Parameter
Oil & grease
Nitrate Nitrogen
BOD (3 days, 27C)
COD
Not
Not
Not
Not
more
more
more
more
than
than
than
than
Range
10 mg / l
10 mg/l
30 mg/l
250 mg/l
i) Wastewater from Other Sources

In addition to the above some additional wastewater may be generated due to
floor washings and also from the toilet blocks of the various units of the plant.
The sewage generated from the toilet blocks will be treated in the sewage
treatment plant (STP) and reused for green belt/ green cover.
Mitigation Measures
During the design phase, all efforts will be made to adopt latest state of art
technology and to install adequate effluent treatment facilities for different units
expected to generate water pollutants. During the construction phase of the
proposed project appropriate mitigation measures will be implemented to
ameliorate the anticipated water/effluent quality problems.
The following water reduction methods should be implemented:
Over 90% of the wastewater generated can be reused;
Recirculate wastewaters. Using dry air pollution control systems where

feasible. Otherwise, treating wastewaters;
Segregating wastewaters containing lubricating oils from other wastewater

streams and remove oil;
Controlling water consumption by proper design of spray nozzles and cooling

water systems;
In the pickling process, using countercurrent flow of rinse water; using

indirect methods for heating and pickling bath;
Using closed-loop systems for pickling; regenerating and recovering acids

from spent pickling liquor using resin bed, retorting, or other regeneration
methods such as vacuum crystallization of sulfuric acid baths;
Using electrochemical methods in combination with pickling to lower acid

consumption;
Reusing quench water;
In the segregating process water from cooling water;
The wastewater treated in the effluent treatment plant will be reused in the
plant;
C4-44

Chapter-4
Oil separators will be installed in compressor house of power plant and other
units also like SMS, Stores, DRI and garage etc to ensure oil content in drain
water will be within prescribed limits;
The plant shall be operated on the zero discharge condition; and
The sewage effluent after treatment in sewage treatment plant will be used
for greenbelt development.
Treatment of Coke Oven Effluent Stream

This would be the only toxic effluent stream, which requires physico-chemical as
well as biological treatment. Raw coke oven effluent would be first stripped off in
ammonia still by alkali addition in a stripping column. The effluent after bringing
down the ammonia load below 100 mg/l would be stored in balancing reservoir.
From the balancing tank, the effluent would require separation of floating and
emulsified oil. Thereafter three-stage aeration with addition of nutrients and
maintaining desired bacteriological population followed by clarification for removal
of phenol and ammonia in waste. The treated effluent would be pumped to the
settling pond for reuse within the plant in coke quenching and greenbelt. The
schematic flow diagram of the BO plant of Coke oven effluent is given Figure4.8.
Gas Cleaning Plant Wastewater
The BF and BOF gas cleaning scheme would be of the conventional venturi type
which have become the bench mark for similar application. The effluent coming
out of the wet scrubber would be contaminated with high concentration of
suspended solids. The slurry effluent would be clarified in the clarifier to recover
clarified water for recycling to the wet gas scrubber after cooling in the cooling
tower. The contaminated water coming from gas cleaning plant is collected in the
flash mixer. Coagulants are added in the flash mixing tank and then water is
supplied into thickeners (high rate type) for further treatment. The clean overflow
water is collected in clean water sump and pumped back to gas cleaning plant.
The settled sludge in the thickeners is pumped to sludge storage tanks and
vacuum filter unit for drying and the cakes are disposed suitably.
Treatment of Caster Effluent and Mill Effluents
The wastewater is generated in the continuous casting units mainly due to
machine / moulds cooling and may be contaminated with suspended solids and
traces of oil. The effluent from the mill would be collected first in scale pit which
is a large settling basin to separate out the floating oil and settable iron scales.
The clean water is passed through sand filters to remove finer particles, after
which the water is recycled in the process.
C4-45

Chapter-4
AIR
CLARIFLOCCULATOR
AMMONIA STRIPPED
COKE OVEN
EFFLUENT
EQUALISATION TANK
NUTRIENT (H3PO4)
THICKENER
1st STAGE AERATION
SLUDGE DRYING BED

1st STAGE CLARIFIER
2nd STAGE AERATION
NaOCl
2nd STAGE CLARIFIER
OVER FLOW
MIXER
CHLORINE CONTACT TANK
TREATED WATER SUMP
TO TREATED EFFLUENT LAGOON

WITHIN THE PLANT
FIGURES 4.8
SCHEMATIC FLOW DIAGRAM OF PROPOSED B.O. PLANT OF COKE OVEN
EFFLUENT STREAM
C4-46

Chapter-4
The back wash from the filters is sent to the settling tank for removal of
particulates. The settled sludge is sent to sinter plant for agglomeration. Quality
of this discharged water will be continuously checked and as required will be
treated to meet statutory norms.
Treatment of Plant Sanitary Wastewater
The sanitary wastewater will be treated in sewage treatment plant.
Treatment of Wastewater from Indirect Cooling Circuit Streams
In the proposed project, the wastewater generated from indirect cooling circuits
of sinter plant, blast furnace, BOF and rolling mill are not normally contaminated
with any major pollutants. However, occasional discharges are made as bleed off
when there is built up of dissolved solids in the circulating water due to repeated
circulation. The dissolved solids are mainly different salt constituents of calcium
and magnesium already present in water. Thus major portion of water will be recirculated after necessary physical treatment e.g settling, cooling etc.
Cooling Tower Blow Downs from Direct Cooling Circuit Streams
It is noted that the re-circulating water in cooling towers gets contaminated with
the dust & dissolved solids, necessitating blow down. It is proposed that all
cooling towers be provided with side stream pressure filters to reduce the volume
of blow down. The cooling towers shall be designed to operate at high cycles of
concentrations to conserve water.
Summary of Proposed Wastewater Treatment Scheme
In view of the above stated proposals for wastewater treatment and disposal for
various production facilities, a summarized list of the same is presented in below:
Sr.
No.
1
Production unit/facilities
Coke ovens by-products recovery
plant
2
3
4
BF gas cleaning plant

BOF gas cleaning plant
Other plants such as sinter plant,
BF & SMS
Plant sanitary effluent treatment

plant
CRM wastewater
Outlet effluent characteristics in

mg/l
pH 6.0-8.5
Suspended solids <100
Phenol <1.0
CN <0.2
N2 <50
BOD 3 days at 27C <30
COD <250
Oil & Grease <10
TSS 100
TSS 100
pH 6.0-9.0
Suspended solids <100
Oil & Grease <1.0
BOD 20
Coli-form < 500 MPN/100 ml
Neutrilisation pit
C4-47

Chapter-4
4.3.5.5 Reuse of Wastewater

Some of the measures taken to reuse the wastewater generated in the plant will
be:
The wastewater generated from BF gas cleaning plant after physical treatment
will be reused in the system;
Cooling Tower blow downs of indirect cooling water system shall be used for
slag quenching and as make up to direct contaminated cooling water circuits
and surplus if any would be stored in the treated wastewater lagoon for inplant use (eg. Green belt, floor washing, plant road dust suppression etc);
Blown down water from Blast Furnace re-circulation system will be reused in
Slag Granulation Plant as make-up water to SGP re-circulation water system;
Blow down water from BOF re-circulation system will be reused in SMS slag
yard for spraying on hot slag; and
Blow down water from power plant will be reused for pig casting machines.
Through cascaded reuse of blow-down, the water scheme ensures practically zero
discharge from the industrial water circuit. However, in such huge operation of
ISP some water will be discharged, which will meet the statutory norm.
Recommended Water Pollution Control Measures
The typical water pollutants and suggested treatment and or disposal in the
integrated steel plant are given in Table-4.13.
TABLE-4.13
WATER POLLUTANTS TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL
Sr. No.
1
Pollutants
Oil
Rolling oil
Lubricants
Fuel oil
Hydraulic oil
2
Hot and cold rolling mills

Various
electrical
and
mechanical equipment and
machine
halls.
Spills
segregated
Boiling plant furnaces and
soaking pits
Pumps, winches and presses
Suspended Solids
Scale
Rolling mills
Burden fines
Source
Coal
and
coke fines
Heat
Cooling
Air and water at sinter plant

and skip hoist area, blast
furnace gas washer, OH and
basic oxygen furnace
Coke ovens
Furnaces, heat treatment, roll
Waste oil will be collected and
sold to authorized recyclers
Floor spills soaked up on
adsorption compound; cutting oil
will be and sold to authorized
recyclers
Spills segregated by dykes and
incinerated
Spills segregated and collected
to sell to authorized recyclers
Recovery and used in sintering
plants
Cooling towers and recirculation
C4-48

Chapter-4
Sr. No.
Pollutants
water
Boiler blow
down
Source
cooling air conditioners and
heat exchanges
Steam plant
after cooling
Recovered to heat feed water
The effluent and sewage analysis report of existing JSW Vijayanagar plant is
given in Table-4.14. Water balance flow diagram is shown in Figure-4.9. The
water circulating & make up water requirement is given in Table-4.15. The
schematic diagrams of proposed raw water treatment plant and STP are given in
Figure-4-10 and Figure-4.11.
Most of the water is used for cooling purposes. The wastewater arising from the
plant will be treated in effluent treatment plant and will be re-utilized for the plant
purposes.
No effluent discharge is envisaged due to recycling into the plant operation.
Hence, there will be no impact on the water regime due to the effluents from the
proposed steel plant.
TABLE-4.14(A)
RESULTS OF EFFLUENT ANALYSIS
Sr. No. Parameters
1
pH
2
Suspended Solids
3
Dissolved Solids
4
Oil & Grease
5
BOD - 5 days, 20C
6
Chloride (as Cl)
7
Sulphates (as SO4)
8
Cyanides (as CN)
9
Pesticides
10
Iron (as Fe)
11
Arsenic (as As)
12
Boron (as B)
13
Lead (as Pb)
14
Zinc (as Zn)
Source-JSW Vijayanagar Plant
Standards
5.5-9
100 mg/l
2100 mg/l
10 mg/l
100 mg/l
600 mg/l
1000 mg/l
0.2 mg/l
Absent
3 mg/l
0.2 mg/l
2 mg/l
0.1 mg/l
5 mg/l
Guard Pond I
7.38
58
469
0.9
8
115
104
Nil
Absent
0.04
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
Guard Pond II
7.67
23
826
0.6
6
204
116
Nil
Absent
0.16
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
TABLE-4.14(B)
RESULTS OF SEWAGE ANALYSIS
Sr. No. Parameters
1
pH
2
Suspended Solids
3
BOD - 3 days, 27C
4
COD
Source-JSW Vijayanagar Plant
Standards
5.5-9
30 mg/l
20 mg/l
250 mg/l
Raw Sewage
7.38
28
110
224
Treated Sewage
7.4
24
18
90
C4-49

Chapter-4
FIGURE-4.9
WATER BALANCE
C4-50

Chapter-4
FIGURE-4.10
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF PROPOSED RAW WATER TREATMENT PLANT
C4-51

Chapter-4
FIGURE-4.11
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF PROPOSED STP
C4-52

Chapter-4
TABLE-4.15
CIRCULATING & MAKE UP WATER REQUIREMENT
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Plant Facilities
RMHS
Beneficiation plant
Pellet plant
Coke oven plant
Sinter plant
Blast furnace with PCM
SMS
Continuous casting machine
(Billet/Bloom/Shaped Bloom Caster)
Slab caster
Wire rod mill
Medium section mill
Heavy section mill
Hot strip mill
Plate mill
Bar mill
Cold rolling mill complex
Oxygen plant
Captive power plant
Cement plant
Coking & non-coking coal washery
Township
Power & blowing station
Compressed air station
Lab
ACVS
Fire fighting
Miscellaneous
Drinking
Total Process Water
Treatment Loss
Total Raw Water Required
Circulating Water m3/hr

DM/Soft
Industrial
Water
Water
1707
1140
2860
44628
1083
3250
12640
24438
6704
19568
Makeup Water m3/hr

DM/Soft
Industrial
Water
Water
213
2010
28
190
1380
275
84
767
225
34
612
2700
4660
60
200
6840
759
521
263
2000
34650
9918
4200
2286
4191
15177
23239
4200
5213
8333
1260
20158
26417
1333
242
2,27,278
34
25
10
450
167
892
175
75
57
105
270
1501
75
125
208
70
2250
189
52
240
793
40
30
180
250
450
530
13537
721
15150
The list of water pollution control systems are summarized in Table-4.16.

TABLE-4.16
LIST OF WATER POLLUTION CONTROL SYSTEMS
Source
Raw material handling yard
Raw water treatment plant
BF& BOF gas cleaning plant
Coke oven and by product
plant
Bloom caster, billet caster
& rolling mills
Soft and DM water plant
Cooling tower and boiler
blow-down
Pollutants
Suspended solids
Suspended solids
Suspended solids
Oils,
suspended
solids,
ammonia, phenols etc.
Suspended solids, oil &
grease
pH and dissolved solids
Temperature,
dissolved
solids
Control System
Catch pits
Clarifier, thickener
Clarifier, thickener
Oil, organics and ammonia
removal in BOD plant
Settling tanks fitted with oil &
grease trap
Neutralizing pit
For re-use
Canteens, toilets
BOD, suspended solids
Sewage treatment plant
C4-53

Chapter-4
The new plant aims at zero discharge concept. In case of problem in water
recovery/reuse system, during wet season maximum 200 m3/hr, occasional
discharge can be anticipated for a short period of time meeting the discharge
norm. It is presumed that after completion of the project the water environment
will improve significantly.
4.3.5.6 Impact on Ground Water Quality
The proposed plant does not envisage any ground water drawl during the
operation and hence nominal impact will be there during construction phase.
There will not be any major adverse impact on ground water.
The waste disposal area around any industry is one of the major factors
deteriorating ground water quality, if the water leached from the waste dumps
contains toxic substances. In the proposed plant, waste material will be dumped
in secured land fill sites and inert wastes will be dumped in low lying area. All
other solid wastes are reused / recycled or sold out.
Movement of Pollutants and Pollutant Pathways4
Contaminants can migrate directly into ground water from below ground sources
(e.g., storage tanks, pipelines) that lay within the saturated zone. Additionally
contaminants can enter the ground water system from the surface by vertical
leakage through the seals around well casings, through wells abandoned without
proper procedures, or as a result of contaminant disposal of improperly
constructed wells (Boulding & Ginn 2004). Generally, three processes can be
distinguished which govern the transport of contaminants in ground water:
advection, dispersion and retardation.
Dispersion and density/viscosity
differences may accelerate contaminant movement, while retardation processes
can slow the rate of movement. Some contamination problems involve two or
more fluids. Examples include air, water and organic liquids in the unsaturated
zone, or organic liquids and water in an aquifer. Tracers are useful for
characterizing water flow in the saturated and unsaturated zone.
Pollutant Pathways around Proposed Project
Any pollutants coming in contact with surface water will follow the topography
and surface drainage course/storm water drains and reach Domra nadi running
westeast along southern boundary. The pollutants infiltrating vertically through
soil and reaching shallow ground water will move along the direction of ground
water table movement direction with a hydraulic conductivity of 0.083 m/day
towards Subarnarekha river.
A review of the results of the chemical analysis of water samples revels that
quality of ground water is potable in general and observed to be within the
prescribed ISO: 10500 limits. The results also do not show any toxic or heavy
metals more than desirable limits indicating that there is no contamination in the
vicinity of the proposed project area. When there is no toxic or heavy pollutant
available in ground water and since 83.33% of the samples fall in calcium
4
Ground water modeling showing pathways of pollutants as per ToR-43 and ToR-54
C4-54

Chapter-4
bicarbonate and rest fall in sodium bicarbonate water types, the pathways for
these dominant constituents representing TDS, hardness, calcium and sodium
have been prepared. The area considered for modelling covers an aerial distance
of 2.60 km towards north, 6.0 km towards east, 2.5 km towards south and 4.4
km towards west of the proposed project area. The area considered for modelling
and pollutant pathways for TDS, hardness, calcium and sodium are presented in
Figure-4.12, Figure-4.13A to Figure-4.13D respectively. The dispersion
pattern of these constituents reveals that their movement is from the drainage
divide along the catchment boundary of the proposed project site towards south
west. Any pollutants joining the ground water of deeper aquifer will move towards
southwest from the proposed project site. Effective management practices
ensuring zero discharge from the proposed project and proper waste disposal
mechanism will not allow any pollutants migrating to ground water and further
movement along the pollutant pathways.
Mitigation Measures
Periodical monitoring of ground water quality at up-gradient and down

gradient of slag dump area.
Disposal of waste generated from the proposed project will be done in a

systematic /scientific manner as per guidelines to prevent any ground water
pollution.
4.3.5.7 Water Pollution Control Systems Proposed5

The wastewater generated from the indirect cooling circuit would be routed
through the cooling tower and pressure filter for recycling purpose.
The wastewater generated from the coke ovens will be treated in a bio-oxidation
plant to reduce the level of phenolic compound, oil & grease and cyanide. The
treated wastewater will be reused in the system.
The wastewater of gas cleaning plants of blast furnace and steel melt shop
containing suspended solids will get clarified in the effluent treatment plant. The
clarified water will be recycled to the waste gas cleaning units. Similarly, the
wastewater coming out from the continuous casting machine will be treated to
remove scales and oil and the treated water will be recycled after cooling.
In the captive power plant, effluent generated from DM plant will be neutralized
in neutralization pit and treated water will be taken into power plant pond and will
be reused in wet ash conveying system. Decanted water from ash pond will also
be recycled back for reuse in wet ash conveying system.
Treatment of wastewater as per ToR-50, ToR-51 & ToR-52
C4-55

Chapter-4
FIGURE-4.12
MAP SHOWING MODEL BOUNDARY AND GROUND WATER SAMPLES
C4-56

Chapter-4
FIGURE-4.13A
MODEL SHOWING PATHWAYS FOR TDS IN GROUND WATER
FIGURE-4.13B
MODEL SHOWING PATHWAYS FOR HARDNESS IN GROUND WATER
C4-57

Chapter-4
FIGURE-4.13C
MODEL SHOWING PATHWAYS FOR CALCIUM IN GROUND WATER
FIGURE-4.13D
MODEL SHOWING PATHWAYS FOR SODIUM IN GROUND WATER
C4-58

Chapter-4
The overall water pollution control measures are:
The wastewater treated in the effluent treatment plant will be reused in the
plant;
Oil separators will be installed in compressor house of power plant and other
units also like SMS, stores, and garage etc to ensure oil content in drain
water will be within prescribed limits;
The plant will be operated on the zero discharge condition; and
The sewage effluent after treatment in sewage treatment plant will be used
for greenbelt development.
4.3.5.8 Water Conservation Schemes

In order to conserve water to the maximum possible extent, closed re-circulating
cooling system will be adopted using re-circulating soft water as the primary
cooling media and air or industrial water as secondary cooling media in heat
exchangers. For some users, the industrial water will be used directly/ indirectly
as primary cooling media. The hot re-circulating industrial water will be cooled in
cooling towers.
To minimize water loss, blow down from the cooling tower of clean circuit will be
fed as make-up to cooling circuit of dirty cycle. Contaminated dirty circuit will
comprise necessary pressure filtration system.
Backwash water from the pressure filters will be treated in a sludge thickener and
the concentrated sludge will be pumped to the sludge drying bed.
Rain water harvesting schemes from roof top of the buildings will be included in
the proposed project as part of water conservation measures.
4.3.5.9 Water Pollution Control System
In order to combat the industrial pollution and to comply with the guidelines
(CPCB / SPCB norms), treatment units to control water pollution have been
considered for the direct cooling water (DCW) circuit, re-circulating industrial
water and wastewater discharge from DM plant. Major pollutant in DCW circuit is
scales in suspension, oil, grease & temperature.
Cooling tower has been considered for removing heat from both industrial water
& DCW in circulation. For treatment of contaminated DCW, scale pit, oil skimmer,
pressure filters, thickener and sludge drying beds have been considered. Filtrate
from sludge drying bed will be reused in the system. Dry sludge will be disposed
off in a suitable manner. Wastewater from DM plant will be treated in
neutralization pits and treated water will be used for afforestation within the
plant area.
C4-59

Chapter-4
The plant is designed for complete recirculation of water except during monsoon.
Water balance for the plant is indicated in the Figure-4.8.
4.3.6
Energy Conservation Measures

Waste heat energy recovery is also planned in the plant as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
BF stove waste gas sensible heat recovery;

Recuperator in reheating furnace;
Top Recovery Turbine (TRT) in proposed BF for power generation;
Waste heat recovery from CDQ in coke oven plant for power generation; and
Waste heat recovery from sinter cooler for power generation.
4.3.7 Design Measures to meet Environmental Standards

During design stage of the plant, efforts will be made for reduction of raw
material requirements by adopting latest technological measures and maximum
recirculation of water so that fresh water consumption can be reduced. All air
pollution control systems will be designed to 50 mg/Nm 3. SO2 emission will be
controlled by tall chimney as per norms. Low NOx burner will be used in all
furnaces. In-plant generated mixed gas will be reused inside the plant. Less
noise generation equipment will be considered while selecting any equipment.
Recycle and reuse of solid waste to the maximum extent will be adopted in the
plant. The plant would be designed conforming to all applicable environmental
laws/standards of SPCB/CPCB/MoEF.
4.3.8 Impact on Noise Levels
The main noise generating sources will be from sinter plant, pellet plant, blast
furnace, DR plant, captive power plant and cement plant. The noise levels at the
source for these units will be in the range of 90-115 dB (A). The noise dispersion
from the plant units has been computed based on the mathematical model as
described below.
4.3.8.1 Mathematical Model for Sound Wave Propagation During Operation
For an approximate estimation of dispersion of noise in the ambient air from the
source point, a standard mathematical model for sound wave propagation is
used. The sound pressure level generated by noise sources decreases with
increasing distance from the source due to wave divergence. An additional
decrease in sound pressure level with distance from the source is expected due to
atmospheric effect or its interaction with objects in the transmission path.
For hemispherical sound wave propagation through homogenous loss free
medium, one can estimate noise levels at various locations, due to different
sources using model based on first principles, as per the following equation:
r
L p 2 L p1 20 log 2
r1
(1)
C4-60

Chapter-4
Where Lp2 and Lp1 are sound pressure levels (SPLs) at points located at distances
r2 and r1 from the source. The combined effect of all the sources then can be
determined at various locations by the following equation.
L p (total) 10 log 10
( L p1 / 10)
10
( L p 2 / 10)
10
( L p 3 / 10)
(2)
.........
Where, Lp1, Lp2, Lp3 are noise pressure levels at a point due to different sources.
Based on the above equations, an user-friendly model has been developed. The
details of the model are as follows:
Maximum number of sources is limited to 200;

Noise levels can be predicted at any distance specified from the source;
Model is designed to take topography or flat terrain;
Co-ordinates of the sources in meters;
Maximum and minimum levels are calculated by the model;
Output of the model in the form of isopleths; and
Environmental attenuation factors and machine corrections have not been
incorporated in the model but corrections are made for the measured Leq
levels.
The major noise generating sources from the proposed plant are listed in Table4.17. These are considered as input to the noise model.
TABLE-4.17
NOISE LEVELS FROM THE PROPOSED PLANT
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Sources
Blast furnace-1
Blast furnace-2
SMS-I
SMS-II
Oxygen plant
Rolling mills-I
Plate mill
Rolling mills-II
Rolling mills-III
DR plant
Pellet plant-I
Pellet plant-II
Lime & Dolo Calcination plant
Sinter plant-I
Sinter plant-II
Cement plant
Base mix yard I
Base mix yard-II
Beneficiation plant
Captive power plant
Coal washery-I
Coal washery-I
Coke oven plant-I
Coke oven plant-II
Coal yards
Co-ordinates (m)
X
Y
532.6
00
385.1
889.1
1179.5
667.6
868.5
1202.3
1526.6
795.3
229.6
731.7
-282.0
-111.9
254.6
-562.2
-257.2
118.3
567.1
1050.0
1420.7
1581.1
1819.6
2111.5
1087.4
322.6
00
-611.9
-296.4
-29.9
-1247.0
-1129.6
-961.5
-758.4
715.2
672.6
969.2
384.6
826.6
1041.9
701.3
1050.7
1277.4
1381.1
1755.3
2060.6
1814.0
1953.7
2142.0
2220.3
Expected Noise
Levels dB(A)
90-110
90-105
90-105
90-115
85-95
95-115
95-105
95-110
95-110
95-115
85-105
85-105
90-105
95-115
95-115
95-110
85-95
85-95
85-115
85-115
85-110
90-110
95-115
95-110
85-105
C4-61

Chapter-4
4.3.8.2 Presentation of Results

The model results are discussed below and are represented through contours in
Figure-4.14. The noise levels at the plant boundaries are given below in Table4.18.
TABLE-4.18
PREDICTED NOISE LEVELS AT THE PLANT BOUNDARIES
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Direction
N
NE
E
SE
S
SW
W
NW
Noise Levels dB(A)

35
30
30
45
50
50
40
35
4.3.8.3 Prediction of Impacts

Perusal of Table-4.18 indicates that the resultant noise levels at plant boundary
do not change much due to the proposed activities. This may be due to the
masking effect since the incremental noise levels due to the proposed project are
less. The predicted incremental noise levels at the boundary of the plant are less
than 50 dB (A), which is well within the prescribed norms for industrial zone.
4.3.8.4 Impact on Work Zone
The equipments with significant continuous noise levels at sinter plant, blast
furnace, DR plant and casting machines and power plant blowers. However,
impacts on the working personnel are not expected to be significant on account of
the high level of automation of these plant equipments, which means that
workers will be exposed for short duration only that too intermittently. In
addition to that, ear plug wearing will be made as compulsory personnel
protective equipment for all employees and visitors entering inside the plant
premises.
C4-62

Chapter-4
-10000
10000
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
10000
8000
8000
6000
6000
4000
4000
2000
2000
-2000
-2000
-4000
-4000
-6000
-6000
-8000
-8000
-10000
-10000
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
2000
4000
6000
8000
-10000
10000
FIGURE-4.14
NOISE DISPERSION CONTOURS
C4-63

Chapter-4
4.3.8.5 Noise Pollution Control Measures

As per model results the incremental noise levels due to the proposed steel plant
will be <50 dB (A) at the plant boundaries in all the directions. The ambient noise
levels in the region are within permissible limits and are envisaged to be within
the permissible limits after commissioning of the proposed facilities also.
The criterion for environmental noise control is that the design of the proposed
plant will not exceed, in any continuous mode of operation, the level stipulated by
MoEF and/or pollution control board at any point on the site boundary.
The measured noise level produced by any rotating equipment will not exceed 90
dB (A) at a distance of 1.0-m from its boundary in any direction under any load
condition. The noise produced in valves and piping associated with handling
compressible and incompressible fluids will be attenuated to 85 dB(A) at a
distance of 1.0 m from the source by the use of low noise trims, baffle plate
silencers/line silencers, acoustic lagging (insulation), thick-walled pipe work as
and where necessary.
All rotary equipment like fans, blowers, pumps and compressors, rolling mills
would be of low noise design. The grouting of this equipment will be made free
from vibrations. The work zone noise exposure of the operating personnel would
be avoided by remote operation from the control rooms.
All pipes and valves downstream of pressure control valve (including pressure
control valve) will be one schedule higher than needed by pressure considerations
to attenuate the noise. For safety relief valves the allowable noise level will not
exceed 115 dB (A) for one-quarter hour or less per day. Safety valves will be
provided on the stem drum and its number and capacity will conform to the code
requirements.
Adequate greenbelt development will be done in the plant boundary of the
proposed steel plant.
4.3.8.6 Recommendation for Reduction in Noise Levels
Noise level can be reduced by stopping leakages from various steam lines,
compressed air lines and other high pressure equipment;
By providing padding at various locations to avoid rattling due to vibration;
By adopting new technologies for control of noise in various units especially in

blast furnace;
Encasement of noise generating equipment where otherwise noise cannot be

controlled;
Providing noise proof cabins to operators where remote control for operating
noise generating equipment is feasible;
C4-64

Chapter-4
The air compressor, process air blower, pneumatic valves should be provided
with acoustic enclosure;
All the design/installation precautions as specified by the manufacturers with

respect to noise control will be strictly adhered to;
High noise generating sources will be insulated adequately by providing

suitable enclosures;
Design and layout of building to minimize transmission of noise, segregation

of particular items of plant and to avoid reverberant areas;
Use of lagging with attenuation properties on plant components / installation

of sound attenuation panels around the equipment;
The noise control system will be designed to form an integral part of the
plant;
Other than the regular maintenance of the various equipment, ear

plugs/muffs are recommended for the personnel working close to the noise
generating units;
All the openings like covers, partitions shall be designed properly; and
Inlet and outlet mufflers will be provided which are easy to design and
construct.
4.3.8.7 Noise Control at the Community Level

It should be noted that, the incremental noise levels at the plant boundary will be
less than 50 dB (A). The proposed greenbelt in the project will help to further
attenuate the noise emitted by the various sources in the plant and the
community noise levels will not be increased.
4.3.9 Impact on Soil Quality and Management
Most of the impacts of steel projects on soils are restricted to the construction
phase, which are expected to be stabilized during operational phase.
The impact on the topsoil will be confined to the main plant area. The air borne
fugitive dust from the plant is likely to be deposited on the topsoil in the immediate
vicinity of the plant boundary. However, the fugitive emissions are likely to be
controlled to a great extent through proposed control measures like electro static
precipitator, ventilation systems and industrial road sweeping machines in all plant
areas. Good greenbelt development has been envisaged to further arrest the
fugitive emissions. Details of greenbelt development plan proposed are described in
Chapter-6.
C4-65

Chapter-4
4.3.10 Solid Waste Management

Integrated iron & steel plant generates solid wastes, some of which are hazardous
while others are non-hazardous. Some of these wastes are reused / re-utilised.
Solid wastes are mainly generated from:
-
Sinter plant;
Blast furnace;
DR plant;
Basic oxygen furnance;
Coke oven & by-product plant;
Different rolling mills;
Lime & dolomite plant; and
Captive power plant.
In addition to above, wastes are also generated during operation / maintenance /

annual maintenance of other units / shops etc, which are:
-
Flue dust from blast furncance;

Blast furnace gas cleaning plant sludge;
BOF gas cleaning plant sludge;
Waste refractory materials; and
Waste lubricant / oil etc. and waste lead acid batteries.
Source of generation and characterisation of solid wastes are presented in Table

4.196.
Source of generation and characterisation of solid wastes as per ToR-56 and ToR-59
C4-66
Chapter-4
TABLE 4.19
SOURCE OF GENERATION AND TYPICAL CHARACTERISATION OF SOLID WASTES
Unit
BF Plant
Type of Waste
Source of Generation
BF flue dust
Flue dust of coarser particle is collected in

dust catcher located before wet scrubbling
BF sludge
Flue dust of fine particles trapped by wet

scrubbling and finally settled at sludge pond
BF slag
BF operation
Typical Chemistry (%)
Fe(t) : 37.00
C : 23.69
SiO2 : 9.01
Al2O3 : 7.26
TiO2 : 0.87
CaO : 6.37
MgO : 5.46
MnO : 2.02
P2O5 : 0.25
S : 0.27
Fe(t) : 20-30
FeO : 7-12
Fe2O3 : 25-35
C : 30-40
S : 0.5-0.8
P : 0.09-0.12
Na2O : 0.1-0.2
K2O : 0.5-0.7
ZnO : 0.2-0.4
CaO : 8-10
SiO2 : 5.0-7.0
MgO : 0.3-0.5
Al2O3 : 0.8-1.3
MnO : 0.5-0.8
CaO : 30-31
SiO2 : 32-33
Al2O3 : 18-22
MgO : 8-10
FeO : 0.2-0.6
MnO : 1.5-3.0
Waste Characterisation as per

Hazardous Wastes
(Management, Handling &
Trans-boundary Movement)
Rules, 2008 & its Amendments
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
C4-67
Chapter-4
Unit
Type of Waste

Hazardous Wastes
S : 1.5-1.7,
DR Unit
Spent
refractories
Sludge
Bricks from BF, dismantled ladles / torpedo

ladles, cast house runners, etc.
Sludge from ETP
Iron oxide fines
Iron oxide fines /sludge
De-dusting dust
Hot metal
Pretreatment
Unit
BOF Shop
Hot metal
pretreatment
dust
Hot metal
pretreatment
slag
BOF dust /
sludge
De-dusting dust from pollution control

equipment installed with raw material
handling, and product processing &
handling area unit.
Dust collected in bag house filter of dust
extraction system
Not Applicable
Ash: 60-70%
C: 18-22%
H2O: 3.5%
VM: 2%
Calorific Value: 800 kCal/kg
Ash: 70%
C: 20 25%
VM:2%
Mithyleblue value 50-100
Ash: 70%
C: 20 25%
VM:2%
Mithyleblue value: 50-100
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Slag skimmed after pretreatment of hot

metal
BOF flue dust collected in gas cleaning
system either in dry form or as sludge
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
BOF Dust
Fe(t) : 52.25
SiO2 : 5.92
Al2O3 : 1.1
TiO2 : 0.43
CaO : 18.26
MgO : 5.98
MnO : 2.59
P2O5 : 0.36
S : 0.18
BOF Sludge
Not Applicable
C4-68
Chapter-4
Unit
Refractory
Materials Plant
Continuous
Casting Plant
Type of Waste
BOF slag
BOF
Spent
refractories
Limestone /
Dolomite Fines
Bricks from dismantled converter
Lime / Calcined
dolomite fines
Spent
refractories
RMP sludge
Caster scale
Screening of raw limestones / dolomite in

raw materials handling yard / lime plant /
dolomite calcination plant
Screening of calcined lime / dolomite in lime
/dolomite calcination plant
Bricks from dismantled kilns of refractory
materials plant
Collected after scrubbing of kiln flue
Caster area
Fe(t) : 50.84
CaO : 15.39
SiO2 : 2.19
P : 0.17,
MgO : 4.31
Al2O3 : 0.71
S : 0.29
Na2O : 0.51
K2O : 0.06
Zn : 1.10
C : 2.58
CaO : 40-50
FeO : 20
SiO2 : 15-17
P2O5 : 2.45
MgO : 3.9-4.5
MnO : 4.5
Al2O3 : 5.2-6.3
-

Hazardous Wastes
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Fe(t) : 62-68
FeO : 60-70 Fe2O3 : 15-25
C : 0.3-0.5
S : 0.12-0.25
P : 0.15-0.25
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
C4-69
Chapter-4
Unit
Type of Waste

Hazardous Wastes
Na2O : 0.05-0.1
K2O : 0.01-0.03
ZnO : 0.04-0.06
CaO : 0.3-0.5
SiO2 : 0.8-1.5
MgO : <0.01
Al2O3 : 0.1-0.2
MnO : 0.3-0.5
Hot Rolling Mill
Caster Sludge
Spent
Refractories
Mill Scales
Sludge pit of continuous casting plant

Repair of tundishes and ladles
Mill Sludge
Fine mill scale contaminated with oil is

collected in sludge pit
Relatively coarse mill scale is collected from

reheating furnaces and dry processing
areas like cooling beds, straighteners,
shears and saws
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Fe(t) : 62-68
FeO : 60-70 Fe2O3 : 15-25
C : 0.3-0.5
S : 0.12-0.25
P : 0.15-0.25
Na2O : 0.05-0.1
K2O : 0.01-0.03
ZnO : 0.04-0.06
CaO : 0.3-0.5
SiO2 : 0.8-1.5
MgO : <0.01
Al2O3 : 0.1-0.2
MnO : 0.3-0.5
Fe(t) : 64.4
CaO : 0.6
SiO2 : 4.0
P : 0.085
MgO :0.22
MnO :0.44
Al2O3 : 1.85
TiO2 : 0.07
Cr2O3 : 0.08
LOI : 0.4
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
C4-70
Chapter-4
Unit
Coke Oven
Plant
By-Products
Plant
Mineral
Oil/synthetic oil
used as
lubricants in
hydraulic
operations /
other uses
Batteries
Type of Waste
Spent
refractories
Spent
refractories
Decanter tar
sludge
Tar storage tank
residues
Tarry & acidic
wastes
BOD plant
sludge
Spent / wash /
lubricant
Lead acid
batteries
Bricks from dismantled reheating furnaces

Rebuilding of coke ovens and miscellaneous
repairs in coke ovens
Decanter for separation of tarry sludge from
ammonical liquor and tar
Cleaning of tar storage tank & gas traps &
seals
Coal chemical plant: reactor / electrostatic
tar precipitator (etp) cleaning & annual
maintenance
Sludge from BOD Plant
Oil : 10-11
-
Not Applicable
-
From various operations

Hazardous Wastes
Not Applicable
As per Category 13.3 of Schedule
I
As per Category 1.2 & 13.4 of
Schedule I
Schedule I
As per Category 34.3 of Schedule
I
Schedule I
Category B4 & E3 of Schedule II
C4-71

Chapter-4
Analysis results of solid waste from existing JSW Vijayanagar plant is given in
Table-4.20.
TABLE-4.20 (A)
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF SOLID WASTE
Chemical Composition
Iron (as Fe2O3), %
Carbon as C, %
Silica (as SiO2), %
Calcium (as CaO), %
Titanum(asTiO2),%
Phosphorous(as P2O5), %
Sodium (as Na2O), %
Potassium (as K2O), %
Zinc(as ZnO), %
Sulphur
BF Sludge
54.13
21.1
9.67
7.87
2.44
1.09
0.21
Nil
0.35
0.36
1.7
Nil
SMS Sludge
75.6
1.6
1.98
0.48
25.75
7.5
0.04
0.12
Traces
0.13
0.086
0.1
Source : JSW Vijayanagar plant
TABLE-4.20 (B)
Iron (as Fe2O3), %
Silica (as SiO2), %
Calcium (as CaO), %
Titanum(asTiO2),%
Sodium (as Na2O), %
Zinc(as ZnO), %
Sulphur
BF Slag
0.525
33.21
20.01
33.06
10.28
0.82
Nil
0.42
0.41
Nil
0.78
BOF Slag
(ungranulated)
26.24
15.76
1.18
48.01
10.27
0.88
1.82
0.039
0.35
Nil
0.026
BOF Slag
(granulated)
30.76
14.36
2.2
48.7
5.8
0.81
1.68
0.021
0.31
Nil
0.018
TABLE-4.20 (C)
Iron (as Fe2O3), %
Carbon as C, %
Silica (as SiO2), %
Calcium (as CaO), %
Titanum(asTiO2),%
Sodium (as Na2O), %
Zinc(as ZnO), %
Sulphur
Mill Scale
BF Flue Dust
99.05
0.9
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
0.043
52.39
28.79
9.2
5.47
3.1
1.31
0.21
0.11
0.16
0.2
0.44
0.18
SMS Secondary
Dedusting
Baghouse Dust
48.02
4.4
5.84
3.8
24.9
6.84
0.28
0.23
0.23
0.89
1.97
0.31
Slime
55.6
Nil
8.25
5.84
0.5
0.24
0.2
0.7
Nil
Nil
Nil
0.02
C4-72

Chapter-4
The details of hazardous and non-hazardous waste generated from the proposed
integrated steel plant and quantity of waste are presented in this section.
4.3.10.1 Hazardous Waste
The hazardous waste such as waste oil, lead acid batteries and oil soaked cotton
waste will be generated. Lead acid batteries will be sold to authorized
users/recyclers approved by JSPCB. The oil soaked cotton waste will be
incinerated in BOF.
4.3.10.2 Non-Hazardous Waste
slag which is non hazardous waste. Other solid waste includes gas cleaning plant
etc. this solid waste except refractory will be completely reused in sinter plant
and coal fines will be used in the power plant. Further, oil soaked cotton waste,
generated. The details of solid waste and hazardous waste generated from the
proposed steel plant are given in Table-4.217 and Table-4.22.
TABLE-4.21
Sr. No
1
Generation TPA
Proposed disposal
Cement plants, 2% treated in dry
pits and used for land fill
BOF slag is granulated , metalics
separated and used in
construction
Iron Making slag
30,00,000
Steel making slag
14,80,000
Sludge
Iron making sludge
1,29,000
Steel making sludge
1,51,000
Slimes from Beneficiation

plant
Mill scales
4
A
B
5
A
B
Steel making shop
Lime / Dolo dusts
Ash
Reject from Coal washery

(Middlings)
Refractory waste
9
7
Solid waste
Slag
Rolling mills
Dusts
Flue dust from Blast furnace
58,00,000

dewatering
dewatering
38,000
1,49,000
1,06,572
3,43,428

38,000
7,50,000
16,00,000
50,000 -1,00,000
Sold to Cement Plants and use for

manufacturing fly ash bricks
field
Treatment, storage and disposal of solid waste as per ToR-58
C4-73

Chapter-4
TABLE-4.22
Sl. No
Category
1
2

from CRM
Waste pickled liquor from
CRM
Tar sludge from Coke oven
3
4
5
6
Quantity KL or T/Yr
@ 10 MTPA
2,750 KL / Year
450 t
Proposed disposal
7,32,16,000 KL
Regenerated in ARP
315 t
8,172 t

catalyst & Oil soaked filter
waste treatment process,
incinerator & Waste
sulphur

Regenerated in ARP

Sent to hazardous waste land
fill
Incinerated
8.7 t/y
59 t/y

disposal site
Slag Utilization
Steel slag utilization :
1.
The proposed BOF process of steel making leads to generation of following a) Converter slag : (160 180 kg/tlc). Called convertor slag
b) Hot metal pretreatment slag ( 20 kg/tcs) and
c) Ladle furnace slag : ( 20 kg/tcs).
2.
a) Hot metal pretreatment slag: This slag is produced in the pretreatment

stage of steel making predominantly in the desulphurization stage. The composition
of HMPT slag is given below;
Fe2
7.4
O3
24.3
SiO2
9.7
AlO3
49.9
CaO
4.3
MgO
1.1
SO3
HMPT slag is separately collected, crushed , and the iron bearing materials are
removed. The non metallic slag, is fed to sinter plant through base mix or
through proportioning bins as a replacement of limestone in sintering.
b)
Converter slag : (BOF or LD slag or steel slag).
This slag is produced in the proposes of steel making in BOF convertors. Ths slag
contains residual metallics s needs to be removed. The composition of steel slag
is given below;
Fe2
6.1
O3
24.4
SiO2
11.9
AlO3
49.1
CaO
4.2
MgO
2.2
SO3
The molten slag is poured into pits in the slag bay and is allowed to cool.
C4-74

Chapter-4
Water is sprayed on the hot slag to facilitate faster cooling. The slag is then
processed in a series of crushers and screens to separate metallic components.
The metallic compoment (10% 15%) is recycled back to the BOF convertors as
coolant. The non metallic portion of BOF slag is proposed to be processed and
used under;
c)
LHF Slag: This slag is produced in the secondary metallurgical operations

carried out in ladle furnaces. This slag is essentially in powder form and
contains higher amount of alumina and cannot be used internally in steel
making. The composition of slag is given below:
This material is extensively used in manufacture of ladle covering compound
and also in production of high alumina cements. For this the material will be
screened to remove larger size which is used in convertors for producing
steel. Non metallic component is sent to produce cement.
Fe2
2.5
3.
O3
22.1
SiO2
11.6
AlO3
35.5
CaO
13.8
MgO
<1.0
SO3
The utilization of the steel slag is given below:

a) Slag of less than 5 mm ( fine steel slag)
(i)
(ii)
Used in producing ordinary Portland cement (up to 5% in OPC). The slag is

used as performance improrer and also provides the requenisite colour to
the OPC and slag cement.
Use as fine aggregate in civil construction : The fine slag does not contain
free lime, which is one of the reason for its poor utilization. The BOF slag
has been permitted by for use as replacement of river sand by BIS. These
material being heavy can be used in pavements, bricks road making etc.
b) Slag more than 5 mm 60 mm:

(i)
The nonmetallic portion of LD slag contains free lime and magnesia. This
advantage has been used in construction of roads / highways as slag
bound materials. In this process, LD slag and granulated BF slag in
different proportions are mixed and rolled to produce a cementations base
for roads.
This concept is widely practiced in Europe, and Japan. this is being
investigated in Indian steel plants. This has the potential to reduce the
thickness of highways by 25-30% and can help greatly in reducing the use
of natural materials in the construction sector.
This process can also used for producing gabions, boulders, etc for use in
protection of coastal areas. In Japan, these are called ferro form
(ii)
BOF slag as construction aggregates: The BOF steel slag has excellent
properties and is ideally suited for use in the following area.
C4-75

Chapter-4
a)
b)
Ballast in railways
Aggregates in highways / roads
The preferred application is highways due to higher angle of friction high

PSV heavy weight etc. However, for use as road aggregate, the steel slag
needs to be weathered. Though several options of weathering (natural,
accalarated etc) are available, it is intended to carryout weathering using
steam. This reduces the weathering time to less than a week. This has
been investigated and the process established at JSW Vijayanagar.
The proposed utilization of slags will be as below:
a)
b)
c)
HMPT Slag
:
Convertor Slag
:
:
:
:
:
LHF Slag
: 90% in sinter making

5% metallics to convertor
: 10% metallics in steel making
15% in sinter making
2 % in cement plants
75% Road construction
5% Railway ballast
3% soil conditioner
: : 95% in cement making 5% in steel making
4.3.10.3 Fly Ash Management8

The main solid waste from the CPP will be the ash (fly ash and bottom ash). The
equivalent coal consumption in the captive power plant will be 3.0 MTPA. The
total ash generation will be about 7,50,000 TPA. Out of this, the bottom ash will
be about 1,50,000 TPA (20% of the total ash) and the balance fly ash will be
6,00,000 TPA.
JSW will put all efforts to utilize 100% of the ash generated from the CPP. The
following activities will be carried out to comply as per the new fly ash
notification, S.O. 2623 (E) dated on 6th November 2008 issued by MoEF.
Fly ash is proposed to be utilized in the captive cement plant with a capacity
6.0 MTPA of own group companies;
The bottom ash will be stored in properly designed ash dykes as per CPCB
guidelines to prevent leaching to the sub-soil and underground aquifer;
The ash disposal area will be lined with HDPE/LDPE impervious lining to
prevent seepage of rain water from the disposal area in the ground and pollute
ground water;
Shall maintain a record of all sale and/ or disposal of the fly ash; and
Shall submit annual compliance report including record of sale and/or disposal
of the fly ash.
Utilization (Recycle & Reuse) of Solid Waste
Evacuation of fly ash as per ToR-57
C4-76

Chapter-4
Different types of solid wastes are generated from integrated steel plant. The
source of solid waste generation along with their re-use, re-cycle, utilization and
disposal methodology are given in Table-4.239.
End use of solid waste as per ToR-59
C4-77
Chapter-4
TABLE-4.23
SOLID WASTE GENERATION THEIR RE-USE, RE-CYCLE,
UTILIZATION AND DISPOSAL
Sr. No
Type of Solid
Waste
BF slag
BOF Slag
BOF Scales &

Scrap
Mill Scrap
Fly ash
Bottom Ash
Waste Refractory
8
9
Lime/dolo
Fines
Mill scale
Re-use
Within Plant
Cement plant
4
5
6
7
Re-utilization
Recycle
-Granulated and partly used in

plant
-Balance will be crushed & used
for making roads, civil works,
etc.
Reused
in
sinter
plant as sinter mix.
Used in BF
mite
Cement Plant
-Used in plant for making
refractory mortars in captive
mortar shops
- Making / repairing plant roads
Re-used in sinter plant
Dumped for
Future Use
Sold
Sold
to
cement
manufacturers
/
glass
manufactures
-Will be sold to parties for building roads
(aggregate for road making, rail track ballast,
land filling, after conditioning as it contains lime
which if used before conditioning then it swells),
civil engineering works, etc.
-Soil conditioner as it contains P2O5, especially at
places where PH is acidic as in heavily leached
soils of Ranchi region.
-Used in sinter @of 3% only due to high P2O5.
Sold to cement manufacturers
Sold as material for making road embankment
or for filling low lying areas
Ash dump
-Reused in sinter plant (Oil

content from 1 - 3%).
- Reused as a reductant input
material in BF (Oil content up to
C4-78
Chapter-4
Sr. No
10
Type of Solid
Waste
BF flue dust
Re-utilization
Recycle
Dumped for
Future Use
Re-use
Within Plant
15%)
Used in pellet plant
Sold
Reused
in
sinter
plant as sinter mix.
11
BF GCP sludge
-Reused in sinter Used in sinter plant after plant as sinter mix pelletisation
after pelletisation
12
BOF sludge
Reused
in
sinter Used in sinter plant
plant & BF
13
Sinter ESP dust
Recycled in sinter plant
Recycle of waste means utilization of waste in the same process from which it has been generated
Reuse of waste means utilization of the waste in any process other than the process from which the waste has been generated. The process utilizing
the waste may be within the plant or out side the plant. In case of utilization outside plant, the waste is sold to firm utilizing the waste
Disposal means dumping of waste in designated areas.
C4-79

Chapter-4
The following shop wise specific management measures will be adopted for solid
waste:
Sinter Plants
100% recycling of LD sludge, mill scale, lime and dolomite dust, SP sludge,
and ESP dust;
100% recycling of return sinter fines;
Complete utilization of 10 mm LD slag; and
BF flue dust utilization in Sinter Plant.
DR Plant
DRI process dust 100% used - reused in sinter plant as sinter mix. Unused
quantity sold to parties for brick making, land filling and to oil refineries as
replacement of activated carbon; and
DRI de-dusting dust 100% used - reused in sinter plant as sinter mix. Unused
quantity sold to parties for brick making & land filling.
Blast Furnaces
100% cast house slag granulation for sale to cement plants;

Recovery of iron scraps at BF slag dump;
Use of cast-able material in cast house runners, in place of ramming mass,
which will reduce scrap generation by 1%;
Recycling of BF flue dust in sinter plant and sold; and
Recycling of used refractory.
Steel Melting Shops
Recycling of LD sludge will be explored; and

LD slag after granulation partly used in sinter plants, blast furnaces and
steel melting shop for conserving limestone & dolomite. Balance used for
making roads, civil works etc.
Refractory Material Plant
Under size limestone, dolomite & lime fines recycled 100% to sinter plant;
Utilisation of refractory grog made from used refractory bricks for mortar
manufacturing of different grades (25% raw material input is from grog);
Ladle covering compound in SMS using LD slag;
Waste Mg-C bricks for production of new bricks for converter bottom, coating
and patching materials for converter vessels; and
Reduction of refractory consumption.
Rolling Mills
100% recycling of mill scales.
C4-80

Chapter-4
Coal Based Power Plant

100% Used in Fly-ash brick making plant and sold to cement plants.
4.3.11 Impact on Ecology
Impacts on Terrestrial Ecology
The impact on terrestrial ecology may occur due to emission of gaseous

pollutants like SO2 PM and NOx. These pollutants at a very low dose act as
atmospheric fertilizer for the vegetation. However, at higher doses, they can be
injurious to both vegetation as well as animals.
The main sources of air pollution from the proposed plant would be from the
process stacks and stacks from the power plant units. The pollutants from the
proposed plant include sulphur dioxide, particulate matter and NOx.
Presentation of Modeling Results
The impact of air pollutants on vegetation due to the proposed integrated steel
plant is identified and quantified by using air dispersion modeling.
The simulations have been done to evaluate PM, SO 2 and NOx likely to be
contributed by the proposed plant. The resultant concentrations are estimated as
71.11 g/m3 for PM, 56.25 g/m3 for SO2 and 55.46 g/m3 for NOx
concentrations of pre-monsoon season which is within the limits as per National
Ambient Air Quality Standards. Hence, a marginal impact is envisaged due to
proposed steel plant on the surrounding forest areas.
Impact on Aquatic Ecology
Since the unit will be operating on zero discharge process, no adverse impact on
aquatic ecology is envisaged. The plant drainage system will be suitably designed
such that the storm water does not carry any pollutants. Suitable de-silting
check dam will be provided so that the steam, down stream are not effected.
Impact on Migratory Paths for Wild life
As per the Forest Working Plans, there are no identified migratory paths for major
and minor wild life in the project site and the study area. The identified avi-fauna,
which are observed in the project site and in the study area, are local migrants
only. Therefore, the proposed plant operations are not likely to have any adverse
impact on the paths for avifauna.
Impact of Air Emissions on Forest Blocks
The impacts on the reserve forest blocks have been computed based on the SO 2
incremental concentration over the reserved/protected forests. There are 12
protected/reserve forest blocks present in 10 km radius. The incremental
concentrations over the reserve forests are given in Table-4.24.
C4-81

Chapter-4
The predicted and resultant concentrations will be well within the limits of 100
g/m3 for PM, 80 g/m3 for SO2 and 80 g/m3 for NOx in sensitive areas as per
NAAQMS. Hence, there will be limited impact on the forests in the study area.
TABLE-4.24
INCREMENTAL CONCENTRATIONS AT FORESTS
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Name of the Forest

Block
PF near Barenda village

PF near Mankidih village
PF near Tilaipiri village
P.F near Papridi village
PF near Rahadih village
PF near Garadih village
PF near Bhusudih
PF near Chatam village
PF near Mukrub village
PF near Saparum village
PF near Barukande village
Kalimati RF
Distance
from Plant
Site
Boundary
(km)
0.5
0.6
1.7
2.9
4.0
4.1
4.6
4.7
5.8
6.9
7.9
8.2
Direction
from Plant
Site
NW
ESE
ESE
S
ESE
ESE
SSW
SE
NE
ESE
SSW
NE
Incremental
Concentration (g/m3)
Winter Season
PM
SO2
NOx
2
8
7
5
5
5
5
3
3
5
30
25
23
23
23
9
14
5
5
36
24
20
17
18
10
13
8
4.3.12 Impacts on Occupational Health & Safety

Impact
Working operation of integrated steel plant is cumbersome and negligence in
plant operations may cause risk to safety and health problems.
Mitigation Measures
For ensuring better occupational health and safety the following measures will be
implemented:
General Measures
Proper control of fugitive dust from sources inside plant including open
stockyards and to keep all de-dusting systems in prefect conditions. The dedusting systems provided in shops will be regularly monitored and the level of
dust in working zone will be reported to the management for necessary
control action;
Keeping plenum ventilation systems of premises in perfect working order to
avoid accumulation of dust on equipment inside the pressurized room. Regular
cleaning of air filters;
Keeping air conditioning plants in perfect running condition for
control/instrumentation rooms;
Proper functioning of pollution control systems to minimise dust fall on plant
and outside areas;
C4-82

Chapter-4
Based on the environmental monitoring for dust, gases, toxic chemical, noise
& vibration, the workers exposed to these will be regularly checked in medical
unit and results will be intimated to management;
Workers exposed to noise prone areas will be medically checked and proper
noise protective equipment will be supplied to them and will be encouraged to
use the same;
Spot cooling facilities will be provided for workers exposed to high heat
generating shops and will be checked periodically. If necessary, rotation of
duties is advised;
Proper attention is given to township water quality so that water borne
disease may not affect residents; and
More doctors in township hospital and plant medical unit will be additionally
trained in the field of occupational health as policy matter.
4.3.12.1 House Keeping Measures

Proper housekeeping is the key to proper environment management. This creates
proper working environment for the work force and safe working conditions.
However, for the proposed project the following good housekeeping measures will
be adopted:
Regular cleaning and watering of plant roads to avoid accumulation of

dust/garbage;
Regular cleaning of shop floors;
Avoiding accumulation and dumping of wastes and damaged equipment and
items anywhere inside the plant affecting aesthetics;
Developing a positive outlook in the employees for keeping the work place,
both in factory, office or laboratory, clean and well maintained; and
Maintaining hygienic conditions in areas like canteens, near drinking water
sources and toilets.
4.3.12.2 Impacts of the Proposed Project

The proposed project will have positive changes on the socio-economic conditions
of the villages in the study area. There will be a natural change, due to
industrialisation process.
Following are the positive impacts due to the proposed project:
Employment potential;
Increased business opportunity;
Improvement in health and education facilities;
Better living standards; and
Access to improved infrastructure facilities.
The project is expected to provide impetus for economic development in the

immediate surroundings and would also generate local employment. Furthermore,
it will facilitate improved access to market centers, educational institutions,
healthcare facilities, and offices located in the district. The cumulative likely
positive impacts of the project will result in increased mobility, employment
C4-83

Chapter-4
generation and above all better economic integration of the area with the major
market and trade centers within and outside the districts.
4.3.13 Impact on Socio-Economic Aspects After the construction of Project
This section of the chapter deals with the demographic, social and economic
impact of the study area of JSW Jharkhand Steel Ltd proposed 10 MTPA
integrated steel plant. The proposed project site is free from human settlements
and all the villages are situated at a considerable distance from the plant area,
except few villages, which are within one km radius of plant area. However, the
project is expected to result in improvements in the socio-economic levels in the
study area.
4.3.13.1 Positive Impacts of the Project
There will be number of positive changes on the socio-economic conditions of the
project study area villages as well as the population. There will be a natural
change, due to industrialisation process, in the scenario leading into the socioeconomic development of project core zone area and also the buffer zone.
Considering project size and investment, it is expected to create direct and
indirect impact on:
Employment potential;
Increased business opportunity;
Improvement in health and education facilities;
Better living standards; and
Access to improved infrastructure facilities.
The project is expected to provide impetus for economic development in the

immediate surroundings and would also generate local employment. Furthermore,
it will facilitate improved access to market centers, educational institutions,
healthcare facilities, and offices located in the district. The cumulative likely
positive impacts of the project will result in increased mobility, employment
generation and above all better economic integration of the area with the major
market and trade centers within and outside the districts.
4.3.13.2 Impact on Population Growth
Increase of Migration
The proposed industry will have an impact on the population growth as it would
provide considerable employment to the families in the nearby villages. About
50% employees from outside may take up jobs in the proposed plant and with
immigration of their families, an increase in the population is anticipated.
The important and natural impact on demography would be immigration of men
workforce. Due to this trend there will be an impact on family structure. There
will be more single and nuclear families immigrating into the project area, which
is expected to have some sociological implications.
C4-84

Chapter-4
Increase of Number of Households

The natural impact anticipated due the project is the increase in number of
households. The social family structure is expected to change from strong joint
family system in rural areas to small and nuclear families, which is a common
trend in the industrialization and urbanization process.
Population Growth Control
The industrialization, urbanization, increase in rate of literacy, health awareness
and delay in marriage will have an impact on birth rate due to population control
measures.
Impact on Civic Amenities, Educational and Heath Care Facilities
The commissioning of proposed project will provide infrastructure development
benefits to the surrounding backward villages in the form of development of
roads, communication facilities, transportation, marketing, banking, postal
services and health facilities directly or indirectly. The civic amenities will be
developed due to proposed project.
Impact on Education Aspects
The literacy of the project area is expected to improve due to the expected
change in socio-economic development of the villages. The project is expected to
improve the educational facilities in the villages of project study area. Presently
the literacy rate of project study area is 54.35% which is very low compared to
the national and state literacy rate.
Impact on Economic Aspects
The proposed project would be instrumental in improving the financial resources
of the surrounding population by way of creating direct and indirect employment
and business opportunities to the local population and people from surrounding
villages.
Indirect Employment
The proposed industry will help to improving the financial resources of the
surrounding population by way of petty trade, micro enterprises, transport
companies and employment opportunities in auxiliary units. The project is
expected to encourage the setting up of various utility services and petty trade
benefiting around 20,000 people around the project area.
Direct Employment
Direct employment opportunities will also be generated in project, besides
indirect and ancillary employment opportunities. Local people will be given
preference for employment under semi-skilled and un-skilled categories. Thus
the people in and around the project area are indirectly benefited both socially
and economically. The proposed industrial activities will provide employment to
C4-85

Chapter-4
persons of different skills and trades. The local population is the largest group
among these employees. The employment potential ameliorates economic
conditions of these families directly and provide employment to many other
families indirectly who are involved in business and service oriented activities.
This in-turn will improve the socio-economic conditions of the area.
Impact on Human Settlements
The project area is free from habitants. Hence no resettlement is required.
However, the project proponent is committed to implement rehabilitation or
restoration of livelihood programs. A detailed tribal development plan, social
impact assessment and rehabilitation plan prepared by BAIF, New Delhi and
enclosed as Annexure-XVI.
4.3.13.3 Impacts on Public Health and Safety
The discharge of waste materials (stack emission, wastewater and solid wastes),
from process operations can have potential impact on public safety and health.
The impact from the discharge of waste products is not expected to be significant
since, the adverse impacts on ambient air, water and soil quality are predicted to
below.
It is predicted that the impacts on public safety will be very low, due to the
effective safety system and safety management available in the plant. Overall,
the impact on public safety and health from the proposed project activities are
likely to be insignificant.
4.3.13.4 Impacts on Cultural Resources
There are no historical monuments or ancient temples within the study area.
GLCs concentration levels in ambient air are well within the standards and no
major adverse effect predicted is envisaged.
4.3.13.5 Impact on Other Sensitive Locations
There are no buildings of public interest and monuments notified by
archaeological department in and around the proposed plant area. Thus, there
will not be any major adverse impact on the tourist/religious or historical
important places due to project.
4.4
Compliance with CREP Guidelines10

The plan for the implementation of the recommendations made for the steel
plants in the Charter on Corporate Responsibility for Environmental Protection
(CREP) guidelines is presented in Table-4.25 and for the captive power plant is
given in Table-4.26. The CREP guidelines for cement plant are given in Table4.27.
10
Plan for implantation of CREP guidelines as per ToR-68
C4-86

Chapter-4
TABLE-4.25
PLAN FOR THE IMPLEMENTATION OF THE RECOMMENDATIONS OF
CREP GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATED IRON & STEEL INDUSTRY
Sr. No.
1
CREP Recommendations
Coke Oven Plants
Action Plan
To meet the parameters PLD (% leaking

doors), PLL (% leaking lids), PLO (% leaking
off take), of the notified standards under EPA
within three years. Industry will submit time
bound action plan and PERT Chart along with
the Bank Guarantee for the implementation of
the same.
To rebuild at least 40% of the coke oven
batteries* in next 10 years.
Steel Melting Shop
Fugitive emissions
To reduce (including installation of secondary
de-dusting facilities)
Blast Furnace
Direct inject of reducing agents
Solid
Waste
Management
Hazardous
Waste
Utilization of Steel Melting Shop (SMS) / Blast

Furnace (BF) Slag
Hazardous Wastes
Charge of tar sludge / ETP sludge to coke
oven.
Inventorization of the hazardous waste as
per hazardous waste (M&H) rules, 1989 as
amended in 2000 and implementation of
the
rules.
(tar sludge, acid sludge, waste lubricating
oil and type fuel falls in the category of
Hazardous Waste)
The proposed coke oven in

the
steel
plant
is of
recovery
type
and
all
conditions shall be complied
with
Will
be
complied
by
installation
of
control
equipment like ESP/bag
filters
for
removal
of
process emission
Will
be
complied
by
installation
of
ESP/bag
filter/wet
scrubber
for
control of air emissions and
flue emission will be utilised
in proposed power plant
BF slag will be used in own
cement plant and will also
be supplied to other cement
industries/brick
manufacturer.
SMS slag is proposed to be
reutilized to the extent
possible.
ETP sludge/tar sludge to be
used in coke ovens to the
extent possible shall be
explored
Used oil/spent oil will be
sold to authorized persons.
Control measures will be
taken
according
to
hazardous waste as per
Hazardous Waste (M&H)
Rules, 1989
C4-87

Chapter-4
Sr. No.
6
Water Conservation / Water Pollution
To reduce specific water consumption to 5
m3/T for long products and 8 m3/T for flat
products.
To operate the CO-BP effluent treatment
plant efficiently to achieve the notified
effluent discharge standards.
Action Plan
Will be complied
Installation of continuous stack monitoring

system & its calibration in major stacks and
setting up of the online ambient air quality
monitoring stations.
To operate the existing pollution control

equipment efficiently and to keep proper
record of run hours, failure time and efficiency
with immediate effect. Compliance report in
this regard be submitted to CPCB / SPCB every
three months.
To implement the recommendations of Life
Cycle Assessment (LCA) study sponsored by
MoEF.
The industry will initiate the steps to adopt the
following clean technologies/measures to
improve the performance of industry towards
production, energy and environment
Continuous
stack
monitoring
system
and
online ambient air quality
monitoring stations will be
installed.
Will be complied
9
10
Energy recovery of top blast furnace (BF)

gas.
Use of tar-free runner linings.
De-dusting of cast house at tap holes,
runners, skimmers ladle and charging
points.
Suppression of fugitive emissions using
nitrogen gas or other inert gas.
To study the possibility of slag and fly ash
transportation back to the abandoned
mines, to fill up the cavities through empty
railway wagons while they return back to
the mines and its implementation.
Processing of the waste containing flux &
ferrous wastes through waste recycling
plant.
To implement rainwater harvesting.
Reduction of Green House Gases by:
a. Reduction in power consumption
b. Use of by-products gases for power
generation
c. Promotion of Energy Optimisation
Technology including energy audit
To set targets for Resource Conservation
such as Raw material, energy and water
consumption
to
match
International
Standards.
Up-gradation in the monitoring and
Will be complied
BF gas recovered will be

utilised in CPP
Will be complied
C4-88

Chapter-4
Sr. No.
analysis facilities for air and water
pollutants. Also to impart elaborate
training to the manpower so that realistic
data is obtained in the environmental
monitoring laboratories.
To Improve overall house keeping.
11
SIP/DRI Plant
Inventorisation of DRI plant to install proper
air pollution control equipment to control
primary and secondary emissions.
* As per rebuilding schedule submitted to CPCB/MoEF
Action Plan
Will be complied
The following CREP guidelines for thermal power plant will be implemented for the
captive power plant of the proposed project.
TABLE-4.26
PLAN FOR THE IMPLEMENTATION OF THE RECOMMENDATIONS OF CREP
GUIDELINES FOR CAPTIVE POWER PLANT
Sr. No.
1
Implementation
of
Environmental
Standards
(emission & effluent) in non-compliant* Power
Plants (31 & 27) Placement of order for pollution
control
equipment,
Installation & commission :
For existing thermal power plants, a feasibility study
shall be carried out by Central Electricity Authority
(CEA) to examine possibility to reduce the
particulate matter emissions to 100 mg/Nm3. The
studies shall also suggest the road map to meet 100
mg/Nm3 wherever found feasible. CEA shall submit
the report.
New / expansion power projects to be accorded
environmental clearance on or after 1.4.2003 shall
meet the limit of 100 mg/Nm3 for particulate matter
Development of SO2 & NOx emission standards for

coal based plants. New / expansion power projects
shall meet the limit of SO2 & NOx Existing power
plants shall meet the limit of SO2 & NOx.
Install/activate
opacity
meters/continuous
monitoring systems in all the units, with proper
calibration system.
Development of guidelines / standards for mercury
and other toxic heavy metals emissions.
Review of stack height requirement and guidelines
for power plants based on micro meteorological
data.
Implementation of use of beneficiated coal as per
GOI Notification: power plants will sign fuel supply
agreement (FSA) to meet the requirement as per
the matrix prepared by CEA for compliance of the
6
7
8
Action Plan
Proposed
captive
power plant will be
complied
with
environmental
standards
Not applicable as this
is proposed captive
power plant.
Will be complied. The

particulate matter will
be controlled as per
CPCB/MOEF
guidelines.
Will be complied
Will be complied
Will be complied
Will be complied
Will be complied
C4-89

Chapter-4
Sr. No.
notification
as
short
term
Action Plan
measure.
Options/mechanism for setting up of coal washeries

as a long term measure
10
Coal India will set up its own washery

State Electricity Board to set up its own
washery
Coal India to ask private entrepreneurs to

set up washeries for CIL and taking washing
charges
SEBs to select a private entrepreneur to set

up a washery near pit-head installation of
coal beneficiation
Power plants will indicate their requirement of
abandoned coal mines for ash disposal & Coal India /
MOC shall provide the list of abandoned mines to
CEA
Power plants will provide dry ash to the users
outside the premises or uninterrupted access to the
users within six months.
Will
be
suitably
complied
Will
be
suitably
complied
complied
11
Power Plants should provide dry flyash free of cost

to the users.
Will
be
suitably
12
State PWDs / construction & development agencies

shall also adhere to the specifications / Schedules of
CPWD for ash / ash based products utilization. MoEF
will take up the matter with State Governments.
i) New plants to be accorded environmental
clearance on or after 1.04.2003 shall adopt dry fly
ash extraction or dry disposal system or Medium
(35-40%) ash concentration slurry disposal system
or Lean phase with hundred percent ash water recirculation system depending upon site specific
environmental situation
Will be complied
13
14
15
(ii) Existing plants shall adopt any of the systems

mentioned in 13
Fly ash Mission shall prepare guidelines/manuals for
fly ash utilization.
New plants shall promote adoption of clean coal and
clean power generation technologies
Will be complied
Will be complied
Will be complied
C4-90

Chapter-4
TABLE-4.27
PLAN FOR THE IMPLEMENTATION OF THE RECOMMENDATIONS OF CREP
GUIDELINES FOR CEMENT PLANT
Sr. No.
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CREP Guideline
Cement Plants, which are not complying with notified
standards, shall do the following to meet the standards:
Augmentation of existing Air Pollution Control Devices
Replacement of existing Air Pollution Control Devices
Cement Plants located in critically polluted or urban
areas (including 5-km distance outside urban boundary)
will meet 100 mg/Nm3 limit of particulate matter and
continue working to reduce the emission of particulate
matter to 50 mg/Nm3
The
new
cement
kilns
to
be
accorded
NOC/Environmental Clearance w.e.f. 01.04.2003 will
meet the limit of 50 mg/Nm3 for particulate matter
emissions
CPCB will evolve load based standards
CPCB and NCBM will evolve SO2 and NOx emission
standards
The Cement industries will control fugitive emissions
from all the raw material and products storage and
transfer points. However, the feasibility for the control of
fugitive emissions from limestone and coal storage areas
will be decided by the National Task Force (NTF). The
NTF shall submit its recommendations within three
months
CPCB, NCBM, BIS and Oil refineries will jointly prepare
the policy on use of petroleum coke as fuel in cement
kiln.
After performance evaluation of various types of
continuous monitoring equipment and feedback from the
industries and equipment manufacturers, NTF will decide
feasible unit operations/sections for installation of
continuous monitoring equipment. The industry will
install the Continuous Monitoring Systems (CMS).
Trippings in kiln ESP to be minimized as per the
recommendation of NTF
Industries will submit the target date to enhance the
utilization of waste material
NCBM will carry out a study on hazardous waste

utilization in cement kiln
Cement industries will carry out feasibility study and
submit target dates to CPCB for co-generation of power
Action Plan
Will be complied
Will be complied
Will be complied
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Will be complied
Not Applicable
-
Not Applicable
Waste fly ash from
power plant will be
utilised for cement
making
to
the
extent possible.
Not Applicable
-
****
C4-91

Chapter-5
Analysis of Alternative Technology & Site
5.0
ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVE TECHNOLOGY AND SITE
5.1
Selection of Process
Manufacture of iron and steel starting from raw materials is the output of various
complex metallurgical process and, therefore, highly technology oriented. In
order to select an appropriate process route for production of iron and steel, a
large number of factors affecting these technologies need to be examined. Some
of these important factors are:
Product-mix and plant capacity;

Availability of raw materials and other infrastructural facilities like water,
power, etc;
Status of technologies;
Logistics of operation; and
Extent of environmental pollution;
There are two established process routes for production of steel viz.
1. Blast Furnace-Basic Oxygen Furnace route; and
2. Direct Reduction- Electric Arc Furnace route.
Approximately 75% of the worlds hot metal is produced through the BF-BOF
route and it is generally accepted that the BF will continue to be the dominant
means of hot metal production.
BF-BOF process route for production of steel from iron ore consists of reduction of
iron ore using metallurgical coke as a reducing agent in a Blast Furnace (BF) and
refining the metal in a Basic Oxygen Furnace (BOF), where oxygen is blown into
molten iron in order to reduce its carbon content. This route requires
metallurgical coke.
On account of inadequate availability of coking coal in some parts of the world,
another technique, the DRI-EAF method has been used perfected over the years.
In the DRI-EAF technique, steel scrap or Directly Reduced Iron (DRI) are
charged into an Electric Arc Furnace (EAF) and is melted using graphite
electrodes. The steel is then refined to the required specifications.
The steel produced by the above-mentioned techniques is either cast into flat
products (hot rolled coils, plates etc) or into long products (bars, rods, rails and
structural shapes). While the long products are primarily used in the construction
sector, the flat products find application in white goods, automobiles etc.
Hot rolled coils are further processed in cold rolling mills to produce cold rolled
steel products and are obtained by passing hot rolled steel coils/strips through
pressurized rolls at room temperature to reduce thickness.
BF/BOF processes mainly requires iron ore and coke/coking coal where as DRIEAF process requires scrap or sponge iron and non-coking coal.
C5-1

Chapter-5
It is proposed to adopt BF-BOF process for this proposed steel plant, which is
used widely in the world due to flexibility and large scale of operation.
The status of technologies prevailing in all production areas and selection of the
optimum ones for the proposed steel complex have been deliberated in the
following sections viz.
Pelletising;
Sintering;
Coke making
Iron making;
Steel making;
Casting; and
Rolling.
5.1.1 Pelletising
Basis for Pellet Plant Selection
For the blast furnace normal feed materials are lump iron ore sinter and pellets
along with coke, limestone and other flux materials. Due to depletion of rich iron
ore, large amount of experiments were conducted in the usage of lesser rich iron
ore of about 63.5% Fe content as against the preferred 67.5% Fe content.
Technological improvements have led to the use of pellets in every aspect to
achieve higher productivity point of view, reduced coke requirement, as well as
better burden chemistry or production point of view. The pellet & sinter
combination is highly recommended for the Blast Furnace operation.
The proposed pelletisation plant will be designed to produce 2 x 4.0 million
tonnes of pellets. This pellet plant will utilize the beneficiation plant product to
produce BF grade pellets to be used in the blast-furnace.
Pelletising turns fine grained iron ore (even low grade iron ore) into balls of a
certain diameter, which are suitable for blast furnace and direct reduction. Iron
ore is crushed and the impurities are removed. The ore mix is moistened and a
binding agent is added. The iron-rich ore is heated with a binding agent to create
durable marble sized "green pellets in rotating drums or on rotary discs. These
green pellets are dried and indurate at temperatures of more than 1000C. This
can take place in shaft furnaces or on a travelling grate. The pellets have
excellent physical and metallurgical properties and can be easily transported, due
to their high strength and suitability for storage. The pelletisation process
involves three steps:
Raw material preparation;

Forming pellets; and
Pellet hardening.
Prior to the formation of pellets, water is added to iron ore fines to adjust the
moisture content to approximately 9 % and the ore is mixed with small amounts
of binding agents such as bentonite (approximately 0.5 %) and flux such as
limestone, lime olivine and dolomite (1-5 %). These give the pellets the proper
C5-2

Chapter-5
physical and metallurgical properties needed for further processing. Mixing takes
place in continuously operating drum or pan-type mixers of suitable capacity.
Pellets are formed either in pelletizing discs or drums, drums usually being
connected to roller screens used for separating undersized pellets. The pellets
thus formed have low mechanical strength they are hardened in travelling grate
coupled with drying and furnace.
5.1.2 Sintering
Sintering is a technology for agglomeration of iron ore fines into useful blast
furnace burden material. The raw materials used are: iron ore fines (-10 mm),
coke breeze (-3 mm), limestone & dolomite fines (-3 mm) and other metallurgical
wastes. The proportioned raw materials are mixed and moistened
in a mixing drum and are loaded on sinter machine. The raw material mix is
segregated so that the coarse materials settle at the bottom and fines onto the
top. The top surface of the mix is ignited through stationary burners at 1200 oC. A
high temperature combustion zone is created in the charge-bed due to
combustion of solid fuel of the mix and regeneration of heat of incandescent
sinter and outgoing gases. Sinter is produced as a combined result of locally
limited melting, grain boundary diffusion and re-crystallization of various
components. On the completion of sintering process, finished sinter cake is
crushed and cooled. The cooled sinter is screened and is dispatched to blast
furnace.
5.1.3 Coke Making
Coke is one of the prime requirements for production of hot metal through blast
furnace route. Considering the level of technological development in the
coke making area and total requirement of blast furnace coke in the blast
furnace, installation of recovery type coke oven batteries have been envisaged.
The complex is proposed to be equipped with four (4), stamp charged 6.3 m tall
coke oven batteries of each oven. The gross coke generated in the coke ovens
will be screened. BF coke & nut coke will be sent to the blast furnace and coke
fines/ coke breeze generated in the plant will be utilized in the sinter plant. The
coke
making
technology
would
include
pre-carbonization
and
post
carbonization technologies like selective crushing of coal, stamp charging, coking
in high capacity ovens, cooling of coke, screening & gas cleaning facilities.
Blast Furnace Process Route
In blast furnace, lump iron ore, sinter, pellets, metallurgical coke, lime stone, flux
materials are charged and the reaction of the carbon in coke and the oxygen in
the blast both acts as reductant and fuel thus separating iron from iron oxide.
This gets collected into hearth as molten iron (which is tapped at intervals)
molten slag, input materials to blast furnace are in solid form but the output is in
liquid form.
Blast furnace is, by far, the most established process for production of hot metal.
The process has been continuously improved over many years to increase
productivity and quality of hot metal. In fact, the blast furnace still continues to
be the dominant means of hot metal production for the iron and steel industry.
Nevertheless, this technology has some limitations like dependence on
C5-3

Chapter-5
metallurgical coke and elaborate supporting facilities (coke ovens etc.). However,
the latest developments, as narrated below, have retained its predominant
status:
Pulverised coal injection;

Oxygen enrichment;
Bell less charging system;
Stave cooling system;
High hot blast temperature; and
High top pressure.
Basic Oxygen Furnace (BOF)
In BOF scrap, hot metal, limestone, nut coke and other flux materials are charged
and oxygen is blown from the top. Oxidized iron react with the carbon and forms
pure iron with depletion of carbon thus resulting in liquid steel. The quantum and
pressure of oxygen determines the time for making hot metal to liquid steel with
occluded gases and slag particles. The output from BOF are liquid steel, slag and
iron rich fumes/gases.
Ladle Refining
Presently, refining operation of steel is carried out in a separate ladle with electric
heating arrangement along with alloy addition and rinsing arrangement.
Important factor which led to the usage of ladle refining process is that main
vessel to be used for melting as well as primary refining whereas ladle furnace to
be used for final or secondary refining. In ladle refining furnace, following
treatment is possible:
Chemistry correction like addition of ferroalloys for production of micro or low

alloy steel;
Homogenisation of steel composition;
Homogenisation of steel temperature;
Desulphurisation of steel;
Final decarburisation of steel; and
As holding vessel till continuous casting machines are ready.
RH- TOB Degassing Unit
In addition to the ladle refining process some of the low carbon steel products
need further purification of the steel in the form of removal of occluded gases as
well as other foreign impurities which are detrimental in the final properties of the
rolled products. For this reason RH-TOB (Rhuhrstahl Hereaues-Top Oxygen
Blowing) degassing facilities with vacuum as well as argon purging have been
envisaged. With the RH-TOB degassing facility following treatments are possible:
Chemistry correction like addition of ferroalloys for production of micro or low

alloy steel;
Homogenisation of steel composition;
Removal of occluded gases;
Removal of inclusions.
C5-4

Chapter-5
5.1.4 Casting of Liquid Steel

During continuous casting, the liquid steel passes from the pouring ladle, with
the exclusion of air, via a tundish with an adjustable discharge device into the
short, water-cooled copper mould. The shape of the mould defines the shape of
the steel. Before casting, the bottom of the mould is sealed with a so-called
dummy bar. As soon as the bath reaches its intended steel level, the mould
starts to oscillate vertically in order to prevent the steel adhering to its walls. The
red-hot strand, solidified at the surface zones, is drawn from the mould, first with
the aid of a dummy bar, and later by driving rolls. Because of its liquid core, the
strand must be carefully sprayed and cooled down with water. Rolls on all sides
must also support it until it has completely solidified. This prevents the still thin
rim zone from disintegrating. Once it has completely solidified, mobile cutting
torches or shears can divide the strand. Intensive cooling leads to a
homogeneous
solidification
microstructure
with
favorable
technological
properties.
Considering market requirements, single/double strand slab caster capable of
producing slabs of 950-2200 mm width and 220/250 mm thickness have been
envisaged. Billets/bloom caster have also been envisaged. Considering capacity of
the plant, conventional slab casting machine has been envisaged for the proposed
plant.
5.1.5 Rolling
The slabs/blooms/billets are processed in the rolling mills to produce wire rods,
bars, sections, cold rolled coils, plates etc. It is proposed to install bar mill, wire
rod mill, medium and heavy section mill, hot strip mill, plate mill in the proposed
project.
5.1.6 Capacities of Major Facilities
The major plant facilities as envisaged for the proposed project and their
capacities are presented in Table-5.1.
TABLE-5.1
PLANT FACILITIES AND CAPACITY
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Plant Facilities
Beneficiation Plant
Pellet Plant
Coke Oven Plant
Sinter Plant
Blast Furnace
Direct Reduction Plant
BOF Converter
Ladle Furnace
RH-TOP
Billet Caster
Bloom Caster
Shaped Bloom Caster
Slab Caster
Capacity
29.0 MTPA
2 x 4.0 MTPA
2 x 3.0 MTPA- Recovery type ovens with CDQ
having stamp-charging facilities & by-products
2 x 7.8 MTPA
2 x 5500 m3 (2 x 4.9 MTPA)
1.2 MTPA
3 x 180 T + 2 x 280/300 T
3 x 180 T + 2 x 280/300 T
1 x 180 T + 1 x 280/300 T
2 x 6 strand
1 x 6 strand
2 x 3 strand
2 x 2 strand
C5-5

Chapter-5

Sr. No.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
5.2
Plant Facilities
Wire Rod Mill
Bar Mill
Medium Section Mill
Heavy Section Mill
Hot Strip Mill
Plate Mill
Cold Rolling Mill
Galvanizing Line
Tin Plate Mill
Electrical Steel
Colour Coating Line
Oxygen plant
Lime Calcination Plant
Dolo Calcination Plant
Captive Power Plant
Cement Plant
Coking Coal Washery
Non-Coking Coal Washery
Capacity
1.0 MTPA
1.0 MTPA
1.2 MTPA
2 x 1.1 MTPA
4.5 MTPA
1.5 MTPA
2.3 MTPA
1.0 MTPA
1.0 MTPA
1.0 MTPA
1.0 MTPA
3 x 2500 TPD
5 x 600 TPD
2 x 600 TPD
3 x 300 MW
6.0 MTPA
5.52 MTPA
2.30 MTPA
Selection of Alternative Sites

Three sites were evaluated for plant site selection:
Site 1 : Ichagarh-Nimdih, Sarikela Kharswan district, Jharkhand;
Site 2 : Chandankiary, Bokaro district, Jharkhand; and
Site 3 : Barenda, Ranchi district, Jharkhand.
Comparison of all the sites is given in Table-5.2 and the location of alternative
sites are shown in Figure-5.1.
TABLE-5.2
COMPARISON OF ALTERNATE SITES
Parameters
Block/District
Distance from nearest
village
Topo sheet No.
Co-ordinates
Distance from the

National
&
State
Highways
Distance
Railway line/s
Elevation
(AMSL)
of
Alternate Site-I
Ichagarh-Nimdih
IchagarhNimdih/Saraikela
Kharswan
1/2 km from Kukru
73 E/16 & 73 I/4
23o 04 15N to
23 o 09 22N
85 o 56 05E to
86 o 04 56E
15 km form NH-32
40 km from SH
(Silli Ranchi SH)
from
1 km Latemda
railway station
site
RL 200 m
Alternate Site -II

Chandankiary
Chandankiary/Bokaro
Alternate Site-III
Barenda
Sonahatu/Ranchi
1/2 km from
Barmasia
73 I/7
1 km from Barenda
23 o 26 26N to
23 o 09 24N
85 o 18 14E to
86 o 20 50E
10 km form NH-32
Km from SH
(Chandakiyari Barmasia SH)
10 km Gourinath
dham &
20 km - Purulia
railway station
RL 220 m
73E/11, 73 E/12,
73 E/15,73 E/16
23 o 0845N to
23 o 1157N,
85 o 4756E to
85 o 5011E
16.1 km from NH33
20 km from SH
(Ranchi- Silli SH)
12 km Torang
railway station
RL 245 m
C5-6

Chapter-5

Parameters
Nearest Water Body
Nearest Airport
Nearest town
Land Availability
Barren
Single crop
(rain-fed)
Double crop
Forest Land
Total Land
Approximate no. of
homestead involved
Coal
or
mineral
bearing areas if any
in 10 Km radius
Distance of National
Park/Wildlife
Sanctuary/ Biosphere
Reserves,
etc
(Wildlife Sanctuary &
Tiger
Reserve/
Archeologically
important sites)
Existing or proposed
Wild life corridor, if
any,
(Elephant
Corridor)
Source of water and
approximate distance
Source of coal & iron
ore and approximate
distance (Rohne
Coal
BlockHazaribagh Dist and
Ankua
Iron
Ore
Mines,
West
Singhbhum Dist)
Nearest
Power
Substation
for
Construction power
Alternate Site-I
Ichagarh-Nimdih
Subernarekha river 1 km
Ranchi-80 km
Chandil, 40 km
Raiyati land 84%
Govt. land 14%
Forest land 2%
15.0%
82.5%
0.5%
2.0%
Alternate Site -II

Chandankiary
Gobai river-5 km
Damodar river- 25
km
Bokaro-35 km
Chandankiary, 25 km
Raiyati land 95%
Govt. land 5%
Alternate Site-III
Barenda
Subernarekha river2.4 km
30.0%
65.0%
5.0%
Nil
12.0%
88.0%
Ranchi 50 km
Muri, 25 km
Rayati Land : 88%
Govt. Land : 12%
8837 acres
1655
3680 acres
70
Nil
Nil
3800 acres
Nil
Nil
Chandankiary
Nil
13 km, S
Dalma Wildlife
Sanctuary
60 km, S
Dalma Wildlife
Sanctuary
39 km, SE
Dalma Wildlife
Sanctuary
Nil
Nil
Nil
Subarnarekha River
1 km
Coal : 113 km, NW
Iron : 113 km, SW
Gobai River-5 km
Damodar River- 25
km
130 km, NW
170 km, SW
Subarnarekha
River2.4 km
96 km, NW
107 km, SW
Namkum
Note: All distances mentioned above () are aerial distances
The site-3 (near Barenda Village) has been selected, considering the following:
No protected /reserved forest within the project site;

Distance from Wildlife Sanctuary, National Park, Elephant Corridor- As per
prescribed norms;
Distance from major water bodies, highways, etc - As per prescribed norms;
88% - Raiyati Land (private land); 12% - Govt. Land; 0% - Forest Land;
No displacement of homesteads;
Only 10 km from the main broad gauge rail line;
C5-7

Chapter-5
Coal deposits : 96 km and Iron ore deposits: 107 km;

Haldia Port : 350 km & Dhamra Port : 470 km;
Distance from allocated water source Tapping point on Subarnarekha
around 25 km and second tapping point at Chandil dam around 27 km;
Easily accessible through a motorable road and 16.1 km from National
Highway (NH-33).
C5-8

Chapter-5
FIGURE-5.1
LOCATION MAP OF ALTERNATIVE SITES
C5-9

Chapter-5
5.3
Carbon Credit Project / Reduction of Green House Gas Emission Projects 1

Under Clean Development Mechanism (CDM) in steel sector the Green House
Gases (GHG) reduction projects which can be taken through the CDM route to
accrue carbon credits benefits as financial incentives for the efforts. Following are
the areas which shall be developed as CDM project activity and have been
identified as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Top pressure recovery turbine (TRT) in blast furnace;

Coal dust injection in blast furnace;
Sinter plant: waste heat utilization; and
CDQ in coke oven.
Project concept note (PCN) and project design document (PDD) will be prepared
after detail engineering.
Top Pressure Recovery Turbine (TRT) in Blast Furnace
Top pressure recovery turbine (TRT) is a power generation system, which

converts the physical energy of high-pressure blast furnace top gas into electricity
by using an expansion turbine. Although the pressure difference is low, the large
gas volumes make the recovery economically feasible. The key technology of TRT
is to secure the stable and high-efficiency operation of the expansion turbine in
dusty blast gas conditions, without harming the blast furnace operation. Two
types of system are available, wet TRT system and dry TRT system.
Benefits
Generates electric power

Excellent operational reliability, abrasion resistant; and
Suitable for larger furnaces and higher temperature gases.
Coal Dust Injection (CDI) in Blast Furnace
Pulverized coal injection in BF replaces part of the coke used to fuel the chemical
reaction, reducing coke production, thus saving energy. The increased fuel
injection requires energy from oxygen injection, coal and electricity and
equipment to grind coal.
The maximum injection depends on the geometry of the BF and impact on the
iron quality (e.g., sulphur). Coal dust injection system will be introduced involving
handling, screening, drying and pulverisation system for coal. CDI has an
economic as well as an environmental advantage as it directs injection of coal into
BF as reducing agent which reduces coke requirement (for every kg of coal
injected approximately 0.8 kg. of coke requirement is reduced).
Benefits
Reduces emissions of coke ovens by reducing coke making, as required for

without CDI;
Increased costs of oxygen injection and maintenance of BF and coal grinding
Identification and implementation of Carbon credit as per ToR-72

1
C5-10

Chapter-5
equipment offset by lower maintenance costs of existing coke batteries and/or

reduced coke purchase costs, yielding a net decrease in operating and
maintenance costs;
Decreased frequency of BF relining;
Improved cost competitiveness with cost reduction of hot metal;
High reliability and easy operation; and
Increased productivity.
Sinter Plant Waste Heat Utilisation
Waste heat utilization has been envisaged preheating the sinter mix before
feeding to sinter bed. For the same ignition furnace with post heat hood and pre
heating (before ignition furnace) will be installed just after the sinter mix drum
feeder. Hot air from waste heat recovery system of sinter cooler will also be used
for preheating of raw material before ignition furnace and post heat hood after
ignition furnace.
Approximately 2500C to 3500C hot air for the combustion is supplied from
waste heat recovery system of sinter cooler. De-dusting system shall be
provided at inlet of combustion air fan to supply clean hot air from discharge of
cooler. The hot air for combustion shall have control by having intake in cold air.
The ignition temperature shall be 1200 13000C. Pilot burners shall be provided
for start up and safety.
Benefits
Fuel savings in terms of reduction in coke consumption and steam;
Exhaust heat recovery;
NOx, SOx and particulate emissions reduction; and
Increased productivity, yield, and cold strength.
Use of Continuous Casting Technology
Hundred percent of the steel production through continuous casting facilities

saves considerable energy and protects environment. The major environmental
advantages are:
Elimination of soaking pits resulting in reduction in consumption of fuels and

electricity;
Considerable energy is saved vis--vis less energy generation and reduces
pollutant emissions; and
Less scrap production resulting in improved yield and less solid waste
handling.
CDQ in Coke Oven
Coke oven is the equipment to carbonize coal to make coke and discharge
periodically coke at around 1000 deg. C. This coke is cooled by the inert gas
instead of water. The major advantages are:
Power generation from sensible heat; and

Particulate emission.
****
C5-11

Chapter-6
6.0
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM
6.1
General
To ensure compliance to environmental regulation and also to maintain healthy
environmental conditions around the integrated steel plant, several measures
have been proposed in the Environment Management Plan (EMP) for mitigation of
adverse environmental impacts. These shall be implemented as per proposal and
shall be monitored regularly.
A monitoring strategy shall be ensured that all environmental resources, which
may be subject to contamination, are kept under review and hence monitoring of
the individual elements of the environment will be done. A major part of the
sampling and measurement activities will be concerned with long term monitoring
aimed at providing an early warning of any undesirable changes or trends in the
natural environment that could be associated with the plant activity.
This is essential to determine whether the changes are in response to a cycle of
climatic conditions or due to plant activities. During the operation phase,
Environment Management Department (EMD) will undertake all the monitoring
work to ensure the effectiveness of environmental mitigation measures. The
suggestions given in the environmental monitoring programme will be
implemented by the EMD by following an implementation schedule.
In case of any alarming variation in ground level concentration in ambient air,
stack emission, work zone air, water quality or noise monitoring results.
Performance of air pollution control equipment, effluent treatment facilities,
wastewater discharge etc., will be discussed in the EMD and any deviation from
the prescribed norms will be reported to the higher management for immediate
rectification action. In addition to the monitoring programme, the following will
also be done to further ensure the effectiveness of mitigation measures:
Comprehensive environmental audits will be carried out for the entire plant
operation to check for compliance with standards / applicable norms by
inhouse experts. Third party environmental audits will be carried out once in
every year;
In addition to the above, all necessary steps would be taken to implement the
measures suggested by MOEF in CREP for integrated iron and steel industry;
and
The environmental aspects to be monitored will ensure proper implementation

and effectiveness of various mitigative measures envisaged / adopted during
the design and commissioning stage of the proposed project plan are
described here under.
6.1.1 Meteorology
Automatic continuous meteorological station will be installed in the plant and the
observations recorded will be used in respect of the project. The following
parameters will be recorded regularly:
C6-1

Chapter-6
Wind speed and direction;

Rainfall; and
Temperature and humidity.
6.1.2 Primary and Secondary Emissions and Air Quality Monitoring

Ambient air quality will be monitored regularly in accordance with CPCB/
Jharkhand State Pollution Control Board (JSPCB) guidelines. Work zone air quality
will be monitored for the units under operation as per directives of JSPCB to
assess the levels of PM, NOx and SO2.
Stack Emission Monitoring
All major stacks will be monitored regularly in accordance with CPCB/JSPCB
guidelines. Major stacks will be provided with on-line monitoring system.
Plant Unit
Sinter Plant
Coke Ovens
Blast Furnaces
Lime/Dolo Plant
Bar Mill
HSM
CPP
Pellet Plant
Cement Plant
Monitoring Frequency per Month

1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
The emissions from all major stacks will be monitored once in a month using the
manually operated stack monitoring equipment. However, the frequency of
monitoring will be discussed with JSPCB and frequency may be increased as
required in accordance with the stipulation of JSPCB or other statutory
authorities.
Work Zone Monitoring
Work zone air quality shall be monitored as per directives of CPCB/JSPCB to

assess the levels of PM10, NOx and SO2. 8 hourly samples will be collected from all
major unit premises.
Work zone dust levels/fugitive emissions will be monitored inside the plant
regularly. The EMD will keep a record of the same and taking necessary
organizational actions.
Ambient Air Quality Monitoring
Ambient air quality will be monitored regularly in accordance with CPCB/JSPCB

guidelines. JSW-JSL will install 4 continuous ambient air quality monitoring
systems in accordance with the CREP guidelines.
C6-2

Chapter-6
6.1.3 Water Quality Monitoring

Wastewater from different shops/units of plant shall be monitored and tested in
EMD laboratory at least once a month as per CPCB/JSPCB guidelines/directives.
However, the frequency of monitoring may be increased if required in accordance
with the stipulations of JSPCB or other statutory authorities. In addition to the
above, JSW-JSL will carry out monitoring of certain parameters in some of the
plant areas as a quality measure for pollutants in the discharge.
6.1.3.1 Ground Water Monitoring
Ground water is important source of potable water for surrounding communities.
Ground water will be sampled from up gradient and down gradient of JSW-JSL
proposed slag storage area to check for possible contamination and to ascertain
the trend of variation in the water quality, if any. In case any adverse trend is
noticed, immediate remedial measures shall be taken. A total of 5 samples from
up gradient and down gradient of JSW-JSL slag storage area will be monitored
once in a six months period.
6.1.3.2 Maintenance of Drainage System
The region has records of good rainfall during monsoon and therefore effective
drainage within plant for storm water is essential. The effectiveness of the
drainage system depends on proper cleaning of all drainage pipes/channels just
before monsoon and after at regular interval. Regular checking will be done to
see that none of the drains are clogged due to accumulation of sludge/sediments.
The clogged drains are cleaned as soon as possible, preferably the same day. The
catch-pits linked to the storm water drainage system from the raw material
handling areas are regularly checked and cleaned to ensure their effectiveness.
This checking and cleaning is rigorous during the monsoon season, especially if
heavy rains are forecast.
6.1.4 Noise Monitoring
Ambient noise quality will be monitored regularly in accordance with CPCB /
Jharkhand State Pollution Control Board (JSPCB) guidelines.
6.1.4.1 Work Zone Noise Level
Noise levels will be monitored inside the plant and in the study area regularly.
The EMD will keep a record of noise levels and take necessary organisational
actions like rotation of workmen, availability and use of personal protective
devices, damage to enclosures or insulation layers over enclosures and piping.
Noise levels are measured at the source of generation at a 1 m distance. The
noise attenuation measures will be taken at the design stage of the plant itself.
However, in case of high noise generating equipment, which shall not be
frequented by the plant personnel, the area will be clearly marked as High
Noise area and the employees be provided with personal protective equipment
(PPE) like ear plugs/ear muffs. Further, noise levels in the nearby villages will be
C6-3

Chapter-6
monitored regularly to estimate the community noise impact due to operation of

the plant.
6.1.5 House Keeping
The EMD shall be keeping a very close monitoring of housekeeping activities and
organizing regular meetings of joint forum at the shop level (monthly).
6.1.6 Occupational Health and Safety
The routine medical examination of personnel will be carried out in a systematic
manner by the plant medical unit. A systematic programme for medical check-up
at regular intervals will be followed for all workers to ascertain any changes in
health condition due to the working conditions.
6.1.7 Solid/Hazardous Waste Generation and Utilisation
Maximum re-cycling and utilization of generated solid and hazardous waste within
the plant as per guidelines will be done. Hazardous waste shall be either sold or
dumped in hazardous waste pit as per applicable statutory conditions.
6.1.8 Socio-Economic Development
The proposed project will improve the infrastructure and economic conditions of
the local people and thus improve the socio economic development of the region
as whole. The communities, which are benefited by the steel plant, are thus one
of the key stakeholders for the steel plant. It is suggested that JSW-JSL should
have structured interactions with the community to disseminate the measures
taken by the steel plant and also to elicit suggestions for overall improvement
for the development of the area.
6.2
Monitoring Schedule1
Environmental monitoring schedules are prepared covering various phases of
project advancement, such as construction phase and regular operational phase.
6.2.1 Monitoring Schedule during Constructional Phase

The construction activities require clearing of vegetation, mobilisation of
construction material and equipment. The construction activities are expected to
last for over three to four years.
The generic environmental measures that need to be undertaken during project
construction stage are given in Table-6.1.
Action plan and monitoring schedule to follow NAAQ standards as per ToR-34
C6-4

Chapter-6
TABLE-6.1
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING DURING PROJECT CONSTRUCTION STAGE
Sr.
No.
1
Potential
Impact
Air emissions
Noise
Action to be Followed
All
equipments
are
operated within specified
design parameters.
Vehicle
trips
to
be
minimized to the extent
possible
Maintenance of DG set
emissions
to
meet
stipulated standards
Ambient air quality within
the
premises
of
the
proposed
unit
to
be
monitored.
Gaseous
emissions
(SO2, HC, CO, NOx)
List of all noise generating

machinery
onsite
along
with age to be prepared.
Equipment logs, noise

reading
Equipment
to
be
maintained in good working
order.
Night working is to be
minimized.
Generation
of
vehicular
noise
Noise to be monitored in
ambient air within the plant
premises.
Wastewater
discharge
Soil erosion
Drainage and
effluent
management
Waste
management
Parameters for
Monitoring
Random checks of
equipment
logs/
manuals
Vehicle logs
No untreated discharge to
be made to surface water,
groundwater or soil.
Protect topsoil stockpile
where possible at edge of
site.
Ensure drainage system
and
specific
design
measures
are
working
effectively.
The design to incorporate
existing drainage pattern
and avoid disturbing the
same.
Implement
waste
management
plan
that
identifies and characterizes
every
waste
arising
associated with proposed
The
ambient
air
quality will conform to
the standards for PM,
SO2, NOx, and CO
Frequency of
Monitoring
Periodic
Periodic
during
site clearance &
construction
activities
Periodic
emission
monitoring
As per CPCB/
SPCB
requirement or
on monthly basis
whichever
is
earlier
Regular
during
construction
activities
Working hour records
Daily records
Maintenance
of
records of vehicles
Spot Noise recording
Daily records
No discharge hoses
shall be in vicinity of
watercourses.
Effective
cover
in
place.
Visual inspection of
drainage and records
thereof
Comprehensive waste
management
plan
should be in place and
available
for
inspection on-site.
As
per
CPCB/SPCB
requirement or
on
quarterly
basis whichever
is earlier
Periodic
during
construction
activities
Periodic
during
construction
activities
Periodic
during
construction
activities
Periodic
check
during
construction
activities
C6-5

Chapter-6
Sr.
No.
Potential
Impact
activities
and
which
identifies the procedures
for collection, handling &
disposal of each waste
arising.
Non-routine
events and
accidental
releases
Health
Environmental
management
cell/ unit
10
Loss of flora
and fauna
Plan to be drawn up,

considering
likely
emergencies
and
steps
required to prevent/limit
consequences.
Employees and migrant
labour health check ups
The
environment
management cell/unit is to
be set up to ensure
implementation
and
monitoring
of
environmental safeguards.
Re-vegetation as per forest
guidelines
Parameters for
Monitoring
Compliance with MSW
Rules,
1998
and
Hazardous
Wastes
(Management
and
Handling Rules), 2003
Mock
drills
and
records of the same
Frequency of
Monitoring
Periodic
during
construction
activities
All
relevant
parameters including
HIV
Responsibilities
and
roles will be decided
before
the
commencement
of
work.
Regular
ups
check
No. of plants, species
During
site
clearance phase
During
construction
phase
6.2.2 Monitoring Schedule during Operational Phase

During operational stage, continuous air emissions from all major units of
integrated steel plant, wastewater disposal, non-hazardous waste such as ash,
blast furnace slag, BOF slag, hazardous waste such as used oily wastes are
expected.
The following attributes, which require regular monitoring based on the
environmental setting and nature of project activities are listed below:
Source emissions and ambient air quality;

Groundwater levels and ground water quality;
Water and wastewater quality (water quality, effluent & sewage quality etc);
Solid and hazardous waste characterisation (fly ash, bottom ash, oily wastes,
ETP sludge, used and waste oil);
Soil quality;
Noise levels (equipment and machinery noise levels, occupational exposures
and ambient noise levels); and
Ecological preservation and afforestation.
The following routine monitoring programme as detailed in Table-6.2 will be

implemented at site. Besides this monitoring, the compliances to all
environmental clearance conditions and regular permits from JSPCB/MoEF/CPCB
will be monitored and reported periodically.
C6-6

Chapter-6
TABLE-6.2
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING DURING OPERATIONAL PHASE
Sr.
No.
1
Potential
Impact
Air Emissions
Stack emissions from all
major units and CPP boilers
to
be
optimized
and
monitored
Stack emissions from DG set
to
be
optimized
and
monitored
Ambient air quality within
the
premises
of
the
proposed unit and nearby
habitations to be monitored.
Exhaust from vehicles to be
minimized by use of fuel
efficient vehicles and well
maintained vehicles having
PUC certificate.
Measuring onsite
data of
meteorology
Noise
Vehicle
trips
to
be
minimized to the extent
possible
Noise
generated
from
operation
of
power
boilers/cooling towers to be
optimized and monitored
Parameters for
Monitoring
Gaseous emissions
(PM,
SO2,
CO,
NOx)
Gaseous emissions
(SO2,
HC,
CO,
NOx)
PM,
RPM, SO2,
NOx, CO and HC.
November
notification
2009
Frequency of
Monitoring
Continuous
monitoring
using
on-line
equipment
during operation
phase
Periodic during
operation phase
As per CPCB/
JSPCB
requirement or
on weekly basis
whichever
is
earlier
Vehicle logs to be
maintained
Wind
speed,
direction,
temp.,
relative humidity
and rainfall.
Vehicle logs
Continuous
monitoring
using
on-line
weather station
during operation
phase
Daily records
Spot Noise Level

recording;
Leq (night), Leq
(day), Leq (dn)
Periodic during
operation phase
Maintain
records
of vehicles
Regular check ups
Periodic
operation
Periodic
operation
Discharge norms
for effluents
Periodic during
operation phase
Noise
generated
from
operation of DG set to be
optimized and monitored
DG sets to generate less
than 75 dB(A) Leq at 1-m
from the source
Wastewater
discharge
DG sets are to be provided

at basement with acoustic
enclosures
Generation
of
vehicular
noise
No untreated discharge to
be made to surface water,
groundwater or soil.
Take care in disposal of
wastewater generated such
that soil and groundwater
resources are protected
during
phase
during
phase
C6-7

Chapter-6
Sr.
No.
Potential
Impact
Compliance of wastewater
discharge to standards
Water quality
and water levels
Work zone air

contamination
Emergency
preparedness,
such as fire
fighting
Maintenance of
flora and fauna
Waste
management
6.3
Drainage and
effluent
management
10
Soil quality
11
Health
Compliance
of
treated
sewage to standards
Ensure drainage system and
specific design measures are
working effectively.
Design
to
incorporate
existing drainage pattern
and avoid disturbing the
same.
Monitoring
used
water
quality, groundwater quality
around
ash
pond
and
ground water levels
River
water
quality
downstream to discharge
Contaminants such as VOCs
to be reduced by providing
adequate ventilation
Fire protection and safety
measures to take care of fire
and explosion hazards, to be
assessed and steps taken
for their prevention.
Vegetation, greenbelt /
green cover development
Implement
waste
management
plan
that
identifies and characterizes
every
waste
arising
associated with proposed
activities
and
which
identifies the procedures for
collection,
handling
&
disposal of each waste
arising.
Maintenance of good soil
quality
Employees
and
migrant
labour health check ups
Parameters for
Monitoring
pH,
TSS,
TDS,
BOD,
COD
&
temperature
Comprehensive as
per GSR 422(E)
Visual inspection
of drainage and
records thereof
Frequency of
Monitoring
Once in a week
during operation
phase
Once
in
a
season
Periodic during
operation phase
Comprehensive
monitoring as per
IS 10500
Periodic during
operation phase
Groundwater level
in meters bgl
As per IS 10500
Once in a week
Monitoring
of
indoor
air
contaminants such
as CO, CO2 and
VOCs.
Mock drill records,
on site emergency
plan,
evacuation
plan
As per CPCB/
SPCB
requirement
Local/native
species
Records of solid
waste generation,
treatment
and
disposal
Periodic
operation
Periodic
operation
Physico-chemical
parameters
and
metals.
All
relevant
parameters
including HIV
Periodical
monitoring
at
ash pond site
Regular
check
ups
Periodic during
operation phase
during
phase
during
phase
Progress Monitoring and Reporting Arrangements

The rationale for a reporting system is based on accountability to ensure that the
measures proposed as part of the environmental monitoring plan get
implemented in the project. The monitoring and evaluation of the management
measures are critical activities in implementation of the project. Monitoring
C6-8

Chapter-6
involves periodic checking to ascertain whether activities are going according to

the plans. It provides the necessary feedback for the project management to
keep the programme on schedule.
6.4
Implementation Schedule of Mitigation Measures

The mitigation measures suggested in Chapter-4 will be implemented so as to
reduce the impact on environment due to the operations of the proposed
integrated steel project. In order to facilitate easy implementation of mitigation
measures, the priority of implementation is given in Table-6.3.
TABLE-6.3
IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
6.5
Recommendations
Air pollution control
measures
Water pollution control
measures
Noise control measures
Ecological preservation and
up gradation
Time Requirement
Before commissioning of respective
units
Before commissioning of the units
Schedule
Immediate
Along with the commissioning of the

plant activities
Stage wise implementation
Immediate
Immediate
Immediate &
Progressive
Infrastructure for Environmental Protection

A well-equipped environmental laboratory will be set up within the plant
premises. Proper periodic training will be given to all employees to carry out
necessary environmental monitoring and analysis. The requirement of equipment
for carrying out environmental monitoring and frequency are given in Table-6.4.
Alternatively, JSW-JSL can engage well reputed, recognized laboratory for
carrying out the environmental monitoring works.
TABLE-6.4
ENVIRONMENT MONITORING AND FREQUENCY
Sr.
No
Major Monitoring Equipment

Equipment
Nos.
Required/
Proposed
Air/Stack/Noise Monitoring
1
Respirable
dust
4
sampler (RDS)
Parameters/
Function
Frequency
Ambient
Air
Fugitive
Emission
Stack Gas
Source
Emission
24
hr
continuous
once per month
Yes
PM2.5 samplers
PM10, SO2, NOx,

O3, NH3,As, Ni &
Benzo-a-Pyrine
(Bap)- sampling
PM2.5
Yes
Stack
Monitoring
kit (manual)
On
line
stack
monitoring
along
with
accessories
for
monitoring
SO2, NOx, CO2, CO
& PM
PM
No
Yes
Particulate
matter, SO2, NOx,
CO2 & CO
24
hr
continuous
once per month
All stack once
per month
Continuous
No
Yes
C6-9

Chapter-6
Sr.
No

Equipment
Nos.
Required/
Proposed
On
line
AAQ
4
monitoring station
Flue gas analyser
1
Sound level meter
Parameters/
Function
20
21
22
pH meter
Conductivity meter
AAS along with
Graphite furnace,
hydride generator
and cold vapor
technique
Digital
MicroBalance
Digital top load
balance (range 1
to 500 g)
Filtration
2
1
1
23
24
25
Stack Gas
Source
Emission
Continuous
O2%
CO%
SO2 mg/m3
NOx mg/m3
NO mg/m3
CxHy PPM
Ambient temp
Noise levels
Once per month

for coke oven
battery stacks
No
Yes
As and when
required
Once per month
Yes
Once per month
Yes
Once per month
Yes
Continuous
Daily
Regularly
Regularly
As and when
required
Twice in a week
Twice in a week
As and
required
Daily
CO
analyser
1
CO
(NDIR)
9
Gas
1
Benzene (C6H6)
chromatograph
10
High
pressure
1
Benzo-a-pyrine
liquid
(BaP)- particulate
chromatograph
phase only
(HPCL)
Meteorological Monitoring
11
Automatic weather
1
Meteorological
monitoring station
parameters
Water Monitoring & Chemical Analysis
12
Ion analyser with
1
NH3. CN,F
auto-titrate
13
Hot air oven
1
Moisture content
&
drying
of
samples
glassware
14
Hot plate
2
O&G
Iron
&
various
purpose
like
boiling
digestion
of
sample
15
Muffle furnace
1
Digestion at temp,
up to 10000 C
16
BOD incubator
1
BOD
17
BOD
apparatus,
1 set of 6
BOD
Oxitop
18
DO meter
1
BOD
Spectrophotometer
with COD digestion
assembly
Ambient
Air
Fugitive
Emission
Yes
PM10, PM2.5
19
Frequency
COD,
Phenol
NO3-N
PO4-P
pH
TDS
Heavy metals in
water, As & Ni
analysis
in
Ambient air
Daily
Daily
As and
required
when
when
No
Weighing
Daily
Weighing
Daily
SS/MLSS
Daily
C6-10

Chapter-6
Sr.
No
6.6
26
27

Equipment
Nos.
Required/
Proposed
apparatus
Heating material
2
Refrigerator
1
28
Fuming chamber
29
Water bath
30
Vacuum pump
31
Turbidity meter
32
Filter papers, glass

ware,
plastic
wares, chemicals
Parameters/
Function
Distillation
Preservation
chemicals
samples
For Exhaust
of
and
Evaporation
sample
Hardness,
alkalinity etc.
Turbidity
In Lot
Frequency
of
Ambient
Air
Fugitive
Emission
Stack Gas
Source
Emission
when
when
when
when
when
Daily
Regularly
As and
required
As and
required
As and
required
As and
required
As and
required
Cost Provision for Environmental Measures2

It is proposed to invest about Rs. 1750 Crores on pollution control, treatment and
monitoring systems, which includes Rs. 14 Crores for greenbelt development and
others. The capital and recurring expenses will be incurred phase-wise in
proportion to the implementation of the project. The break-up of the investment
is given in Table-6.5.
TABLE-6.5
COST PROVISION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MEASURES
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6.7
Description of Item
Air pollution control system
Water pollution control system
Solid
waste
management
system
Greenbelt development and
others
Post project monitoring
Total
Capital Cost
(Rs in Crores)
845
350
535
Recurring Cost
(Rs in Crores)
50
21
32
14
6
1750
1
1
105
Greenbelt Development3
6.7.1 Objective
The main objective of the green belt is to provide a barrier between the plant and
the surrounding areas. The green belt helps to capture the fugitive emissions and
to attenuate the noise generated in the plant apart from improving the aesthetics
of the plant site. In order to control the industrial pollutants, dense tree
plantations are necessary.
2
3
Cost for EMP as per ToR-68

Green belt development plan as per ToR-61
C6-11

Chapter-6
As the sedimentation pattern of the pollutants, ambient and ground level

concentration of pollutants are usually determined by the direction and speed of
prevailing wind and vertical and horizontal thermal gradients prevailing in the
area, the belt of plantations will be designed accordingly. The width of the tree
belt depends on the gaseous emissions, availability of land and site
characteristics etc.
Geometry of planting of tree is more important in order to have effective wind
break by the plantation. For an effective green belt, a mixture of tree species is
necessary and some shrubs and grasses will be inter-cropped. As far as possible,
there will be no gaps in the green belt. Where opening is imperative, alignments
to roads will be such that open gaps are prevented to overcome funneling action
of wind.
The tree species selected for green belt include the native species as identified in
Chapter-3. These trees will be planted in several rows with a tree density of
2000-2500 trees/ha with adequate width around the plant boundary and
maintained as per CPCB guidelines. The inter-spaces will be planted with grasses,
bushes and hedges. Greenbelt is thus a set of rows of trees planted in such a way
that they form an effective barrier between the plant and the surroundings.
Design of Green Belt
The following shall be designed and implemented as per the latest CPCB
guidelines. The broad aspects to be covered are given below:
Shrubs and trees will be planted in encircling rows around the project site;
The short trees (<10-m height) will be planted in the first rows (towards plant
side) of the green belt. The tall trees (>10 m height) will be planted in the
outer rows (away from plant side);
Planting of trees in each row will be in staggered orientation (triangular form);
In the front row, shrubs consisting of Albizia sp., Peltoforum etc. will be
grown;
Since the trunks of the tall trees are generally devoid of foliage, it will be
useful to have shrubs in front of the trees so as to give coverage to this
portion; and
The spacing between the trees will be maintained slightly less than the normal
spaces, so that the trees may grow vertically and slightly increase the
effective height of the green belt.
6.7.2 Plant Species for Greenbelt

While selecting the plant species for the proposed green belt, the following points
will be taken into consideration:
Should
Should
Should
Should
Should
be a fast growing type;

have a thick canopy cover;
be perennially green;
be preferably of native origin; and
have a large leaf area index.
C6-12

Chapter-6
6.7.3 Recommended Species for Plantation

Based on climate and soil characteristics of the study areas, some species are
recommended for plantation. The recommended species for plantation are given
in Table-6.6.
TABLE-6.6
RECOMMENDED PLANT SPECIES FOR GREENBELT
Name of the Plant Species
Acacia Arabica
Aegle marmelos
Alstonia scholaris
Annona squalmosa
Artocarpus heterophyllus
Artocarpus lacoocha
Bauhinia arundanacea
Bauhinia purpuria
Bauhinia racemosa
Bauhinia retusa
Butea monosperma
Carica papaya
Carissa carandus
Citrus lemon
Diospyros discolor
Emblica officinalis
Ficus carica
Ficus glomerata
Ficus hispida
Gmelina arborea
Leucena leucophloe
Mangifera indica
Michalia champaca
Psidium guava
Semicarpus anacardium
Spondias cythera
Tamarindus indica
Terminalia catapa
Peltophorrum ferrusinum
Albizia lebbeck
Albizia procera
Delonix regia
Pongamia pinnta
Dalbergia sissoo
Local Name
Babul
Bael
Chattin
Sharifa
Kathal
Barhar
Safed kachna
Camel foot tree
Kachnar
Kandla
Palas
Papitha
Karonda
Nimbu
Mabola
Amla
Anjir
Dumar
Jungli anjir
Gamhar
Sabubal
Aam
Champaka
Guava
Bhelwa
Kathjamun
Imli
Badam
Copper pod
Sirsh
Korai
Kachnar
Sisso
Family
Mimosaceae
Rutaceae
Apocyanaceae
Annonaceae
Moraceae
Moraceae
Caesalpinaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Fabaceae
Caricaceae
Apocyanaceae
Rutaceae
Ebanaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Moraceae
Moraceae
Moraceae
Fabaceae
Mimosacaae
Anacardiaceae
Magnoliaceae
Myrtaceae
Anacardiaceae
Myrtaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Combretaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Caesalpinaceae
Fabaceae
Fabaceae
The above mentioned species not only resist water stress but also covers the
ground quickly and also have wider soil adaptability.
6.7.4 Greenbelt Area
The greenbelt will be developed along the periphery of the plant and all open
spaces within the plant area covering an area of 1150 acres (465 ha) and
vegetation density of about 2500 trees/ha. Accordingly, about 11,62,500 saplings
will be planted. The survival rate will be maintained more than 90%. The
complete greenbelt will be developed in five years. The development plan is given
in Table-6.7.
C6-13

Chapter-6
TABLE-6.7
GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT PLAN
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Period
1st Year
2nd Year
3rd Year
4th Year
5th Year
6th to 10th Year
Total
Area (ha)
46.5
46.5
46.5
46.5
46.5
232.5
465
No. of Trees
1,16,250
1,16,250
1,16,250
1,16,250
1,16,250
5,81,250
11,62,500
The layout plan of the green belt and tree cover in plant area, ash pond area, slag
disposal area and township is shown in Figure-6.1.
6.8
Rainwater Harvesting Facilities4
6.8.1 Surface Run-off and Rain Water Harvesting

Efficient management of water resource in an area is the key of long term
sustainability. The proposed project is spread over a large area of 3800 (including
300 acres of township) acres with partially flat and undulating topography. A
tentative estimate of availability of surface and ground water in the area provides
an opportunity for conjunctive management of water resources.
Although the comprehensive hydrogeological assessment studies of the study
area carried out shows as safe area and proposed project is not drawing any
ground water, realizing its national obligation, JSWJSL proposed to take up
rainwater harvesting measures by harvesting roof top rainwater of all the major
buildings through shallow recharge pits and small to medium check dams/nala
bunds on the stream channels.
The catchment area where the project site is located measures 35.99 sq.km
where as the effective are is 34.97 sq.km. In order to estimate the volume of
run-off, the areas of water shed have been worked out using GIS. The run-off
values calculated for different land uses before the proposed development are
presented in Table-6.8. The annual volume of surface water available from the
catchment of proposed site is estimated at 17.23 MCM while the volume of water
available during monsoon period is 15.05 MCM. The rain water harvesting
network is shown in Figure-6.2.
TABLE-6.8
PRE-DEVELOPMENT ANNUAL & MONSOON RUN-OFF FROM THE CATCHMENT
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Land Use
Area
(sq.km)
Run-off
Coefficient
1.66
0.00
2.73
0.36
0.97
29.25
34.97
0.5
0.7
0.7
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.44
Residential land
Industrial land
Barren land
Forest land
Scrub land
Cultivated land
Total/average
Annual
Rainfall
(m)
1.4549
1.4549
1.4549
1.4549
1.4549
1.4549
1.4549
Annual
Run-off
(MCM)
1.21
0.00
2.78
0.10
0.35
12.77
17.21
Monsoon
Rainfall
(m)
1.2714
1.2714
1.2714
1.2714
1.2714
1.2714
1.2714
Monsoon
Run-off
(MCM)
1.06
0.00
2.43
0.09
0.31
11.16
15.04
Rain water harvesting measures as per ToR-45
C6-14

Chapter-6
The proposed project brings some changes in the land use which will alter the
run-off and volume of surface water availability. Post-development run-off values
calculated for different land uses are presented in Table-6.9. The effective area
contributing run-off after deducting waste disposal and water reservoirs/ponds is
33.76 sq.km. The annual volume of surface water available from the catchment of
proposed plant and township site after development is estimated at 21.29 MCM
while the volume of water available during monsoon period is 18.61 MCM. The
review of the pre and post development annual and monsoon run-off estimations
reveal that there is a slight increase in run-off availability due to proposed project
plant.
TABLE-6.9
POST-DEVELOPMENT ANNUAL & MONSOON RUN-OFF
FROM THE WATERSHED
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Land Use
Residential land
Industrial land
Barren land
Forest land
Scrub land
Cultivated land
Total/Average
Area
(sq.km)
Run-off
Coefficient
2.87
8.70
2.40
4.61
0.97
14.21
33.76
0.5
0.7
0.7
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.44
Annual
Rainfall
(m)
1.4549
1.4549
1.4549
1.4549
1.4549
1.4549
1.4549
Annual
Run-off
(MCM)
2.09
8.86
2.44
1.34
0.35
6.20
21.25
Monsoon
Rainfall
(m)
1.2714
1.2714
1.2714
1.2714
1.2714
1.2714
1.2714
Monsoon
Run-off
(MCM)
1.83
7.74
2.14
1.17
0.31
5.42
18.61
After considering 50% as the safe run-off, balance surface water available can be
utilized for roof top harvesting and surface water harvesting in the form of
recharge pits, check dams, percolation tanks etc., with suitable location specific
designs. As part of water conservation and harvesting measures, JSW will
construct and operate rain water harvesting structures in the proposed project
area. This will reduce fresh water consumption of the plant to a considerable
volume. A storm water pond is proposed in the southern part of the proposed
project area to collect a portion of natural run-off through storm water drains.
Roof top rain water harvesting can also be adopted to meet the critical water
requirements and augmenting ground water recharge. Roof top rain water
harvesting, which involves the collection of rain water from the roof of the
buildings and its storage in the surface ponds or storm water pond or recharge to
ground water through recharge pits can play an important role in conservation of
water. It is proposed to construct the recharge pits taking the advantage of roof
top rain water in the vicinity of proposed bore well locations.
The storm water drains and roof top rain water diversions shall be maintained
properly to carry only clean water without having any contact with pollutants
from the waste, spills and other contaminant material.
C6-15

Chapter-6
FIGURE-6.1
GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT PLAN
C6-16

Chapter-6
FIGURE-6.2
RAIN WATER HARVESTING NETWORK
****
C6-17

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.0
ADDITIONAL STUDIES
This chapter describes the technical presentation of the draft EIA report before The
Board of JSPCB, public consultation for the proposed project, risk assessment and
disaster management plan, occupational health and safety issues.
7.1
Technical Presentation of Draft EIA report before JSPCB

The draft EIA report prepared in compliance of TOR dated 24.06.2013 was
presented before the JSPCB Officials on 13.08.2014. In the presentation of the
project, the status of the compliance of TOR was examined point wise by the
Technical committee of the Board.
The proceeding of public hearing along with minutes of technical presentation was
submitted to MOEF&CC vide Ref: No PC/NOC/RNC/134/14 Dated 15.10.2014 with
memo no G3907 by JSPCB. The letter, proceedings and attendance of public
hearing in Hindi and English are given in Annexure-XVII.
The compliance of the points raised the technical committee of the board is
covered in this EIA report and point wise compliance is summarized in the below
Table-7.1
TABLE-7.1
COMPLIANCE OF QUERIES RAISED BY TECHNICAL COMMITTEE
Sr.
No
Query raised by JSPCB

The proponent shall ensure
proper drainage of the area so
that the run-off joining Domra
Nadi is not obstructed
Compliance
The drainage network in the proposed plant
site initiates from the hill range about 1.50
km towards north of the proposed plant site
and have up to 3rd order streams joining
Domra nadi running west-east along the
southern
boundary
and
joining
Subarnarekha river. The drainage network
in the proposed area joins Subarnarekha
river. It is proposed to divert the flow safely
in the development area of the plant site
and leave natural course as it is in the
open/green belt area maintaining the
natural flow along the boundaries of
development within proposed plant site.
Drainage in the open and green belt areas is
undisturbed and that in the development
area is diverted along the boundaries of
development and project site to continue
the natural run-off joining Domra nadi in the
south.
The run-off from the developed area
including plant, facilities, roads etc., and
C7-1

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Sr.
No
All surface run off should be

stored in 200 acres intake well
and utilized in plantation
The water quality of ground

water should be maintained
Continuous AAQMS should be

installed at Ranchi and at their
township or Bundu town
All stacks should be equipped
with
continuous
online
monitoring of emissions system
All the solid waste should be
disposed off properly as per
MSW (M&H) Rules-2013 &
Hazardous waste (M.H & TB)
Rules, 2008
The proponent shall develop a
captive TSDF facility for disposal
of non-carbonaceous hazardous
solid wastes
5
6
10
The proponent shall use its

bottom ash and other solid
wastes in plant or by other
authorized agency
The proponent shall submit
details of STP of proposed
township to the JSPCB prior to
commissioning the plant
JSW shall install online water
Compliance
drainage from the roofs are routed through
storm water drains. These storm water
drains are laid alongside the road just
outside the boundary of the development.
Few small ponds which do not have active
storage will be disturbed during the
development process. The run-off water
routed through the storm water drains will
be collected in a storm water pond,
proposed in the south eastern part of the
site.
The run-off water routed through the storm
water drains will be collected in a storm
water pond, proposed in the southeastern
part of the site and will be utilized in
plantation.
The quality of ground water will be
maintained and it will be regularly
monitored as per the frequency prescribed
by
JSPCB
during
the
post
project
monitoring.
Continuous Ambient Air quality monitoring
station (AAQMS) will be installed at our
township.
Online monitoring system to monitor
emission from all major stacks will be
installed prior to commissioning of the plant
All solid waste will be disposed off properly
as per MSW (M&H) Rules-2013 & Hazardous
waste (M.H & TB) Rules, 2008.
JSWJSL
will
request
Government
of
Jharkhand (GoJ) to setup a centralized TSDF
facility for industry.
JSWJSL will set up the TSDF facility as per
the statutory norms in the land identified by
Govt. of Jharkhand.
Authorized agency will be identified.
STP design will be finalized during detailed

engineering and details will be submitted to
JSPCB prior to commissioning of the plant
and township.
Online water quality monitoring station up in
C7-2

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Sr.
No

quality monitoring station up in
river Subernarekha at upstream
of Ranchi and of Downstream of
chandil
Compliance
river Subernarekha at upstream of Ranchi
and of Downstream of Chandil river will be
installed prior to commissioning of plant.
7.1.1 Public Consultation

As per New Environment Impact Assessment Notification dated 14 th September
2006 and as per TOR conditions issued by MoEF. The public hearing for the
proposed Integrated Steel Plant was conducted near Bank of India, Barenda
village, Sonahatu Block, Ranchi district, Jharkhand State.
The press notification indicating date and venue of the public hearing was issued
by Member Secretary, Jharkhand State Pollution Control Board (JSPCB), on
18.08.2014 in prominent newspapers Viz. Prabhat Khabar & Times of India
with project details inviting suggestions, views, comments and objections from
the public regarding the above mentioned project. The copies of the press
notification issued in newspapers for public hearing are shown in Figure-7.1.
The EIA & EMP reports along with Executive Summary in English and Hindi were
displayed and made available at the following places:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Collector office, Ranchi

District Industrial office, Ranchi
District Council/Municipal office, Ranchi
H.o, JSPCB, TA Building, P.o Dhurwa, Ranchi
R.O office JSPCB, E-1, CTI colony, P.o Dhurwa, Ranchi
MoEF, Government of India, East Regional Office,
Shekharpur, Bhubaneswar
7) Gram Panchayat Offices
8) BDO/CO office, Sonahatu Block, District Ranchi
A-3,
Chandra
The public hearing was conducted on 21/9/2014 near Bank of India, Barenda
village, Sonahatu Block, Ranchi District, Jharkhand. Public hearing was started
with the welcoming of people present in the public hearing by Shri R.N. Choubey,
Director (Projects) on behalf of project proponent. Thereafter, people have been
informed by Shri Iqbal Alam Ansari, Additional DistrictMagistrate (Law and
Order), Ranchi who was presiding the public hearing that it is proposed to
establish 10.0 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant and 900 MW captive power plant
under the proposed project.
Later Regional Officer, Jharkhand State Pollution Control Board was requested by
Addl. Dist. Magistrate to give a brief about public hearing. Accordingly Regional
officer has highlighted about the procedure and purpose of public hearing. He said
that the questions, suggestions and doubts raised during public hearing will be
replied by the project proponent and the same will be compiled and will be sent
to ministry of Environment and Forests, Government of India, New Delhi. Then,
the project proponent was asked to give a brief about the proposed plant and the
measures to be taken to control pollution.
C7-3

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Shri B.K. Choudhary, Environment consultant M/s Vimta Labs limited, Hyderabad
explained the people about proposed project.
After presenting executive summary, Regional Officer requested the villagers to
raise their questions, suggestions to the management. People present in the
public hearing, welcomed the proposed project by company management, and
submitted their opinion and reactions, in which demands like providing
employment, providing suitable value for land, education, health, establishment
of technical institutions, providing schools, colleges , hospitals etc., along with
providing employment to land losers were raised. The main demand from the
villagers is to establish and operate the plant in pollution free environment. Unit
representative present in the hearing Shri R.N. Choubey, Director Projects while
focusing on all the points raised by the villagers, assured that education, health,
school, college, facility of hospital, providing suitable compensation for the land,
overall development of surrounding villages under CSR etc. will be ensured and
work will be done in a pollution free environment. The points, questions,
suggestions raised by villagers will be resolved through Village Committee.
Thereafter, Additional District Magistrate in his address appreciated the villagers
to co-operate in smooth conduction of public hearing and raising their
suggestions, points, questions peacefully. He directed project proponent to
extend necessary co-operation to the villagers and solve their problems and
implement their suggestions / points and also to take corrective measures for
pollution control by establishing suitable equipment and to run them in a
systematic way. Thereafter, the public hearing was declared closed.
About 397 people attended the public hearing. The list of people attended public
hearing and the minutes of the public hearing are enclosed as Annexure-XVII.
The photographs taken during the Public hearing are shown in Figure 7.2. The
comments/issues raised during the public hearing and replies to public hearing
comments along with budgetary action plan by project proponent are given below
in the Table-7.2.
C7-4

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
FIGURE-7.1(A)
PUBLIC HEARING NOTIFICATION
C7-5

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
FIGURE-7.1(B)
PUBLIC HEARING NOTIFICATION
C7-6

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
FIGURE-7.2(A)
PHOTOS OF PUBLIC HEARING
C7-7

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
FIGURE-7.2(B)
PHOTOS OF PUBLIC HEARING
C7-8
Chapter-7
Additional Studies
TABLE-7.2
PUBLIC HEARING ISSUES AND ACTION PLAN
Sr.
No
1
Name and
Address of the
villagers
present
Shri Sadananda
Mahto,
VillBarenda
Raised Questions/
Suggestions/ issues etc.
There should be proper arrangement
for
controlling of environmental pollution with the
establishment of the project
Shri
Satyanarayan
Simhadev, VillBarenda
We support the project provided there should

be proper arrangement for controlling of
environmental pollution in the proposed
project. Unemployed Local Youth should be
provided employment as soon as the project is
established. This should not be neglected.
Shri Gopal Sahu

Vill- Pandadih
Shri
Harish
Chandra
Pramanik,
VillChokahatu
Project should be established as soon as

possible so that the problem of unemployment
will be solved.
We welcome the establishment of the project.
Decision about the value of the land should be
with the consensus of everybody. The present
value of Rs.5 lakh per acre is very less. It
should be increased.
The present assessed value of the land is very
less. It should be increased. Farmers should be
given employment.
Shri Anup Singh

Munda, Vill-Mahil
Shri
Surendra
Munda
Vill- Chokahatu
Land losers of the effected villages should also

be
provided
employment.
Educational
institutions should be opened for higher
education.
Reply/
commitment
made by PP
Shri R. N. Choubey,
Director
(Projects)
has assured general
public in his address
that the amount for
the land will be paid
through
Gram
Sabha as per the
rates fixed and the
same is being paid.
Similarly a mention
is made in the
registry deed about
the
employment.
Local
landless
people will be given
priority
in
the
employment.
Modern and suitable
equipment (Such as
Bag
filters,
ESP,
Cyclone, ETP, STP
etc.)
will
be
arranged to control
water, air and noise
pollution prior to
commissioning the
project.
Water,
Electricity,
Action Plan
Financial Allocation
Effective pollution control measures will be

implemented to minimize the impact on the
environment.
Rs. 1750 Crores on

pollution
control,
treatment
and
monitoring system
Rs. 1750 Crores on
pollution
control,
treatment
and
monitoring system
Effective pollution control measures will be

implemented to minimize the impact on the
environment.
Employment preference will be given to nearby
villagers. About 10,000 people will be employed
directly which includes skilled, semiskilled and
unskilled.
Plant will be commissioned in 48 months from
the date of obtaining all the required clearances.
Private land will be purchased in mutual
agreement, which includes cost of the land and
R&R benefits.
agreement which includes cost of the land and
R&R benefits.
Employment preference will be given to the

nearby villagers.
Employment preference will be given to the land
losers.
Focus will be given on Education. Various

activities like strengthening of school buildings,
Rs. 10.28 Crores

C7-9
Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Sr.
No
10.
Name and
Address of the
villagers
present
Shri
Madan
Singh
Munda,
Vill-Napra
Shri
Amitabh
Mishra,
Vill- Barenda
Shri
Durga
charan Sahu
Vill-Sonadih
Shri
Viswarath
Mahto
Vill-Charkodih
Raised Questions/
Pollution control Board should inspect the plant

time to time even it has accorded permission.
The fixation of land value was not done
through village sabha. There should be some
solution for this.
This is rain dependent agricultural area. Only

one crop is possible. We want to see the
development of our area by giving land to JSW.
Villagers should be provided employment and
the village should be developed.
This is very backward area. We are happy with
the establishment of the project. Proper care/
attention should be given for the poor people
of the area and displaced persons. All facilities
should be provided for the development of the
area. Written assurance should be given to
villagers about their facilities before the project
is established. Permanent job should be
provided to land providers.
Registration should not be done with others
name. Cultivated land should not be shown as
barren land. Villagers should be given the
information about the fixation of the land cost
and the facilities to be provided to the villagers
through Gram Sabha.
Reply/
commitment
made by PP
Action Plan
School,
College,
Hospital, Road etc.
facilities
will
be
provided under CSR
in the villages of 10
kms radius of the
project.
setting up village school, library, providing mid

day meal, sponsorship to bright students etc will
be implemented as part of the CSR programme.
Online stack monitoring will be set up and the
results will be displayed at the entry gate.
Further, six monthly compliance will be sent to
the State Pollution Control Board.
Payment
for
the
non-ownership land
will be made to
Government and the
present cultivator in
the land will also be
paid
suitable
compensation.

agreement, which includes cost of the land and
R&R benefits.
Project will comply

with R&R Policy of
Jharkhand
Government.
Land rate has been fixed in consultation with the

villagers including consent of Gram Sabha.
The proposed CSR activities will have a positive
impact due to the proposed project, thus
changing the socio economic status of the people
in the study area
in the study area.
Rs. 175 Crores for

CSR Programmes
Rs. 175 Crores for

CSR Programmes
Employment provision is already covered under

R&R policy of Jharkhand State and assurance is
given in the sale deed itself.
Land is being purchased by JSWJSL only.
Sale deed is executed based on the records of
rights.
C7-10
Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Sr.
No
11
Name and
Address of the
villagers
present
Shri Jagbandhu
Mahto
Vill- Mahil
Raised Questions/
Industry should be established. We are not
opposing it. Cost of the land was decided by
few people. This should be done collectively.
Govt land which was settled to Raiyats is to be
considered for suitable compensation.
12
Shri
Jagatpal
Viswakarma,
Chakodih
Company should provide proper facilities to

villagers.
13
Shri
Yudhister
Mahto
Marankiti
CNT Act is violated. Agricultural land is shown

as barren land.
14
Shri
Kesav
Mahto Kamalesh,
Ex-MLA
Silli
People agree for establishment of industry.

Employment should be provided for land
givers. Education for children and health
facilities should be provided. Village should be
developed an all aspects and it should be an
ideal village. Good and sophisticated modern
methods should be adopted to control pollution
in the unit. The present value of the land
should be increased. CSR fund should be spent
for the development of surrounding villages.
We support for establishment of the project.
Youth should be imparted technical education
and they should be absorbed in the company.
Reply/
commitment
made by PP
Action Plan

Regarding
compensation
towards
the
Government land settled to landless Raiyat is
also being taken into consideration with due
consent of State Government.
All the basic community infrastructure will be
provided under CSR programme
Land is being purchased as per the provisions

under CNT Act.
The details of DCs order under CNT is enclosed
as Annexure-VII.
The employment for the land providers will be
given as per the R&R policy of Jharkhand State.
Rs. 175 Crores for

CSR
Programmes,
out of which Rs 33.98
Crores
has
been
allocated
for
community
infrastructure.
Rs. 175 Crores for

CSR Programmes

in the study area.
C7-11

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.2
Risk Assessment1
7.2.1 Introduction
Industrial activities, which produce, treat, store and handle hazardous
substances, have a high hazard potential to safety of man and environment at
work place and outside. Recognizing the need to control and minimize the risks
posed by such activities, the Ministry of Environment & Forests have notified the
Manufacture Storage & Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules in the year 1989
and subsequently modified, inserted and added different clauses in the said rule
to make it more stringent. For effective implementation of the rule, Ministry of
Environment & Forests has provided a set of guidelines. The guidelines, in
addition to other aspects, set out the duties required to be performed by the
occupier along with the procedure. The rule also lists out the industrial activities
and chemicals, which are required to be considered as hazardous.
The proposed project will be producing steel from iron ore and other raw
materials. During the process of manufacture of steel and other associated
materials hazardous gases are generated which are stored and used within the
plant process. In addition to this also some other hazardous chemicals, which are
required in the manufacture of steel or produced as a by-product, being stored
and handled in plant. The major chemicals handled / stored by the plant includes
coke oven gas (COG), blast furnace gas (BF gas), basic oxygen furnace gas (BOF
gas), LPG, different acids etc. In view of this, proposed activities are being
scrutinized in line of the above referred manufacture, storage and import of
hazardous chemicals rules and observations / findings are presented in this
chapter.
7.3
Approach to the Study

Risk involves the occurrence or potential occurrence of some accidents consisting of
an event or sequence of events. The risk assessment study covers the following:
7.4
Identification of potential hazard areas;

Identification of representative failure cases;
Visualization of the resulting scenarios in terms of fire (thermal radiation) and
explosion;
Assess the overall damage potential of the identified hazardous events and the
impact zones from the accidental scenarios;
Assess the overall suitability of the site from hazard minimization and disaster
mitigation point of view;
Furnish specific recommendations on the minimization of the worst accident
possibilities; and
Preparation of broad disaster management plan (DMP), on-site and off-site
emergency plan, which includes occupational and health safety plan.
Hazard Identification
The following two methods for hazard identification have been employed in the
study:
Risk assessment as per ToR-63
C7-12

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.4.1
Identification of major hazardous units based on manufacture, storage and

import of hazardous chemicals rules, 1989 of Government of India (GOI rules,
1989); and
Identification of hazardous units and segments of plants and storage units based
on relative ranking technique, viz. fire-explosion and toxicity index (FE&TI).
Classification of Major Hazardous Units

Hazardous substances may be classified into three main classes namely flammable
substances, unstable substances and toxic substances. The ratings for a large
number of chemicals based on flammability, reactivity and toxicity have been given
in NFPA Codes 49 and 345 M. The major hazardous materials to be stored,
transported, handled and utilized within the facility have been summarized in the
Table-7.3. The fuel storage details and properties are given in Table-7.4 and
Table-7.5 respectively.
TABLE-7.3
CATEGORY WISE SCHEDULE OF STORAGE TANKS
Materials
Blast furnace gas (carbon
monoxide)
Coke oven gas (hydrogen)
Coke oven gas (methane)
BOF gas
(carbon monoxide)
LPG
LDO
HFO
Hazardous Properties
UN 1016. Dangerous Goods Class 3 Flammable Gas
UN 1203. Dangerous Goods Class 3 Flammable Liquid
UN 1202. Dangerous Goods Class 3 Flammable Liquid
TABLE-7.4
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS STORED, TRANSPORTED AND HANDLED
A
Material
Blast furnace
monoxide)
Coke oven gas (hydrogen &

methane)
BOF gas
(carbon monoxide)
LPG
5
6
HFO
LDO
2
2
gas
(carbon
No. of
Tanks
2
Capacity
(Storage Condition)
50,000 m3
gaseous, ambient temperature
pressure
50,000 m3
pressure
50,000 m3
pressure
50 T
liquid & pressurized
1000 m3
250 m3
and
and
and
C7-13

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
TABLE-7.5
PROPERTIES OF FUELS USED IN THE PLANT
Chemical
Codes/Label
Blast furnace gas

(carbon
monoxide)
Coke oven gas
(hydrogen)
Coke oven gas
(methane)
BOF gas
(carbon
monoxide)
LPG
LDO
HFO
TLV
MP
UEL
7.4.2
:
:
:
TLV
Flammable
50 ppm
-191.45
MP
c
-205
Flammable
-252.8
-259.2
74
Flammable
1000 ppm
-161.5
-187.8
15
Flammable
50 ppm
-191.45
-205
74
12.5
Flammable
Flammable
Flammable
1000 ppm
-0.5
371
>350
-187
-
<-60
54.4
>62
8.5
6
5
1.8
0.7
0.5
Threshold Limit Value

Melting Point
Upper Explosive Limit
14
FBP
FBP
FP
LEL
:
:
:
FP
UFL
LFL
74
12.5
Final Boiling Point

Flash Point
Lower Explosive Limit
Physio-Chemical Properties of Hazardous Chemicals Stored/Used

The physio-chemical properties of BF/CO gas (toxic component is carbon
monoxide), LPG and liquid oxygen are given below:
Blast Furnace Gas (BFG)
BFG is a by-product of the iron making process and is used as a fuel gas. It is an
odourless, colourless and toxic gas. Its toxic properties are due to the presence of
carbon monoxide (CO) (typically 21-25% v/v) in the gas. In confined space, it can
form explosive mixture.
BFG is a very low heating value fuel (CV=800-900 Kcal/nm3), containing inerts of
approximately 58% nitrogen and 17% carbon monoxide. Therefore, the gas is only
likely to support stable combustion at elevated temperature, or with a permanent
pilot flame. BFG may be ignited by a high ignition source such as a permanent pilot
flame. BFG may be ignited by a high ignition source such as a welding torch.
However, the resulting combustion is slow.
BFG is not typically considered an explosion hazard for the following reasons:
Very high ignition energies are required to initiate BFG combustion;

High concentration of inerts in the gas; and
Very low combustion energy (3.2 MJ/m3).
Coke Oven Gas (COG)
COG is toxic and flammable gas and has a very strong odour. Its toxic properties
are due to the presence of CO (typically 9% v/v) in the gas. COG has a specific
gravity of 0.43 and therefore, is a very buoyant gas, which tends to disperse rapidly
when released to the atmosphere.
C7-14

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
The high concentration of hydrogen and methane in COG suggests that the gas can
be ignited by a low ignition energy (e.g., static). Therefore, the probability of
ignition of COG leaks is likely to be high relative to other flammable gases.
COG is a corrosive gas due to the presence of hydrogen and sulphides (H2S=2500
mg/Nm3). This has significant implications for the maintainability of COG systems,
because COG pipework frequently develops small corrosion holes.
Carbon Monoxide
CO is a colourless, odourless gas, which is also flammable (limits 12% to 74%). It

has an auto-ignition temperature of 160C. It is a flammable gas with serious fire
hazard.
The health effects of CO are largely the result of the formation of
carboxyhemoglobin (COHb) which impairs the oxygen carrying capacity of the
blood. Resumption of the normal oxygen supply process takes place once the blood.
Resumption of the normal oxygen supply process takes place once an individual is
removed from the contaminated atmosphere. However, any damage due to the
prolonged loss of oxygen supply to the brain may not be reversible. The TLV, STEL
and IDLH values for CO is 50 ppm, 400 ppm and 1200 ppm respectively.
Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG)
In addition to the BFG, COG and liquid oxygen, JSW-JSL will also use LPG. LPG is a
big fire and explosion hazard. Primarily, LPG is associated with the severe fire and
explosion hazards, i.e., boiling liquid expanding vapour explosion (BLEVE) under
sustained ignition and also vapour cloud explosion (VCE). BLEVE can be caused by
an external fire near the storage vessel causing heating of the contents and
pressure build-up. While tanks are often designed to withstand great pressure,
constant heating can cause the metal to weaken and eventually fail.
An unconfined (i.e., in open space) vapour cloud explosion (VCE) is possible only
when a large amount comes from a rupture of line/leak from large hole and
accumulates in the open space as a cloud while moving along the wind. If the
mixture of cloud and air is in the flammability range and some ignition source is
available on its way, it ignites and subsequently releases the energy on the point of
ignition in the form of a blast wave. It is called vapour cloud explosion (VCE). The
human injury and loss of property in case of VCE depends upon the mass involved
in the explosion and the location of the center of explosion.
A flammable release of gas that does not ignite at the leak source, or has a delayed
ignition, can produce a large vapour cloud, which covers a significant area. In the
absence of significant confinement or obstruction, ignition of the cloud results in a
low velocity flame front with minimal over pressure effects, known as a flash fire
and typically results (initially) only in impacts within the flammable cloud.
7.4.3
Identification of Major Hazard Installations Based on GOI Rules, 1989

Following accidents in the chemical industry in India over a few decades, a specific
legislation covering major hazard activities has been enforced by Govt. of India in
C7-15

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
1989 in conjunction with Environment Protection Act, 1986. This is referred here as
GOI Rules 1989. For the purpose of identifying major hazard installations, the rules
employ certain criteria based on toxic, flammable and explosive properties of
chemicals.
A systematic analysis of the fuels/chemicals and their quantities of storage has been
carried out, to determine threshold quantities as notified by GOI Rules, 1989 and
the applicable rules are identified. Applicability of storage rules are summarized in
Table-7.6.
TABLE-7.6
APPLICABILITY OF GOI RULES TO FUEL/CHEMICAL STORAGE
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Chemical/ Fuel
Listed in
Schedule

monoxide)
methane)
BOF gas
(carbon monoxide)
LPG
HFO
LDO
3(1)
3(1)
3(1)
3(1)
3(1)
3(1)
7.5
Hazard Assessment and Evaluation
7.5.1
Methodology
Total
Quantity
2x50,000 m3
2x50,000 m3
2x50,000 m3
3x50 T
2 x 1000 m3
2x250 m3
Threshold Quantity (T) for

Application of Rules
5,7-9,13-15
10-12
15
200
15
200
15
200
15
25 MT
25 MT
200
200 MT
200 MT
An assessment of the conceptual design is conducted for the purpose of identifying

and examining hazards related to feed stock materials, major process components,
utility and support systems, environmental factors, proposed operations, facilities,
and safeguards.
7.5.2
Preliminary Hazard Analysis (PHA)

A preliminary hazard analysis is carried out initially to identify the major hazards
associated with storages and the processes of the plant. This is followed by
consequence analysis to quantify these hazards. Finally, the vulnerable zones are
plotted for which risk reducing measures are deduced and implemented. Preliminary
hazard analysis for fuel storage area and whole plant is given in Table-7.7 and
Table-7.8.
TABLE-7.7
PRELIMINARY HAZARD ANALYSIS FOR STORAGE AREAS
Unit
Blast furnace gas
(carbon monoxide)
Coke oven gas
(hydrogen & methane )
BOF gas (carbon monoxide)
Capacity
1,00,000 m3
LPG
HFO
LDO
3 x 50 T
2 x 1000 m3
2 x 250 m3
1,00,000 m3
1,00,000 m3
Hazard Identified
Toxic vapor cloud/
Vapour cloud explosive
Toxic vapor cloud/
Toxic vapor cloud/
BLEVE
Pool fire
Pool fire
C7-16

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
TABLE-7.8
PRELIMINARY HAZARD ANALYSIS FOR THE WHOLE PLANT IN GENERAL
PHA
Category
Description of
Plausible
Hazard
If there is any
leakage
and
eventuality
of
source
of
ignition.
Highly
inflammable
nature of the
liquid fuels may
cause fire hazard
in the storage
facility.
Environmental
factors
7.5.3
Recommendation
Provision
--
All electrical fittings and

cables are provided as per
the specified standards.
All motor starters are
flame proof.
Fire extinguisher of small
size and big size are
provided at all potential
fire hazard places. In
addition to the above, fire
hydrant network is also
provided.
A well designed fire

protection
including
foam, dry powder, and
CO2 extinguisher should
be provided.
Fire Explosion and Toxicity Index (FE&TI) Approach

Fire, explosion and toxicity indexing (FE & TI) is a rapid ranking method for
identifying the degree of hazard. The application of FE & TI would help to make a
quick assessment of the nature and quantification of the hazard in these areas.
However, this does not provide precise information.
The degree of hazard potential is identified based on the numerical value of F&EI as
per the criteria given below:
F&EI Range
Degree of Hazard
0-60
61-96
97-127
128-158
159-up
Light
Moderate
Intermediate
Heavy
Severe
By comparing the indices F&EI and TI, the unit in question is classified into one of
the following three categories established for the purpose (Table-7.9).
TABLE-7.9
FIRE EXPLOSION AND TOXICITY INDEX
Category
I
II
III
Fire and Explosion Index (F&EI)

F&EI < 65
65 < or = F&EI < 95
F&EI > or = 95
Toxicity Index (TI)

TI < 6
6 < or = TI < 10
TI > or = 10
Certain basic minimum preventive and protective measures are recommended for
the three hazard categories.
C7-17

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.5.3.1 Results of FE and TI for Storage/Process Units

Based on the GOI Rules 1989, the hazardous fuel used by the proposed steel plant
is identified. Fire and explosion are the likely hazards, which may occur due to the
fuel storage. Hence, fire and explosion index has been calculated for in plant
storage. Estimates of FE&TI are given in Table-7.10.
TABLE-7.10
FIRE EXPLOSION AND TOXICITY INDEX
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7.5.4
Chemical/ Fuel
Total Capacity
F&EI
Category
TI
Category

monoxide)
methane)
BOF gas
(carbon monoxide)
LPG
HFO
LDO
2 x 50,000 m3
53.29
13.61
III
2 x 50,000 m3
63.32
5.6
2 x 50,000 m3
53.29
13.61
III
3 x 50 T
2 x 1000 m3
2 x 250 m3
101.90
22.91
19.82
III
I
I
5.43
15.26
9.55
I
III
II
Conclusion
Results of FE&TI analysis show that the storage of carbon monoxide gas, hydrogen
& methane gas, LPG, HFO and LDO falls in category of Light to moderate
category.
7.6
Consequence Analysis and Risk Assessment
7.6.1
Introduction
Consequences of worst-case/major credible emergency scenarios and likely dangers
to be associated in the proposed JSW-JSL plant near Barenda village have been
assessed through dispersion modeling, consequence and risk analysis.
Consequence analysis deals with the study of physical effects of potential dangers
associated with hazardous chemicals, their storage and operation etc. For
flammable and explosive chemicals like LPG, consequence on humans/animals and
structures are studied in terms of heat radiations and over pressures. For toxic
chemicals like carbon monoxide, consequence on human/animals are studied in
terms of concentration and dose-response relationships. The physical impact of heat
radiation, over pressure and toxic concentration are shown in Table-7.11.
The consequence modeling for different release scenarios for proposed JSW-JSL
plant has been carried out using the model ALOHA- Area Locations of Hazardous
Atmospheres developed by NOHAA and USEPA. Aloha predicates the rate at which
chemical vapors may escape into the atmospheres from the leaking/ruptured tank.
C7-18

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
TABLE-7.11(A)
DAMAGE DUE TO INCIDENT RADIATION INTENSITIES
Sr.
No.
1
Incident
Radiation
(kW/m2)
37.5
Type of Damage Intensity

Damage to Equipment
Damage to People
25.0
19.0
12.5
4.5
Minimum energy required to ignite

wood at indefinitely long exposure
without a flame
Maximum
thermal
radiation
intensity allowed on thermally
unprotected adjoining equipment
Minimum energy to ignite with a
flame; melts plastic tubing
--
1.6
--
Damage to process equipment
100% lethality in 1 min. 1% lethality

in 10 sec.
50% Lethality in 1 min. significant
injury in 10 sec.
--
1% lethality in 1 min.
Causes pain if duration is longer than
20 sec, however blistering is un-likely
(First degree burns)
Causes no discomfort on long
exposures
Source: Techniques for Assessing Industrial Hazards by World Bank
TABLE-7.11(B)
EXPOSURE TIME NECESSARY TO REACH THE PAIN THRESHOLD
Radiation Level (kW/m2)
Time to Pain Threshold (Seconds)
19.9
2
11.7
4
9.5
6
4.7
16
1.7
60
Source: Techniques for Assessing Industrial Hazards by World Bank
TABLE-7.11(C)
PHYSCIAL IMPACT OF EXPLOSION OVER PRESSURE
Pressure
(psig)
0.1
0.7
1.0
2
3
4
5
7
10
300
Damage Produces by Blast

Breakage of small windows under strain
Minor damage to house structures
Partial demolition of houses
Partial collapse of walls and roofs of houses
Heavy machines (3000 lb) in industries building suffered little damage;
steel frame building distorted
Cladding of light industries building ruptured
Wooden utility poles snapped; tall hydraulic press (40,000 lb) in building
slightly damaged
Loaded train wagons overturned
Probable total destruction of buildings; heavy machines tools (7000 lb)
moved and badly damaged
Limit of crater lip
C7-19

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
TABLE-7.11(D)
PHYSICAL IMPACT OF TOXIC CONCENRATION
Concentration Level
Short-Tem Exposure
Limit (STEL)
Immediately Danger to
Life and Health (IDLH)
Lethal Concentration at
50% mortality (LC50)
Fatal Level
7.6.2
Observed Effect
Maximum concentration of the substance to which workers can
be exposed for a period upto 15 minutes without suffering (a)
Intolerable irritation (b) Chronic or irreversible tissue change
(c) narcosis of sufficient degree to increase accident proneness,
impair self rescue, or materially reduce worker efficiency,
provided that no more than 04 excursion per day are
permitted, with at least 60 minutes between exposure periods,
and provided that daily TLV is not exceeded.
An atmospheric concentration of any toxic, corrosive or
asphyxiant substance that poses an immediate threat to life or
would cause irreversible or delayed adverse health effects or
would interfere with an individuals ability to escape from a
dangerous atmosphere. If IDLH values are exceeded, all
unprotected people must leave the area immediately.
LC stands for Lethal Concentration. LC values usually refer to
the concentration of a chemical in air but in environmental
studies it can also mean the concentration of a chemical in
water. For inhalation experiments, the concentration of the
chemical in air that kills 50% of the test animals in a given
time (usually half to four hours) is the LC50 value
Death
Maximum Credible Loss Scenarios (MCLS)

As per MSIHC rules 1989 as amended in 2000, disaster management plan (DMP) for
any industry is prepared for worst-case release scenarios associated with maximum
damage potentials. The hazardous chemicals present in JSW-JSL are susceptible for
creating emergency scenarios and have been considered for assessing the damage
potentials through predicting the vulnerable zones and fatality/injured levels:
7.6.3
Blast furnace (BF) gas (carbon monoxide and hydrogen);

Coke oven (CO) gas (carbon monoxide and hydrogen);
LPG;
HFO; and
LDO.
Consequence Analysis of Accidental Release of Toxic Chemicals

The main toxic component of BF gas is carbon monoxide (CO) with maximum 25%
as basic composition. The IDLH and STEL values of CO are 1200 ppm and 400 ppm
respectively. These values represent the consequence zones of moderate and low
damage respectively. The severe level corresponding to 50% toxicity fatality level
has been considered as 3696 ppm for 20 minutes exposure duration with reference
to CO.
As per statutory regulation for the preparation of DMP, the worst-case scenario
involving the catastrophic release of entire quantity of a gasholder (BF/CO) is
considered, though the frequency of occurrence of worst-case scenario is very
C7-20

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
remote. Such scenarios are considered in the assessment of likely dangers in and
around the plant with respect to the ultimate preparedness measures.
7.6.4
Meteorological Information for Consequence Analysis

During summer season, JSW-JSL area experiences maximum temperature about
43.4C with high surface winds and in winter months, the minimum temperature
reach about 9.7C. The relative humidity is in the range of 29.5% 38.4% and
during rainy season, it may reach near 87%. The prevailing wind direction varies
with respect to season. The predominant wind direction is NW and SW with speed of
1 to 9 km/hr and the calm condition prevails for 7.8%.
Atmospheric conditions (wind speed, direction, solar radiation, cloud amount etc.) at
the time of release largely controls the extent of vulnerable zones. The physical
state of the atmosphere is usually best described by Pasquill-Gifford stability class A
(very unstable) to F (very stable). The details of various stability classes are given in
Table-7.12.
TABLE-7.12
PASQUILL-GIFFORD ATMOSPHERIC STABILITY CLASSES
Surface
Wind Speed
(at 10 m) in
m/s
<2
2-3
3-5
5-6
>6
Day
Incoming Solar Radiation
Strong
Moderate
Slight
A
A-B
B
C
C
A-B
B
B-C
C-D
D
B
C
C
D
D
Night
Amount of over cast
>4/8
low <3/8
low
cloud
cloud
E
D
D
D
E
E
D
D
The atmospheric characteristics of a particular site experience in general, almost all

types of stability classes during a season (summer, winter and rainy). For example,
in summer months, when the temperature is high for a sufficient amount of time, a
particular site like JSW-JSL near Barenda village may experience unstable (A/B
class) condition in noon time, neutral (D class) for majority of the time and also
stable condition (E/F) in the late night. In winter months, when the solar radiation is
weak to moderate with a considerable surface wind speed, the atmospheric
conditions may correspond to C/D class, E and F class in the late night and early
morning. However, the neutral class (D) of atmospheric condition exists for most of
the time in a day in a particular season; and hence it is considered as the most
representative class for a particular site and in a particular season (summer, rainy
or winter).
The other average meteorological parameters considered in the analysis are as
follows: ambient temperature = 38.5, relative humidity = 48, roughness parameter
= 0.17 (industrial area), three stability classes, i.e., B (unstable), D (neutral) and F
(very stable) class with wind speeds of 1.5 m/s to 2 m/s. For representative cases,
D class with wind speed of 2 m/s has been considered.
C7-21

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.6.5
Flammable, Explosive and Toxicological Levels Considered

The following levels corresponding to severe, moderate and low damage levels have
been considered are given in Table-7.13(A) and Table-7.13(B).
TABLE-7.13(A)
TOXICOLOGICAL LEVELS CONSIDERED FOR CONSEQUENCE ANALYSIS
Vulnerable Zones
Concentration (in ppm) and Damage

Levels considered for BF/CO gas
50% Fatality level (CCPS)=3696 ppm for 20
minutes exposure
IDLH=1200 ppm for 30 minutes exposure
STEL=400 ppm for 1 minutes exposure
Red zone: severely affected zone

Orange zone: moderately affected zone
Yellow zone : low impact zone
TABLE-7.13(B)
FLAMMABLE AND EXPLOSIVE LEVELS CONSIDERED FOR CONSEQUENCE ANALYSIS
Vulnerable Zones
Red zone: severely affected
zone
Orange
zone:
moderately
affected zone
Yellow zone : low impact zone
7.7
Radiation
(kW/m2)
LPG
Intensity
Levels for
Explosion
Overpressure
(psi) Levels for LPG, CO
and Hydrogen
37.5 (kW/m2)
7 psi
12.5 (kW/m2)
3 psi
4.5
(kW/m2)
1 psi
Selection of Scenarios in Gas Holders
7.7.1 Blast Furnace (BF) Gas Holder

The maximum volume (design capacity) of a BF gas holder is 50,000 m 3. The
density of BF gas is 1.02 kg/m3, the total quantity of BF gas available in the
holder of volume 50,000 m3 is 51,000 kg. Out of this quantity, about 25 %, i.e.,
12,750 kg are CO. The maximum amount of hydrogen in BF gas is about 6% and
hence the contribution of hydrogen in the holder will be about 3060 kg. The
maximum values of temperature and pressure at the header are 35C and 350
mmwc.
The following worst-case release scenarios involving BF gasholder have been
conceptualized:
i)
ii)
iii)
Accidental release of 12,750 kg of CO into the atmosphere leading to toxic

vapour cloud;
Accidental release of 12,750 kg of CO into the atmosphere leading to
explosive vapour cloud; and
Explosion associated with 3060 kg of hydrogen due to catastrophic release
of BF gas into the atmosphere from holder.
C7-22

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.7.2 Coke Oven (CO) Gas Holder

The maximum volume (design capacity) of a CO gas holder is 55,000 m3. As the
density of CO gas is 0.43 kg/ m3, the total quantity of coke oven gas available in
the holder of volume 55,000 m3 us 23,650 kg. Out of this quantity, maximum 9
%, i.e., 2128 kg is CO. The maximum amount of hydrogen in CO gas is about 55
% and hence the contribution of hydrogen in the holder will be about 13007.5 kg.
The maximum values of temperature and pressure at the header are 35C and
343 mmwc.
The following worst-case release scenarios involving CO gasholder have been
conceptualized:
i) Accidental release of approximately 2128 kg of CO into the atmosphere (toxic
impact only);
ii) Accidental release of 2128 kg of CO into the atmosphere leading to explosive
vapour cloud; and
iii) Explosion associate with 13007.5 kg of hydrogen due to catastrophic release
of CO gas into the atmosphere from holder.
7.7.3 Fire and Explosion Associated with LPG Storage
In JSW-JSL, there will be one LPG bullet with capacity of 50 MT. LPG is a
colourless, tasteless and odourless gas. It has the ability to flash back, explode
within an enclosed space. It is a flammable gas, so it may be ignited from flames,
heat, sparks, static electricity and operational electrical switches. Thus, the use of
LPG within the JSW-JSL premise may lead to the occurrence of various scenarios.
Only the major scenarios of fire and explosion have been considered for the
consequence modeling to assess the maximum damage with the inventory of 45
MT (90 % full bullet).
i) Catastrophic failure of a LPG bullet (inventory=45 MT) leading to boiling liquid
expanding vapour explosion (BLEVE); and
ii) Catastrophic failure of a LPG bullet (inventory=45 MT) leading to vapour cloud
explosion (VCE).
7.7.4 Consequence Analysis Results for Toxic Carbon Monoxide in BF and CO Gas Holders
Though there are several incidences of gas holder fire and explosion resulting into
the release, the frequency of occurrence of such catastrophic release scenarios in
will vary as per the safety measures adopted in the unit. Carbon monoxide (CO)
has both toxicity and flammability/explosive nature. The consequence analysis
results in terms of maximum downwind distances due to accidental release of
BF/CO gas (equivalent CO) from holders under various atmospheric stability
conditions are shown in Table-7.14.
From the Table-7.12, worst case scenarios arising for toxic vapor cloud
catastrophic release from the holders (BF/CO) will have toxic impact upto 632 m
for CO holders and about 1100 m for BF gas holder respectively for IDLH
concentration level (1200 ppm) of CO under neutral stability class (D) and 2.0
m/s. The consequence distances will further increase upto a maximum distance of
about 1280 m if the release occurs in stable atmosphere (F class). Whereas, in
C7-23

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
unstable atmospheric conditions (B class), the downwind distances will be the

least. The graphical representations of the consequence analysis of the carbon
monoxide are shown in Figure-7.3.
The flammability/explosive impact of CO released from BF/CO holders have been
studied in terms of extension of flammable impact under D; 2 m/s. The maximum
affected distance of 32 m of CO holder and 78 m of BF gas holder area.
TABLE-7.14
MAXIMUM IMPACT DISTANCES FOR TOXIC/FLAMMABLE VAPOUR CLOUD
OF CARBON MONOXIDE GAS FROM BF/CO GAS HOLDER
Sr.
No
Scenario
Accidental release of
12750 kg of carbon
monoxide (CO) into
the atmosphere due to
catastrophic failure of
BF gas holder
Accidental release of
2128 kg of carbon
monoxide (CO) into
the atmosphere due to
catastrophic failure of
CO gas holder
Wind
Speed*/
Stability
Class
2B
2D
Toxic Vapour Cloud

(maximum downwind distance in
m)
3696
1200
400
(ppm)
(ppm)
(ppm)
466
788
1200
679
1100
1600
Vapour Cloud Explosion

(maximum distance in
m)
0.7(psi)
1(psi)
2(psi)
82
84
78
78
73
73
1.5F
696
1280
1900
93
86
82
2B
2D
248
360
447
623
743
994
34
36
30
32
27
28
1.5F
367
632
1000
43
39
36
*wind speed in m/sec
C7-24

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
FIGURE-7.3(A)
ACCIDENTAL RELEASE OF CO INTO THE ATMOSPHERE LEADING TO
TOXIC VAPOR CLOUD
FIGURE-7.3(B)
ACCIDENTAL RELEASE OF CO INTO THE ATMOSPHERE LEADING TO
VAPOUR CLOUD EXPLOSION
C7-25

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.7.5 Consequence Analysis Results for Fire/Explosion Scenario of Hydrogen as

Component of COG/BFG
One of the major flammable/explosive components of CO/BF gas is hydrogen.
Besides explosion, it may produce fireball type situation in the presence of ignition
source. Since hydrogen is very light, there is a chance of early ignition and less
possibility of explosion in late ignition. The maximum affected distances (m) for
fire and explosive scenarios of hydrogen under neutral stability class (D) and wind
speed of 2.0 m/s is given in Table-7.15 and Figure-7.4.
TABLE-7.15
VARIOUS SCENARIOS OF HYDROGEN
Scenarios
Explosion associated with 3060 kg of

hydrogen due to catastrophic release
of BF gas into the atmosphere from
holder.
Explosion associate with 13007.5 kg
of hydrogen due to catastrophic
release of CO gas into the
atmosphere from holder.
Over pressure (psi) for Explosion (early

ignition)/Distance in meter
1 psi
3 psi
7 psi
125
74
58
579
346
269
The vulnerable impact distances for explosion associated with hydrogen after
worst case release from BF/CO holder in terms of explosion overpressure levels
under D; 2 m/s for early ignition. Maximum impact distance corresponding to
moderate damage level of 3 psi for BF gas holder is 74 m and CO gas holder is
346 m from the holder area.
In addition, for planning purposes, the consequence impact zones
(severe/moderate/low) under stability class D, 2 m/s for the worst-case release
scenarios considered are depicted in plant layout of JSW-JSL. These drawings
show the locations and areas in JSW-JSL coming under severe/moderate/low
impact zones corresponding to various concentration levels of toxic vapour cloud
of hydrogen.
C7-26

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
FIGURE-7.4(A)
EXPLOSION ASSOCIATED WITH HYDROGEN DUE TO CATASTROPHIC
RELEASE OF BF GAS INTO THE ATMOSPHERE FROM HOLDER
FIGURE-7.4(B)
EXPLOSION ASSOCIATED WITH HYDROGEN DUE TO CATASTROPHIC
RELEASE OF CO GAS INTO THE ATMOSPHERE FROM HOLDER
C7-27

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.7.6 Consequence Results for Fire and Explosion Scenarios for LPG
Since the worst-case release scenario of LPG release are Boiling Liquid Expanding
Vapor Explosion (BLEVE) and unconfined Vapor Cloud Explosion (VCE), the impact
factors considered are radiation intensity and explosion overpressure. The three
heat radiation levels of 37.5 kW/m 2, 12.5 kW/m2 and 4.5 kW/m2 and three
explosion overpressure levels of 7 psi, 3psi and 1 psi corresponding to severe
moderate and low damage levels have been considered respectively.
Maximum affected downwind distances (in m) due to heat radiation and explosion
over pressure level of LPG (stability class: D and wind speed =2.0 m/s)
BLEVE/Fire ball scenarios are given in Table-7.16 and Figure-7.5.
TABLE-7.16 (A)
THERMAL RADIATION LEVELS DUE TO
FAILURE OF LPG BULLET
Scenario
BLEVE due to catastrophic failure of a
LPG Bullet (45 MT)
Thermal Radiation Intensities in kW/m2

/Distance in m
37.5 kW/m2 12.5 kW/m2
4.5 kW/m2
213
396
659
TABLE-7.16 (B)
EXPLOSIVE OVER PRESSURE LEVELS DUE TO
Scenario
Vapour cloud explosion due to
catastrophic rupture of LPG bullet
(45 MT)
Explosion Overpressure Level in psi

/Distance in m
1 psi
3 psi
7 psi
926
784
Never reached
LOC
7.7.7 Consequence Analysis Results for Pool Fire Scenario for HFO and LDO Storage
Tanks
The maximum capacity of storage of HFO and LDO are 2x1000 KL and 2X 250 KL
respectively. The most credible failure is the rupture/hole of the storage tank. As
a worst case, it is assumed that the entire contents leak out into the dyke
forming a pool, which may catch fire on finding a source of ignition. The radiation
intensities for rupture of HFO and LDO storage tank is given in Table-7.17 and
Figure-7.6.
TABLE-7.17
THERMAL RADIATION DUE TO FAILURE OF HFO AND LDO TANKS
Scenario
Failure
of
storage tank
Failure
of
storage tank
HFO
Thermal Radiation kW/m2 /distances in m

37.5
12.5
4.5
16
35
63
LDO
<10
13
25
C7-28

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
FIGURE-7.5(A)
THERMAL RADIATION LEVELS DUE TO
FIGURE-7.5(B)
EXPLOSIVE OVER PRESSURE LEVELS DUE TO
C7-29

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
FIGURE-7.6(A)
THERMAL RADIATION DUE TO FAILURE OF HFO TANKS
FIGURE-7.6(B)
THERMAL RADIATION DUE TO FAILURE OF LDO TANKS
C7-30

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.7.8 Coal Handling Plant - Dust Explosion

Coal dust when dispersed in air and ignited would explode. Crusher house and
conveyor systems are most susceptible to this hazard. To be explosive, the dust
mixture should have:
Particles dispersed in the air with minimum size (typical figure is 400
microns);
Dust concentrations must be reasonably uniform; and
Minimum explosive concentration for coal dust (33% volatiles) is 50 gm/m 3.
Failure of dust extraction and suppression systems may lead to abnormal

conditions and may increase the concentration of coal dust to the explosive limits.
Sources of ignition present are incandescent bulbs with the glasses of bulkhead
fittings missing, electric equipment and cables, friction, spontaneous combustion
in accumulated dust. Dust explosions may occur without any warnings with
maximum explosion pressure upto 6.4 bar. Another dangerous characteristic of
dust explosions is that it sets off secondary explosions after the occurrence of the
initial dust explosion. Many a times the secondary explosions are more damaging
than primary ones. The dust explosions are powerful enough to destroy
structures, kill or injure people and set dangerous fires likely to damage a large
portion of the coal handling plant including collapse of its steel structure which
may cripple the life line of the steel plant.
Stockpile areas shall be provided with automatic garden type sprinklers for dust
suppression as well as to reduce spontaneous ignition of the coal stockpiles.
Necessary water distribution network for drinking and service water with pumps,
piping, tanks, valves etc., will be provided for distributing water at all transfer
points, crusher house, control rooms etc. A centralized control room with
microprocessor based control system (PLC) has been envisaged for operation of
the coal handling plant. Except for locally controlled equipment like traveling
tripper, dust extraction/ dust suppression / ventilation equipment, sump pumps,
water distribution system etc., all other in-line equipment will be controlled from
the central control room but will have provision for local control as well. All
necessary interlocks, control panels, MCCs, mimic diagrams etc. will be provided
for safe and reliable operation of the coal handling plant.
7.7.8.1 Control Measures for Coal Yards
The total quantity of coal will be stored in separate stock piles, with proper drains
around to collect washouts during monsoon season.
Water sprinkling system will be installed on stocks of coal in required scale to
prevent spontaneous combustion and consequent fire hazards. The stock
geometry will be adopted to maintain minimum exposure of stock pile areas
towards predominant wind direction.
7.7.9
Identification of Hazards
The various hazards associated, with the plant process apart from fuel storage have
been identified and are outlined in Table-7.18.
C7-31

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
TABLE-7.18
HAZARD ANALYSIS FOR PROCESS IN THE PLANT
Sr. No.
1
2
3
Blocks/Areas
Coal storage in open yard
Coal handling plant
including bunker area
Boilers
Steam turbine generator

buildings
Switch-yard control room
LDO & HSD tank farms
Hazards Identified
Fire, spontaneous combustion
Fire and/or dust explosions
Fire (mainly near oil burners), steam
explosions, fuel explosions
Fires in
a) Lube oil system
b) Cable galleries
c) Short circuits in
i) Control rooms
ii) Switch-gears
Explosion due to leakage of hydrogen and fire
following it.
Fire in cable galleries and switch-gear/control
room
Fire
7.7.10 Hazardous Events with Greatest Contribution to Fatality Risk

The hazardous event scenarios likely to make the greatest contribution to the risk
of potential fatalities are summarized in Table-7.19. Onsite facility refers to the
operating site at Barenda village, whereas offsite facility refers to transport and
handling systems, which are away from the operating site.
TABLE-7.19
HAZARDOUS EVENTS CONTRIBUTING TO ON-SITE FACILITY RISK
Hazardous Event
Onsite vehicle impact on
personnel
Entrapment/struck by
machinery
Fall from heights
Risk Rank
3
3
3
Electrocution
Storage tank rupture
Consequences of Interest
Potential for single fatalities, onsite
only
only
only
only
only
impact
impact
impact
impact
impact
7.7.11 Risk Assessment Summary

The preliminary risk assessment has been completed for the proposed plant and
associated facilities and the broad conclusions are as follows:
There will be no significant adverse community impacts or environmental

damage consequences; and
C7-32

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
The hazardous event scenarios and risks in general at this facility can be
adequately managed to acceptable levels by performing the recommended
safety studies as part of detailed design, applying recommended control
strategies and implementing a safety management system.
7.7.12 Risk Reduction Opportunities

The following opportunities will be considered as a potential means of reducing
identified risks during the detailed design phase:
7.8
Buildings and plant structures designed for cyclone and seismic events (where
appropriate), to prevent structural collapse and integrity of weather (water)
proofing for storage of dangerous goods;
Provision for adequate water capacity to supply fire protection systems and
critical process water;
Isolate people from load carrying/mechanical handling systems, vehicle traffic

and storage and stacking locations;
Installation of fit-for-purpose access ways and fall protection systems to

facilitate safe access to fixed and mobile plant;
Provision and integrity of process tanks, waste holding tanks and bunded
areas as per relevant standards;
Containment of hazardous materials;
Security of facility to prevent unauthorized access to plant, introduction of

prohibited items, and control of onsite traffic; and
Development of emergency response management systems commensurate

with site specific hazards and risks (fire, explosion, rescue and first aid).
Disaster Management Plan2
7.8.1 Disasters
A disaster is a catastrophic situation in which suddenly, people are plunged into
helplessness and suffering, as a result, need protection, clothing, shelter, medical
and social care and other necessities of life.
Disasters can be divided into two main groups. In the first, disasters resulting
from natural phenomena like earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, storm surges,
cyclones, tropical storms, floods, avalanches, landslides, forest fires etc. The
second group includes disastrous events occasioned by man, or mans impact
upon the environment. Examples are armed conflict, industrial accidents,
radiation accidents, factory fires, explosions and escape of toxic gases or
chemical substances, river pollution, mining or other structural collapses, air, sea,
2
Disaster Management plan as per ToR-63
C7-33

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
rail and road transport accidents and can reach catastrophic dimensions in terms
of human loss.
There can be no set criteria for assessing the gravity of a disaster in the abstract
since this depends to a large extent on the physical, economic and social
environment in which it occurs. What would be considered a major disaster in a
developing country, ill equipped to cope with the problems involved, may not
mean more than a temporary emergency elsewhere. However, all disaster bring
in their wake similar consequences that call for immediate action, whether at the
local, national or international level, for the rescue and relief of the victims. This
includes the search for the dead and injured and removal of debris and social
care, the provision of temporary shelter to the homeless food, clothing and
medical supplies, and the rapid re-establishment of essential services.
7.8.2 Objectives of Disaster Management Plan (DMP)
The disaster management plan is aimed to ensure safety of life, protection of
environment, protection of installation, restoration of production and salvage
operations in this same order of priorities. For effective implementation of the
disaster management plan, it will be widely circulated and personnel training
given through rehearsals/drills.
The disaster management plan would reflect the probable, consequential
severalties of the undesired event due to deteriorating conditions or through
Knock on effects. Further, the management should be able to demonstrate that
their assessment of the consequences uses good supporting evidence and is
based on currently available and reliable information, incident data from internal
and external sources and if necessary the reports of outside agencies.
To tackle the consequences of a major emergency inside the factory or immediate
vicinity of the factory, a disaster management plan has to be formulated and this
planned emergency document is called Disaster Management Plan.
The objective of the industrial disaster management plan is to make use of the
combined resources of the plant and the outside services to achieve the
following:
Effect the rescue and medical treatment of casualties;

Safeguard other people;
Minimize damage to property and the environment;
Initially contain and ultimately bring the incident under control;
Identify any dead;
Provide for needs of relatives;
Provide authoritative information to the news media;
Secure the safe rehabilitation of affected area; and
Preserve relevant records and equipment for the subsequent inquiry into the
cause and circumstances of the emergency.
In effect, it is to optimize operational efficiency to rescue, rehabilitation and

render medical help and to restore normalcy.
C7-34

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.8.3
Flood Hazard
Central Water Commission has a river flow monitoring station on Subarnarekha
river in Muri at about 20 km upstream from the proposed plant site and the data
collected from this is presented below:
Latitude
Longitude
Altitude above sea level
Catchment area
Zero of gauge
Mode of observation
Highest water level/date
Danger level
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
23 22 00 N
85 48 00 E
241.96 m
1330 km
231.00 m
By wading/boat
243.4 m/1973
238.12 m
The event of highest water level 243.40 m occurred on 12.10.1973 flooded low
lying areas along Subarnarekha river near Muri. The water level during second
flood event occurred on 09.07.2008 was 238.12 m just touching the danger level.
Considering 194.00 m as danger level at nearest location on Subarnarekha River
with a 5.20 m of water level rise above danger level during worst flood event
based on 30 year monitoring data of CWC, Muri, a flood hazard zonation map has
been prepared and presented in Figure-7.7. The lowest ground elevation at
proposed project site is 210 m amsl and is 11 m above the worst flood level
occurred on 12.10.1973. Hence chances of proposed plant site getting flooded are
very less.
7.9
Emergencies
7.9.1
General, Industrial, Emergencies

The emergencies that could be envisaged in the plant and tank farm are as
follows:
A situation of fire at tank farm of storage;

Slow isolated fires;
Fast spreading fires;
Structural failures;
Contamination of food/water; and
Sabotage/social disorder.
7.9.2 Specific Emergencies Anticipated
Fire and Explosion
Fire consequences can be disastrous, since they involve quantities of fuel either
stored or in dynamic inventory in pipelines or in nearby areas. Toxic releases can
affect persons working around. Preliminary hazard analysis has provided a basis
for consequences estimation. Estimation can be made by using various pool fire,
tank fire consequence calculations. During the study of risk assessment, the
natures of damages are worked out and probability of occurrence of such hazards
is also drawn up.
C7-35

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
FIGURE-7.7
FLOOD HAZARD ZONATION BASED ON FLOOD OCCURRENCE DATA
C7-36

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.10
Emergency Organization
It is recommended to setup an emergency organization. A senior executive who
has control over the affairs of the plant would be heading the emergency
organization. He would be designated as site controller. As per the general
organization chart, would be designated as the incident controller. In the case of
stores, utilities, open areas, which are not under the control of the production
heads, senior executive responsible for maintenance of utilities would be
designated as incident controller. All the incident controllers would be reporting to
the site controller.
Each incident controller, for himself, organize a team responsible for controlling
the incidence with the personnel under his control. Shift incharge would be the
reporting officer, who would bring the incidence to the notice of the incidence
controller and site controller.
Emergency coordinators would be appointed who would undertake the
responsibilities like fire fighting, rescue, rehabilitation, transport and provide
essential and support services. For this purposes, security incharge, personnel
department, essential services personnel would be engaged. All these personnel
would be designated as key personnel.
In each shift, electrical supervisor, electrical fitters, pump house incharge, and
other maintenance staff would be drafted for emergency operations. In the event
of power or communication system failure, some of the staff members in the
office/plant offices would be drafted and their services would be utilized as
messengers for quick passing of communications. All these personnel would be
declared as essential personnel.
7.10.1 Emergency Communication

Whoever notices an emergency situation such as fire, growth of fire, leakage etc.
would inform his immediate superior and emergency control center. The person
on duty in the emergency control center would appraise the site controller. Site
controller verifies the situation from the incident controller of that area or the
Shift incharge and takes a decision about an impending on site emergency. This
would be communicated to all the incident controllers, emergency coordinators.
Simultaneously, the emergency warning system would be activated on the
instructions of the site controller.
7.10.2 Emergency Responsibilities
The responsibilities of the key personnel are appended below:
7.10.2.1Site Controller
On receiving information about emergency he would rush to emergency control
center and take charge of ECC and the situation:
C7-37

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Assesses the magnitude of the situation on the advice of incident controller

and decides;
Whether the effected area needs to be evacuated;
Whether personnel who are at assembly points need to be evacuated;
Declares emergency and orders for operation of emergency siren;
Organizes announcement by public address system about location of
emergency;
Assesses which areas are likely to be affected, or need to be evacuated or are
to be alerted;
Maintains a continuous review of possible development and assesses the
situation in consultation with incident controller and other key personnel as to
whether shutting down the plant or any section of the plant is required and if
evacuation of persons is needed;
Directs personnel for rescue, rehabilitation, transport, fire, brigade, medical
and other designated mutual support systems locally available, for meeting
emergencies;
Controls evacuation of affected areas, if the situation is likely to go out of
control or effects are likely to go beyond the premises of the factory, informs
to district emergency authority, police, hospital and seeks their intervention
and help;
Informs inspector of factories, deputy chief inspector of factories, PCB and
other statutory authorities;
Gives a public statement in necessary;
Keeps record of chronological events and prepares an investigation report and
preserves evidence; and
On completion of on site emergency and restoration of normally, declares all
clear and orders for all clear warning.
7.10.2.2 Incident Controller
Assembles the incident control team;

Directs operations within the affected areas with the priorities for safety to
personnel, minimize damage to the plant, property and environment and
minimize the loss of materials;
Directs the shutting down and evacuation of plant and areas likely to be
adversely affected by the emergency;
Ensures that all key personnel help is sought;
Provides advice and information to the fire and security officer and the local
fire services as and when they arrive;
Ensures that all non-essential workers/staff of the affected areas evacuated to
the appropriate assembly points, and the areas are searched for causalities;
Has regard to the need for preservation of evidence so as to facilitate any
inquiry into the causes and circumstances, which caused or escalated the
emergency;
Co-ordinates with emergency services at the site;
Provides tools and safety equipment to the team members;
Keeps in touch with the team and advise them regarding the method of
control to be used; and
Keeps the site controller of emergency informed of the progress being made.
C7-38

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.10.2.3 Emergency Coordinator - Rescue, Fire Fighting
On knowing about emergency, rushes to ECC;

Helps the incident controller in containment of the emergency;
Ensure fire pumps in operating conditions and instructs pump house operator
to ready for any emergency with standby arrangement;
Guides the fire fighting crew i.e. firemen, trained plant personnel and security
staff;
Organizes shifting the fire fighting facilities to the emergency site, if required;
Takes guidance of the incident controller for fire fighting as well as assesses
the requirements of outside help;
Arranges to control the traffic at the gate and the incident area;
Directs the security staff to the incident site to take part in the emergency
operations under his guidance and supervision;
Evacuates the people in the plant or in the nearby areas as advised by site
controller;
Searches for casualties and arranges proper aid for them;
Assembles search and evacuation team;
Arranges for safety equipment for the members of this team;
Decides which paths the evacuated workers should follow; and
Maintains law and order in the area, and if necessary seeks the help of police.
7.10.2.4 Emergency Coordinator-Medical, Mutual Aid, Rehabilitation, Transport and

Communication
In the event of failure of electric supply and thereby internal telephone, sets
up communication point and establishes contact with the emergency control
center (ECC);
Organizes medical treatment to the injured and if necessary will shift the
injured to nearby hospitals;
Mobilizes extra medical help from outside, if necessary;
Keeps a list of qualified first aiders of the factory and seek their assistance;
Maintains first aid and medical emergency requirements;
Makes sure that all safety equipment are made available to the emergency
team;
Assists site controller with necessary data and coordinate the emergency
activities;
Assists site controller in updating emergency plan, organizing mock drills
verification of inventory of emergency facilities and furnishing report to the
site controller;
Maintains liaison with civil administration;
Ensure availability of canteen facilities and maintenance of rehabilitation
center;
He will be in liaison with site controller/incident controller;
Ensure transportation facility;
Ensures availability of necessary cash for rescue/rehabilitation and emergency
expenditure;
Controls rehabilitation of affected areas on discontinuation of emergency; and
Makes available diesel/petrol for transport vehicles engaged in emergency
operation.
C7-39

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.10.2.5 Emergency Coordinator - Essential Services
He would assist site controller and incident controller;

Maintains essential services like diesel generator, water, fire water,
compressed air/instrument air, power supply for lighting;
He would plan alternate facilities in the event of power failure, to maintain
essential services such as lighting, refrigeration plant etc;
He would organize separate electrical connections for all utilities and
emergency services so that in the event of emergency or fires, essential
services and utilities are not affected;
Gives necessary instructions regarding emergency electrical supply, isolation
of certain sections etc. to shift incharge and electricians; and
Ensures availability of adequate quantities of protective equipment and other
emergency materials, spares etc.
7.10.2.6 General Responsibilities of Employees during an Emergency

During an emergency, especially it becomes more enhanced and pronounced
when an emergency warning is raised, the workers if they are incharge of process
equipment should adopt safe and emergency shut down and attend any
prescribed duty as essential employee. If no such responsibilities assigned, he
should adopt a safe course to assembly point and await instructions. He should
not resort to spread panic. On the other hand, he must assist emergency
personnel towards objectives of DMP.
7.11
Emergency Facilities
7.11.1 Emergency Control Center (ECC)

For the time being office block is identified as emergency control center. It would
have external telephone, fax, telex facility. All the site controller/incident
controller officers, senior personnel would be located here. Also, it would be an
elevated place. Various other materials that are to be maintained in the
emergency control center are:
The following information and equipment are to be provided at the emergency
control center (ECC).
Intercom, telephone;
P & T telephone;
Self contained breathing apparatus;
Fire suit/gas tight goggles/gloves/helmets;
Hand tools, wind direction/velocities indications;
Public address megaphone, hand bell, telephone directories;
(internal, P&T) factory layout, site plan;
Emergency lamp/torch light/batteries;
Plan indicating locations of hazard inventories, plant control room, sources of
safety equipment, work road plan, assembly points, rescue location vulnerable
zones, escape routes;
Hazard chart;
C7-40

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Emergency shut-down procedures;

Nominal roll of employees;
List of key personnel, list of essential employees, list of emergency coordinators;
Duties of key personnel;
Address with telephone numbers and key personnel, emergency coordinator,
essential employees; and
Important address and telephone numbers including government agencies,
neighboring industries and sources of help, out side experts, chemical fact
sheets population details around the factory.
7.11.2 Assembly Point

Number of assembly depending upon the plant location would be identified
wherein employees who are not directly connected with the disaster management
would be assembled for safety and rescue. Emergency breathing apparatus,
minimum facilities like water etc. would be organized.
7.11.3 Emergency Power Supply
Plant facilities would be connected to diesel generator and would be placed in
auto mode. Thus water pumps, plants lighting and emergency control center.
Administrative building and other auxiliary services are connected to emergency
power supply. In all the blocks flame proof type emergency lamps would be
provided.
7.11.4 Fire Fighting Facilities
First aid fire fighting equipment suitable for emergency should be maintained in
each section the plant. This would be as per statutory requirements as well as per
TAC regulations. However, fire hydrant line covering major areas would be laid. It
would be maintained as 6 kg/sqcm pressure. Fire alarms would be located in the
bulk storage areas.
In order to combat any occurrence of fire in plant premises, the following fire
protection facilities have been envisaged for the various units of the plant.
Fire Station Building
One fire station building has been envisaged, where all the fire personnel will be
stationed. All fire related signal from various units shall receive in this building to
take necessary action to extinguish and control the fire.
Fire Fighting Vehicles (Fire Tenders)
To meet any eventuality of fire, fire-fighting vehicles (one crash fire tender and
one dry power tender) have been considered.
C7-41

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Portable Fire Extinguishers
All plant units, office buildings, stores, laboratories etc will be provided with
adequate number of portable fire extinguishers to be used as first aid fire
appliances. The distribution and selection of extinguishers will be done in
accordance with the requirement of IS: 2190-92.
Hydrant System
The fire hydrant network system has been envisaged for the plant. Internal
hydrants will be provided at suitable locations and at different levels inside the
major plant units. Yard hydrants will be provided normally along the road and in
the close vicinity of the units to meet the requirement of water for extinguishing
fire. Hydrant system shall have dedicated pump house, pumps, water storage
and piping network etc.
Automatic Fire Detection System
Unattended and vulnerable electrical premises like electrical control rooms, cable
tunnels, MCC, transformer rooms, switch gear room, oil cellers, etc will be
provided with automatic fire detection and alarm system.
Automatic Extinguishing System
Installation like transformers of MSDS will be provided with fire detection and
emulsifier (high velocity water spray) system. Water spray system (MVWS) shall
be provided for the natural gas/LPG storage area.
7.11.5 Location of Wind Sock
On the top of the administration block, top of each production blocks, wind socks
would be installed to indicate direction of wind for emergency escape.
7.11.6 Emergency Medical Facilities
Stretchers, gas masks and general first aid materials for dealing with chemical
burns, and inhalations, fire burns etc. would be maintained in the medical center
as well as in the emergency control room. Private medical practitioners help
would be sought. Government hospital would be approached for emergency help.
Apart from plant first aid facilities, external facilities would be augmented. Names
of medical personnel, medical facilities in the surrounding area and near towns
would be prepared and updated. Necessary specific medicines and antidotes for
emergency treatment of burns patients and for those affected by toxicity would
be maintained.
Breathing apparatus and other emergency medical equipment would be provided
and maintained. The help of nearby industrial management in this regard would
be taken on mutual support basis.
C7-42

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.11.7 Ambulance
An ambulance with driver availability in all the shifts, emergency shift vehicle
would be ensured and maintained to transport the injured or affected persons. A
number of persons would be trained in first aid so that, in every shift first aid
personnel would be available.
7.12
Emergency Actions
7.12.1 Emergency Warning

Communication of emergency would be made familiar to the personnel inside the
plant and people outside. An emergency warning system would be established.
7.12.2 Emergency Shutdown
There are number of facilities, which can be provided to help deal with hazardous
conditions, when a tank is on fire. The suggested arrangements are:
Stop feed;
Dilute contents;
Remove heat;
Deluge with water; and
Transfer contents.
Whether a given method is appropriate depends on the particular case. Cessation

of agitation may be the best action in some instances but not in others. Stopping
of the feed may require the provision of by pass arrangements.
Methods of removing additional heat include removal through the normal cooling
arrangements or use of an emergency cooling system. Cooling facilities which use
vapouring liquid may be particularly effective, since a large increase in
vaporization can be obtained by dropping pressure.
7.12.3 Evacuation of Personnel
There could be more number of persons in the storage area and other areas in
the vicinity. The area would have adequate number of exits, stair cases. In the
event of an emergency, unconnected personnel have to escape to assembly
point. Operators have to take emergency shutdown procedure and escape. Time
office maintains a copy of deployment of employees in each shift, at ECC. If
necessary, persons can be evacuated by rescue teams.
7.12.4 All Clear Signal
Also, at the end of an emergency, after discussing with incident controllers and
emergency co-ordinators, the site controller orders an all clear signal. When it
becomes essential, the site controller communicates to the district emergency
authority, police, fire service personnel regarding help required or development of
the situation into an off-site emergency.
C7-43

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.13
General
7.13.1 Employee Information

During an emergency, employees would be warned by raising siren in specific
pattern. employees would be given training of escape routes, taking shelter,
protecting from toxic effects. Employees would be provided with information
related to fire hazards, antidotes and first aid measures. Those who would
designated as key personnel and essential employees should be given training to
emergency response.
7.13.2 Public Information and Warning
The industrial disaster effects related to this plant may mostly be confined to the
plant area. The detailed risk analysis has indicated that the pool fire effects would
not be felt outside. However, as an abundant precaution, the information related
to chemicals in use would be furnished to district emergency authority for
necessary dissemination to general public and for any use during an off site
emergency.
7.13.3 Co-ordination With Local Authorities
Keeping in view of the nature of emergency, two levels of coordination are
proposed. In the case of an on site emergency, resources within the organization
would be mobilized and in the event extreme emergency local authorities help
should be sought.
In the event of an emergency developing into an off site emergency, local
authority and district emergency authority (normally the collector) would be
appraised and under his supervision, the off site disaster management plant
would be exercised. For this purpose, the facilities that are available locally, i.e.
medical, transport, personnel, rescue accommodation, voluntary organizations
etc. would be measured. Necessary rehearsals and training in the form of mock
drills should be organized.
7.13.4 Mutual Aid
Mutual aid in the form of technical personnel, runners, helpers special protective
equipment, transport vehicles, communication facility etc. should be sought from
the neighboring industrial management.
7.13.5 Mock Drills
Emergency preparedness is an important on that of planning in industrial disaster
management. Personnel would be trained suitably and prepared mentally and
physically in emergency response through carefully planned, simulated
procedures. Similarly, the key personnel and essential personnel should be
trained in the operations.
C7-44

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.13.6 Important Information

Once the plant goes into stream, important information such as names and
addresses of key personnel, essential employees, medical personnel out side the
plant, transporters address, address of those connected with off site emergency
such as police, local authorities, fire services, district emergency authority should
be prepared and maintained.
7.14
Off-Site Emergency Preparedness Plan

The task of preparing the Off-Site Emergency Plan lies with the district collector,
however the off-site plan will be prepared with the help of the local district
authorities. The proposed plan is shown in Figure-7.8.
7.14.1 Aspects Proposed to be Considered in the Off-Site Emergency Plan

The main aspects, which will be included in the emergency plan are:
Organization
Detail of command structure, warning systems, implementation procedures,

emergency control centers.
Names and appointments of incident controller, site main controller, their
deputies and other key personnel.
Communications
Identification of personnel involved, communication center, call signs, network,

lists of telephone numbers.
Specialized Knowledge
Details of specialist bodies, firms and people upon whom it may be necessary to
call i.e. those with specialized chemical knowledge, laboratories.
Voluntary Organizations
Details of organizers, telephone numbers, resources etc.
Chemical Information
Details of the hazardous substances stored or procedure on each site and a

summary of the risk associated with them.
Meteorological Information
Arrangements for obtaining details of whether conditions prevailing at the time

and weather forecasts.
C7-45

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
FIGURE-7.8
ACTION PLAN FOR HANDLING OFF SITE EMERGENCY
C7-46

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Humanitarian Arrangements
Transport, evacuation centers, emergency feeding treatment of injured, first aid,

ambulances, temporary mortuaries.
Public Information
Arrangements for
(a) Dealing with the media press office;
(b) Informing relatives, etc.
Assessment of Emergency Plan
Arrangements for:
(a) Collecting information on the causes of the emergency;
(b) Reviewing the efficiency and effectiveness of all aspects of the emergency
plan.
7.14.2 Role of the Emergency Co-ordinating Officer
The various emergency services will be co-ordinated by an emergency
coordinating officer (ECO), who will be designated by the district collector. The
ECO will liase closely with the site main controller. Again depending on local
arrangements, for very severe incidents with major or prolonged off-site
consequences, the external control will be passed to a senior local authority
administrator or even an administrator appointed by the central or state
government.
7.14.3 Role of the Local Authority
The duty to prepare the off-site plan lies with the local authorities. The
emergency planning officer (EPO) appointed will carry out his duty in preparing
for a whole range of different emergencies within the local authority area. The
EPO will liase with the works, to obtain the information to provide the basis for
the plan. This liaison will ensure that the plan is continually kept up-to-date.
It will be the responsibility of the EPO to ensure that all those organizations which
will be involved off site in handling the emergency, know of their role and are
able to accept it by having for example, sufficient staff and appropriate
equipment to cover their particular responsibilities. Rehearsals for off-site plans
will be organized by the EPO.
7.14.4 Role of Police
Formal duties of the police during an emergency include protecting life and
property and controlling traffic movements.
C7-47

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Their functions will include controlling bystanders evacuating the public,

identifying the dead and dealing with casualties, and informing relatives of death
or injury.
7.14.5 Role of Fire Authorities
The control of a fire will be normally the responsibility of the senior fire brigade
officer who would take over the handling of the fire from the site incident
controller on arrival at the site. The senior fire brigade officer will also have a
similar responsibility for other events, such as explosions and toxic release. Fire
authorities in the region will be apprised about the location of all stores of
flammable materials, water and foam supply points, and fire-fighting equipment.
They will be involved in on-site emergency rehearsals both as participants and on
occasions, as observes of exercises involving only site personnel.
7.14.6 Role of Health Authorities
Health authorities, including doctors, surgeons, hospitals, ambulances, and so on,
will have a vital part to play following a major accident, and they will form an
integral part of the emergency plan.
For major fires, injuries will be the result of the effects of thermal radiation to a
varying degree, and the knowledge and experience to handle this in all but
extreme cases may be generally available in most hospitals. For major toxic
releases, the effects vary according to the chemical in question, and the health
authorities will be apprised about the likely toxic releases from the plant which
will unable them in dealing with the aftermath of a toxic release with treatment
appropriate to such casualties.
Major off-site incidents are likely to require medical equipment and facilities
additional to those available locally, and a medical mutual aid scheme should
exist to enable the assistance of neighboring authorities to be obtained in the
event of an emergency.
7.14.7 Role of Government Safety Authority
This will be the factory inspectorate available in the region. Inspectors are likely
to want to satisfy themselves that the organization responsible for producing the
off-site plan has made adequate arrangements for handling emergencies of all
types including major emergencies. They may wish to see well documented
producers and evidence of exercise undertaken to test the plan.
In the event of an accident, local arrangements regarding the role of the factory
inspector will apply. These may vary from keeping a watching brief to a close
involvement in advising on operations. In cases where toxic gases may have been
released, the factory inspectorate may be the only external agency with
equipment and resources to carry out tests.
C7-48

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.15
Occupational Health and Safety3

Large industries, in general, and chemical plants in particular where multifarious
activities are involved during construction, erection, testing, commissioning,
operation & maintenance, the men, materials and machines are the basic inputs.
Along with the boons, the industrialization generally bring several problems like
occupational health and safety.
Following are the additional occupational and safety measures to implemented in
the proposed JSW-JSL project.
7.15.1 Occupational Health

Occupational health needs attention both during construction & erection and
operation & maintenance phases. However, the problem varies both in magnitude
and variety in the above phases.
Construction & Erection
The occupational health problems envisaged at this stage can mainly be due to
constructional accident and noise.
To overcome these hazards, in addition to arrangements to reduce it within TLVs
personal protective devices should also be supplied to workers.
Operation and Maintenance
The problem of occupational health, in the operation and maintenance phase is

due to respirable dust and noise. With suitable engineering controls the exposures
can be reduced to less than TLV limits and proper personnel protective devices
should be given to employees.
The working personnel should be given the following appropriate personnel
protective devices.
Industrial safety helmet;

Crash helmets;
Face shield with replacement acrylic vision;
Zero power plain goggles with cut type filters on both ends;
Zero power goggles with cut type filters on both sides and blue colour glasses;
Chemical goggles;
Welders equipment for eye & face protection;
Cylindrical type earplug;
Ear muffs;
Dust masks;
Canister gas mask;
Self contained breathing apparatus;
Leather apron;
Aluminized fiber glass fix proximity suit with hood and gloves;
Occupational health and safety measures as per ToR-64
C7-49

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Boiler suit;
Safety belt/lime mans safety belt;
Leather hand gloves;
Asbestos hand gloves;
Acid/alkali proof rubberized hand gloves;
Canvas cum leather hand gloves with leather palm;
Lead hand glove;
Electrically tested electrical resistance hand gloves;
Industrial safety shoes with steel toe;
Rubber boots (alkali resistant); and
Electrical safety shoes without steel toe and gum boots.
Full fledged hospital facilities should be made available round the clock for
attending emergency arising out of accidents, if any. All working personnel should
be medically examined at least once in every year and at the end of his term of
employment. This is in addition to the pre-employment medical examination.
7.15.2 Safety Plan
Safety of both men and materials during construction and operation phases is of
concern. The preparedness of an industry for the occurrence of possible disasters
is known as emergency plan. The disaster in the plant is possible due to leakage
of hazardous chemicals, collapse of structures and fire/explosion etc.
Keeping in view the safety requirement during construction, operation and
maintenance phases, steel plant has formulated safety policy with the following
regulations:
To allocate sufficient resources to maintain safe and healthy conditions of

work;
To take steps to ensure that all known safety factors are taken into account
in the design, construction, operation and maintenance of plants, machinery
and equipment;
To ensure that adequate safety instruction are given to all employees;
To provide wherever necessary protective equipment, safety appliances and

clothing, and to ensure their proper use;
To inform employees about materials equipment or processes used in their

work which are known to be potentially hazardous to health or safety;
To keep all operations and methods of work under regular review for making
necessary changes from the point of view of safety in the light of experience
and upto date knowledge;
To provide appropriate facilities for fist aid and prompt treatment of injuries
and illness at work;
C7-50

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
To provide appropriate instruction, training, retraining and supervision to

employees in health and safety, first aid and to ensure that adequate publicity
is given to these matters;
To ensure proper implementation of fire prevention methods and an

appropriate fire fighting service together with training facilities for personnel
involved in this service;
To organize collection, analysis and presentation of data on accident, sickness

and incident involving personnel injury or injury to health with a view to
taking corrective, remedial and preventive action;
To promote through the established machinery, joint consultation in health

and safety matters to ensure effective participation by all employees;
To publish/notify regulations, instruction and notices in the common language

of employees;
To prepare separate safety rules for each types of occupation/processes

involved in a project; and
To ensure regular safety inspection by a competent person at suitable

intervals of all buildings, equipment, work places and operations.
7.15.3 Safety Organization
Construction & Erection Phase
A qualified and experienced safety officer will be appointed. The responsibilities of

the safety officers include identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe
acts of workers and advice on corrective actions, conduct safety audit, organize
training programs and provide professional expert advice on various issues
related to occupational safety and health. He is also responsible to ensure
compliance of works safety rules/statutory provisions.
In addition to employment of safety officer by steel plant every contractor, who
employs more than 250 workers, should also employ one safety officer to ensure
safety of the worker, in accordance with the conditions of contract.
Operation & Maintenance Phase
When the construction is completed the posting of safety officers should be in

accordance with the requirement of factories act and their duties and
responsibilities should be as defined thereof.
7.15.4 Safety Circle
In order to fully develop the capabilities of the employees in identification of
hazardous processes and improving safety and health, safety circles would be
C7-51

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
constituted in each area of work. The circle would consist of 5-6 employees from
that area. The circle normally should meet for about an hour every week.
7.15.5 Safety Training
A full fledged training center will be set up. Safety training will be provided by the
safety officer with the assistance of faculty members called from corporate
center, professional safety institutions and universities. In addition to regular
employees, limited contractor labors are also provided safety training.
To create safety awareness safety films will be shown to workers and leaflets etc.
will be distributed.
Some precautions and remedial measures proposed to be adopted to prevent
fires are:
Compartmentation of cable galleries, use of proper sealing techniques of cable

passages and crevices in all directions would help in localizing and identifying
the area of occurrence of fire as well as ensure effective automatic and
manual fire fighting operations;
Spread of fire in horizontal direction would be checked by providing fire stops

for cable shafts;
Reliable and dependable type of fire detection system with proper zoning and
interlocks for alarms are effective protection methods for conveyor galleries;
House keeping of high standard helps in eliminating the causes of fire and
regular fire watching system strengthens fire prevention and fire fighting; and
Proper fire watching by all concerned would be ensured.
7.15.6 Health and Safety Monitoring Plan

All the potential occupational hazardous work places such as iron ore handling,
dolomite, limestone, coal handling and storage areas will be monitored regularly.
The health of employees will be monitored once in a year for early detection of
any ailment due to exposure to noise, respirable dust and hazardous chemicals.
The audiometry and lung function tests will be included in this surveillance
program.
7.15.7 Occupational Health & Safety measures followed in the existing JSW Vijaynagar
Plant
Occupational Health of the workers in JSW is looked after by occupational health
centre which is managed by factory medical officer, staff nurses and ward
assistant under the supervision of chief of medical and health services.
Occupational health service activities being followed in the existing plant at JSW
Vijayanagar is as follows:
C7-52

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
1. Pre-employment medical examination of employee

Employees recruited for employment undergo necessary pre-employment
medical examination for fitness for the job. In this way, right persons are
selected for right job.
2. Periodical medical examination of employees
Periodic medical examination of employees is being conducted regularly and
necessary feedback is being provided to individuals. They undergo lung function
test, audiometry test, X-ray chest, E.C.G., blood & urine examination and clinical
examination. Year wise coverage is given below.
3. Industrial hygiene survey
Industrial hygiene survey is being conducted at JSW through OHC to assess the
nature and level of hazards inside the plant and for necessary planning & action
to reduce these hazard levels. Due to very nature of operation in the plant, there
were few incidences of noise.
However, because of the excellent engineering control measures and hearing
conservation programme like periodic audiometry examination, motivating
employees to use personal protective equipments like ear muff & ear plugs, noise
induced problems are negligible.
4. Eye check-up for the employees
Crane operators and drivers undergo eye check up for refractory error by
Ophthalmologist once in two years. Year wise coverage is given below.
5. Food handlers hygiene check-up
Food handlers in canteen undergo hygiene check up once in six months since they
may be a source of infection to others. All of them undergo stool examination for
ova and cyst. Treatment is given accordingly. All of them are given one dose of
Albendazole 400 mg under direct supervision. They are given fitness certificate
(Form 40) after ensuring fitness.
In addition to the above, first aid training & treatment and maintenance of first
aid boxes are also looked after by the occupational health services.
The JSWJSL will follow and implement the above explained occupational health
and safety measures as practiced in JSW Vijayanagar plant.
7.16
Hydrology & Hydrogeology Study

A detailed hydrogeology study was carried out by Multi Tech Services (MTS),
Hyderabad. Hydrogeology study report is enclosed in Annexure-XI. The gist is
given below.
C7-53

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
The normal annual rainfall indicates that average rainfall is 1454.9.

Physiographically, the area is characterized by varied landforms like high hill
ranges, eroded valleys and undulating land. The lower area lies covers major part
of the study area mainly created by river Subarnarekha and its tributaries. The
proposed project site is partially flat and undulating with lowest elevation of 210
m amsl in the southeastern part and highest elevation of 245 m amsl in the
northern part with general slope towards southeast. Domra nadi is flowing westeast along the southern boundary of the proposed project site and joins
Subarnarekha towards southeast of the project site.
downstream at about 45 km south from the proposed plant site. Suitable
impounding arrangements in the form of a pickup weir or intake well at the river
source will have to be considered to meet the plant water requirement, along with
dedicated pipeline or open channel. It is not proposed to draw surface water from
Subarnarekha River during the lean season. Chandil dam across Subarnarekha
River is a composite dam which is 720.10 m long and 56.5 m high with a gross
storage of 1963 hm (1963 MCM) and live storage of 1611 hm (1611 MCM) at
maximum water level (MWL)/full reservoir level (FRL) 192 m. The flow monitoring
data of CWC at Muri on Subarnarekha river between 1997-98 and 2007-08
indicates that the monsoon flow range between 202 MCM 682 MCM. As the
proposed surface water withdrawal from Subarnarekha river is 77.4 MCM with
suitable pickup weir or intake well during only monsoon period and the
requirement from Chandil dam is also minimal at 3.43% of the live storage, no
major impact on Subarnarekha river or Chandil dam is envisaged.
It is proposed to divert the flow safely in the development area of the plant site
and leave natural drainage course as it is in the open/green belt area maintaining
the natural flow along the boundaries of development within proposed plant site.
The run-off water routed through the storm water drains will be collected in a
storm water pond, proposed in the southeastern part of the site for critical water
usage and supplementing ground water recharge.
The quality of surface and ground water is observed to be within the prescribed
ISO:10500 limits. The ground water table contours depicts that the ground water
flow also follows the topography and surface water flow direction and moves in
southeast direction. The hydraulic gradient near the proposed plant site is
moderate and during both seasons is observed as 4.83 m/km.
The stage of ground water development including proposed draft for the proposed
plant during construction phase in the study area is 4.72% and the long term
water level monitoring data of CGWB observation well data at Bundu and Lodma
near the study area does not indicate any decline of pre or post monsoon ground
water levels. The stage of ground water development in Sonahatu block as per
CGWB assessment is 13.95% and categorized as Safe. Hence, the area is under
Safe category of ground water development.
C7-54

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
The dispersion pattern of TDS, hardness, calcium and sodium reveals that their
movement is from the drainage divide along the catchment boundary of the
proposed project site towards south west. Any pollutants joining the ground water
of deeper aquifer will move towards southwest from the proposed project site.
Effective management practices ensuring zero discharge from the proposed
project and proper waste disposal mechanism will not allow any pollutants
migrating to ground water and further movement along the pollutant pathways.
7.17
Sodar Study for Site Specific Inversion Data

A detailed Sodar study was carried out by M/s. Eco Tech Instruments Private
Limited, New Delhi. Sodar study report is enclosed in Annexure-XIII.
SODAR was operated continuously from 1st May to 30th May 2014. This is a final
report prepared based on one month data. Data generation remained almost
continuous throughout this period using power backup system.
The hourly echograms obtained for a total of about 688 hours in 30 days have
been analyzed to obtain mixing heights.
7.18
R & R Study
The social impact assessment including resettlement and rehabilitation (R&R) of
the project affected persons (PAP) has been conducted by M/s. BAIF
Development Research Foundation, New Delhi as per R & R policy of
Jharkhand state. The Detailed SIA and R&R report is enclosed as Annexure-XVI.
All the possible socio-economic mitigation measures will be adopted while
planning the project site.
By paying a comprehensive compensation package for different losses and
introduction of income generating schemes the PAFs are likely to generate
income that was prevailing before the land and property for the project.
Apart from this the proponent has already established track record of good
practices in CSR initiatives, which will continue in this project also, which would
ultimately improve the living standards by developing basic individual and
community infrastructure.
****
C7-55

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
8.0
PROJECT BENEFITS
The growth of the steel industry significantly contributes to economic growth of a
nation as it generates employment both directly and also due to development of
ancillary industries. Peripheral development takes place due to need of
infrastructure facilities and due to more influx of money through the area, overall
importance of the area increases and overall the infrastructure and the living
conditions will improve.
8.1
Improvement in the Physical Infrastructure

Road
Improvement and extension of the existing network is essential to develop
remote areas, to provide better connection between the economic centres of
state, and also cross-border transport and for personal mobility of the masses.
Rail Network
Railways provide an important mode of transportation in the industrialization
spreading over the entire country. It contributes to the countrys economic
development by catering to the needs of large-scale movement of freight as well
as passenger traffic and is a major source of promoting integration among the
masses. Railway provides transport facility to people and handles freight of over
600 million tonnes annually. The Indian railway is intended to modernize the vast
railway network, keeping both the economic and social dimensions in mind.
8.2
Improvement in the Social Infrastructure

JSWJSL will continue to implement the socio-economic development programs
under CSR initiatives in the surrounding villages to meet the needs of the local
population to the extent possible.
8.3
Employment Potential
The proposed project implementation will generate employment both directly and
also due to development of ancillary industries. During the construction period,
the project is going to create substantial employment and income. A large portion
of these is likely to trickle down to the local people. Besides this, many persons
from the study area will get employment on permanent basis for actual operation
of the plant in the form of skilled or semiskilled or unskilled labour. Thus,
substantial amount of employment and income are expected to be generated for
the local people. Hence, it can be ascertained that the project is going to have
significant employment and income effects. The estimated manpower
requirement at the operational stage of the integrated steel complex is 10000.
In the case of indirect employment, the effect will be quite strong and
widespread. Besides direct employment, the project is expected to generate
substantial indirect employment in other sectors. So far as indirect employment is
concerned, the effect will be very strong and widespread specifically, in ancillary
industries, services and transport sectors. In view of the above, it can be
C8-1

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
justifiably concluded that the proposed integrated steel plant will have
tremendous positive employment and income effects. Overall assessment of the
employment and income effects indicates that the creation of additional capacity
will have strong positive direct as well as indirect impact on employment and
income generation.
8.4
Other Tangible Benefits

The other tangible benefits will accrue in the form of hospital services due to
township proposal and good schooling facilities as well as community
development plan of JSW-JSL which will also help local population to enjoy the
fruits of better facilities nearby.
8.4.1 Education
The interest towards higher technical education due to the expectation of getting
jobs nearby their home will drive local people towards education. This will be
more visible especially from non-agricultural sources such as ancillary industries
in the area.
The capacity additions are expected to increase such aspirations by bringing
opportunities of many direct & indirect employment for the local people. The
general awareness towards the importance of technical education is expected to
increase as a result of the proposed project.
The project will have positive impact on the level of education of the people of the
study area.
8.4.2 Industrialization around Integrated Steel Complex
Steel plants by nature serve as the nuclei for development of small-scale
industries in the areas around them. These small-scale units usually have
input/output linkages with the steel plants. The demand for spares, assemblies
and sub-assemblies by steel plants are generally met through the supply (of
these items) from small-scale units located nearby.
The proposed project is likely to accelerate such industrialization through Bubble
Effects in the study area. It is important to note that the small-scale units are
usually labour-intensive and high priority industries from socio economic
development point of view.
The proposed project is expected to serve as centre of significant small-scale
industrial economy around it complemented by the services sector. This is
expected to play a major role in the future economic and social development of
this area.
8.4.3 Pattern of Demand
The socio-economic assessment reveals that the respondents spend major portion
of their disposable income on food items. However, the respondents are heavily
influenced by the changing demand pattern of fast growing Indian consumer
C8-2

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
society. There has been a tendency among the respondents of allocating higher
expenditure on non-food items although their basket of consumption has only few
items other than food. With the implementation of the proposed project and
development of the locality, existing demand pattern is likely to continue, which,
indicates more importance on consumer goods and quality products. This will
increase the local consumer goods market, thus creating more income
opportunities to the local people.
8.5
Community Development Plan & CSR Activities

Plant authorities are committed for community development around the steel
plant. A substantial amount has been allocated and schemes shall be
implemented for the socio-economic development of surrounding villages. The
major programs and activities to be undertaken are as follows:
Health development programs along with mobile medical unit for periodic health
check-up of peripheral villagers, organisation of annual eye camps for local
population, under water and sanitation program provision of safe drinking water
facilities with overhead tanks at each peripheral village, education development
programs with provision for establishment of school and strengthening of local
schools, promotion of sports and culture, environment protection and green belt
development, community infrastructure development includes construction of
community centres, temples,
ponds, connecting roads for peripheral villages
and livelihoods development programs includes the support for development of
agriculture and allied activities like diary, sheep and goat rearing.
The various activities to be implemented in the above fields are as follow:
Health Programs
Mobile medical unit (MMU) with doctor, pharmacist, lab technician, community
health worker and diagnostic facilities in collaboration with technical support
agency like Help-age India;
Partnership with government primary
programmes like polio, TB, malaria etc.;
health
centre
for
national
health
Health camps for family planning, dental, old aged, HIV/AIDS, TB, malaria and
other communicable diseases;
Promoting rural health insurance by creating awareness and subsidy; and
Training and
volunteers.
awareness
programmes
for
health,
hygiene
and
sanitation
Water and Sanitation Programs

Establishment of community managed water treatment and distribution plants, in
all the periphery villages, to supply safe drinking water to all the families;
C8-3

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
Supply of drinking water, to the periphery villages in summer, by providing

mobile water tankers; and
Providing proper sanitation facilities to the villages and develop model villages in
the lines of nirmal gram puraskar sanitation villages.
Education
Establishing and managing a model school to benefit the population in project
core area villages;
Strengthening of local government schools by making provision of drinking water
supply of books, uniforms and construction of toilets in schools and extra class
rooms in collaboration with Rajiv Vidya Mission;
Strengthening of mid-day meal program in schools by supplementing and
improving quality of food, construction of kitchen and supply of plates and
tumblers;
Establishing model aganwadies / balwadies and provision of supplementary
nutrition to anganwadi children in collaboration with ICDS;
Establishing and running adult education centres in collaboration of Jan shiksha
sansthan and stare adult education program or literacy mission;
Setting up of library, computer training, ITI's in project core area villages; and
Sponsorship of bright, meritorious poor students of adjoining villages for higher
education.
Sports & Cultural Activities
Promoting rural sports through coaching and sports material support in periphery
villages;
Facilitation and sponsorship to local talent for competitions and state and national
level coaching;
Organizing local and district level sports meets; and
Developing play grounds in each affected village.
Livelihoods Development Programs
Short term courses for employability skill training in collaboration with Rajiv
Gandhi youth employability skill development program;
Sponsorship and promotion of full time vocational training course;
Promoting micro-enterprises and small business; and
C8-4

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
Agriculture, horticulture and animal husbandry development program.

Community Infrastructure
Construction of roads, public utilities, bus shelters, religious places, laying of
drainage system, improving sanitation facilities, construction of toilets etc. in all
project affected villages and the study area as per the need; and
Construction of community centres, health centres, veterinary service centre and
developing grazing lands in project study area villages.
Supporting Vulnerable Persons
Ensuring life-long pension to vulnerable (elderly/widows/special disabilities)
from the government schemes through community facilitation services;
Gainful engagement on priority to vulnerable persons and creation/adoption of
old age homes;
The above measures will be continued with additional focus for the issues
identified in need based assessment; and
It is proposed to keep provision for training of women folks for promotion of selfreliance (sewing, stitching etc.) of surrounding villages for their economic upliftment.
8.6
Estimated Budget for CSR1

The proposed activities would be undertaken in phased manner and the budget
has been categorised into:
One time capital expenditure; and

Recurring annual expenditure.
The project will help in improving the basic facilities like medical facilities,
educational, transport etc. The roads will be constructed and improved in the area
under community development program of the project. A total budget of Rs. 175
crores with capital cost of Rs. 93.28 crores and recurring cost of Rs 81.72 crores
is proposed for CSR activities. The capital and recurring expenses will be incurred
phase-wise in proportion to the implementation of the project. The capex cost will
be followed by the recurring cost. The budgetary allocation for the CSR activities
is given in Table-8.1 and detailed CSR action plan is given in Table-8.2.
Estimated Budget for CSR as per ToR-70
C8-5

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
TABLE-8.1
BUDGET FOR PROPOSED CSR PROGRAMS
Sr.
No.
Category
1
2
3
4
5
6
Health programs
Water and sanitation
Education programs
Sports and culture
Livelihoods
Community
infrastructure
development including green belt
development
Supporting vulnerable persons
Management cost (Rs. in Crores)
Grand Total
7
8
Capital
Expenses
(Rs. In
Crores)
25.00
18.00
06.28
04.00
10.00
Recurring Expenses
(Rs. In Crores)
Total
(Rs. In
Crores)
20.33
10.35
04.00
04.40
05.25
45.33
28.35
10.28
08.40
15.25
25.00
08.98
33.98
0
05.00
93.28
03.41
25.00
81.72
03.41
30.00
175
TABLE-8.2
DETAILED CSR ACTION PLAN
Sr.
No.
1
CSR Programs
Health
Programme
Action Plan
Mobile medical unit (MMU) with doctor,
pharmacist, lab technician, community health
worker
and
diagnostic
facilities
in
collaboration with technical support agencies
like Help-age India (Best Practice)
Partnership with government primary health
center for supplementing national health
programs like polio, TB, and malaria etc.
Health camps for family planning HIV/aids
and other communicable diseases
Promoting rural health insurance by creating
awareness and subsidy
Training and awareness programs for health,
hygiene and sanitation volunteers
Total Approx.
Budget in
Crores
16.5
10
7
7
4.83
45.33
Water and
Sanitation
Programme
Establishing water treatment and distribution

system in periphery villages @ 20 lts. to each
family (Tata trust model of drinking water
treatment plant can be adopted)
Ensuring supplying of drinking water to the
periphery villages in summer by providing
tankers, wherever is required.
Providing proper sanitation facilities to the
villages and developing nirmal gram puraskar
villages (national program)
20
7
1.35
28.35
Education
Programme
Strengthening
of
school
buildings/
establishing model aganwadies/ balwadies in
collaboration with ICDS and adult education
centers drinking water supply and toilets in
schools
Setting up of village school, library ,computer
training, ITI's
Strengthening of mid - day meal program by
improving quality of food, kitchen in the
0.94
1.54
6.3
C8-6

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
Sr.
No.
CSR Programs
Action Plan
Total Approx.
Budget in
Crores
school, plates and tumblers etc.

Sponsorship of bright students of adjoining
villages
1.5
10.28
Sports & Cultural
Promoting rural sports through coaching and

sports material support in project periphery
villages
Facilitation and sponsorship to local talent for
competitions and state and national level
coaching
Organizing local and district level sports
meets
Developing play grounds in each affected
village
2.1
1.4
1.4
3.5
8.4
Livelihoods
Development
Programme
Short term courses for employability skill

training in collaboration with Rajiv Gandhi
youth
employability
skill
development
program
Sponsorship and promotion of full time
vocational training course
Promoting
micro-enterprises
and
small
business
Agriculture,
horticulture
and
animal
husbandry development program
2
1.25
7
5
15.25
Community
Infrastructure
Construction of roads, public utilities, bus

shelters, religious places etc. in all project
affected villages and the study area as per
the need.
Laying of drainage system, improving
sanitation facilities, construction of toilets.
Construction of community center in project
periphery villages
Construction of health center
Veterinary service center
Developing grazing lands
28
3.5
0.7
1
0.3
0.48
33.98
Supporting
Vulnerable
Persons
Ensuring life-long pension to vulnerable

(elderly/widows/special disabilities) from the
government schemes through community
facilitation services
2.71
Gainful engagement on priority to vulnerable

persons and creation/adoption of old age
homes
0.7
3.41
Management
Cost
Human resource and establishment of

foundation and administration
Total (Rs in Crores)
30
175
****
C8-7

Chapter-9
9.0
ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS
9.1
Organization Policy
The importance of environment management has been recognised
management very early and JSWJSL has taken necessary steps
environmental aspects and mitigate those aspects which generate
the plant, respond to impacts on its own captive population and
peripheral areas.
by JSWJSL
to identify
pollution in
also in the
Environment Management System as per ISO: 14001-2004 is one of the thrust

areas of operation. It has already adopted a two-pronged strategy to abate
pollution, as follows:
Provision of state of the state of art pollution control equipment at the

design stage itself through clean technology initiatives; and
By developing a very strong monitoring/analysis and inspection setup for

statutory compliances.
The above objective has been intended to be achieved through the following:
i) Improvement in the quality and appropriateness of raw materials as per
design philosophy;
ii) Using automation & computer control to have improvement on technology and
on working condition;
iii) Pollution monitoring and environmental management plan;
iv) Augmenting & implementation of occupational health set up including regular
medical monitoring of employees;
v) A well developed safety management system;
vi) Preparation of emergency/disaster management plan and a properly trained
group to meet the emergency situations;
vii) Green belt development inside the plant;
viii) Development of awareness among employees towards environmental
conservation; and
ix) R & D activities with respect to specific pollution problems.
JSWJSL management has given maximum importance for adopting latest clean
technologies for keeping the pollution to minimum levels. This is well evident
from the fact that a separate environment management department (EMD) will
exist in integrated steel plant headed by senior officer with an environmental
laboratory well equipped with latest monitoring instruments. The EMD will be the
nodal agency within the plant to deal with all environmental issues arising out
C9-1

Chapter-9
operation of various plant units and for ensuring compliance with all the
statutory requirements, including:
Environmental clearance conditions;
Consent to operate conditions; and
Hazardous waste authorization.
9.2
Corporate Environmental Policy1

JSW has formulated environmental policy at corporate level with commitment to
protect the environment while operating industries. JSW will put its sincere efforts
to control the pollution and comply all the statutory standards. The corporate
environmental policy of JSW is given in Figure-9.1.
9.3
Institutional Arrangements for Environment Protection and Conservation

The plant complex will be supervised and controlled by the unit head, supported
by HOD (plant operations) and adequate team of technically and statutorily
qualified personnel apart from the operating staff of skilled, semi-skilled, unskilled
and other categories.
Environment management cell will be headed by HOD-sustainable development
(SD) and will be supported by multi-disciplinary professionals. The HOD-SD will
be responsible for regular environment management activities in the integrated
steel plant and CPP.
The organizational structure of environment management for plant complex is
presented in Figure-9.2.
The environmental engineer will be responsible for monitoring activities in the
plant. As conscious of this, JSWJSL will create a department consisting of officers
from various disciplines to co-ordinate the activities concerned with the
management and implementation of the environmental control measures in all
sphere of activities.
Basically, this department will supervise the monitoring of environmental
pollution levels viz. ambient air quality, water and effluent quality, noise level
either departmentally or by appointing external agencies wherever necessary.
In case the monitored results of environmental pollution are found to exceed the
allowable limits, the environmental management cell will suggest remedial action
and get these suggestions implemented through the concerned authorities.
The environmental management cell will also co-ordinate all the related activities
such as collection of statistics of health of workers and population of the region,
afforestation and green belt development.
Environmental policy of JSW as per ToR-65
C9-2

Chapter-9
FIGURE-9.1
CORPORATE ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY OF JSW
C9-3

Chapter-9
Director & CEO
AVP (EMD)
Sr. Manager/AGM
(SE&FS)
DGM / Sr. Manager
Manager
SR.Environment Scientist
/ Env Lab
Jr. Manager
Dy. Manager
Jr. Manager
Analytical Chemist
Technician
Technician
FIGURE-9.2
ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE OF ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT
****
C9-4

Chapter-10
10.0
SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
10.1
Introduction
M/s. JSW Jharkhand Steel Limited (JSWJSL) proposes to establish 10.0
million tonnes per annum (MTPA) capacity integrated steel plant (ISP) along with
900 MW captive power plant (CPP) and township near Barenda village, Sonahatu
block in Ranchi district of Jharkhand state.
10.2

The proposed project of JSW Jharkhand Steel Limited comprises of 10.0 MTPA
integrated steel plant, 900 MW CPP, township and other facilities.
The major plant facilities envisaged for the proposed project and their capacities
TABLE-10.1
MAJOR PLANT FACILITIES
Sr. No.
1
2
3
Plant Facilities
Beneficiation plant
Pellet plant
Coke oven plant
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Sinter plant
Blast furnace
BOF converter
Ladle furnace (LF)
RH-TOP
Billet caster
Bloom caster
Shaped bloom caster
Slab caster
Wire rod mill
Bar mill
Medium section mill
Heavy section mill
Hot strip mill
Plate mill
Cold rolling mill
Galvanizing line
Tin plate mill
Electrical steel
Colour coating line
Oxygen plant
Lime calcination plant
Dolo calcination plant
Captive power plant
Cement plant
Coking coal washery
Non- coking coal washery
Capacity
29.0 MTPA
2 x 4.0 MTPA
2 x 3.0 MTPA- recovery type ovens with
CDQ having stamp-charging facilities
and by-products
2 x 7.8 MTPA
2 x 4.9 MTPA
1.2 MTPA
3 x 180 t + 2 x 280/300 t
3 x 180 t + 2 x 280/300 t
1 x 180 t + 1 x 280/300 t
2 x 6 strand
1 x 6 strand
2 x 3 strand
2 x 2 strand
1.0 MTPA
1.0 MTPA
1.2 MTPA
2 x 1.1 MTPA
4.5 MTPA
1.5 MTPA
2.3 MTPA
1.0 MTPA
1.0 MTPA
1.0 MTPA
1.0 MTPA
3 x 2500 TPD
5 x 600 TPD
2 x 600 TPD
3 x 300 MW
6.0 MTPA
5.52 MTPA
2.30 MTPA
C10-1

Chapter-10
Sr. No.
Plant Facilities
Capacity
Other Facilities
32
Township
300 acres
33
Water supply pipelines/channels & intake wells/weirs
34
External infrastructure
35
Railway sidings, railway bridge over Subarnarekha river and rail connection
to existing railway lines
Existing Features at the Site

The major portion of land is rainfed single crop agricultural land in the project
area. The soil is sandy clay type in the project area. There is no forest and hilly
area within the project site. However, small patches of protected forests exist
near and outside the project site towards north and south. Hilly terrain exists
outside the northern boundary of the project site. No wet lands are present at the
proposed plant site.
Project Requirements
The proposed project will be developed in an area of 3800 acres (1538 ha). The
project area includes adequate area allocation for all technological and service
units, dump area, raw water reservoir and greenbelt development as per
statutory requirements.
The estimated power requirement of the plant is proposed to be met by 900 MW
captive power plant (CPP) to be located within the proposed plant complex.
Gallons per day (MGD), i.e. about 15150 m 3/hr including water requirement for
10.3
Baseline Environment
The study area generally represents undulating land with winds blowing
predominantly from northwest and southwest. The nearest IMD station is at
Ranchi at a distance of about 50 km from the project site.
The baseline environment quality has been monitored during pre monsoon season
(summer) 2014. With regard to the air quality in the study area, the
concentrations of particulate matter (PM10 and PM2.5), sulphur dioxide (SO2) and
oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and other pollutants levels are within the stipulated
standards as per 16th November, 2009 Notification. The contributors to the air
quality in the region are predominantly rural, residential activities, domestic coal
burning, traffic and unpaved open surfaces in the region. There are no major
operating industries in the study area.
C10-2

Chapter-10
The water quality in the area covering surface and ground water sources in the
region is in compliance with the stipulated standards of IS:10500. The baseline
water quality does not reflect any major industrial contamination in the region.
The soil in the project site is predominantly clayey and the NPK values are in
sufficient quantity as compared to soil classification given by Indian Council of
Agricultural Research, New Delhi. The soil quality does not appear to have any
visible contamination. However, the surfaces in the region appear to be dusty due
to traffic and windblown dust.
Ambient noise levels were measured at ten locations around the project site. The
day time and night time noise levels in all the rural/residential locations were
observed to be within the permissible limits.
The study area (10 km radius) has a total population of 1,47,066 persons as per
2011 census data. Total male population is about 50.89% and total female
population is around 49.11%. The total literacy rate is 54.35% in the region
which is moderate.
From the field observations, it can be concluded that the forests in the study area
are under high anthropogenic pressure and show signs of degradation in the form of
fragmentation. As per the MOEF and the forest department, Jharkhand reveals that
there are no wildlife sanctuaries, national parks/biospheres reserves and migratory
corridors in 10 km radius from the proposed site boundary. As per the records of
the Botanical Survey of India, there are no plants of conservation importance in the
study area. On comparing the checklist given in the Schedule-I of the Wildlife
(Protection) Act 1972 and the list of wildlife recorded from the study area, it can be
concluded that there are no schedule-I species found in the study area.
To assess the existing traffic density in the study area, traffic survey was
conducted one (1) location. It is observed that during the study period, traffic
load is reported to be observed mainly during day time. It was also observed that
the 2/3 wheelers, cars/jeeps and trucks/buses forms the major volume of the
traffic. The total traffic PCU of this road is minimal.
Thus, the monitoring of environmental attributes like ambient air, water quality,
soil characteristics, noise levels, terrestrial and aquatic ecology etc. indicates that
the pollution concentrations are within the permissible limits. Based on the
baseline environmental data of the area, the proposed project is environmentally
feasible as it has sufficient buffer assimilative capacity.
10.4
Summary of Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures

The summary of anticipated adverse environmental impacts due to the proposed
project during operation and mitigation measures are given below:
10.4.1 Air Environment

The air pollution control system proposed in the proposed integrated steel plant is
given below:
C10-3

Chapter-10
During the design phase, all efforts have been made to adopt latest state of art
technology and to install adequate pollution control measures for different
processes and de-dusting stacks and for different fugitive emission sources.
During the construction phase, the following mitigation measures will be
employed to reduce the pollution level to acceptable limits:
Proper and prior planning, appropriate sequencing and scheduling of all major
construction activities will be done, and timely availability of infrastructure
supports needed for construction will be ensured to shorten the construction
period vis--vis to reduce pollution;
The construction sites will be adequately camouflaged from outside areas so

that pollution can be confined to the construction site only;
Construction materials will be stored in covered go down or enclosed spaces

to prevent the windblown fugitive emissions;
Stringent construction material handling / overhauling procedures will be

followed;
Truck carrying soil, sand, stone dust, stone will be duly covered to avoid
spilling and fugitive emissions;
Adequate dust suppression measures such as regular water sprinkling at

vulnerable areas of construction sites will be undertaken to control fugitive
dust during material handling and hauling activities in dry seasons;
The construction material delivering vehicles will be covered in order to

reduce spills;
Low emission construction equipment, vehicles and generator sets will be

used;
It will be ensured that all construction equipment and vehicles are in good
working condition, properly tuned and maintained to keep emission within the
permissible limits and engines turned off when not in use to reduce pollution;

confirm to standards of central pollution control board (CPCB);
Monitoring of air quality at regular intervals will be conducted during

construction phase; and
Construction workers will be provided with masks to protect them from

inhaling dust.
The following mitigation measures will be employed during operation period to

reduce the pollution level to acceptable limits:
C10-4

Chapter-10
Bag filter based DE system in BF with gas cleaning plant;

Bag filter based DE system for ground based pushing emission control in coke
oven battery;
Dry fog type DS system for material handling junction points;
Fume extraction system for BOF & LF along with gas cleaning plant;
Dust extraction system in sinter plant;
Dedusting system in lime & dolo plant;
Stack monitoring to ensure proper functioning of different major stacks;
Air monitoring in the work-zone to ensure proper functioning of fugitive
emission control facilities;
Adequate plantation in and around different units;
confirm to the applicable standards;
Monitoring of ambient air quality through online AAQ monitoring system at
four locations; and
Workers will be provided with adequate protective measures to protect them
from inhaling dust.
10.4.2 Water Environment

The peak water requirement during construction will be drawn from ground water
(750 m3/day) wells and other sources. The existing tube wells/dug wells falling in
proposed plant area will be utilized to the maximum extent. The necessary
permission for withdrawing ground water for industrial purpose will be taken as
required.
The wastewater generation during the construction period will be from the
sanitary units provided for the workers. This wastewater will be treated in
packaged sewage treatment plants. The treated wastewater will be used for
greenbelt and dust suppression. Hence, there will not be any major adverse
impact on the water regime due to discharge of sanitary treated wastewater.
The recommended measures to minimise the impacts and conservation of fresh
water are:
The plant drainage will be protected or re-routed through well-engineered storm
water drains within the project site. The seasonal Domra river in the south of the
project area will not be diverted. The plant boundary will instead be aligned along
the river boundary.
The earth work (cutting and filling) will be avoided during rainy season and will be
completed during summer season. Stone pitching on the slopes and construction
of concrete drains for storm water to minimize soil erosion in the area will be
undertaken. Settling pond is planned for storage and recycling of surface water
for use in the plant area. Also development of green belt in and around plant will
be taken up during the monsoon season. In-plant roads will be paved to arrest
fugitive dust emission.
Soil binding and fast growing vegetation will be grown within the plant premises
to arrest the soil erosion. Toilets with packaged sewage treatment plants will be
constructed at site for workers.
C10-5

Chapter-10
During the operation of the plant, the total water requirement will be about 80
million gallons per day (i.e. about 15150 m3/hr) including the water requirement
for the proposed captive power plant.
The wastewater generated from each process unit will be treated adequately and
re-used/re-cycled within the process. The proposed plant aims at zero discharge
concept. In case of water recovery/re-use system, during wet season, maximum
200 m3/hr, occasional discharge can be anticipated for a short period of time
meeting the discharge norms.
10.4.3 Solid and Hazardous Waste Management
slag which is non-hazardous waste. Other solid waste includes gas cleaning plant
etc., this solid waste except refractory will be completely reused in sinter plant
and coal fines will be used in the power plant. Further, oil soaked cotton waste;
generated. The details of non-hazardous and hazardous waste generated from
the proposed integrated steel plant and its disposal are given in Table-10.2 &
Table-10.3.
TABLE-10.2
Sr. No
1
Solid waste
Generation TPA
Proposed disposal
Cement plants, 2% treated in dry
pits and used for land fill
BOF slag is granulated , metalics
separated and used in
construction
Slag
Iron Making slag
30,00,000
Steel making slag
14,80,000
Sludge
Iron making sludge
1,29,000
Steel making sludge
1,51,000
Slimes from Beneficiation

plant
Mill scales
4
A
B
5
A
B
Steel making shop
Lime / Dolo dusts
Ash
Reject from Coal washery

(Middlings)
Refractory waste
Rolling mills
Dusts
Flue dust from Blast furnace
58,00,000

dewatering
dewatering
38,000
1,49,000
1,06,572
3,43,428

38,000
7,50,000
16,00,000
50,000 -1,00,000
Sold to Cement Plants and use for

manufacturing fly ash bricks
field
C10-6

Chapter-10
TABLE-10.3
Sr. No
Category
Quantity KL or T/Yr
@ 10 MTPA
1
2

from CRM
Waste pickled liquor
from CRM
Tar sludge from Coke
oven
2750 KL / Year
450 t

catalyst & Oil soaked
filter
8.7 t/y

waste treatment
process, incinerator &
Waste sulphur
59 t/y
3
4
5
73216000 KL
Proposed Disposal
Regenerated in ARP
Regenerated in ARP
315 t
8172 t

land fill
Incinerated

disposal site
10.4.4 Noise Environment

construction equipment like dozers, scrapers, concrete mixers, cranes, pumps,
compressors, pneumatic tools, saws, vibrators etc. The operation of these
equipment will generate noise ranging between 85-90 dB (A) near the source at
1-m distance. These noises will be generated within the plant boundary and will
be transient in nature.
Equipments will be maintained appropriately to keep the noise level within 85 dB
(A). Wherever possible, equipment will be provided with silencers and mufflers.
Highly noise intensive construction activities will be restricted to day time only.
Greenbelt will be developed from construction stage. Further, workers working in
high noise areas will be provided with necessary protective devices e.g. ear plug,
ear-muffs etc.
10.4.5 Biological Environment & Greenbelt Development
During construction vegetation will be disturbed. However, precautions have to be
taken to disturb only to the minimum extent possible. Greenbelt will be developed
phase wise during construction to improve the aesthetic value in the area and to
screen out the fugitive dust generated during construction.
The removal of vegetation from the soil and loosening of the topsoil generally
causes soil erosion. However, such impacts will be confined to the project site and
will be minimized through paving and water sprinkling. There are not many existing
matured trees in the site. However, greenbelt will be developed surrounding the
plant facilities in the open areas. The existing trees will be preserved to the extent
possible.
C10-7

Chapter-10
The tree species selected for green belt include the native species, which will be
planted in several rows with a tree density of 2000-2500 trees/ha with adequate
width around the plant boundary and maintained as per CPCB guidelines. The
inter-spaces will be planted with grasses, bushes and hedges. Greenbelt is thus a
set of rows of trees planted in such a way that they form an effective barrier
between the plant and the surroundings so that community noise impact and air
pollution will be reduced to a great extent.
10.4.6 Socio- Economics
The proposal implementation will generate employment both directly and also
due to development of ancillary industries. During the construction period, the
project is going to create substantial employment and income. A large portion of
these is likely to trickle down to the local people. Besides this, many persons
from the study area will get employment on permanent basis for actual operation
of the plant in the form of skilled or semiskilled or unskilled labour. Thus,
substantial amount of employment and income are expected to be generated for
the local people. Hence, it can be ascertained that the project is going to have
significant employment and income effects. The estimated manpower
requirement at the operational stage of the integrated steel complex is 10000.
In the case of indirect employment, the effect is quite strong and widespread.
Besides direct employment, the project is expected to generate substantial
indirect employment in other sectors. So far as indirect employment is
concerned, the effect is very strong and widespread specifically, in ancillary
industries, services and transport sectors. In view of the above, it can be
justifiably concluded that the proposed of integrated steel plant will have
tremendous positive employment and income effects. Overall assessment of the
employment and income effects indicates that the creation of additional capacity
will have strong positive direct as well as indirect impact on employment and
income generation.
10.5
Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan

A detailed risk assessment and consequence analysis has been carried for all the
plant operations in the proposed integrated steel plant. A suitable disaster
management plan has been recommended. A qualified and experienced safety
officer will be appointed. The responsibilities of the safety officers include
identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe acts of workers and advice
on corrective actions, conduct safety audit, organize training programs and
provide professional expert advice on various issues related to occupational
safety and health. He is also responsible to ensure compliance of works safety
rules/statutory provisions.
In addition to employment of safety officer by steel plant every contractor, who
employs more than 250 workers, should also employ one safety officer to ensure
safety of the worker, in accordance with the conditions of contract.
In order to fully develop the capabilities of the employees in identification of
hazardous processes and improving safety and health, safety circles would be
C10-8

Chapter-10
constituted in each area of work. The circle would consist of 5-6 employees from
that area. The circle normally should meet for about an hour every week.
A full fledged training center will be set up. Safety training will be provided by the
safety officer with the assistance of faculty members called from corporate
center, professional safety institutions and universities. In addition to regular
employees, limited contractor labors are also provided safety training.
All the potential occupational hazardous work places such as iron ore handling,
dolomite, limestone, coal handling and storage areas will be monitored regularly.
The health of employees will be monitored once in a year for early detection of
any ailment due to exposure to noise, respirable dust and hazardous chemicals.
The audiometry and lung function tests will be included in this surveillance
program.
10.6
Budget Requirement for Environment Protection

The proposed activities would be undertaken in phased manner and the budget
has been categorised into:
One time capital expenditure; and

Recurring annual expenditure.
The project will help in improving the basic facilities like medical facilities,
educational, transport etc. The roads will be constructed and improved in the area
under community development program of the project. Capital cost of Rs. 175
Crores is proposed for CSR activities. The capital and recurring expenses will be
incurred phase-wise in proportion to the implementation of the project. The
recurring cost will be followed by the capex cost. The budgetary allocation for the
CSR activities and EMP cost towards measures is given in Table-10.4 and Table10.5 respectively.
TABLE-10.4
BUDGET FOR PROPOSED CSR SCHEMES
Sr.
No.
Category
1
2
3
4
5
6
Health programs
Water and sanitation
Education programs
Sports and culture
Livelihoods
Community
infrastructure
development including green
belt development
Supporting vulnerable persons
Management cost (Rs. in Crores)
Grand Total
7
8
Capital
Expenses
(Rs. In
Crores)
25.00
18.00
06.28
04.00
10.00
Recurring
Expenses (Rs. In
Crores)
Total
(Rs. In
Crores)
20.33
10.35
04.00
04.40
05.25
45.33
28.35
10.28
08.40
15.25
25.00
08.98
33.98
0
05.00
03.41
25.00
03.41
30.00
93.28
81.72
175
C10-9

Chapter-10
TABLE-10.5
COST PROVISION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MEASURES
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
10.7
Description of Item
Air pollution control system
Water pollution control system
Solid
waste
management
system
Greenbelt development and
others
Post project monitoring
Total
Capital Cost
(Rs in Crores)
845
350
535
Recurring Cost
(Rs in Crores)
50
21
32
14
6
1750
1
1
105
Conclusions
The proposed integrated steel plant will have certain level of adverse impacts on
the local environment. However, with the judicious implementation of the
proposed pollution control and environment management measures, even the
adverse impacts anticipated due to construction and operation of the proposed
steel plant will be mitigated/contained. Further, development of this project will
have many beneficial impacts/effects in terms of bridging the steel demand and
supply gap and providing employment opportunities that will be created during
the course of its setting up and as well as during the operational phase of the
project.
Thus, in view of considerable benefits from the project and controllable adverse
environmental impacts, the proposed project will be most advantageous to the
region as well as to the nation.
****
C10-10

Chapter-11
Disclosure Of Consultants
11.0
DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS
11.1
Introduction
The Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environment Management Plan
(EMP) report has been prepared by carrying out various scientific studies. Studies
have been carried out by engaging scientists/engineers/experts of Vimta Labs
Limited, India and its empanelled associates. The list of experts involved in
different studies is given below:
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
Study
Environmental impact assessment study
including environment management plan
Detailed hydro geological study
Remote sensing and land use/land cover
studies
Upper air measurement studies (SODAR)
Consultants
Vimta
Labs
Limited,
Hyderabad, India
Multi
Tech
Services,
Hyderabad, India
Multi
Tech
Services,
Hyderabad, India
Eco Tech Instruments, New
Delhi, India
The profile of the consultants is given below:

11.2
Vimta Labs Limited - Environment Consultant

Vimta Labs Limited is a leading multi-disciplinary testing and research
laboratory in India. VIMTA provides contract research and testing services in the
areas of environmental assessment, analytical testing, clinical research, preclinical (animal) studies, clinical reference lab services, advanced molecular
biology services and research & development studies.
The Environment Division has been in the forefront of its vision to provide
better environment through guiding and assisting the industry for sustainable
development. A stalwart in the mission to protect and preserve the natural
resources on earth for future generations, it offers extensive research and
consultancy services in the field of environment. With its rich experience, multidisciplinary expertise and with the support of its state-of the-art analytical
equipment, the services offered by the division are wide ranging and
encompasses entire gamut of environment management and monitoring services.
With its emphasis on quality services over the years, it has evolved itself into a
single reference point in India for comprehensive environmental services.
11.2.1 The Quality Policy
VIMTA is committed to good professional practices and quality of operations in

its testing, validation and research services;
VIMTA shall ensure customer satisfaction by maintaining independence,

impartiality and integrity in its operations;
VIMTA shall provide the services in accordance with national and international
norms;
C11-1

Chapter-11
VIMTA shall implement quality systems as per ISO/IEC 17025 and applicable
Good Laboratory Practices (GLPs) & Good Clinical Practices (GCPs), to
generate technically valid results/data; and
VIMTA shall ensure that all its personnel familiarize with the policies and
procedures of the quality system and implement the same in their work.
11.2.2 Services Offered

Spread over 70,000 sq.ft lush green garden premises at Cherlapally, Hyderabad
(India), the scientifically designed and meticulously groomed infrastructural
facility of the central laboratory of VIMTA has the most sophisticated instruments
backed by an excellent team of professionals.
Over 150,000 sq. ft. of world class research laboratory is also under operation at
Biotech Park-Genome Valley, Hyderabad (India). Having all the facilities under
one roof is perhaps the only one of its kind in South Asia in the contract testing
and research sector.
VIMTA Central Laboratory, Cherlapally, Hyderabad
VIMTA Life Sciences, Genome Valley, Hyderabad
Vimta offers services under the following specializations:
Environment;
Analytical;
Clinical Reference Lab;
Clinical Research;
Preclinical;
Molecular Biology; and
Research and Development.
The environment division of VIMTA Labs Limited (VLL) has its presence all over
India and other countries including a strong association with international
consultants like Japan Bank for International Cooperation (JBIC), Kennametal Inc.
- USA, Rudal Blanchard UK, E&E Solutions Japan, NAPESCO & Kuwait National
Petroleum Corporation Kuwait, Marafiq and Haif Consultants Saudi Arabia and
others. Vimta Labs Limited has the following credentials:
C11-2

Chapter-11
Recognition by BIS, India;

Recognition by Ministry of Environment and Forests, Govt. of India and
various State Pollution Control Boards (wherever applicable);
Recognition by Department of Science & Technology, Govt. of India (NABL);
Accreditation by QCI/NABET;
Recognition by Ministry of Defence, Govt. of India;
Recognition by APEDA, Ministry of Commerce, Govt. of India;
Recognition by Saudi Arabia Standard Organization (SASO), Saudi Arabia;
Recognition from NEMC, Tanzania;
Accreditation by NCTCF;
Certification from Standard Australia;
Recognition from ANVISA Brazil;
Recognition from USFDA;
Quality Assurance Services as per ISO/IEC 17025;
Quality Assurance Services as per ICH Guidelines; and
Recognition by World Health Organization (WHO).
11.2.3 Environment Division

Environment essentially being a multi-disciplinary science, the range of services
offered by the division are also comprehensive and caters to the needs of
industry, pollution control agencies, regulatory authorities and in a larger pursuit
of a green globe. The services under environment include:
Site selection and liability studies;

Environmental impact assessments;
Environment management plans;
Carrying capacity based regional studies;
Environmental audits;
Solid and hazardous waste management;
Risk assessment (MCA,HAZON,HAZOP) & disaster management plans;
Occupational health and safety, industrial hygiene;
Environmental monitoring for air, meteorology, water, soil, noise, ecology and
socio-economics;
Industrial emission source monitoring;
Offshore sampling and analysis of marine water and sediments;
Marine ecological studies;
Marine impact assessment;
Rehabilitation and resettlement studies;
Forestry and ecological studies;
Geological and hydro-geological studies;
Land use /land cover studies based on remote sensing;
Socio-economic studies;
Due diligence studies;
Industrial epidemiological studies;
Wasteland management studies; and
Study on bio-indicators.
C11-3

Chapter-11
C11-4

Chapter-11
The services under environmental chemistry include:
Analysis of water, wastewater, soil, solid waste, hazardous waste as per

international codes;
Source emissions and work zone air/noise quality monitoring;
Analysis of dioxins and furans;
Analysis of SVOCs, VOCs, PAH, BTEX, AOX, PCBs, TCLP metals, TOC etc.;
Categorization of hazardous waste; and
Pesticide residue analysis.
11.2.4 Facilities of Environment Division

Vimta-Environment division is located in scientifically designed central laboratory
with the state-of the-art modern facilities to offer vide range of services in indoor
and outdoor monitoring and analytical characterization in the field of
environment. Further, it is ably supported by highly skilled and experienced team
of professionals in the fields of science, engineering, ecology, meteorology, social
planning, geology & hydro-geology and environmental planning.
Besides the regular monitoring equipment such as fine dust samplers, respirable
dust samplers (RDS), automatic weather monitoring stations, stack monitoring
kits, personal samplers, noise meters, portable water kits etc, the other major
specialized equipment include:
Monostatic sodardesigned by National Physical Laboratory, GOI;

Integrated noise level metersQuest, U.S.A;
Flue gas analyzersTesto, Germany;
113-A Gravimetric dust sampler-Casella, London;
ICP AES Varian, USA;
Gas liquid chromatographs with FID, ECD & pFPDVarian, USA;
Gas chromatograph with mass detectorVarian, USA;
Atomic Absorption Spectrometer [AAS]Varian, USA;
PAS-AFC-123 instrument;
High Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC);
Laser particle size analyzer;
Bomb calorimeter;
Polarographs;
X-ray fluorescent spectrometer;
Flame photometer;
Carbon sulphur analyzer;
Computerized fatigue testing machine;
Electronic universal testing machine;
Fourier transmission infrared spectroscope; and
Water flow current meter make Lawrence & Mayo.
11.2.5 Quality Systems

The basic fact that environment division and its supporting site laboratories are
accredited by NABL (IS0-17025) and Ministry of Environment and Forests, India
and by other international bodies stand testimony to its emphasis on quality
systems.
C11-5
Chapter-11
The details of the persons involved in the preparation of present EIA/EMP report is presented below:
DETAILS OF PERSONNEL INVOLVED IN CURRENT EIA/EMP STUDY VIMTA LABS LTD
Sr. No.
Name
In House Experts
1
Mr. M. Janardhan
Qualification
M. Tech (Env)
Position
Contribution
Experience
Vice President & Head
Co-ordination
Sr. Manager
Co-ordination
Manager
Expert
About 24 years of experience in the field of environment

management, environmental engineering and dispersion modeling
management and dispersion modeling
management and environmental engineering
About 23 years of experience in the field of social impact
assessment studies
management and environmental chemistry
About 11 years of experience in ecological and biodiversity studies
management, environmental engineering and dispersion modeling
management and environmental engineering
management and environmental chemistry
About 6 years of experience in the field of environmental impact
assessment studies
management
About 2 year of experience in the field of social impact assessment
studies
About 1 year of experience in the field of environment
management
About 1 year of experience in the field of environment
management
About 5 years of experience in quality assurance
About 21 years of experience in the field of environmental
monitoring and secretarial support
Dr. B. Chandra Sekhar
M.Sc., Ph.D
Mr. G. V. Raghava Rao
M. Tech (Env)
Mr. S. Srinivas Goud
M.S.W
Group Leader
Expert
Ms. Durga Bhavani
Group Leader
Expert
6
7
Dr. Mandar Nanajkar

Mr. S. Kishore Kumar
M.Sc., M. Tech
(Env)
P.hD (Ecology)
M.Tech (Env)
Env Scientist
Env Engineer
Expert
Expert
Mr. M. Raja Manohar
M.Tech (Env)
Env Engineer
Expert
Dr. M. Subba Reddy
P.hD (Env Chem)
Sr. Scientist
Expert
10
Mr. T. Seshagiri Rao
M.Sc (Env)
Sr. Scientist
Expert
11
Mr. P. Rama Krishna
M. Tech (Env)
Engineer
Expert
12
Mr. Ch. Narendra
M.S.W
Scientist
Expert
13
Mr. M. Praveen Kumar
M. Tech (Env)
Tr. Engineer
Trainee
14
Mr. J. Sunil Kumar
M. Tech (Env)
Tr. Engineer
Trainee
15
16
Ms. T. Ramya Devi

Mr. P. Niranjan Babu
B. Sc
B.Com
Quality Auditor
Dy Manager
Quality Check
Secretarial
Support
C11-6
Chapter-11
Sr. No.
17
18
Name
Mr. P. Krishna
Qualification
I.T.I (Civil)
Position
Jr. Engineer
Contribution
Cartography
Mr. J. Rama Krishna
I.T.I (Civil)
Jr. Engineer
Cartography
B.Sc. (Mining
Engineering)
Empanelled
Consultant
Expert
About 40 years of experience in the field of mining engineering,

geology and soil
Empanelled Experts
19
Mr. V.K.Bhatnagar
Experience
About 14 years of experience in the field of environmental and civil
drawings
About 13 years of experience in the field of environmental and civil
drawings
20
Mr. J. Rajendra Prasad
M.Sc. (Applied
Geology)
Empanelled
Consultant
Expert
About 20 years of experience in the field of landuse and landcover,

satellite data interpretation
and detailed hydrology &
hydrogeology (representing multi-tech services)
21
Mr. Rajgopal Krishnan
M.Tech (Chemical
Engineering)
Empanelled
Consultant
Expert
About 42 years of experience in the field of risk assessment and

hazardous management
****
C11-7

EIA EMP Report of JSW Steel

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

EIA EMP Report of JSW Steel

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Environmental

Impact Assessment Report

Vimta Labs Limited

JSW Jharkhand Steel Limited

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated

Baseline Environmental Status

Purpose of the Report

Impact Assessment and Mitigation Measures

Identification of Impacts and Mitigation Measures

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated

Table of Contents (Contd.)

Environmental Monitoring Program

Analysis of Alternatives for Technology and Site

Technical Presentation of Draft EIA report before JSPCB C7-1

Improvement in Physical Infrastructure

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated

Table of Contents (Contd.)

Summary and Conclusions

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated

List of Figures (Contd..)

Pre Development Drainage Network

Model showing Pathways for Hardness in Ground Water

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated

List of Tables (contd..)

List of Forest Blocks in 10 km Radius

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated

List of Tables (contd..)

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

THE PROPOSED 10.0 MTPA INTEGRATED STEEL PLANT,

JSW Jharkhand Steel Limited

Vimta Labs Ltd.

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated

The proposed plant is located at about 50 km (aerial) from Ranchi in SE

There are no ecological sensitive locations, archaeological monuments, places of

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated

Infrastructural Facilities and Raw Material Requirement

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated

Raw Material Requirement

Iron ore fines for

Iron ore lumps

Limestone (BF grade)

Limestone (SMS grade)

Dolomite (SMS grade)

Captive mines (Rohne)

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 10.0 MTPA Integrated

BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Relative Humidity (%)